JP2020022778A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving an excellent performance effect of a light emitting performance.SOLUTION: A light receiving member 6730 is configured so as to guide a light from an illumination board 6720 in different forms so that deterioration of a performance effect can be suppressed even when distances with the illumination board 6720 as a reference are different. Therefore, an improvement can be made from a viewpoint of a performance effect of a light emitting performance while achieving cost reduction. Various forms are exemplified as forms of the light receiving member 6730. For example, a light transmissive member consisting of a colorless or chromatic transparent member may be used, or a member capable of emitting a light planarly almost uniformly like frosted glass may be used.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 275

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which LED light is made incident from an end of a plate-shaped member and emitted from the surface (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-159875 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect. SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the effect of a light-emitting effect.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a light emitting means configured to emit light, and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the light guiding means is the light emitting means. A first light guiding means for guiding light emitted from the light source in a first mode, and a second light guiding means for guiding light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode. Prepare.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the light guide unit is configured such that a way of illuminating changes stepwise according to a difference in distance from the light emitting unit. .

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, further comprising an accommodation unit that accommodates the light-emitting unit, and a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting unit is disposed, wherein the accommodation unit is provided. Comprises a support means for supporting the light emitting substrate, wherein the light guide means is fixed at least in a first position, and a shield means configured to shield between the light guide means and a player. The first position is located outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the light emitting mode can be changed stepwise in a positional relationship based on the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the handling of the light guide means can be facilitated.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating XIVc− in FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17A is a front view of the driving device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a release member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). 10 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibrating apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG.59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 67 (a). It is. (A) is a sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in (a) of FIG. 6, and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIIb in (a) of FIG. It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disk cam. FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) in which the back pack was opened to the inner frame with the inner frame opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing a lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 96A is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating a binding movable member and a harness, FIG. 96B is a schematic top view of FIG. 96A, and FIG. FIG. 96D is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the image, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is a schematic top view of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which schematically illustrate a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side view schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of (a) of FIG. 124, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (a) of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper plate member along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launching unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the ball launch unit which shows the state of sending out the ball by the ball feeder in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a ball launch unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after a ball is launched. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back board, a side substrate, and a 2nd effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fit device in a twelfth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a twelfth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial back view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) and (c) are the back views of a fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb in FIG. 206 (a). It is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member, and (c) is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member which typically shows the downward recessed part recessed in a light guide member in area CCVIc of FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIe of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic sectional view of a right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of a left reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of a lower plate unit, and (b) is a front view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow R. It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and (b) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229 (a); (C) is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). FIG. 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. (A) is a front view of a rear side unit, (b) is a front view of an electric decoration board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241. FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 24B is a sectional view illustrating the partition member along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illuminated substrate, a back support member, and an acoustic device along the line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 24B is a sectional view illustrating a partition member along the line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. It is a side view schematic diagram of an upper presentation apparatus. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit and a guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit. (A) is a front view of the board guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the board guide unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the division | segmentation unit and guided unit in the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line of FIG.251 (b), (b) is a division unit and guided unit in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG.251 (b). 25C is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and an outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit and the outer frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is It is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a transparent cylindrical member, (e) is a rear view of a transparent cylindrical member. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. FIG. 7 is a right side view as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 10E is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 243 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of light visually recognized through the light transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal production device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal production device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a horizontal production device. (A) is a front view of a base member and an electric decoration board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is It is a top view of a base member, (e) is a bottom view of a base member, (f) is sectional drawing of the base member and electric decoration board in CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line of FIG. 269 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a covering unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a covering unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of a light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member. (A) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a sectional view of the horizontal staging device taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and (b) is a sectional view of the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274 (b). FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is a sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate and the light receiving member along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272 (b), and (b) is a base member along the line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb of FIG. 272 (b); It is sectional drawing of an electric decoration board and a light receiving member, (c) is sectional drawing of the base member, electric decoration board, and a light receiving member in CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of FIG.272 (b). FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of a base member, an illuminated substrate, and a light receiving member schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is sectional drawing of the rendering device in CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the rendering device in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. FIG. 292 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the twentieth embodiment, taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 which are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general prize port 63, the first prize port 64, the second prize port 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And so on.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place, is indicated by a lighting state, the number of retained balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device is used to display a round during a jackpot. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (opened state), a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared to the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only in the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can be easily placed in the second winning opening 640 during the probable change and during the working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or during the time saving, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning port 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640 a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 can be created during the probability change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where the winning is possible.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 can aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine 10 is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into a player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Will be arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) by the player performing the tilting (rotating) operation of the tilting device 310.

  A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

  Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

  FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6A. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed in a first state (an initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the up-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is shifted from the first state. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by, for example, a player when a specific display (for example, a display of “press a button”) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Here, for example, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward, such as when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the near side depending on the degree of tilt. This is a mode in which the palm shifts and the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation by vigorously dropping his hand downward.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

  Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

  The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the viewpoint of the player will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 9, an example of the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312 a 1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the viewpoint of the player to such a degree that the operation surface 312 a 1 is visually recognizable in the first state, but is invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed outward from the player's viewpoint). This makes it possible to greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310 between the first state and the second state.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protection lens member 311i is configured such that the area of the protection lens member 311i gradually increases, and accordingly, the LED device 341f (FIG. 12), the difference between the first state and the second state is greater. Can greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered with the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist about an axis), the tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

  Accordingly, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported on a shaft 314 in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a direct impact to the tilting device 310, and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state, move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding from the side.

  As described above, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for providing the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. Thus, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at left and right ends at a rear end (a rear end in FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining a pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. And a large opening in the center with a concave portion arranged facing the lower frame member 320 and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. And an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm that is fastened and fixed below the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A driving device 340 for transmitting a driving force to the tilting device 310 via a system member 345, and a protective cover device fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protecting the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left, right, and rear. 350.

  The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-like member horizontally disposed at the upper end portion on the far side of the tilting device 310 and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in a pair on the right and left below the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal position at the horizontal center position of the bottom plate portion 321. An opening 325 that is an opening that is opened by shaving a portion disposed below the portion 322.

  The bottom plate portion 321 is configured to define the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by abutting on the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. You.

  The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a formed in the center on the near side, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection groove of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and a left and right side of the opening 325. And an insertion hole 321c symmetrically formed.

  The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

  The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection holes 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

  The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

  The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and extends upward from the upper surface thereof and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

  The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

  The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distance (position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

  Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and gaps (slits, detecting grooves) into which a detecting part can be inserted. Means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

  On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the driving device 340 is configured to protrude the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), so that after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325, the driving device By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and compared with the vertical width including from the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 The vertical width can be shortened.

  The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 that is an opening having a size to be hooked by the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed in a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

  The protective cover device 350 is configured so as to be vertically dividable and covered in three directions except the near side, and is fixed to a lower end portion of the driving device 340 and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340. A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; And a detection sensor 353R.

  Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate 321 of the lower frame member 320 in an assembled state (see FIG. 10). Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the projecting protrusion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

  The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. The disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are arranged in such a manner as to be arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged at a specific phase. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR with different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2 Kind.

  Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14A is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. FIG. 15 is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured such that a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and having upper and lower openings, and an upper opening of the case main body 311 is covered. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and a state sandwiched between the rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. , A torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and a ring-shaped member for fixing the case main body 311 and the lid 312 inseparably at the rear ends of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. And a ring member BR1.

  The case body 311 includes a bottom plate 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate 311a, and left and right sides of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And an insertion groove 311e, which is a groove arranged at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-like portion 311f formed in a hook shape and locking a central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A left detection piece 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair on the left and right below the bottom plate 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end of the bottom plate 311a toward the front. An extension portion 311h to be provided and a protective lens member 311i which is disposed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And a protruding projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

  The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

  The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

  The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to the driving device 340. Is provided.

  The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

  In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the shaft 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22), the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared with the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle becomes the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

  The extended portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked by the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is configured in an embodiment.

  The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from the top (see FIG. 14A), and also has a curved shape when viewed from the left and right directions (see FIG. 14C). The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The overhanging protruding portion 311j is formed so as to protrude at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes down the tilting device 310. In the state (see FIG. 29), the tip is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a and the tip protrudes below the lower frame member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape large enough to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

  In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312 c emits light emitted from the LED device 341 f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by rigidity in the axial direction. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light is emitted from the LED device 341f in a wide range.

  The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end formed of a shape matching the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the center.

  The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, and has two arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions. , Is provided.

  Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (left disk cam 344L, right disk cam) that are non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343. 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a second projection 342c of the disk cam 344 that are pivotally supported by the shaft 341c of the main body member 341. A release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhang portion 344c3 in the rotation direction, a rotating claw member 347 that is axially supported coaxially with the release member 346 and that relatively operates with the rotation of the release member 346; The first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-shaped spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the rotating claw member 347 to fall down, and a direction in which the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are separated from each other. A second spring SP2, which is a torsion spring-shaped spring member that generates a force.

  The main body member 341 is bent at the left and right in the rearward direction and formed in a U-shape in a top view, and is formed at the same position of a plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a opposed to the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344; and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position displaced to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b so as to have an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. An extension 341d extending from the motor housing 341a below the shaft 341c, an illumination support 341e extending frontward and upward from the motor accommodation 341a, and an illumination support 341e. And an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end and having an LED light source disposed therein.

  The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). Thereby, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

  The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing 341a.

  The fixing member 342a supports the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

  The arm member 345 is bored in one end at a perfect circular shape, and is bored in a shaft support hole 345a supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

  The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a is in contact with the shaft 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

  The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disk cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is rotatably supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement; a coil spring 343d for pressing the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly equipped.

  The cylindrical member 343a includes fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 each having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. You. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed to have a length that can move to a position that does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

  The transmission gear 343b has a perfectly circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from a surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c. 343b2.

  Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

  The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

  In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are formed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having an apex angle of about 100 °.

  Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a becomes impossible, so the engagement between the clutch 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c. Accordingly, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thus, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

  Note that the movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when a load in the axial direction is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

  The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the disc cam 344 has a left disc cam 344L and a right disc cam 344R roughly mirrored in shape, and differs only in the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. The description will be omitted, and the description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

  FIG. 20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb of FIG. is there. Note that FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is located at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a protruding in a cylindrical shape inward, a circular rib 344b protruding inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. An engagement rib 344c having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and having a portion projecting radially outward at two locations; and an outer portion between the circular rib 344b and the engagement rib 344c. It mainly includes a connection pin 344d projecting in a cylindrical shape in the direction and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

  The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position forming an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the others are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

  The center shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer periphery is fitted in the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Be composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

  The circular-diameter rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thus, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

  In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is provided. From the overhang portion 344c1, the first retraction portion 344c2, and the first overhang portion 344c1 that withdraw from the first overhang portion 344c1 radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (the angle θ1 = 50 ° in the present embodiment). At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (the angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), a second overhang portion 344c3 that projects again radially outward and an angle θ3 (an angle in the present embodiment) from the second overhang portion 344c3. (θ3 = 20 °), and a second retraction part 344c4 that retreats radially inward at a shifted position.

  In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position where the distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state is the longest (see FIG. 22). That is, the connection pin 344d is provided on the opposite side of the shaft 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the center shaft 344a.

  The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one of them will be described.

  FIGS. 21A and 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B illustrates the release member 346. In contrast, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

  The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide slots 347b). (See FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A projection pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape about the center axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. And an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting at the maximum diameter.

  The engagement portion 346d is a portion configured to be able to abut on the engagement rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

  The rotary claw member 347 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. The guide slot 347b of the release member 346 is guided along the guide slot 347b (the guide pin 346b is drilled so as to include the movement trajectory of the protrusion pin 346b inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. The insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

  In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engagement portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate integrally in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engagement portion 346d rotates in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 is rotated until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached, and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

  Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in a case where a player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

  FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 23 shows a state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand that performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. Thereby, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is disposed in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

  Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is continuously hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. However, depending on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. Cannot be returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there have been problems that the product cost increases and space cannot be saved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibrating operation is provided at a position facing the protruding projection 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. You.

  As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

  Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long-presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, the load of returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation can be improved. Thereby, the player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

  Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (a tilting operation) from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

  25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned, and FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 performs a reciprocating rotation operation. In FIG. 29, a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state in FIG. 28 is shown, and in FIG. 30, a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach a second initial state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 of the engagement rib 344c abuts on the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustratedIn addition, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be ensured to be large. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c has an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. Direction, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and the release member 346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310.

  The change in the posture of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises by the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

  At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the operation of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward operation of the tilting device 310 has an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, By the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle (upper angle in FIG. 27) between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347, and thus the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

  In this state, the cover 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can also be irradiated in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing light can be improved.

  In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount. By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. And in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 28) as well as in the vertical direction.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in a direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotary claw member 347, thereby When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated with the tilting device 310. It returns to a position where it can be engaged (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player has depressed the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is vertically moved as shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting the hand on the tilting device 310.

  That is, the purpose is to generate a driving force that assists the raising of the tilting device 310 with the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 24), and to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. Can be used for

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 is It is buried in the lower surface, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

  Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pushed and operated, it is determined whether or not the vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the end of the pushing. Only let me know.

  Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in such a case, the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

  Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when the jackpot is determined, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 Can be improved as a prefetch means. Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction until the second projecting portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 (from the state shown in FIG. 29). By rotating the driving device 340 a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction, the driving device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

  The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotation direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c.

  In addition, from the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first protrusion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes through the engagement portion 346d, the reverse rotation is performed. In this way, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (moving up) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( (Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down through the second state (a tilting operation).

  FIGS. 31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 31, from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31), and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). FIG. 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 shows a state shown in FIG. 34 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is reciprocatingly rotated, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

  At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released), the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed. 310 can be set to a position that can be arranged in the second state (a position in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 moves upward at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the state change is obstructed by the disk cam 344 (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating by a predetermined angle at a slow speed, and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is moved backward by the same amount (counterclockwise). By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, in response to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f. And in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 33) as well as in the vertical direction.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the mode of the up-down operation of the tilting device 310, two types of up-down operation (tilting operation) of the up-down operation shown in FIG. 28 and the up-down operation shown in FIG. Immediately after the restriction on the movement of the device 310 in the upward direction is released, the operation can be performed immediately. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

  Thereby, as compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in expectation of a jackpot), and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only a load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and a load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345 is not generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and then pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), when the player releases his / her hand, the tilting device 310 is set to the first state. Can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. I do. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up-and-down operations (tilting operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one of the operations.

  35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 rotates backward (more clockwise in FIG. 35) than in the state shown in FIG. 35, and then the disc cam 344 rotates forward until it comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. In FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 36 counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protection cover device 350. The state where the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes when the engagement rib 344 c pushes up the release member 346, but the projection pin 346 b of the release member 346 moves in the space of the guide elongated hole 347 b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotation pawl member 347 stays in the posture shown in FIG.

  That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the tilting device 310 being lifted can be maintained.

  From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotating cam 344 is subsequently rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 7, the driving device 340 can be in the second initial state.

  In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but it is necessary to go through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up-and-down operation (tilting operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

  Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

  This is, for example, an operation that occurs due to forgetting to release the hand that pressed and operated the tilting device 310 to concentrate on the production. In this case, the tilting device 310 is lifted even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs the reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for vertically moving (tilting operation) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is useless, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts below the first state), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the driving device 340 in which the driving device 340 is turned on (see FIG. 14), the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the driving motor 342 is stopped).

  In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, since the tilting device 310 does not perform the ascending operation due to the player's hand being placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

  When the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, when the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state, the circle is left as it is. Rather than rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and unnecessary load is not applied to the driving device 340, so that the life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, the hand of the player holding and tilting the tilting device 310 with the tilting device 310 in the second state is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left alone, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a for fixing the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving in a state where the disc cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotation direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is driven via the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2. The power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thus, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can idle. Thus, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

  When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned ON while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not set to the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and a notification is displayed by, for example, displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

  This makes it possible to select a case where the player has intentionally performed an erroneous operation, to notify only at that time that the erroneous operation is to be stopped, and to stop the drive motor 342 early to prevent a failure. be able to.

  When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the occurrence of the phase shift, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive device 340 can be specified to be in the first initial state by detecting that the left detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 with the state as an initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are adjusted again.

  Accordingly, when an effect is performed by operating the tilting device 310, there is a difference between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, it is possible to perform an effect by appropriately operating the tilting device 310.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

  FIGS. 40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in FIG. 38. In FIG. 41, the disk cam 344 is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW. Also, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves up to the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the state in the first state shown in FIG.

  This is due not only to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it goes from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CW direction. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346 from below. In this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw is rotated. There is no load in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

  Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. Is an operation different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

  For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39). Due to the difference, the player notices the control mode being performed, and the effect to be executed is grasped by the player, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, a load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the operation of the tilting device 310 thereafter is made different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 becomes Since only the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction in the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the first state when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player is given the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. Can be watched over.

  That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the driving motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) suddenly in order to perform an effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. Thus, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 performs an up / down operation without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

  FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) by a predetermined amount from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the driving device 340. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhang portion 344c1 does not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 are engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 reciprocally while maintaining the positional relationship that does not pass through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

  In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) with the change in the posture of the release member 346. When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the first state (rotation) by releasing the hand of the player. When the pawl member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310, an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward (up to the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising) and continues to move up and down can be implemented.

  Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, a difference in the effect is provided between the above-described first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a different meaning from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. The user can know whether the user has been moving up or down in the third operation mode.

  The difference in the effect is that the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). Is performed) when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after releasing the hand after pushing the tilting device 310). If the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up in the first embodiment has been described, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment has the The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 45B is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. It is a side view.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking operation of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

  FIG. 46A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. The small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide elongated holes 347b). (See FIG. 48).

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation member as functional members supported by the shaft portion 341 c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 across the plate member 2347 and configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory about the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47); , Mainly comprising. In the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a shape curved so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a forward end at an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in the shape of a hook (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to overlap in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper of FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly provided. Prepare.

  The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

  The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be attracted to a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 described later.

  The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

  The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

  The rotating plate member 2347 includes, in addition to the shaft support hole 347a, the guide long hole 347b, the insertion hole 347c, and the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. A long supporting hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

  The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347. The side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are such that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated forward (see FIG. 46 (counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft 314 (see FIG. 47).

  Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid in a state where the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. The wobble can be suppressed.

  The release member 2346 includes a functional support hole 2346e that is a long hole formed in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the projection pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

  The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the direction opposite to the shaft support hole 346a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. To slide.

  Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 keeps the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d without time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. Reflected on speed.

  That is, when the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 is quickly slid, while when the rotation speed of the release member 2346 is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in a straight line direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

  That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 is slid by the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 is slid by being pulled in the large angle state. It does not move. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the slide claw member 2348 is engaged with the tilting device 2310, so that the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising.

  FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in a time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346. In FIG. 48, the disk cam 344 is changed from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47), and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 48 (clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2.

  In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet 2311a1 and the hook 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes down the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to a change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will not be done.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-shaped part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

  Accordingly, the slide claw member 2348 is caused to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, thereby causing the slide claw member 2348 to rotate backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a different speed from the upward movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the releasing member 2346 is released, the releasing member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 returns to the first state.

  By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, the association between the operation mode and the jackpot expectation degree makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching. Attention can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. The tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 by securing a large magnetic force. The load can be increased.

  That is, normally, when the player places his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 and the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. If the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand (even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), the player lifts the hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

  Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the rising direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing a hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

  For example, by associating the difference in the load with the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading. Can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player. However, the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured so that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or in the state of being pushed by the player. You. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detecting piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detecting piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane disposed at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The extension length of the left detection piece 3311gL is longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR, and the extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

  FIGS. 51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. No (left detection sensor 324L is off and right detection sensor 324R is off).

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L while the right detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the right side. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  By detecting a change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing, it is in the state of being pushed. , Or in the state of returning.

  That is, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

  FIGS. 52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG. 52 (a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52 (b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the pushing end to the first state. . 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detecting sensor 324L and the right detecting piece 311gR is inserted into the right detecting sensor 324R. (The left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state arranged at the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

  When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

  Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves downward. Rather than causing the tilting device 3310 to move upward, the load that causes the tilting device 3310 to rise more effectively can be applied by causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves upward.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 effectively, the tilting device 3310 can be compared with a case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be performed comfortably.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed by the player. However, the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case main body 4311.

  The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating a pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54A, the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. A state where the sensor 4321e has passed downward is illustrated. In FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are sensors of a photocoupler type, and are disposed in such a manner that the detection grooves are oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on a circular orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

  When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing down on the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321d. 4321e. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

  Here, in the case where the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which the acceleration can be applied is long). The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 robust as a safety measure when the player pushes with full power, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

  Further, an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end may be built in, and the tilting device 4310 may be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who decides to perform the pushing operation gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined by the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary.

  That is, for example, when the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. If the driving is not performed and the above-described timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

  Accordingly, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is low, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated with a small force. Pushing operation can be performed.

  Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pushing as the reaction force to the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. The control is performed in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.

  FIGS. 55A and 55B are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. .

  In FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the projecting protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state in which the tilting device 4310 is reaching the pushing end from the first state. The set portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are in contact with each other.

  When the tilting device 4310 is pushed in, the direction in which the projecting protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving the button. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be applied, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

  At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disk brake, but has a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force. Therefore, damage to members is suppressed, and durability can be ensured.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

  Accordingly, the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 contact each other is suppressed, and the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and stops descending. Therefore, it is unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 to the end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

  Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is vibrated to transmit the vibration to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment includes the lower frame member 5320 And a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and the vibration is transmitted to a player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is a driving device 5340. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

  A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is provided on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch is provided on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

  FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 houses a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. A flexible member 5420 and a receiving member formed in a bottomed dish shape having an open upper surface, which separately accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 and which is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 mainly.

  The transmission device 5410 includes a driving motor 5411 formed of a rotating electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a rotation shaft of the driving motor 5411 pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to a pivot. And mainly comprising.

  The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of right and left fixed portions 5411a formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

  The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

  The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the side opposite to the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction of the drive motor 5411, and a main body 5421 in an assembled state. The left and right sides of the main body 5421 are connected to a pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding in the form of a rib, and the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of columnar projecting legs 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421.

  The main body 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411 and has a container-shaped depth. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the axial end face of the drive motor 5411 and the open end face of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

  The rib-shaped legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 are provided by the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-shaped leg 5422.

  Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be made fine.

  In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is housed. 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432.

  When the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 reaches the bottom and the load applied when the flexible member 5420 is inserted is released (assembly load released state), the depth of the first accommodation portion 5431 is The protruding leg 5424 has a protruding depth.

  The depth of the second storage portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 to apply the flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is set so as to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

  The concave groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly extended below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in an assembly load state. You.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is set to the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, is pushed into the player three times from the first state, An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when it is arranged at the end position of the pushing, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg 5424 with respect to a change in the angle of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be evenly pushed right and left on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (when tilting left and right on the sheet of FIG. 59B) at the time of pressing. Thus, the protruding leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d formed so as to be able to insert the protruding legs 5424. Since the width of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is protruded. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the projecting leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424, and to easily move the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

  FIGS. 60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows that the protruding legs 5424 are in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). An assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first storage portion 5431 is illustrated. Note that the outer shapes of the second storage portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), when a load is applied to the vibration device 5400 from the assembly load release state and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding legs 5424 and the lower rib-like legs are provided. As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

  In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is pushed. It is possible to reduce the impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57). Further, since the load is based on the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) is used. The lifting speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is reduced. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous tapping operation of the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 can be used as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not abut on the inner wall of the second storage portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load released state, no vibration occurs due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.

  In addition, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the fine vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the housing member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembly load state, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced up and down due to deformation of the upper protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

  When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be reduced, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

  In addition, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg 5422 extends along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421, and is uniformly spaced left and right from the center axis. Since the flexible member 5420 is moved downward, the radially outer end of the rib-shaped leg 5422 is moved right and left outward (in the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422). It deforms in such a manner as to move in the direction of smaller resistance (see FIG. 60B). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, a horizontal load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second storage portion 5432 is partially reduced by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 below the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. Thus, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

  61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In (b), a state where the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibration device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

  The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is moved to a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second storage portion 5432 becomes the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. Note that, in the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

  That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs against) the second housing portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared to the assembly load released state, so that different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

  The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 generates a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (FIG. 61B, upward) as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to and away from each other in the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is changed in the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ). By this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). Direction) can be reinforced.

  As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By using a combination of the generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force for pushing back the tilting device 310.

  That is, during a period from the start of the contact of the tilting device 310 to the protruding leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes the tilting device 310 back. After the tilting device 310 reaches the termination region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Accordingly, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made lighter and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is used due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined to be higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

  For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

  Accordingly, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof has risen upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 by the radius Ra. Thereby, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

  That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression size of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). By doing so, it is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 from being generated.

  Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of the pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 is used only when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

  Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed, and the pushing operation of the player is detected. The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

  That is, in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in a mode in which the player releases his / her hand immediately after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (the mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed in. In such a case, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of the vibration cannot be made in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the tilting device 310 is pressed, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration is ready to be generated, so that the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pressing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by the vibration.

  In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

  Accordingly, the state where vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

  Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The drive device 5340 is different from the drive device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft 5343. Other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have symmetric shapes, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

  The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft 5343 are arranged at the connection portion with the transmission shaft 5343. It is.

  That is, the right disk cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support tubular portion P1 that extends cylindrically from the disk portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is provided, and an axial direction of the support tubular portion P1. Along the length of the extension distance, about a half of the extension distance, an axially symmetrical long hole shape, a long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion, and a shaft of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. And a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the end in the direction toward the disk portion along the axial direction.

  The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as a region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

  The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole concave portion C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

  The long hole concave portion C1 is formed so that the shape of the concave cross section is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the long hole concave portion C1.

  Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole concave portion C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed in an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This can prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

  The holding arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a protruding from a surface of the pair of arm portions facing the arm of the other side toward a direction approaching the arm portion of the other side. . The engagement convex portion A1a engages with the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

  The tip shape of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the columnar member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the radial overlapping length in the state where the engaging projection A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65) (B) the length in the left-right direction).

  The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (a long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is concave along the axis near the axis. (A side surface on the opening side of C1) and a surface position.

  Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (the lower side in FIG. 63B) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a outside the concave surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the column member 5343a protruding from the concave surface portion C2 is longer than the e-ring. (See FIG. 65 (b)).

  Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

  The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

  The columnar member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the insertion groove 5343a3 interposed between the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the cross-sectional shape, a groove into which an e-ring is fitted, and a fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring; When the disk cam 5344 is fitted until reaching the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, the engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages, is mainly used. Prepare. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is disposed outside the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the left-right direction in the assembled state.

  The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

  Before the e-ring is fitted, the column is formed before the e-ring is fitted because a mechanism in which the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

  In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b by the e-ring. And the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 can be prevented by the e-ring.

  With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft 5343, the column member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging projection A1a is provided. From the opposite end, insert into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted. At this time, before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a is formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between each other can be expanded. Thereafter, when the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging protrusion A1a, the engaging protrusion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

  On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 functions not only in one-touch assembly but also in this embodiment as a structure for preventing destruction. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66B is a right disk cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

  FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole concave portion C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial falling displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the column member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected. Are in contact with each other, so that the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial tilt displacement increases.

  Therefore, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Is applied, the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be restricted.

  That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), On the plane parallel to the plane of the disk portion, the disk portion is axially deformed with the support shaft r1 connecting the connection pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 as the center. As a result, the distal end position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating the operation when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 18 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. 67 (b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343R is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connection pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay on the spot and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disk cam 5344R can perform the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the manner of connection with the arm member 345 due to the shaft falling deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

  In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd by the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the pivotal support of the arm member 345 by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and in order to absorb the displacement, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to fall over the shaft.

  Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a) due to the shaft falling deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right circular. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this displacement can partially absorb the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd, the drive motor can be moved while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the motor 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other by the axial deformation of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but is repelled by the second spring. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotation claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repelled in the direction. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  Therefore, when the release member 346 contacts the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 is independent of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344. Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. Accordingly, the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be reduced. Can be reduced irrespective of the rotation direction.

  In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed to have a line-symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). The right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed irrespective of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). Shaft can be deformed by resistance.

  FIG. 68A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the external shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

  FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and falls down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. Is shown of the player's hand gripping.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not, the right disk cam 5344R. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting, so that the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  Note that the items described as the right disk cam 5344R also apply to the left disk cam 5344L.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

  Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation in the axial direction, the occurrence of overload can be noticed at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven during a period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R, and the right detection sensor 353R. Since the input to 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

  In this case, a period of time required to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs is required before the occurrence of the overload is detected, so that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)), the overload occurs. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

  The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects with the engagement rib 344c. In addition, the input section is disposed in a manner to protrude toward the support cylinder P1. In a no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in an overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are formed in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

  Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib 344c are formed of separate members, and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, since the right disk cam 6344R is formed by mirroring the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will not be described.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

  The left disk cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by a cylindrical member 343a, and the disk member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and is rotatable relative to the disk member 6344L1 is provided.

  The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment disposed at the center position of the disk portion, and is annularly and axially spaced apart from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in a radially outward direction. An annular rib 6344f protruding along is provided.

  The ring member 6344L2 has a ring main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

  The annular main body 6344g is formed such that its inner peripheral diameter is larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b. In the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about.

  The axial end face of the annular body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 abuts on the annular rib 6344f. Accordingly, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the disk member 6344L1 is in contact with the surface. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

  The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is set to be three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (while the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations). , The second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the number of receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

  The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and an auxiliary column thereof. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

  With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a description will be given of how the tilting device 310 is lifted up from the first state of the tilting device 310 by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released.

  FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to the state illustrated in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated one rotation in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state illustrated in FIG. (A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) while the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by more than one rotation and then reversed by that amount). Is illustrated. FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state illustrated in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 has been moved up.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is actuated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

  In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 is lifted instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is the second state. It was limited to the position where it was arranged (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relatively, the connecting pin 344d, which is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c are provided. Can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, and tilted downward by the angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the releasing from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotating claw member 347. (Without waiting for the rotation of 344), and the position at which it reaches can be changed.

  Accordingly, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by a difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises and reaches from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 ascending or to increase the degree of expectation of the type where the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is lower.

  However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is improved. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

  In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can be encouraged to do so. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method of operating the tilting device 310 randomly can be suppressed.

  Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 includes a disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are provided on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can be relatively rotated. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of a right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. FIG. 75A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa, and FIG. 75B is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R has a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. A ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7340 and an engaging portion 7630 which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engagement member 7344R3 having the following.

  The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a center shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR at a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the outside in the radial direction. This is a member having a shape in which the portion 344c is partially omitted (the portion between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

  The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in a surface state in an assembled state, and has a first circular concave portion 7410 which is a circular concave portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and Radially between a second circular concave portion 7420 which is a circular concave portion having a diameter smaller than the first circular concave portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be bored, and a fixing protruding radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430. And a projection 7440.

  The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular long hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position shifted from an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole extending from the bottom end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1. And a return portion 7433 that projects from the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 toward the second elongated hole 7432 with the first elongated hole 7431 side as a fulcrum.

  The size of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the size of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. Direction (shorter direction).

  The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75B) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outside the second elongated hole 7432.

  The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a sufficient height to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

  Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a) to FIG. 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. And a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the center and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

  The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. You. Thus, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

  The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)). Is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420. This prevents the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from being excessive while enabling the engaging member 7344R3 to be able to operate in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

  The thick portion 7520 has a deformed through hole 7521 formed in the axial direction, and a concave portion formed in the deformed through hole 7521 radially outward at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (in the present embodiment, equally divided into 5). And an equidistant concave portion 7522 to be provided.

  The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is different from a shape that is disposed radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Be composed.

  FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. The arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on the side, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77 (b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and the extension portion The engaging portion 7630 extending in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620 and the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 are provided on the side facing the engaging portion 7630. And a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 that is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the distal end of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

  The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof has The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface.

  The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly smaller than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in the assembled state with a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

  As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

  Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described. FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c). 78F is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78F is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78E.

  FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c) and 78 (d) show a state where only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1, and FIG. 78 (e). ) And FIG. 78 (f), a state where the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is illustrated. For easy understanding, illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f).

  As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first long hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78A and 78B). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

  Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 in the depth direction of FIG. 78D until the position of the engaging portion 7630 and the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide. Moving.

  At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the displacement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 is suppressed. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

  In addition, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven out of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the direction in which the second elongated hole 7432 extends, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force to the second position. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

  In a state in which the second elongated hole 7432 is inserted inward, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, and the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), so that the movement of the extension 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Accordingly, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

  After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. I do. When the load is released from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

  Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

  Next, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

  The rotating claw member 7347 of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide slot 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes, the projecting pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement.

  The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

  In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

  FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the releasing member 7346, and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate. In FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80) shows a state where the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80). FIG. 80 (a) shows a state where the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 and pushed to the end. FIG. 80 (b) shows a state where the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a), and FIG. 81 shows a state where the right disk cam is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the engagement member 7344R3 has been separated from the release member 7346 by the rotation of the engagement member 7344R in the backward rotation direction is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347 ( Angle small state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in a state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state in which it protrudes outward is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the outermost diameter side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in the small angle state. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the small angle state of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is formed. When the inner peripheral surface and the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c are in contact with each other, the outer peripheral surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346, and the disc cam 7344 is moved. (See FIG. 80 (a)).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member 7346 is released. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engagement portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the modified through hole 7521.

  Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

  Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one originally provided equally recessed portion 7522 to another different equally recessed portion 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are provided. Are relatively rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects radially outward. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted.

  That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 79 from FIG. 79 (a), the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d provided on the ring member 7344R2 can be equally divided into concave portions 7522. Can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval of the concave portions (72 degrees).

  With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. FIGS. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as centers, and other unnecessary parts are not illustrated.

  FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) in chronological order. FIG. 82 (a) shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other. In FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed upward by the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). (B) shows a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates forward, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate backward (FIG. 82 (a)). When rotating in the (rotational direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Can only be done.

  Therefore, a load is not generated enough to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is moved radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 and separates therefrom. Maintain the overhang state. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, the relative rotation of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

  By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344 from these configurations, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation occurs (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

  In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

  Thus, a state that is not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a position that is invisible to the player. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, a description will be given of a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state according to the present embodiment. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of operation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disc cam 7344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 84 and 85, the state where the second protruding part 344c3 is brought into contact with the engaging part 346d is shown in FIGS. 84 and 85. The contact state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

  That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

  On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

  Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 reaches from the first state by the ascending operation immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) can be changed. Thus, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of the operation device 7300 as the effect device can be improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (unfolded) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. FIG. In FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate as an upper side and a lower side and aluminum plate as a left and right side. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 supporting structure (the hinge 18 and the like) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11 are provided. The member may be provided in a game arcade.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. The left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base side) and the right side is a rotation tip side in front view. (Opening / closing front end side) so as to be rotatable forward.

  As shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening and closing base side) and the right side is the rotation when viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as a moving tip side (opening / closing tip side).

  As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And a function to lock the front frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 12. In these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, each is released.

  The front frame 14 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a columnar portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft). The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having a hole.

  Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 above the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot support plate portion 12e having a fitting concave portion 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed to have a fitable size. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are vertically connected, the diameter of the upper cylinder is smaller than that of the upper cylinder). (A small shape) is axially supported by being externally fitted to the support pin 19a.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (such as the decorative portions 8029 to 8033) and units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) on the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). The window unit 14 c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area on the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And The fixed frame is formed of a synthetic resin into an annular shape slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the laminated glass. Have been.

  In addition, the glass unit 16 is formed to be colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, the game area may be formed not colored and transparent but colored and transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14 c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, the illumination unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c incorporates a light emitting unit that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that lights up during payout of a prize ball.

  In addition, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly 450 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window 14c. . As shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are swelled toward the near side below the window 14c, and are vertically arranged side by side.

  The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them toward the ball firing unit 112a while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

  In addition, it is not necessary to provide a portion for storing game balls at a plurality of locations separately in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is used as a single storage portion. Is also good.

  An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the near side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for the game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as the periphery of the lower plate 50 other than the upper plate 17 or may be provided at a plurality of positions. In addition, the operation device 300 is a push-button switch as an operation method. Alternatively, the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( FIG. 92).

  A payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed at an upper corner portion (a corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) of the passage forming unit 140, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. 143 is divided into right and left by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, respectively.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and is then discharged to lower plate 50. The foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

  In addition, the foul ball passage 145 joins with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 are guided by a ball removal operation by the player. It is formed as follows.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to upper right and left corners, and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrates and one end of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 are provided. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is provided, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

  In a portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring passage groove 14h communicated to the left and right electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, and the electric decoration portions 8031 and An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

  Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the near side in FIG. 89). A connector of a conductive wiring or a connector having one end connected to the internal substrates of the illumination portions 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

  The multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the turning front end of the front frame 14 are provided as a pair above and below the turning front end of the inner frame 12, and the board support device 600 (which holds the base plate 60 of the game board 13). (See FIG. 126). The upper and lower devices are positioned so as to face each other, and can be in contact with each other depending on the situation. The details will be described later.

  On the rear side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member formed of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a configuration in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b, which is disposed in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed above the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides in plane with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. It is composed of a shape.

  The long cover member 173 is a wall portion which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

  The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

  In other words, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It protrudes to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, a change in the wiring position (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed can be absorbed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14 a and the front frame An inverted cup-shaped portion 178 that is a portion formed of a resin material and that opens downward is disposed between the vertically long plate portion and the rotating base end side of 14.

  The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion for improperly pushing and expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area to take measures against cheating. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

  In addition, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed from a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the end of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated enters and is pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat dissolves the inverted cup portion 178 and can pass through the inverted cup portion 178. 173 also melts. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wire accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) to each other in plane. Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. When the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that fraudulent acts can be easily found.

  The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcedly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the distal end thereof becomes a wall portion. 178a.

  Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Further, even if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the tip of the rotation of the front frame 14 (travels in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  Also, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to a person who commits wrongdoing through the piano wire from increasing, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below the 173a, it is possible for the person who commits the wrongdoing to find the wrongdoing before fleeing and to easily secure the person who does the wrongdoing. .

  In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the wrongdoing cannot determine it, so that he or she thinks that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Until the front end of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the front end of the piano wire is seen from the front side through the window 14c), the operation of inserting the piano wire deeper is naturally performed by a person who commits an illegal act (piano wire). Without questioning that the insertion was not successful). Therefore, it is possible for the person who commits the misconduct to notice that the misconduct has been found, and to prolong the time required to escape.

  Note that the detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be provided on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operation handle 51. In the case where the detection device is provided on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally provided on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the entry of the piano wire.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball struck by the launching solenoid 701 formed by an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward an area therebetween, and a ball feeder 720 are provided.

  The ball feeder 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one onto the firing rail 730. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730 by the input of the electric signal to the firing solenoid 701, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

  On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. Has been established. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and a body-side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162 are opened toward the rear side such that one end thereof can communicate with a through hole penetrating through the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) is formed so that the end of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. You.

  When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door-side upper plate passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161, and a front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 for restricting the outflow of game balls from the main body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body-side lower dish passage portion 162 is provided in the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowance position where the outflow of the game ball is allowed.

  An urging member (a coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is kept at the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls fall down is avoided. I have.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14 resists the shutter 163 against the above-described biasing force. Is pushed back to the allowed position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

  The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, the places where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and the places where the connector CN3 is provided are configured by separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different. This is intended to prevent malfunction in advance.

  With reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, a portion of the front frame 14 below the window 14c will be described. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded and shown. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are exploded and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, below the window 14 c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14 c, the front side of the upper plate 17, the diagonally upper right of the lower plate 50, and The operation device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operation device 300.

  The cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a width substantially equal to the width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right ends of the cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorations 8031 and 8032, respectively.

  The cover cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 at least by fastening portions 370a formed at the left and right ends, and has a body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project toward the front side. The main body curved portion 371 is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions and the left and right end portions toward the sides closer to each other in the width direction. And a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a main body curved portion 371 or a hanging portion 372. A light-transmitting portion 373 fastened to at least one of them, a left-side flat support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface on the right end of the main body curved portion 371. And a support groove 376 recessed from the back side of the right side plane support portion 375 and having a concave width increasing (tapered) toward the back side. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a rear side edge portion in a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The front left edge 371a of the front side of the front device 17 in the front-rear direction and the front left edge 371a of the operation device 300 are formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300, and the upper edge of the upper side in the assembled state. The rear middle edge 371b abutting on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge 371b is formed on the opposite side of the rear left edge 371a so as to match the front side edge of the ball lending operation unit 40. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball letting operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

  The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and is provided between the hanging portion 372 and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner of the front frame 14. This is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed by screwing the recessed portion 15a at a position on the front side with respect to a recessed portion 15a described later. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

  The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In addition, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is arbitrarily determined. In the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, six LEDs emit light upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs emit light downward (disposed on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Respectively.

  Light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting unit 373. I do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310 and then transmits light. Through the section 373.

  Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting unit 373 is smaller than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

  Further, as another effect control method, it is possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, in accordance with the change of the tilting device 310 from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is increased (in a stepwise manner) while the tilting device 310 is changed to the first state. By controlling the light amount to change slightly (in a stepwise manner) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state, light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373 due to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is controlled. Can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

  The left side flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 vertically in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. . This can suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated part 8031.

  In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right-side flat support portion 375 vertically contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. . Accordingly, the downward displacement of the electric decoration 8032 can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 are displaced. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portions 8031, the illuminated portions 8032, and the cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

  The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front end of the right side flat support portion 375. And the position match.

  The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the cover 370 and the illuminated part 8032 to each other can be dispensed with.

  Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is provided on the main frame 14a at the back of the main frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

  Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or a piano wire having a heated end is pressed and melted), the front frame is not affected. It functions as an entry preventing member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and it is possible to prevent the illustrated wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

  The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the open front side is a passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box part 151 fitted to the fitting part 140, and a flat plate-like plate part 152 that covers the back surface of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

  Since the fitting box 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the foul ball passage are formed. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates at the lower end of the passage 145 in the front-back direction, but also when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. Can be prevented.

  Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back of the foul ball passage 145 and the ball emptying passage 147, a wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, a wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness before and after the operation device 300 is reduced (a place obliquely above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a case where a through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

  Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation portion rear member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the rear side, and the operation portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The upper and lower positions are fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of the left and right long plate member. In addition, a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough, and a screw which is formed above and below the through hole 156 and which fastens and fixes the operation unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a is inserted. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 that are vertically arranged in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140, and a pivot base end that is larger than the through hole 156. And an opening / closing restricting portion 159 protruding rearward on the side.

  The connecting insertion hole 158 is disposed so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is formed in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction, and protrudes from the rear side. And a screw-in portion 148b formed as a hole through which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed in a position matching the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

  With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158 so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear surface are connected. The operation unit rear member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by aligning the position with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b. be able to.

  An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end of the operation portion rear member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed and the lower edge thereof at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c that extends rearward from a plate that forms the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 so as to divide the region. In an assembled state (see FIG. 89), the wall 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of contacting the wall 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Therefore, in order to align the operation unit rear member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extension wall portion 148c. The right and left surfaces make it possible to quickly and easily adjust the position and posture of the operation unit rear member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140.

  The opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front of and behind the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). Under a predetermined condition, there is an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear side of the operation portion rear member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part. Can be reduced. Therefore, the same thickness as the thickness of the other part of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength depends on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low and the strength of the part formed as thin as possible) (Thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the formability.

  The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be secured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to a U-shape. For example, as compared with a flat cross section, a cross section of a curved (wave) shape, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

  Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or from another member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a from the rear side. It may be composed of a metal part that is extended. However, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is made of a synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board surface supporting device 600 is in contact with the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. Chipping or denting can be prevented. Thereby, the worker who changes the state of the board support device 600 and attaches or detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of being injured by touching a chip or a dent formed in the board support device 600.

  Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock further disposed on the rotation distal end side. It is possible to ensure a long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location 20. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are locked by mistake when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

  As a path through which a foreign substance such as a wire enters, for example, a path passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even when following the gap of the operation device 300.

  The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operation device 300 is inserted into a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

  Thus, even if a foreign matter such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the substantially case-shaped operation device 300. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign substances such as wires from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300, a liquid is considered. For example, a player who feels bad about the game result may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to which drinking water can be poured, and if no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) may fail. There is a possibility that.

  Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like, but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it is configured to be separable and independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, on the bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess. It is not a complete case shape, and a clearance gap is formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap). The concave portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

  In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, is connected to wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent failure.

  Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the up-down direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be splashed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the failure of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

  With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is splashed on the return player, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the player touches the upper surface of the operation device 300 and touches the touched portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

  Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

  FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that binds the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 extending leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173 c.

  In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are respectively connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. It is guided and bound by the binding movable member 180.

  On the other hand, a harness connected to each of the illumination portions 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once provided in the relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. Are connected (collected) to each other, a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

  The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the direction of rotation along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to the main body 181 in the direction of rotation of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184 that are disposed in a U-shape as viewed from above and that can lock the binding arm portion 183. It extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 and has an opening. Mainly includes that the temporary retaining portion 185, a.

  Note that while the binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm 183, the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than the binding arm 183.

  The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a cross section formed in a substantially horseshoe shape on the upper side and having a through hole in the center and having a through hole in the center, and protrudes from the lower left and right corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stopper extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extended end curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-like support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96 (a)), and a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d. And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed of a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

  The plate member 14d includes, at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, a hole group 14d1 including a through-hole arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

  When a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, a pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b are fitted into corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d at the time of fixing.

  The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate members 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by reducing the distance between the extension end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is located on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is secured in a region for accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

  The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is fitted inside the base end portion of the movable arm portion 182, and the movable arm portion 182 is formed. It is pivoted (see FIG. 96).

  The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from a shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a base end portion supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long and thin shape that is continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivot position.

  The base end portion 182a has left and right ends (a portion where a straight line connected to an axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a rear end portion (the end with the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. The approaching portion) extends in the rotational direction from the side wall. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls becomes gradually shorter as approaching the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

  Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on circumstances. .

  Since a pair of the binding arm portions 183 have the same shape, only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. The bundling arm 183 has small width portions 183a formed near the distal end with a width equal to the width of the root and large width portions 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at equal intervals. It is formed. In a fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking arm 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93B).

  The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly larger in thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, since the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in a fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm 183.

  The locking portion 184 is formed on the movable arm portion 182 side with a large opening 184a, and is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with the large opening portion 184a interposed therebetween, and has a larger opening width than the large opening portion 184a. And a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

  The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through without being close to the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot pass (is locked).

  According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, by arranging it on the small opening 184b side, the size of the inner area (tightness) easily surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be reduced. Can be adjusted.

  The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which the binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound.

  The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing a lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial sectional view of FIG.

  94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 ( In b), the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d, and comes into contact with a vertically long metal part constituting the left part of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable by about 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). This angle is usually used in view of the situation of installation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the amusement shop (a situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is juxtaposed on the left and right and if it is rotated by 90 degrees or more, it may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). In this case, the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 is sufficiently larger.

  Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can be rotated with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm 182, the possibility of the movable arm 182 being degraded due to elastic deformation and broken can be reduced.

  Next, the manner of supporting the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is regulated by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and broken.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). FIG. 96 (c) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

  96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. You. That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, the horizontal line is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally, and can be supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

  Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upper extending wall 173c across the intermediate stopper 181c. To HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

  In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Accordingly, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

  FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

  97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 about the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

  From the one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the inner end is formed by rotating the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 about the cylindrical fastening part 181e. Since the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14 is supported, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b) and FIG. 96 (d)).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are the main bodies of the front frame 14 irrespective of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path passing near a vertically long metal part (a part where the base end part 182a of the movable arm part 182 abuts in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left part of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from approaching the rotation front end side of the front frame 14 by forcibly circling the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from hindering the work of the worker when performing the work by opening and closing the front frame 14, and to fit the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit that is bent only once on the rotation base end side (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above the inverted cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. In addition, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 to melt and penetrate the wire and advance the wire toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

  When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), thereby making it possible to quickly detect a fraud. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who performs wrongdoing from gaining wrongful profit.

  More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, a ball can be fired even when the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the time the fraud is committed to the time the fraud is discovered (it is possible to detect the fraud early).

  In this case, a wire is entered into the game area, and after the game area is manipulated (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. , It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball from firing a ball, thereby preventing improper profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

  Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is used. 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, there is a possibility that the person who commits the wrongdoing may not be able to collect the bills and the remaining ball of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his own wrongdoing. Therefore, deterrence against wrongdoing can be exerted.

  Further, in order to eliminate the possibility that it is impossible to collect the bills and the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) and perform fraud, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit is 0 yen, the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, so that the gaming machine shop can easily notice the fraud.

  In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a gaming machine store that outputs a disconnection error (CR error) of a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) checks the disconnection error (CR error). This makes it possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide openings 53 are arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. Is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (area of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right part of the ball guide opening 53.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50. And S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extending directions are directed (switched) at least once to both left and right sides.

  The S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thus, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while securing the vertical dimension of the window 14c (see FIG. 86) large, so that the vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area is reduced. Because of the large number of balls that can be temporarily secured on the lower plate 50 (and the upstream side thereof), the stress of ball refilling given to the player (when the balls of the lower plate 50 are gone, remove the balls from a thousand boxes A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress due to a request for replenishment or the like can be provided.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, as regions whose extending directions are bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. And a region NEa2.

  Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 so that the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed. , Is provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, a side wall Na disposed on the opposite side to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end. And walls N, Nb, Nc extending from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

  The proximity wall Nc has a surface Nc1 opposite to the ceiling wall Nb and is formed to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of a sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire or small-diameter metal represented by a piano wire or the like). This function will be described later. The distance between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending area NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from penetrating deeper. In other words, as shown in FIG. 99, a path that proceeds to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance is considered as an approach path of the wire HM that is illegally inserted. In this case, In this case, the wrongdoer advances the wire HM while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side.

  When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the wrongdoer, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances rightward through the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. Will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without leakage.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when the wire HM enters the gap Nin. In addition, the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (sandwiched), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and furthermore, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and fraudulent acts can be quickly found. it can.

  On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not catch and moves further, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the wire HM projects in a posture with the tip facing downward. Even if it does, the tip of the wire HM will proceed downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 disposed upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area disposed upstream of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

  Thereby, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an incorrect payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area to cause the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device and making it easy to win a fraud, it is possible to prevent an illegal payout ball from being obtained and a person who commits an illegal act to obtain an illegal profit.

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE where the ball ball passage portion 147 joins is approximately twice as large as the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thus, when the sphere flowing down the ball passage 147 is disposed in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in a portion downstream from the merging region CE.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The passage portion 145a has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so that the rear-side bottom plate portion of the passage-forming unit 140 projects downward as it goes downward.

  In a region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 is located at the same position as the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in a region downstream of the passage portion 145a, The rear bottom plate portion is located at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a and the surface position.

  That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the front and rear width is set to be larger in a region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in a region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage 145a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged upstream and downstream of the passage 145 so that the number of balls that can be stayed can be increased. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being aligned in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from simultaneously entering the passage portion 145a.

  In other words, the approach of the ball to the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. Thereby, even when two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. The possibility of being interposed between the upper and lower walls can be reduced.

  The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball is directed rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a that descends downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. A curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape to the rear side and that is curved in such a manner that the direction of extension extends upward toward the rear side.

  The ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side), while the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be.

  Thereby, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (since the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While the width of 145 is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 has a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) in which the S-shaped path SL2 is formed. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage 145.

  Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illuminated portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

  The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right directions, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032. In this lower support structure, the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400 has, like the support groove 376 of the cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side. (See FIG. 118), and fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

  Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 need not be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Note that, based on the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling the upper panel unit 400 to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening the upper panel unit 400 after fastening the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

  Further, fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 which are divided into right and left are respectively replaced with left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. With the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 include the main body frame 14a. The state disassembled from 14a is shown.

  The upper side plate member 14 e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is provided in the concave portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. It has a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted.

  The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side thereof, and fastens the screw passing through the through-hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby forming the upper frame. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

  FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes formed in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, while the cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

  In the actual assembling procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main frame 14a. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are superimposed in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a main body frame is provided. 14a (see FIG. 104), and is mainly provided with a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 which is fastened and fixed.

  The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted from the back side to the front side into the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted toward the front side.

  The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extension portion 511a in a plate shape from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is in an assembled state. In FIG. 86, a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension 511a contacts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a board member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, A pin support hole 515 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

  The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b in which the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side in a shape overlapping with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and the base member 511b comes into contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

  The base portion 511b is capable of abutting on the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115 (b)). Can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

  In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560 than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is shifted. The outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface substantially at the same position as the side surface of the base 511b. The rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the rear end of the support plate portion 510, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is connected to the support plate portion 510. Abuts on the left side surface 511c.

  The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. . In other words, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other toward the light guide member 540 from directly behind the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

  Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide 540 and exits from any of the surfaces of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and the path thereof will be described later.

  The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 provided on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 from the rear side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the rear fastening portion 527.

  The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 from the rear side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the rear fastening portion 556.

  The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width set to be approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined.

  That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut on the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projections 566). (In the case where the position is displaced up and down by about the same diameter as the above), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thus, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down by the positional shift with respect to the support plate portion 510, the positional shift is eliminated, and the fastening is easily performed. Fixation can be performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window 14c (see FIG. 86) and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is made of a light-transmissive colorless resin material.

  The right heavy plate unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 facing the left heavy plate unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front end is opposed to the light guide member 540 in the front-rear direction. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

  Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 is a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is exploded and shown.

  The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, an upper fastening portion 522 disposed at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. A lower fastening portion 523 disposed at a lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521; A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and the inner lens member 530 is formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525. And a plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and protrudingly provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the rear side. Support plate 5 0 a plurality of rear fastening portion 527 screws that secure is screwed to, mainly comprises.

  The main body plate portion 521 has a front-side end portion 521a having a corrugated shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front-side end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the corrugation. Is provided.

  The rear side base 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that is in contact with (shapes in shape with) the left side surface of the base 511b of the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  The connection plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connection plate portion 521c.

  In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals increase in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect produced by light can be made different for each opening 524.

  The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and is recessed in the left outer surface in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

  The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left outer side in the left-right direction. That is, screws are inserted into the outer cover member 560 at two locations at the upper end and at one location at the lower end, and are fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

  The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  The openings 524 are arranged side by side in four places at the top and bottom, and function as windows for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

  The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary between the rear side base 521b and the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in this embodiment, where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the rear side base 521b is curved in a design-like manner to the right between the above-described boundary portions. That is, the surface of the rear side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates left and right as it goes up and down.

  In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the design surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity, which is liable to be a dead space, is formed on the reverse surface of the design-shaped overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 is provided. Efficiency can be improved.

  The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. In other words, the inner lens member 530 has a wavy shape in which the front end 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520. Is done.

  The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. And support holes 531b and 531c into which the projecting portions 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 are inserted.

  The support hole 531b is formed in a front portion of the front end 531a in a wave shape, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied near the support hole 531b.

  The support hole 531c is formed in a wave-like rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the support hole 531c can contact the light guide member 540 is provided on the rear side. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is enhanced by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced even when a load is applied near the support hole 531c. be able to.

  In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is formed in the left and right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through-hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

  The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

  The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, similarly to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that extends leftward toward the back side, and thus has a shape in which the left-right width increases toward the back side (the front side end portion when viewed from above). ).

  The inner lens member 530 includes an overhang portion 533 that extends leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes, on the side opposite to the overhanging side, a light scattering portion 533a that is provided in a wavy shape and that has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

  The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a concave portion for changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the rear side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern on both left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is changed to the left and right directions through the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. You. The light guide member 540 is hot-bent to a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and has a width in the thickness direction from an end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to a front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

  Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is depressed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a and emits the light from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by forming a template having a pattern in which a conical portion having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a bottom circle of about 1 mm is dispersedly arranged in a grid at about 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that has reached the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

  The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, and is preferably an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, or an amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, and AS resin (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound) can be exemplified. Among them, in particular, by using an acrylic resin, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.

  In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the heat bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front side end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the right and left sides are formed. Is also formed from a wavy shape.

  The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. There is no particular limitation on the degree of the corrugation, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By using such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting three-dimensional freedom while maintaining good mechanical properties with little distortion after hot bending. .

  The details of the wavy shape waving right and left will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left, and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. A wave shape of a mode of being located to the right (positioning away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

  As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending a base material having a concave portion. As a method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) which are curved while being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + a heating temperature of 10 to 40 ° C. This is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferable that the heat treatment be performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

  At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material at the time of heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is maintained, and the light source light before and after the heat bending process is performed. Fluctuating angle can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and unevenness in luminance distribution in the light guide plate. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

  The light guide member 540 is provided with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting a light guide plate, and a screw that extends vertically from upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and is fastened to the outer cover member 560. And a fastening portion 542 to be performed.

  The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at a position other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect of the light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

  The outer lens member 550 is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a rightward extension in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 to form an outer cover. An overhang portion 554 that can be visually recognized through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a projecting portion provided on the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. A plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551, and the front side end portion 551a that forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a corrugated shape and is slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. You.

  The front-side end 551a is provided on the front side at a position where the curve forming the corrugated shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of protrusions that are fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). An installation part 551b is provided.

  A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) bulging toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed on the surface of the front end 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540. Are formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, The light emission at the front end face can be a strip-shaped light emission mode that extends vertically.

  The insertion hole 553 is provided in a concave deep portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled from the outer cover member 560.

  In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550, and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) facing the player can be enlarged.

  The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member is provided. The surface 540 and the main body plate portion 551 abut on each other (see FIG. 114B).

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 faces the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being displaced from the light guide member 540, and to accurately input light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be done.

  The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface at an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. In addition, a plurality of screws having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and an elongated hole formed in an oval shape with a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface at the lower end of the main body plate portion 561 that is capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and a diameter of a screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a slightly larger vertical width, a long hole shape longer than the vertical width, and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side; and a main body plate portion 561. At the front end portion, a receiving surface which is capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and a vertical width smaller than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 formed in a long hole shape with a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes a portion 565 and a plurality of protruding portions 566 protruding from the main body plate portion 561 to the rear side.

  The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 by fitting the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape protruding to the front side by the cover 370. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stable and supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

  The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an unauthorized act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

  With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

  In addition, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the protruding portions 551b are arranged on the back side of the support holes 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the protruding portions. The state where the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

  The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are abutted in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112 (b)). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

  In this manner, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting the projections 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500 and fitting them. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end on the front side of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are disposed at the front side end of the right panel unit (the front side from the front side surface of the light guide member 540). The number of screws for fastening and fixing the light guide member 540 can be reduced, and the region where light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, so that light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the band.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening portions) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the light member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered front end) can be expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

  When the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are connected. , And the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R form surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and have a positional relationship in which the surfaces can abut. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. Panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, respectively. At least two types of the assembling procedure can be considered. .

  The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right heavy board unit 500R is fastened. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. Thereafter, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing the plate unit 500R and the support plate 510 respectively. These two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

  As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker performing maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of a part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the working time can be reduced.

  In either case, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b. When sliding the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R in the plane direction, at least one of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

  As described above, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted is such that the right panel unit 500 is pryed open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and It helps prevent illegal acts that enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the machine 500.

  That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, by removing the screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled, and an illegal act can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front. If the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are not easily disassembled unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 is provided from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to decompose. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c).

  Light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is applied to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved right and left by the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

  Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape waving in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thus, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

  In addition, since the opposite side (the right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 is closer to the outer lens member 550 at a position corresponding to the uppermost one of the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to is diffused and can be used for production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. The effect can be improved.

  It should be noted that the difference in the mode of producing light is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region, or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, it is possible to make the mode of producing light on both the left and right sides different. .

  The light guide member 540 always has a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also set to the second opening from the top in correspondence with the vertical width being increased as the opening 524 goes upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2). Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is larger. , Which is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

  Accordingly, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 does not change, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit light condensed for each of the openings 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

  Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4１R1) and the center of the concave surface. The normal coming out is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be strengthened, and the effect of light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as a length connecting the middle point of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 facing the upper and lower portions is a vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the upper and lower width W4.

  In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 are formed such that the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. Accordingly, in a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection is performed. In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent light from being excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

  The center point of each of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each of the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. Is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

  The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in a region KE at the boundary between the openings 524. Here, the region KE is a band-like region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 provided adjacently above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE corresponds to the opening 524 provided adjacently below the same. Matches the top of Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a to the region KE travels in a state where the light is hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114C).

  In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the action of condensing light is reduced, the player can visually recognize the light. The difference in the amount of light is small.

  On the other hand, by making the region KE a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Can be improved in durability.

  In addition, by forming a convex shape to the left in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed to the right, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance of the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

  That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

  For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with no gap. At this time, since the right side shape of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE has a concave shape, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

  In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, which is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

  Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. Can be done.

  In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shorter than the upper and lower portions thereof (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter). Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the light amount is weak. The effect may be performed using the light that reaches the front end.

  That is, a light effect is prepared that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but can be visually recognized through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). By setting the degree of expectation of the jackpot high in the effect, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to a side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of fatigue of the eyes of the player can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

  Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, and is visually recognized by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and does not visually recognize the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and visually recognizes the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

  As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the cheating player is not aware of it, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

  Note that, by inverting the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player, and may not be visible to the clerk.

  FIG. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A.

  The light guide member 540 has a shape that tapers gradually from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the part farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm in order to maintain mechanical strength, and has the same width across the entire region in the vertical direction with the same gradient. to shrink.

  Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face is long, the width is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and is disposed at a position depressed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily visually recognized as dark than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion opposed to the support hole 531c is more than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion opposed to the support hole 531b. Since the width (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of a surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

  Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531c and the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531b are increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. This makes it easy to make the degree of light emission visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 vertically uniform with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 at the forefront (the difference in strength is small). )can do.

  FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In FIG. 116, an example of a path (a traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. Spreads and proceeds to the outside.

  Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is fixed, the light emission mode (coarse, dense, light and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the light can be visually recognized by the player in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

  Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 (the player side) is not right next to the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (Refer to the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

  Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the description will be continued. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the lower right end at the upper end of the right panel unit 500. ), And is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

  FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; , Mainly comprising. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The electric decoration unit 401 is a unit in which decoration indicating the model name or the like is provided on the front side surface, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light, thereby performing the effect by light.

  The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on a rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 to form a cylindrical inner side. A tubular portion 405 having a shape formed by penetrating the wavy wall portion 403; and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body 402 is formed in a box shape such that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. Note that the LEDs included are disposed on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body 402.

  The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, so that the position for assembling in the left-right direction is easily determined, and the work of assembling the electric decoration unit 401 to the upper frame member 410 is performed. It is the part that improves the performance.

  The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a horizontally long groove shape which vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed as a recess.

  The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring, which passes the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body 402 is provided to the upper frame member 410 side.

  The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 410e and the upper side plate member 14e, so that access to the inside is prevented. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

  FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge; and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. A left corner supporting member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and fitted to the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position extending from the opening 414 to the front side. And the lens member 440 constituting the illuminated portion 8033 while being prevented from dropping to the rear side by being pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. Provided.

  The main body member 411 is a left and right long member having openings formed on both left and right sides for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker cover 27 being disposed so as to cover the opening. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 which is opposed to the tubular portion 405 of the electric decoration unit 401 is smaller than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through-hole 413 formed to penetrate in a slightly large inner shape, and an opening 414 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

  The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the electric decoration unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

  The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thus, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the electric decoration unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Thus, the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached.

  The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

  The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, so that the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

  The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed groove 417 from the back side at the lower left end face. A supported groove 418 to be formed, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed at a position symmetrical to the left and right near the upper end portion, and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a second portion that is formed so that a screw can be screwed at a position closer to the top and bottom. And a fastening portion 419b.

  The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front end). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

  The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (see FIG. 86). 4), the load (weight and the like) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

  The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the electric decoration 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight and the like) given from the illuminating unit 8031 can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

  The fastening portion 419 is provided at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the screw does not reach the tip. And an enlarged rib 419a to be provided.

  As described later, the enlarged rib 419a connects the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (See FIG. 125 (a)), which will be described in detail later.

  In the present embodiment, the ribs 419a having the same shape are arranged at three locations around the fastening part 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening part 419.

  The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided at a position lower than the main body member 411, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122). Are formed at positions corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of the main body member 411, which will be described later in detail.

  The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at a lower front side edge of the main body member 421, An L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, and then extends upward from the extending end thereof, and has an L-shaped cross section, and a main body plate portion 421. An opening 424 mainly includes a plurality of small-diameter through-holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left-right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically.

  In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically can be increased, and the strength can be improved.

  The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings through which vibration generated toward the front side passes in the speaker assembly 450.

  The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through-hole 430R2 formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

  FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

  The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are jointly fastened to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connection holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L each having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave so that the sound can be heard, and a speaker 451 inserted through the through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape substantially matching the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and after forming a space between the front assembly 460 in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). And a side assembly 480.

  The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits a production sound in connection with a game, and one end is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. A speaker connection line 453 (for example, an electric wire composed of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and is connected to a terminal of the speaker connection line 453. When the connector is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  A front cover of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is scattered. It is possible to reproduce and output high quality sound without any delay. Further, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without deteriorating the sound quality.

  The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 formed in a cup shape having a left / right long side and an open back side, and a plurality of concave portions provided in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. And an extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the outer side in the vertical direction. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end to the front side of the main body 461; a light passing through hole 465 formed in the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction; A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted at the right side; a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side; The screw inserted into the side assembly 480 A plurality of fastening portions 468 to be connected and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a lower end of the distal end side main body portion 461T. And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side.

  The main body 461 includes, as regions divided in the left-right direction, a base-side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base-side main body 461B (see FIG. 121). The main body 461M is mainly provided with an intermediate main body 461M connected to the left side (left side) and a distal end side main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body 461M. The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T have a continuous space formed between the base body 461B, the middle body 461M, and the rear body 480.

  The main body 461 includes a rear side wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

  The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

  The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 463a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

  In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is configured such that the screws inserted into the through holes 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a are screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is so tight that the screws are tightened. Pressed against rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

  According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the sound effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

  The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage concave portion 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is shown so as to be visible.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

  The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole through which light emitted from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

  The passage forming rib 467 abuts the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap between the front and rear, and bends a plurality of times into a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). Are formed. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

  The front recessed portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (ie, slightly protrudes from the outer shape).

  The rear assembly 480 has a main body 481 formed in a cup shape having a long left and right side and an open front side, and a concave semicircular tip from the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extension plate extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside in the vertical width. 483, a wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed in the upper right corner of the main body 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side and a through hole through which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Through holes 488 and front assembly In the corresponding position in the longitudinal direction a front recess 471 of the 60 to the side recess 491 after being recessed toward the front side to the rear side, mainly comprising a.

  The main body part 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. And a front side wall portion 481H formed to have a shape fitted inside the rear side wall portion 461H.

  The speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall fitted on the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H on the entire outer periphery, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

  The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting to the front side beyond the wire pressing convex portion 484 at positions where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right with an interval allowing passage of the speaker connection line 453. 481Ha.

  The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha is a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha have a tapered shape that spreads left and right toward the front side (front end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 extends from the wire passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts right and left, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary projections 481Ha.

  As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembling. In the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

  The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

  The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the common tightening hole 14a2 and the common tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

  In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear side of the main body frame 14a by the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

  The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed to have a width to be fitted into the wiring passing concave part 464, and has a depth greater than the depth of the wiring passing concave part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is provided with a projecting length that is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the outer periphery of the covering portion.

  That is, by passing the speaker connection line 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464 are compressed. A gap can be prevented from being formed between the opening surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes.

  The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole through which light emitted from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through-hole 485 is formed from a circular opening having a size surrounding one LED. The light-passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through-hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is assembled (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

  The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, abuts each other without any gap in front and rear, and is formed in a plurality of spaces formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. These are ribs forming a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends twice. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes.

  The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, and is formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear plate of the main body 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

  Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed such that a front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and at that time, a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, a compressive force in the rearward direction is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the compression force closes the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

  At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is low and the passage-forming rib 487 may bend right and left, the compressive force does not work well, and the gap may not be able to be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is reduced by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), (Strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be.

  The rear recess 491 is formed in a shape that is inverted from the front recess 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening in cooperation with the front recess 471. The opening is formed so as to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outward from the outer shape). It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b), for easy understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is shown by imaginary lines, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are arranged to face each other are facing each other. Is shown in a state of being deployed toward the front side of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper surface. Can be matched. That is, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-rear direction.

  In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the rear side of the base body 461B of the front assembly 460. Is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 extends toward the distal end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and alternately move up and down toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

  By forming the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are assembled during assembly. The wiring can be prevented from being caught between the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

  Since the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, the rigidity of the main body 461 is enhanced by the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can be.

  Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e forms a bent passage for passing the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 in cooperation with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

  Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 proceeds linearly. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided while avoiding the passage forming rib 467. Will progress.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest to the left and right direction (for example, the rib portion 467b) is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (the arrow L and U directions).

  On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) and is closest to the rib portion (for example, in the left-right direction). When the rib 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrow L, D).

  Therefore, when the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are alternately arranged up and down as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, The traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws can be made longer as compared with the left and right width of the space.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of concave portions 471, 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be generated by the concave portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately near the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Directions of arrows L and U).

  Therefore, the concave portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 for holding down the wiring, and are alternately arranged at a plurality of positions (books) toward the left side. Rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e arranged at five locations in the embodiment.

  Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the rigidity of the main body 481 is enhanced by the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can be.

  Here, each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches in the front-rear direction with each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See FIG. 2).

  The operation of each of the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e is similar to the operation of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be generated by the concave portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left between the concave portion 482 disposed immediately near the rear concave portion 491 and the concave portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). Direction (arrows L and U). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

  Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in the vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is once narrowed at a position where the concave portions 462, 482 and the concave portions 463b, 483b are vertically arranged. Further, the vertical width is increased at once at a position further away from the speaker 451, and thereafter communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471, 491. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is attached is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) advances toward the distal end side main body portion 461T on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the front-end-side main body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order. As a result, the sound is emitted outside the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the back surface of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491, and an opening 424 ( 120 (see FIG. 120), it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so that the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is reproduced and output with high sound quality without being interrupted. Can be.

  The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, and converts the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 into the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out by the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it is possible to amplify the heavy bass. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of a sense of reality, and can enhance the interest and excitement of the player for the game.

  In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

  Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is used as a path avoiding the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (audio ) Sound tuning can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 have the following purposes. The speaker assembly 450 is disposed at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

  Further, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125A), and the respective rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screws being screwed into the fastening portions 468, the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of the extension plates 463, 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other so that the front assembly 460 and the rear The deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

  In addition, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. Before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

  For this reason, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portion is formed from the fastening portion 14e1. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

  An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is considered. It can be easily suppressed.

  In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally penetrated into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front recess 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed in a closed box shape. The gap between the openings formed by the wiring pressing projections 484 is closed by the speaker connection lines 453. Therefore, when wires, piano wires, and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly passes through an opening different from the location where the wire has entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e and extending the tip from 450.

  In addition, since the through-hole formed as an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes through the upper side plate member 14e is disposed near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, a wire or a piano wire is provided. For example, the distance between the front recess 471 and the opening formed by the rear recess 491 where the speaker and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 can be increased.

  Therefore, even when such misconduct is performed, the success rate of the misconduct can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent the occurrence of the wrongful profit.

  FIG. 124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of the arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). is there. In FIG. 124 (a) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Are omitted.

  As shown enlarged in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side. The outer surface 481Ho (the upper surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side and is fitted to the inner surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

  In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before the assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib 487c receives a compressive load from the rib 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by the elastic deformation, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the ribs in contact with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M has a shorter front-to-rear dimension than the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. For this reason, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (narrowed) in the intermediate main body 461M as compared with the distal-side main body 461T. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461 </ b> T disposed above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is inside the intermediate main body portion 461 </ b> M. It is largely secured in such a manner as to bulge in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal-side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal-side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to make the bass sound easier to hear by the vibration wave Ws.

  FIG. 125A is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fixed to the fastening portion 419 with the screws inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a, so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and The upper side plate member 14e is a portion for sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at a surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at a position below the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is placed at a position above the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 of 450.

  The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 are located. The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are configured to be fastened and fixed without the interposition of the side assembly 480.

  The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

  In the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the rear side is provided inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is provided inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending to the front side is provided inside).

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are provided in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the reproduction output from the speakers 451 provided in the other speaker assemblies 450R and 450L is performed. In addition to avoiding conflict with the sound to be played, it is possible to reproduce a high-quality sound as a transparent sound without hindering the reproduced sound.

  In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side at a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 does not abut (stick) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14e, but has a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 is line-contacted particularly at the lower end.

  In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the portion projecting from the upper side plate member 14e and abutting on the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin). It is not done.

  For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be provided, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

  In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, sound can be made thicker.

  Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

  Regarding the shape, it may be protruded in a long plate shape, may be protruded in a spike shape, or may be protruded in a rounded dot shape. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

  Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the side or the front of the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, when it is arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed in a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. The positioning may be performed by the following. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the function as the insulator can be achieved by tightening screws inserted into the through holes 483a. The sound effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

  At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) or the same as the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a through hole provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction and a screw inserted into a through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is provided. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper plate member 14e.

  Further, regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) is fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, The upper frame member 410 can be prevented from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

  The same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to be the same as the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

  126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

  First, in order to describe the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left front support portion 12 a and a left rear support portion 12 b are separated from each other in order to support the left end of the game board 13. Will be arranged.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the left front front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13. A flat surface 12a2 extending leftward and rightward from the left end is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

  The left end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a center portion opened in a cup shape. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion projecting from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

  The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a manner that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects toward the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction (rightward) on the side where the game board 13 is arranged in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. Thereby, the workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 by the worker can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) show the board support device 600. It is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. In FIGS. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and FIG. 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIG. 128 and Z39, for easy understanding, a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted.

  When the operator attaches the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent. The part is slid between the left front support part 12a and the left rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis directed in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the near side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is pivoted around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front face of the game board 13). Rotate so as to approach the inner frame 12. In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

  In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left and right direction with an arrangement and a length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose upper front end is cut as an inclined surface, are provided in the left-right direction.

  With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view. Each time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so that the game board 13 can ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side so that the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay. . Therefore, the workability of the operation of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game store. Thereby, the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 can be prevented from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same inclination angle as the rear inclination at the time of setting the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

  In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and released in a later-described state, and the rear face of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

  Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 (the portion disposed on the front side from the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to retreat from the route, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pressing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the rear side, a load is applied to the claw member 640 after the rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost simultaneously.

  In addition, the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c, and the vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board support device 600 does not contact the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600 (game The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Accordingly, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached with the state change of the board supporting device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

  Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the rear side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be reduced by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

  When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has its left end supported at two upper and lower positions by a left front support portion 12a and a left rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126). 13 when the right end of 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in a fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. In addition, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

  For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction to push the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. Is regulated.

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is disposed at the lower rear end of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices provided on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be capable of changing its position in the plane direction of the game board 13, and a control board disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back is connected in the rotating direction of the game board 13.

  The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture inclined in such a manner that the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

  The inner frame 12 is provided with a board supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. In addition, since the pair of upper and lower board supporting devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one board supporting device 600 will be described, and description of the other board supporting device 600 will be omitted.

  130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the board supporting device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board support device 600 A release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board supporting device 600 is rotatable by a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A pre-rotation claw member 620 pivotally supported, and a regulated pre-claw member rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620. 630 and a post-rotation claw member 640 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is disposed on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are disposed to face left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612; An arcuate concave portion 614 is provided on the back side of the support hole 612 along the arc centered on the support hole 612 and is recessed in the plate portion 611a from below, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A bar-shaped regulating rod 615 and a flange extending right and left from the plate portion 611a and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in an assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). A pair of fixing plates 616, mainly comprises.

  The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the base end side of the insertion, inserted into the support hole 612, and then pressed at the end at the insertion end side. , Are fixed to the support holes 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

  Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the front upper corner of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 which are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of support holes which are formed in a straight line on the back side of the plate portion 621a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. And a hole 624.

  When the second shaft member P62 is inserted through the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.

  The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed to face left and right, and includes a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in side view, a connection plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connection plate portion 621b from the rear end of the connection plate portion 621b. And a rear extension plate 621c extending downward at an angle of about 45 degrees, and extending perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the rear end of the extension portion 621a2 toward the opposite plate portion 621a. A hanging back plate 621d to be provided, and a front extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate 621d to the front side at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate 621d. And mainly comprising.

  The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be perpendicular to each other.

  The rear-side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can contact the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts to contact the main body plate portion 611.

  Thus, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the operation is completed, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while the force required at the start of pushing is reduced, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

  The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back of the hanging back plate 621d.

  A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate 621d close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to separate the lower end of the claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate 611 after the rotation.

  The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate 631 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a letter shape in a side view, and is disposed to face left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 which are formed in a straight line in the plate portion 631a to be formed, and which are supported by the second shaft member P62, and inclined forward from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that is extended by extension, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

  The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is disposed to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

  The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby restricts a free posture change of the pre-regulating claw member 630.

  The post-rotation claw member 640 is a body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the body plate portion 641 and is disposed to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 and the pair of plates 641a, which are formed in a straight line through the plate 641a and connected to the third shaft member P63. And an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

  The front connecting plate 641b is a part that contacts the back side of the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

  The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in an unlocked state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the inclined extension plate 643 has a tilt angle that makes contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

  FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process in which the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. In FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), it is fixed to the multifunctional cover member 171 and the board supporting device 600 which are arranged close to the board supporting device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  That is, FIG. 134 (a) illustrates the released state of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) illustrates the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed immediately behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thus, the simple operation of pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 causes the claw member 640 after rotation to rotate too much about the first shaft member P61 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61). Accordingly, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state after the rotation.

  Here, the biasing force in the direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 by the torsion spring NBa as described above. Therefore, when other external force does not act, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 abuts on the restriction bar 615, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated. While the front side where the extending portion 621a2 is disposed tilts, the front side rises in a manner in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  More specifically, while the regulating rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134 (a)). Until 135 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed to face the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 side of the inclined extension plate 633. The leading end is disposed close to the hanging back plate 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

  In the angle range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (range between FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 135 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, a change in the posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 during operation due to the downward load is caused by a change in the posture in the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). (Posture change), the reaction force to the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 to the downward load is restricted.

  In addition, since the game board 13 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

  Thus, rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a downward load applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in which the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

  In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the rear-side extension board 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt), the rear-side extension board is used. Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in a state where the board surface supporting device 600 is released and the front claw member 620 is rotated by a load from the front frame 14, the front frame 14 is disposed on the front frame 14. Depending on the state of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state, the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state, and is stable at a halfway angle May occur.

  Assuming that the board supporting device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the gap between the back of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front of the game board 13 is obtained. May be shortened, which may hinder the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function disposed on the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 contacts the pre-regulation claw member 630, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it is possible to remind the clerk who has performed the operation of closing the front frame 14 that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

  If the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is fixed, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation claw Depending on the state of the contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stabilized at a halfway angle occur (only, The board supporting device 600 reaches a fixed state).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is set to the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the restriction bar 615.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear side extension plate 621 c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

  That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. I have.

  Thereby, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the store clerk pushing the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 90% of the game board becomes stable). The case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the case where the load is applied to the panel support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14. In this case, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

  Accordingly, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (see FIG. )), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the pawl member 640 after the rotation is displaced by the game board 13, and the pawl member 620 before the rotation is accordingly rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d, so the claw member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. Of the torsion spring NBb is applied as a resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistance portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

  Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 moves from a portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) to a portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 gradually increases.

  As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed to the rear side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135A and the second shaft member P62 is displaced by the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620, The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are separated for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given from the regulating bar 615 to the pre-regulation claw member 630 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135B, the dimensional relationship is such that the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be moved to the front claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , And then the board support device 600 can be fixed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the rear side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface supporting device 600 (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the board is to be replaced, and the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed). Thus, the working efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward and the claw member 630 is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation continues as it is. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

  When the board support device 600 is released in a state where the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is released.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 abuts on the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. This can eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

  Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support apparatus 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support apparatus 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are shifted up and down. In addition, there is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the front claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the displacement amount of the pre-regulation claw member 630. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

  Accordingly, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (a degree that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted from being returned by the restriction bar 615), Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the positions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the release state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and rotates before the rotation. And the claw member 640 after the rotation can be displaced in a direction in which the angle between the claw member 640 and the claw member 640 is increased.

  Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, so that the game board at a position supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, a relationship between the board supporting device 600 disposed below and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139 show the front frame 14 in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14.

  In FIG. 136, the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 is shown, and in FIG. 138, the board supporting apparatus 600 is shifted from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). 139) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139 in a state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is shown by imaginary lines. Is done.

  136 to 139, the relationship between the board supporting device 600 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. 136 and 137 are shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is detached, but to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged. Is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 137, when the board supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board supporting device 600 is avoided. . In addition, since the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared with the disposition of the board support device 600 in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 is provided. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is disposed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening / closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

  Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are in opposite directions, so that the reaction force becomes excessively large. This is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 138, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is provided, the front lower end of the game board 13 may abut on the rear side extension plate 621c in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139) when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, the opening / closing control unit 159 And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

  Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) do not become opposite directions, and it is easy to push in with a normal load as described above. (See FIG. 135 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is pushed through the opening / closing regulating portion 159, and the board supporting device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, closing the front frame 14 is allowed.

  FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

  The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) illustrates a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) illustrates a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b), only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The front surface of the base member 710 is pivotally supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. And a ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721 which is provided.

  The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is provided on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A fastening portion 716 in which a screw which is cylindrically protruded toward the front side and is screwed to fasten and fix the ball receiving member 731 is provided at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716 a bulging linearly from the base member 710 to the front side; , And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

  The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 into which the bar-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 713 formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. A protrusion 714 protruding toward the front side near the right side of the locking portion 713 and a suction force generating solenoid 741 are disposed so as to be opposed to each other when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142A). And a problem determination convex portion 715 that is provided to be convex.

  The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A). An opposing plane 714a formed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and an inclined surface that is opposite to the opposing plane 714a and that is inclined rightward toward the back side. And a surface 714b.

  When the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination protrusion 715 does not abut the suction force generating solenoid 741, but loosens the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 ( In a state of being floated from the cover member 721, the cover member 721 is formed at a protruding height which abuts and restricts the rotation of the cover member 721.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosened, and to form a case in which the cover member 721 cannot be closed so that the sales force is applied to the clerk. It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed beforehand.

  The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by the base member 711, a regulation state that regulates the falling of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a regulation state of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). And a switching device 740 that is controlled to change the state between an allowable state in which the air flows down to the firing rail 730.

  The cover member 721 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material into a cup shape with the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) opened, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. , A hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the right and left opposite sides of the bar portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passing at a position displaced toward the bar portion 722 side from the hook portion 723 A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship protruding slightly upward from a lower edge of an inner end of the ball passage opening 724; And a shaft rod portion 726 that supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

  The switching device 740 is an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a member made of a synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft bar portion 726, and the attraction force generating solenoid 741 generates a magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the metal plate 743 is a sheet metal member that is locked on the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741; A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and is inclined downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. And a regulating projection 745 that extends toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the shaft bar 726.

  The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and has a falling plate portion 724a that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction. A rib portion 724b, which is disposed above the falling plate portion 724a, extends downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and has a tip end surface which is inclined downward toward the back side; A left inner side surface 724c, which is provided continuously with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and to the right.

  When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, the sphere P8 flows down in a manner of being separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so that the sphere P8 and the cutting metal 725 are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged to protrude inside the sphere passage opening 724. The collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

  The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, there is provided a ball receiving member 731 which is disposed at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the long direction are parallel and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and passing the fastening screw, and a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a. And a regulating groove 731b having a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

  When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through-hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731. The ball P8 can be slid along the straight line that is output, whereby the standby position (the distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P <b> 81 (the firing intensity when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. In addition, since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

  The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and extends diagonally upward and to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a. The base is formed by screws inserted into a plurality of (two in this embodiment) mounting holes 732 formed in the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

  Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is provided. Is suppressed.

  The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and contacts the front and rear two places on the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the ball P8 upward. It is configured to guide.

  FIG. 144 (a) to FIG. 144 (c) are front views of the sphere launching unit 112a showing a sphere sending state by the sphere feeding device 720 in a time series. 144 (a) to 144 (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

  144 (a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the state in which the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), as shown in FIG. 144 (a). In the case of, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P <b> 8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745. Retreats above the sphere, and the regulation of the downward flow of the sphere P8 is released, whereby the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711, whereby further downward flow is regulated, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, the ball P8 riding on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thus, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

  Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

  FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725 a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 is inserted and a falling plate portion 724 a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and a notch with a sharp acute end formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the same plate as the base plate of the lower blade portion 725b. And an upper blade portion 725c extending from the main body.

  The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined more rearward than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes above the falling plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

  The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and entered is described.

  FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the sphere launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 is fired. In FIGS. 146 and 147, some components of the ball firing unit 112a are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the firing rail 730 stays in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current flows through the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously protrudes, giving a firing force to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is hit along the firing rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

  Here, the ball P8 is struck while one end of the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It has been known that the player can loosen the ball P8 to repeatedly detect the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the firing of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is located at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in such a manner that the yarn Y8 moves closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the ball P8 is struck in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the firing rail 730 under the falling plate portion 724a, and the middle portion of the yarn Y8 of the falling plate portion 724a. Since the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c projecting above the falling plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. .

  While the player holds the end (the other end) on the near side of the thread Y8, a load accompanying the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  When the firing strength of the ball P8 is low, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not cut due to insufficient tensile force, but in this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of an improper act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. Are substantially the same.

  In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is provided. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance / retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

  The reciprocating operation unit 900 raises and lowers the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 921 (the reciprocating operation, that is, the operation of moving inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the third The operation includes at least one of an operation of retreating to the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other end is connected to the other end. Is driven by a drive motor 921 via an arm gear 924 while being pivotally supported by the rear plate 1100, and drives the drive-side arm member 910 to rotate. A driving motor 921 for generating a driving force, and a transmission unit 920 including a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive-side arm member 910, and a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930; And a long plate-like driven arm member 950 for connecting the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800 on the left and right opposite sides of the driving arm member 910.

  Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. In FIG. 154, the supporting substrate 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The petal operating device 800 is configured such that a member such as a petal 802 is supported on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

  A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the right side of the upper end in the central body portion of the supporting base material 801, and a driving shaft of the central motor 804 is moved forward through a small gap formed in the supporting base material 801. A first gear 804 </ b> G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

  An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the center motor 804 in the center main body portion of the supporting base material 801. The opening 801P is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes, and extends inside. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and having a screw insertion hole at a distal end portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a detection arc plate 880d of the loose fitting device 880 described below can pass. It is formed.

  An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed, below the central motor 804 (see FIG. 156).

  A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long, generally elliptical area in the center and cover the peripheral area from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region, and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper portion.

  In the present embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that slightly extends up and down as a whole. However, since the petal operating device 800 is disposed so as to be movable up and down as described later, The operating space can be reduced by forming the 801 into a vertically long shape rather than the left and right long shape.

  At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively linked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap with the position of the opening 801P as described later. The outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be arranged at any position as long as they do not interfere with each other. In the present embodiment, however, they can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged on the right (see FIG. 156).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a slightly inclined position toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the supporting base material 801 and the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the supporting base material 801 from being increased, and the driving base arm member 910 is connected to the driving base arm member 910 via the driving arm member 910. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

  FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which constitute a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

  FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

  Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and has a shape that curves so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

  Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery thereof has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical in shape to each other, but are slightly similar in unevenness and the like, but are formed in approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is formed so that the specific color (red) is dark without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

  Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole inside at two locations, that is, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and the radial center portion. I have.

  The petals 802 are located closer to the rounded tip (counterclockwise in front view, right side of FIG. 157 (a) in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where they are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803 than to the rear side 802a. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp edge side (clockwise in front view, left side in FIG. 157 (a) of the drawing) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side 802a.

  The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side. Petals 802 are arranged so as to gather toward the same center with the tip on the inner peripheral side.

  The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced back and forth, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b overlap at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the matching positional relationship can be set, the difference (size difference) in the shape of the entire petal 802 between the assembled position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be remarkable.

  The five petals 802 have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

  As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member separated from each other and fixed to the five petals 802.

  Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has an outer peripheral edge portion extending forward.

  In the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arrangement state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S which extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes therein are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). The member 803 is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 in the lateral direction.

  The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be located substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803. Further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along portions on both side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes inside at two positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

  The screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat member 803 from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed behind the flat plate member 803.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a similar front shape in which five similar shaped portions are annularly continuous, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

  156 will be described again. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape at the front and rear at two adjacent locations among five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at the middle one of the three locations except the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having a screw hole is formed integrally inside the extension, and a positioning boss 813a extends from a leading edge of a location where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815. Each of the center slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 814 is counterclockwise viewed from the front by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the present pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

  Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight space therebetween.

  In this manner, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a circular shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of these three slits, that is, of the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the small diameter side are the two-sided slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extension (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803.

  The slit member 810 is connected to a side end of a flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 are formed, and has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral ends of the center slit 814 and both-side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Has an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

  Thereby, the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

  Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the pair of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged closer together so as to be closer to the inside, whereby the outer shape of the slit member 810 is also made compact.

  In other words, it is assumed that the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. In the case where the slits 810 are formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the both-side slits 815 can be laid out more densely. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

  As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and has a small thickness at both ends of the slide member 820 and a tip portion having a semicircular shape in a front view. An extending portion to be formed, a central portion that is bulged out of the rendering portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 projecting from the front to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state; a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side; Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects the long direction at right angles. And both side slits 815.

  On the other hand, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

  Thus, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slit 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

  As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the posture in which the flat plate member 803 faces a fixed outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. Is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide.

  FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. 160 and 161 refer to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

  As described above, the rotating plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side, with a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and formed around the peripheral wall.

  The guide rail 832 is formed such that the peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to extend so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape in a front view. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830.

  The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a small gap of play. The ridge corner at the extended end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be angled.

  The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a clockwise direction in a front view along a direction substantially intermediate between a tangent to the pivot opening 831 and a normal line. Further, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape further toward the clockwise direction in front view than the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  The end of the guide rail 832 on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end protrudes forward from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

  Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830 </ b> G that extends rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a peripheral wall shape and has teeth on the outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

  Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five places as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is not linear but linear. As a result, the pivotal opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 is smoothly pivotably supported.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a third gear 810G slightly smaller in diameter than the second gear 830G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is further fixed to the rear side of the second gear 830G so as to be concentric. Are arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

  A circular pivot opening 810a is formed at the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, three portions of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) are provided. A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screw insertion portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

  The third gear 810 </ b> G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830 </ b> G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into positioning hole 810c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through screw insertion hole 810b.

  As a result, the slit member 810 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G, and is braked by the oil damper 805. Is held on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

  FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut out along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to increase the diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

  A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front screw portion 857 having screw holes therein at two places on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and a side from the front screw portion 857 to the lumen portion 856 side. A holding portion 858, which is formed in a shape having a counterbore at a deviated position toward the rear side, and two support protrusions 859 extending slightly short forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

  The inner peripheral surface of the lumen 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing portions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft 852, and A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from the rear screw portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is disposed in front of the center shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

  By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the center shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 and positioning the screw, the screw is screwed into the front screwing portion 857 of the center shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  An insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the center shaft member 851 in a size that allows the screw-in portion 869 of the center decoration member 868 to be fitted inside.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the front surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location at the center and at many locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles multiplexed (doubled) around the one location. The LEDs 865 are respectively arranged and fixed, and emit light forward.

  In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, laterally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to. Note that the horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the front LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward.

  On the front side of the LED board 861, a center decoration member 868 is arranged. The center decoration member 868 is formed of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, is extended in a columnar shape from the base of a long plate to the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the center. It has a pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

  The screw portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. A screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 abuts on the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED board 861 interposed therebetween, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the center decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thus, the center decoration member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861.

  The loose fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member. A main body cylindrical member 883 which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and which is loosely and rotatably fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a front and rear cylindrical shape and internally having a screw hole at two of the four locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed and the above-mentioned four places where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four positions corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with the same protrusion length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a in the outer diameter direction in the shape of a rib and at the same time in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b is formed to extend therethrough.

  A decorative member 884 formed on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861 and covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 149), and the decorative member 884 is externally mounted. A rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the diameter and has a bottomed cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion and abuts against the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

  The back cover 886 is entirely plated on its front and back surfaces (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010), whereby the side surface is mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, light emission can be performed by reflecting the light of the horizontal LED 866 disposed on the back side of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

  The decorative member 884 is a member that performs light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 provided on the LED substrate 861, and has a hibiscus flower shape, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. In addition, an opening 885 is formed in a central portion with a size that allows the center decoration member 868 to be inserted.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 thus configured is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G. A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported by the support base material 801 and meshing with each other are meshed with each other.

  One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with one of the gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

  A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and around the pivot opening 880a, a screw insertion hole is provided at a position corresponding to the two screw insertion portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. 880b is provided with a positioning hole 880c at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

  The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and has a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into positioning hole 880c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into screw insertion portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through screw insertion hole 880b.

  As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off, and the slit is formed. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

  The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the rear side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. As the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152), and is provided so as to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d can be detected regardless of the posture of the fourth gear 880G from which rotation (the minimum angle). The detection of 72 ° can be performed, and the rotation of 72 ° or more can be ensured by the detection).

  The assembly of the center shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the rear ends of the shaft portions 852 project slightly rearward from the pivotal openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

  A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and similarly from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw part 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

  At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wire is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801 </ b> P of the support base 801 (not shown).

  With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base material 801, and the slit member 810 is formed in the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 as shown in FIG. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted to the outside, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to fit.

  At this time, since the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight places along the circumferential direction by the threaded portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, the rear peripheral wall of the slit member 810 is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the slit member 810 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 810, whereby the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is moved. It is pivoted smoothly and freely.

  FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800, the driving arm member 910 and the driven arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 vertically moves up and down (moves forward and backward) when a vertical load is applied from the driving arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIG. 150 to FIG. 152 are appropriately referred to.

  The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest portion inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and at the lower left corner in front view. A support pillar 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear housing part 1120 recessed above the support pillar 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be housed from the front side, A rail fixing portion 1130, and a support slot 1140 formed as a slot that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the right and left opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly equipped.

  The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910, and is a pair of left and right holes arranged near the outer periphery at the front end thereof so that a screw can be screwed therein. It has a threaded portion 1111 to be formed, and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side as a pair of upper and lower portions on the same surface as the leading edge of the threaded portion 1111.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the rear. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110; a connecting protrusion 912 that is formed in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member; A transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the long main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operating device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member. And a support portion 914.

  The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting protrusion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913, and a flange 926 that projects radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction therewith, the support column 1110 is rotated about an axis.

  The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are connected to each other while slightly crossing each other. The gear accommodating portion 1120 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating portion 1121, a second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and a drive-side arm member disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating portion 1121 with the second accommodating portion 1122 interposed therebetween. 910 and a third housing portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 to be fitted is housed.

  The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and slidably supported up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on a line. The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

  The support slot 1140 is a slot that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined and disposed so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° as viewed from the front, and from the vicinity of the outer periphery. An extension wall 1141 is provided to extend to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member that is formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

  A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported projection 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported projection 951 in a state in which the collar is internally fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the elongated support hole 1140.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side substrate 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

  The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front and rear direction in a long hole shape extending left and right. It is connected to the connection protrusion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction and formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. And is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front-end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

  The base-side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a formed along a locus at which the connection protrusion 912 rotates at the upper end around the support column 1110, and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. And a displacement portion 932b.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape on the front side on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed at the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting column 1150 having a fixing plate 1001S, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting column 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. And a support protrusion 1002S protruding rearward in a columnar shape in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and a circular hole in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is concavely formed in the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Concentric with A convex portion 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the circular arc shape, mainly comprises.

  The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed at the tip thereof with the support projected portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. In this state, a screw for retaining the screw is inserted from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S in this state, and the slide plate 930 is configured to be slidably supported.

  The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the convex ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. Part. The protruding ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at a regular position, but is formed at a protruding height at which the second directing member 940 can abut if it is displaced or bent from the regular position. Is done.

  The second effect member 940 has a main body that is formed in such a manner that a lower end portion is bifurcated and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the pivoted support post 941, and is located on the rear side at the right corner in front view. A shaft-supported column portion 941 that is formed in a columnar shape and supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed adjacent to the shaft-supported column portion 941 and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. 942.

  The pivoted support portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entrance 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). A threaded portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the end with the shaft-supported column portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S across the collar. When the screw is screwed into the cover member 945, the cover member 945 serves as a stopper. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the front end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin-made collar is fastened and fixed at the front end, thereby preventing the slide plate 930 from falling off. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are linked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal-side insertion hole 933.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thus, even if the second effect member 940 is likely to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate concave portion 1004S and resistance is generated, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. The rear plate 1100 has three screwing portions 1161 configured to be able to screw screws when fastening a plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and a radially outward direction within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924. Sensor 1162 for detecting the flange portion 926 projecting from the front, a shaft support 1163 on which a collar for guiding a coil spring SP8 for generating a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported, and a support slot. A cover support portion 1164 disposed in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at a lower right side of 1140, a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden in the board cover 1000C in a front view; And a screw portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

  Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even when the auxiliary projection 942 is broken due to long-term use, and a portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in a front view is missing, the screw-in portion 1006S causes 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

  As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixedly fastened to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged back and forth and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side substrate 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S are easily suppressed. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the up / down operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170, and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG. 171, and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

  168 and 169 show a state in which the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving arm member 910. ) Is shown at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end side of the movement range. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the driving side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is fitted into the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive arm member 910 rotates idly). can do.

  170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

  170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked to each other, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as linked. Can be done.

  Here, by moving the second production member 940 in a manner that the second production member 940 projects toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally arranged, the second production member 940 operates as if following the petal operation device 800. It can be seen visually.

  Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

  177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

  179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is at the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 expands from the initial position (assembly position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. Through the middle position, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and the rotating operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position. Operation) and return to the initial position (convergence position).

  In the initial position (assembly position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is positioned inside the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 (end on the side of the circular opening 811). 174 and FIG. 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most gathered position toward the central decoration member 868 at the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is It is in a gathering state that composes flowers.

  When the petal 802 is in the initial position (assembly position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c). When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G, the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate clockwise in rear view as shown by an arrow A10.

  At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831 so that the rotation plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, via the third gear 810G as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move.

  Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates counterclockwise in front view as shown by an arrow A11 on the front side surface thereof. At the same time, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward in the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

  At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. It is guided and moves.

  At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds the torque, and accordingly, With the slit member 810 kept stopped, the slide pin 823 moves linearly outward along the central slit 814 with the rotation of the rotating plate 830.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals 802 expand radially outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to the inclination. Be faster.

  That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the operation of expanding the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

  Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively small as compared with the above-described case, Assuming that the moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the center slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Any reduction is even more pronounced.

  At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise as viewed from the front along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal to the pivot opening 831 from the center end as shown in FIG. Thereafter, it extends outwardly while being curved in an arc toward the clockwise direction in a front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to spirally spread outward as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

  As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise direction in the front view from the direction D15, the reduction of the load on the slide pin 823 and the reduction of the moving speed are all more remarkable.

  That is, in the case of the center slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by tilting the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further bending it in an arc shape.

  In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. For this reason, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is reduced at the expense of the movement speed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the center slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of departure. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

  As described above, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a problem such as deviation and secure the reliability of power transmission, while increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 by the central slit 814. , And roles are divided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially to the full open state, and the expanding operation ends.

  In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially separated, so that the petals 802 can be continuously viewed outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. 802 is arranged. Thereby, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is one size larger (FIG. 178 (b)).

  When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 is thereafter locked to the outer end of the center slit 814. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the end of the expanding operation can be maintained.

  After the end of the expanding operation, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 starts to rotate counterclockwise in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830 by completely removing the braking by the oil damper 805. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

  At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expanding operation, the rotating operation is immediately continued so as to continue from the expanding operation to the rotating operation. Can be migrated.

  When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). To rotate. Therefore, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 is larger than that in the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  When the above rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the reverse clockwise direction as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is rotated. First, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven clockwise in rear view as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b) while being stopped by being stopped by the oil damper 805. Performs the reverse convergence operation.

  That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement, and at the same time, the five petals 802 move from the fully open position to the center decorative member 868 at the center. Then, they gather to return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and end the gathering operation.

  Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is rotated again by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are turned as shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). In the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  When the petals 802 rotate clockwise in a front view in an assembled state as shown by an arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in front view) as shown by an arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 is larger than that in the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  By controlling the central motor 804 from the gathering operation to the rotation operation as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift, or to shift immediately so as to continue without interruption. You can also

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operating device 800 is rotating.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the inner configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

  That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

  The notch 9145b is formed in a series of areas including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the depth of the notch is approximately equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

  The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the plate member 14 d (see FIG. 91), and faces upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand loads.

  The thin plate blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8, thereby illegally operating the ball inside the game area and obtaining an illegal profit. And is arranged for cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

  148 will be described again. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the force of the ball to be fired. If the force of the fire is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. The ball could be fired without it.

  On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 via the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that the ball directly enters the game area.

  On the other hand, for example, when the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly struck, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the ball P8 is attached to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the person who commits the wrongdoing can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and an improper profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when performing a wrongdoing using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin plate blade 145 is formed in the foul ball passage 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

  In other words, when the wrongdoer pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the yarn Y8 and cutting the yarn Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, formed on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

  Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin blade portion 9153 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin blade portion 9153 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin blade portion 9153 can be improved.

  Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 is disposed below the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the dispensed ball. That is, since the person who commits the wrongdoing is afraid of the discovery of the wrongdoing, after holding the ball P8, the player holds the ball P8 close to the body (for example, in a pants pocket, etc.) in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious. ), It is easy to perform an illegal act such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state where the yarn Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (contacts the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 extends through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

  In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front plate side lower plate passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and rebounds, and the ball guide opening is formed. The lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on or hitting the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the bottom 53, and a bottom opening disposed behind the ball release lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate portion is formed. The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 comes into contact with the yarn Y8, so that the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed which is inclined downward toward the right. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage 9142.

  Accordingly, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (facing to the ball ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

  In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (the area of about 1/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53. 9053a is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing regulation step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion that connects to the left end (left end) of the lower bottom near the exit of the spherical passage 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

  A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door-side lower plate passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

  Note that the vertical width of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and abutting on the climbing regulation step portion 9053a from climbing to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts the ball in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. With reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, differences from the eighth embodiment will be described.

  184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, and FIG. The state seen from diagonally below is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage 10145.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 10140 in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side so as to cover below the notch 10145c.

  The notch 10145c is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the concave is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere. You. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d for guiding the ball to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

  In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary projection 14d2 is provided to project from the side surface on the back side toward the back side. The auxiliary projection 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not shown in FIG. 186.

  The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 in the front-rear direction is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are broken or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. Can be prevented, and the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

  The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the rear side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (the front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protrusion 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 increases as the distance from the passage 145a increases. This makes it easier to insert the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage 145a into the gap on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the gap where the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

  The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a portion forming a bifurcated blade portion, and extends to the left in a mode in which the first thin blade portion 10153 is slightly inclined upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, an acute concave portion 10155 whose concave deep portion is an acute angle is formed.

  The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members provided for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

  The acute angle concave portion 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thus, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, the yarn Y8 can enter the acute-angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged.

  Since the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side as compared with the first thin blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 which is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by a wrongdoer. Can easily enter the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

  The plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. You. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left and right opposite directions.

  For example, a person who commits a wrongdoing releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand and tries to avoid the discovery of the wrongdoing by the ball P8 flowing backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and being discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right opposite direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the lower end side extended end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

  This allows the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 to stay inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, thereby increasing the time during which the yarn Y8 is exposed to the game area, thereby expediting the discovery of fraud.

  Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided at a deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 coming to the wrongdoer's hand is cut, the yarn is adhered to the sticky member provided in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is moved to the game area. , And is kept in place, so that it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a low firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described. A receiving foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a tip member 2062a formed and disposed close to the ball firing unit 112a and a gap V11 having a width allowing the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b.

  A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the main body upper dish passage portion 161. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than a width that allows one ball to pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the ball preventing member 68 is disposed above the ball.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the main body-side upper dish passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body-side lower dish passage 162 is provided in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main unit upper plate passage 161. When the ball on the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device is turned on. It is configured such that the payout of the ball from 133 stops.

  That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is dispensed from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering the above-mentioned misconduct in which a ball is adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8 and one of the balls is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, thereby causing the yarn Y8 to enter the inside of the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the payout ball to the yarn Y8 can be caused without depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls on the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

  FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is appropriately referred to.

  The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with a metal long screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the near side.

  Specifically, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to protrude cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b, and has a threaded groove formed therein for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is brought into contact with the base member 68b1 in a state where the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4. A long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as an attachment hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole, and a screw is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in this state. By being inserted, the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

  Note that the closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface, which are the side that contacts the guide member 2062b, match the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

  The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that the surface of the guide member 2062b, which constitutes the outer frame of the game area, descends and falls as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) of the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, , About one-third of the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

  With this configuration, when the ball is fired toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower end of the gradient increasing unit 2062d collides with the ball. That can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d. And it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball firing unit 112a side.

  The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the slope increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 with a width (about 2 [mm] in the present embodiment) smaller than the diameter of the sphere and capable of entering the thread between the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side up to a certain position. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a location where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

  A cutout 2062b3 for a semicircle is provided in the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. The notch 2062b is provided for exposing the long screw B11.

  As described above, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 during fraudulent acts performed through the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

  That is, due to the arrangement of the cuts 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 disposed deep in the cuts 2062b1 when receiving a load that pulls both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at the position where the shot ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

  In addition, the person who performs the wrongdoing performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes toward the player (the ball P8 is fixed). (See FIG. 182) to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, so that near the gap V11 close to the player, the yarn Y8 is shifted toward the front. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c near the front side, the yarn Y8 can be easily inserted into the cut 2062c as compared with the case where the cut 2062c is arranged near the back side.

  A button-type switch SW11 provided with a detection unit projecting downward is provided in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. For this reason, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is provided so as to be able to switch between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

  FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) illustrates a state where the weight portion 68a2 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) The weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used for fraudulent activity is shown for reference, and the button type switch SW11 is turned ON. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is turned on. It is illustrated that the SW 11 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and provides enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows off under its own weight. Even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting of the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the state is returned to the state shown in FIG. This is because you can do it.

  On the other hand, for an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that progresses while filling a passage such as an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 has a large resistance. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

  For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is caused to travel through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, to reach the inside of the game area, and to try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, The nail (not shown) implanted in the game board 13 is bent, the ball is gripped and put into a winning opening, the tip of the device is used as a guide plate to the winning opening, or a laser is emitted from the tip. Cheating nails).

  FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that enters illegally is shown by imaginary lines.

  In the present embodiment, when the distal end of the device such as the endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the distal end is moved while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the distal end of the endoscope. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to repel the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from moving further.

  Here, in the case where the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed and enters the inside, the fraud cannot be prevented as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, control is performed so as to sound an alarm when the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Fraudulent activity can be detected early.

  Further, when the button-type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state where the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. (See FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be minimized, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

  The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball preventing member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball preventing member 68 on the side provided on the game board 13 is broken or bent due to long-term use, Can be exchanged. As a result, as compared with a case where the replacement member of the return ball preventing member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it is possible to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement, and it is possible to eliminate the trouble of searching for a storage location forgotten. The effect described above can be obtained. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided) may be used.

  In addition, whether or not the above-described effect of preventing the illegal action is exhibited when the return ball preventing member 68 is broken or bent and replaced is determined by the degree of breakage of the return ball preventing member 68. However, the perpetrators of the wrongdoing cannot know whether or not the exchange has been performed, and even if they have been replaced, the degree of damage cannot be understood. it can.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully opened position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is configured in an embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the rear end outer edge in comparison with the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, A restricting portion 2888 projecting rearward from the extending end of the flange portion 2887. The loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the difference in the back cover 2886, and has the same components as the loose fitting device 880 in other portions. .

  The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single regulating portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

  FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . 193 and FIG. 194 illustrate an operation example of the petal operation device 2800 in a time series, and FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 194 (a), FIG. 193 (b), and FIG. State is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and a pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a pair of screw insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are provided on opposite sides with the screw insertion portion 803H as a center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

  The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined at about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating section 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

  If the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise in front view) while the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

  At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture illustrated in FIG. 194A (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815). Thus, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture inclined with respect to the center slit 814 and both side slits 815. The posture of the petals 802 changes as much as possible.

  As described above, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received by the change in the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

  That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the sliding member 2820 has only a small width sliding rib 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed, and the sliding member 2820 has the slits 814 and 815. Can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction.

  On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a against the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T against the inner inner wall against the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the width of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both-side slit 815, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

  Accordingly, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the sliding member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance against the movement of the slits 814 and 815 of the sliding member 2820 in the longitudinal direction. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the oil damper 805 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture.

  In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by breaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

  FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) has continued rotating in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanding position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) to the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during the expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

  FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 show the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position in chronological order.

  In FIG. 196 (a), from the state shown in FIG. 195, the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 becomes the normal posture. Will be returned.

  Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) is greater than the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830. The rotation operation of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petals 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petals 802 to the gathering position.

  Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If so, contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petals 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

  In addition, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that the petals 802 slightly change their posture even when they come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the gathering position or the fully opened position, or at the fully opened positions. By setting the position where the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be passed, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

  Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petals 802 are expanded, the petals 802 are used as a mark as to whether the petal passes through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the difference in the distance, it is possible to cause a difference between the rotation of the petal 802 expanded to the maximum and the rotation of the petal 802 performed halfway.

  Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the pattern can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

  Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be provided at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

  At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing the posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be transmitted to the player, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (while flickering) while causing a slight change in posture by contacting the regulating portion 2888. .

  In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulating portion 2888 is the tip position. However, if the abutment position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the position of the petal 802 when it changes its posture is changed. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is configured to be fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes posture can be changed in a plurality of types.

  Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates and rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position is described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment is described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 independently rotates according to the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partial enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 illustrate, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 198 (a). In FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotating plate 830 are shown by imaginary lines.

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. The rotation of the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 together with the rotation exceeds the resistance to be applied is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, and the description is omitted here.

  In addition, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

  Here, when rotating the rotating plate 830 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 is With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional recesses 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

  That is, the difference between the slit member 3810 and the slit member 810 is that the width of the central slit 814 is increased in the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 on the clockwise side in front view. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view, both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view. Of the wall extending along the radial direction of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a that is recessed so as to widen the width in the short direction and the two side slits 815 that are arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view. And a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view so as to widen the width of the slits 815 in the lateral direction.

  The clockwise concave portion 3815a is disposed to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from the position opposed to the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (the lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed.

  The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is positioned on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 (the lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed continuously.

  The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth greater than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the central concave portion 3814a.

  The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts rotating clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move downward in FIG. 198 (a) (the right end of the slide rib 803a moves clockwise). (See FIG. 198 (b)).

  Accordingly, the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

  When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). With reference to FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 199 (b), it rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the portion that first comes into contact with 3810 as a fulcrum.

  Since the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recess 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recess 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is used. Abutment between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise-side recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

  Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a clockwise depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A surrounding recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

  Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. . Accordingly, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwing portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) reach a posture in which the posture is orthogonal to the front view. When the slide rib 803a on the center in the radial direction accommodated in the slits 815 on the clockwise side abuts against the wall of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be viewed from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

  That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)), the rotation plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in front view, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated. The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is reached, the rotation of the rotating plate 830 causes the slit member 3810 to rotate along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction. And the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

  This allows the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation involved in rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 194 (b)). )), The flat member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates along with the slit member 3810). Rotational operation) is interposed (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

  On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation associated with rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 ( a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)). In other words, the rotation operation (rotational operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expanding operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) in a front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 matching the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are formed. The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position from the position of the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 195 (a)) during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then move to the gathering position. Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the second state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, in the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been described in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. In addition, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other components will be described with some supplementary explanations.

  The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed to face the protection lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left and right center positions. The first through hole 8326a and the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 has an oblong rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b formed along the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in front view. And a through hole 8326c.

  The through holes 8326a to 8326c are provided for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the drinking water described above and the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having: The coin-shaped foreign object may be used, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or the tilting device 310 and the upper frame may be meaningless by the player of interest. It may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330.

  Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the possibility of foreign matter being inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) disposed at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the more easily the position is shifted (deformed) right and left near the front end. Note that the positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation utilizing rattling caused by the sum of design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation).

  For this reason, in the case where the design is made such that the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a one-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right (for example, left), the gap V13 formed on the other (for example, right) becomes an upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. And a gap V13 having a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the gaps V1 and V2.

  That is, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be equal to or less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the right and left, a coin-shaped foreign matter may be inserted.

  Further, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also adjusted by the play near the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 14B). The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load facing the rear side and displacing (deforming), so that a coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

  In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted in the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin Foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 202 (a) and FIG. 202 (b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured so as to be narrowed inward toward the left and right toward the center in the vertical direction, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) projects outward from above the constriction of the case main body 311. , A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter the lower frame member 8320.

  If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may hinder the light emission effect.

  In the first place, if the coin-shaped foreign matter is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed with the operation device 8300, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable that the operation device 300 be disassembled as soon as it is detected. However, in a state where the through-hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

  FIG. 203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. FIG. 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a bottom view of the operation device 8300. FIG. It is sectional drawing of operation device 8300 in CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

  The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the left-right direction as the center in the left-right direction of the vibration device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the (vibration device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58)). You. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right central positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

  The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is disposed below the upper surface of the extension 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 rides on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (to the left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state). A slope D81 that is inclined downward toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310 by being curved toward the front, and a gradient D82 that is downwardly inclined toward the front side when the tilting device 310 is tilted, Along the first through-hole 8326a, the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed along the first through hole 8326a (see FIG. 201).

  This makes it possible to minimize the required size of the first through hole 8326a while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, thereby maintaining the design flexibility of the lower frame member 8320. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be more easily ensured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded right and left.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter. The size of the target object is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

  The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 continuously provided on the left, right, up and down of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (members that have been mirror-finished). Is fixed), so that the light that has passed through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

  With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, since the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that reduces the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

  When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through-hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is equal to the coin-shaped amount. Is weaker than when no foreign matter is present (a coin-like foreign matter is shadowed). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the light amount and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as clues. The possibility of remaining on the member 8320 can be reduced. Note that this effect is not limited to the case where it is visually recognized through the first through hole 8326a, and the same applies to the case where it is visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

  The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the left and right widths of the second through hole 8326 are set to about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set to a size capable of discharging the largest coin-like foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin). Is formed with a width in the normal direction of about 2 [mm].

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged near the left and right centers of the bottom plate 321, the second through holes 8326 b can be easily formed even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate 321. Thus, coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed.

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used for discharging outward beforehand.

  The third through hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and allows the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 to move. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed as it stands (posture).

  That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

  When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c only by removing the cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 92). The cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws through which the fastening portions 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 are inserted in the front-rear direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation part 15a is formed, the cover cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be reduced.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

  Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203B). In each of the above embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even in the unlikely event that a coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which the coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be promptly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

  Thus, even if a normal operation is not performed due to the coin-shaped foreign matter entering the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state. However, the board support apparatus 600 in the fourteenth embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinal displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut against it. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is Is shown in a closed state. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmitting device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmitting device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 disposed so as to be vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 which is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12; A longitudinally-displaceable member 2652, which is disposed so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertically-displaceable member 2651 and is supported to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinally-displaceable member 2652, A portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two positions in the front and back, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and is in contact with the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to be in front of the front and rear displacement member 2652. And an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward the urging member.

  The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is located at a position where a slight gap is provided between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

  The longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)), and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and being pushed backward. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

  Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downward toward the distal end is formed at the rear distal end of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position to a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. , A continuous slope.

  The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a lower position at a position in front of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at an upper position at a position behind the longitudinal displacement member 2652. Is set.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

  Thereby, the load which the claw member 640 after rotation applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 abuts on the hanging back plate portion 621d of the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

  Here, the specifications required for the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the board against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is used as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of selection of the operator and the workability can be improved.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are crawled above the inverted cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated by the heated piano wire. Although the case where the burnout is detected by the piano wire and the early detection of the fraud has been described, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment has a configuration in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with the heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

  FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detecting device 2280. FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to a tensile shape (stored shape) by application of heat. Is done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross section at a front / rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

  The fraud detection device 2280 has a main body box portion 2281 which is formed in a box shape with the back side and the lower surface side open and is stacked above the inverted cup portion 2178, and a rear side opening portion which covers the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. And a back cover member 2282 attached from the main body, and a space is formed between the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

  The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner, and extends from the lower corner to abut on the left surface of the wall 2178a of the inverted cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening upward from the lower corner. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a protruding portion 2285 protruding upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a concave portion provided on the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 from the rear side. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and one end projecting to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending to the right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess formed from the back side, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286. Accessible The second conductive portion 2287 formed as described above, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 is supported by the protruding portion 2285. And a shape memory spring 2288 disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

  The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one ends of separate wirings are respectively connected to portions protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other ends of the wirings are connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 come into contact and become conductive (see FIG. 205 (b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and control is performed so that an error signal is output with the disconnection being an input.

  When the error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. The game is controlled so that it is impossible to play the game.

  Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

  The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire can be used as it is to cover the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

  According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and proceeds further, is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 disposed at the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

  The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has a characteristic of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the transformation temperature of the shape memory spring 2288 is set to a temperature (about 80 °) about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. .

  Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to a transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2286 are connected. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of wrongdoing can be achieved.

  An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in a vertically long shape and drilled in the front-rear direction. Overhang. When the temperature returns to the low-temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator presses down the extending portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed in a curved shape to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both surfaces. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upwardly concave shape formed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrating the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206 (d) is a light guide schematically showing the downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) shows an upward concave portion 254 recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) provided on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in accordance with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

  Although concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is determined for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

  That is, a region CCVIb disposed above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc disposed above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a lower and inner lens member 530 based on the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b is arranged such that flat surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the upper side and the rear side. Is formed.

  Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. Difficult to reflect in the left and right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and in a posture in which curved surfaces are disposed on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the area CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and on the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and having a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the area CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543e has a hot press in a posture in which flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in a region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle with respect to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approximately (1 mm conical shape). Therefore, light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

  According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), light travels in the direction of collecting light toward the inner lens member 530, and travels in the direction of spreading light toward the outer lens member 550. Can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof. The effect can be improved.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 15 is formed flat is described. However, in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. Thereby, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower plate unit 6400 is improved. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207 will be described such that the near side of the drawing is the front (front) side and the far side of the drawing is the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 10300 in which a state in which the oscillating member 10310 is arranged in the upward position in FIG. 207 and a front surface device arranged below the operation device 10300. A lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, a horizontal rendering device 6700 that covers the left and right portions of the front frame 10014, and mainly performs a luminous effect, and covers an upper portion of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the luminous effect and And an effect device 6500 for performing sound effects.

  Note that the above-described glass unit 16 is disposed in an area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16 according to each of the above. This is the same as the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawing, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the rear side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 illustrates the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). It is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be viewed from the opening where the glass unit 16 is provided.

  FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 illustrates a direction view (a radial direction of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300. You.

  The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 that are formed in a thin plate shape and have flexibility enough to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the degree of the recess toward the rear side increases as approaching the left and right center, and the center of the housing recess 17a and the operation device It is arranged so that the left and right centers of 10300 coincide.

  The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves to the rear side as it approaches the center in the left and right direction. In other words, the closer the fitting position is to the left and right center, the more the front frame 10014 moves toward the main body frame (metal main body 10014a).

  Therefore, at the left and right center positions where the amount of load transmission during the operation of the operation device 10300 is likely to be large, the vertical position of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-back position from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

  On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions left and right away from the center) where the amount of load transmitted when operating the operation device 10300 is likely to be small, even if the front-back position from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position is long, the operation is not performed. There is no hindrance to the effect of suppressing the displacement of the device 10300 in the vertical direction, and a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body 10014a by arranging the fitting position in this way. A wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, and the like can be secured.

  FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 illustrates a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11 around the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19.

  The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion that is pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Since the components to be newly described are respectively provided on the front frame 10014, the following description will be focused on the front frame 10014.

  FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that FIGS. 211 and 212 illustrate a state where the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 have been removed from the front frame 10014.

  The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member forming a skeleton, includes a metal main body 10014a integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are connected to the metal main body 10014a. Is fixed. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are provided with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal body 10014a side (back side), and the metal body 10014a has a fastening portion. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) into the through hole from the rear side of the metal main body 10014a, screwing it into the fastening portion, and tightening.

  As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held in a state of being sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear of the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, a configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be sequentially described.

  FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. 213 and 214, the illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a, is shown in a direction from the back side, and is provided with insertion holes 6801R and 6801L for easy understanding. Assembling direction lines connecting the fastening points are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When assembling the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 is formed in a plate shape protruding from the front side of the front frame 10014 in a plate shape. The contact is made so as to ride on the upper surface of the protrusion T10.

  Below the operation device 10300, a bottom member De fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is provided. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting concave part De1 (see FIG. 212) formed to open to the front side, and a concave part De2 that is open on the opposite side (lower side) and the rear side of the inner case member 10330 side. Prepare.

  The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear, the bottom of which is open. The recessed portion De2 is formed in a size that can be fitted to the plate-shaped protrusion T10. By fitting with the part De2, the positioning of the operation device 10300 with respect to the front frame 10014 can be performed. In addition, since the plate-shaped protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-shaped protrusion T10. Note that the fitting here may be any condition as long as the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-shaped protrusion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of the gap.

  At the tip of the plate-shaped projection T10, a pair of left and right left and right columns is formed to project in the form of a thin column, and a fastening screw is formed at an intermediate position between the pair of columnar projections. A female screw hole is formed.

  The pair of columnar projecting portions is inserted into a recess formed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 to align the plate-shaped convex portion T10 with the bottom member De. The fastening screw to be screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion De2, and by tightening the fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

  As described above, while the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-shaped protrusion T10, the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215 (a)) supports the plate-shaped support. The portion 6426 is disposed above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. That is, the front half portion of the bottom member De is vertically opposed to the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed to be able to contact the resin member 6427.

  Here, the condition that the contact is possible is not limited in any way. For example, a mode in which the operating device 10300 is normally in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De are normally separated while a load is applied to the operating device 10300, The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward by executing a vibration effect or the like.

  After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, a fastening screw inserted from the rear side is fastened to the front frame 10014, whereby the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014.

  That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is covered with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed to be able to screw fastening screws, and one of the fastening portions 10333. And a metal plate portion 10334 which is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and which can receive a compressive force with fastening and fixing.

  The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to abut on an edge of an insertion hole H10a formed with a diameter that allows a fastening screw to be inserted into the metal main body 10014a. On the front side of the metal main body 10014a, an intermediate plate made of a hard resin is provided, but a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body 10014a.

  Here, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger around the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 where the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged, as compared with the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of this through-hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

  Accordingly, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a by fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main portion 10014a can be electrically connected to each other, they can have the same role as a so-called ground wire. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be secured.

  Further, by disposing the metal plate portion 10334 therebetween, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a function of a washer. Thereby, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal main body 10014a.

  Note that the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to the present embodiment, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through-hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the pawls are formed to be displaced back and forth, a function of a spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

  The places where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts required for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom of design on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

  On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the rear side is a problem because the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300 in the sinking direction (downward). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is employed in which the fastening position is concentrated on the back side and the sinking displacement on the front side of the operation device 10300 is suppressed. This will be described below in order.

  First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting concave portion De1 formed on the lower front side fits with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). Thereby, the vertical movement of the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and the sinking displacement is suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a plate-like portion on the rear side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the rear side of the swing operation member 10310.

  That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-shaped protrusion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half, a plurality of partial protrusions 10321d that further project from the plate-like protrusion 10321c, Mainly equipped.

  Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-shaped overhang 10322c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half. Note that the right front cover 10322 has no portion corresponding to the partial overhang 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-like overhang 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

  The plate-like overhangs 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhang 10321d are configured to be inserted and fitted into the housing recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodation recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge overhang 10017b whose lower edge overhangs the left and right sides of the accommodation recess 17a with a substantially equal overhang width, and a left and right of the accommodation recess 17a. At a position slightly longer than the thickness of the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhang 10017b on both sides, the lower edge overhang 10017b is opposed to the lower edge overhang 10017b so as to overhang the front side. A plurality of opposed overhanging portions 10017c forming a groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b, and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the upper side of which is drilled in the front-rear direction with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b as a long hole at the surface position. And an escape hole 10017e drilled in the front-rear direction at a position aligned with the right opposing overhang 10017c.

  When assembling the operating device 10300 into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the groove between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposed overhang 10017c, and a plurality of partial overhangs 10321d are provided. Are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, whereby the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a.

  In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c into the groove between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposed overhang 10017c. Is suppressed.

  In addition, the plurality of partial overhangs 10321d are inserted (fitted) into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with the housing recess 17a. It is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Further, the housing concave portion 17a is formed in an arch shape that is open on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are abutted and housed inside the arch, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

  With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the displacement of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310. (Return to the original position early).

  Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, the player mainly operates with his left hand. In a general game posture (a posture facing the pachinko machine 10010), the player moves the left and right center of the pachinko machine 10010. In operating the operation device 10300 to be arranged, the left hand is extended diagonally to the front right, so that the load at the time of the operation rarely has a left-right component.

  Therefore, since a load in the left-right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as a load applied in the rear direction, the operation device 10300 may be displaced rearward and left-right.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are disposed therebetween. The restoring force of the possible deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 occurs in the left and right direction and the front and rear direction in the direction of returning the operation device 10300 to the original position. Accordingly, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be quickly restored.

  From the above configurations, displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the operation device 10300 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a can be suppressed.

  The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which a later-described fixed assembly 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembling part 6802 can be disposed at a position protruding outward from the plate-shaped protruding part 10321c.

  Next, the surroundings of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207.

  FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment). FIG. 215 (b), FIG. 216 (a) and FIG. 216 (b) , The state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position (the depressed position in the present embodiment) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a) and FIG. 215 (b), the operating device 10300 includes a lever support shaft in which a lever member 10340 that supports the swing operation member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported at 10331d1. Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is displaced by the movement of the shaft support bar 10363 arranged on an arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1, and is centered on the shaft support bar 10363. It is possible to displace in a mode in which the displacement in the rotation direction is combined, and the displacement is generated by the operation of the player.

  That is, by gripping the swing operation member 10310 arranged at the upward position and applying a load rearward, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in a manner of rotational displacement around the shaft support rod 10363. (Push operation).

  Also, by gripping the swing operation member 10310 arranged at the upward position and applying a load downward toward the near side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. Can be operated (press operation).

  When the swing operation member 10310 is located at the downward position, the operation of the posture correcting device 10312 (the operation of applying a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b) causes the swing operation. The posture in which the member 10310 is pushed rearward with respect to the lever member 10340 (a backward posture, a posture in which the member 10310 is backwardly moved from the initial position by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340). Therefore, since the angle of the posture change of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340 can be suppressed. .

  In addition, when an operation (push operation) of pressing the lens member 10317 displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 in a state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position is performed, the swing at the time of the operation is performed. The operating member 10310 is rotated and displaced about the shaft support rod 10363 and displaced in a manner of falling forward, so that the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 can be changed to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216 (b)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the load for operation can be applied to the swing operation member 10310 from a plurality of directions, and if the load is different, the form of displacement of the swing operation member 10310 is also different. It can be configured differently.

  The lever member 10340 is driven to rotate about a lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thus, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pressed down and is arranged at the downward position, the rotation of the lever member 10340 is controlled by the drive motor, so that the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position.

  A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is provided at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. It is configured to be transmitted.

  The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to and separate from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical bobbin member around which a copper wire is wound (located on the lever member 10340 side). And a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are coaxially arranged and are disc-shaped plates. And a pressing member (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder has a polarity that changes in the axial direction.

  The vibration device 10366 is configured to be able to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

  Accordingly, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by maximizing the energy of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, and the effect of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

  Next, details of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300.

  As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are disposed behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have outer ends (ends opposite to the swing operation member 10310) that are curved, and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is disposed on the swing operation member 10310 side. You. Accordingly, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swinging operation member 10310 can be secured, and the swinging operation member 10310 can be held by a player. Space for inserting a finger can be secured.

  In addition, since the curvature of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310, the designability can be improved, and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be caused separately in the whole. Thus, the allowable width of the deformation of the curved portion can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include insertion holes 6801R and 6801L that are drilled in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to both right and left ends of the accommodation recess 17a can be inserted. A fixing assembly 6802 for fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 inseparably from the inner case member 10330 by fastening screws.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a by insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the places farthest from the load (mainly a load along a plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and orthogonal to the left-right direction) applied to the operation device 10300, and the load is difficult to be transmitted. The loosening of the fastening screw that is inserted through the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a can be suppressed.

  The fixed assembling part 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the formation position of the fixed assembling part 6802 is at the center in the left-right direction of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 This is a position shifted to the right from a position where the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c are located on the rearmost side). That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed to the right beyond the left and right center, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left and right center. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

  In the present embodiment, since the rear boundary of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is displaced from the center in the left-right direction, one member (book part) is provided at the central portion (the portion located at the rearmost side) of the housing recess 17a. In the embodiment, since the positioning with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), the assembly can be made easier as compared with the case where the positioning is performed by both members.

  Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembling part 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when the operation device 10300 is operated. Here, on the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the swing operation member 10310 as a portion operated by the player can be arranged in close proximity (particularly in the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Because there is a point, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may be loosened due to the transmission of the load when the operation device 10300 is operated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the fixed assembling part 6802 to be shifted left and right from the left and right center where the load at the time of operation is maximum, the transmitted load is reduced as compared with the load at the time of operation. As a result, the loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly 6802 can be suppressed.

  As described above, by shifting the fixed assembling part 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and similarly shifting the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the assembling efficiency can be improved and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be prevented. It can be made hard to occur.

  Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the fixed assembling portion 6802. That is, in the fixed assembling part 6802, the fastening screw inserted into the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

  However, with respect to the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembling portion 6802 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 220) and the upper plate portion thereof Is fixed only when the fixed assembling portion 6802 is sandwiched from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the number of fastening portions formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.

  Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the front left cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with many fastening portions, the rigidity of the fastening screws makes the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 difficult to bend and may be easily broken.

  On the other hand, in order to make it easy to bend while maintaining the fastening portion, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be thinned, but in this case, the durability is reduced or cheating is caused. Or there is a risk of

  On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening portions as in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

  219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operation device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operation device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be disassembled to the left and right in an integrated state with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fixed to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point in the front-rear direction (adjustable slots 10323a, 10324a). Is done.

  Therefore, before the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the front left cover 10321 is relatively movable with respect to the left cover member 10323, and the front right cover 10322 is relatively movable with respect to the right cover member 10324. It is possible to easily adjust the position where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. This will be described below.

  The operation device 10300 is disposed on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape along the curved surfaces of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. A left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right.

  The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are provided with adjusting slots 10323a and 10324a, respectively, which are formed in the outer upper end portion and formed in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

  The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction. Even when the shapes vary, the left and right positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are also fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces facing in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is fitted rightward from the end face of the right front cover 10322 that comes into contact with the left front cover 10321, and the right front cover 10322 is prevented by the fitting concave portion 10322a from slipping back and forth. Wall member 10322b attached in a manner, and in a state where the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the wall is stopped by the left end cover 10321 being stopped from moving to the left. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

  With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is loaded from the posture correcting device 10312 (see FIG. 215)). Is a place that repeatedly receives). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to shifting from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After being fastened and fixed, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

  Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, when correcting the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left cover member 10323 and the It becomes necessary to make a correction by loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shifting the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.

  In addition, when the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully fastened to the inner case member 10330 and the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are determined by forcibly fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in anticipation of this, After the front right cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure), the return of the work procedure of fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream of the assembly procedure) occurs. However, the operation itself becomes complicated, which is not preferable in terms of simplification (simplification) of the operation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be relatively moved with respect to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. After being fastened and fixed to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembly operation can be simplified.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 include shielding portions 6803L and 6803R, respectively, in which the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the front edge are arranged to face each other. When the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing a gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), the piano wire enters the gap and enters the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against an illegal act or a mischievous act of pouring a liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in the present embodiment, the clearance is set to 0.3 mm).

  On the other hand, when the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is shifted due to the influence of a load (shock) at the time of operation and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are operated when the operation device 10300 is operated. 6803L and 6803R may rub against each other to generate resin shavings. Resin shavings have little effect when small, but if a large amount of clogging occurs in the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by a so-called photocoupler type, shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is. For this reason, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be employed is limited.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembling portion 6802 as the fastening portion of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is located at the center in the left and right direction (where the load during operation and the load during operation are maximized). Since it is arranged at a position left and right away from the, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to prevent the loosening of the fastening screw.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R and the guide portion 10344a, to prevent generation of resin shavings, and to suppress erroneous detection. In the present embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is provided on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

  The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swing operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

  Then, when the pushing operation in the backward direction is performed on the swing operation member 10310, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC and the metal plate MB, the durability can be improved as compared with the case where a load is applied.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, and a fan-shaped front view below the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R. And lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R formed continuously as the plate portions.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved surface (that is, a lever support shaft 10331d1 (FIG. 215) in which the back surface thereof can abut on the upper curved surface portion of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. (See FIG. 2), and a surface having a center angle of about 90 degrees centered at about 90 °).

  Each of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R includes a protruding interference portion 6805a that protrudes from the rear surface to the rear surface. The protruding interference portion 6805a is disposed slightly inside the inner edges Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and is a front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to protrude more toward the back side.

  Accordingly, in a state where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively assembled (see FIG. 220), the protruding interference portion 6805a controls the displacement to the left and right outside to the inside edge. Regulated to Rm1. Therefore, since the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being disassembled in a manner in which they are separated from each other.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, spread outward in a front view, and bend toward the front side at the spread front ends. Bending portions 6806L and 6806R are provided.

  The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L that are formed at the right end thereof so that fastening screws can be screwed therein and are disposed in a plurality of vertical directions. The right front cover 10322 includes insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, and 6808R that are provided at the left end and are vertically arranged at a plurality of positions and through which fastening screws can be inserted.

  The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening portions and the insertion holes dispersedly arranged in the vertical direction (the direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). This makes it possible to disperse the load and impact associated with the operation of the operation device 10300 to the respective fastening portions, and to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws.

  Further, since a position shift can be suppressed at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion which is easily recognized by the player (particularly, the design portion which can be easily viewed in front view) The performance of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R (see FIG. 207) can be prevented from deteriorating. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

  The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a formed in the left and right direction is inserted in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and is fixed with the fastening screw sandwiching the inner case member 10330. . It should be noted that, instead of the so-called “co-fastening” mode, the distal end of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner to abut on the left surface of the plate portion where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the fastening load does not generate a compressive load on the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

  In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to a load when operating the operation device 10300, the operation of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent within the above-described gap. Therefore, when a small displacement that can occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, it is possible to avoid the displacement of the fixed assembly 6802 in the same manner.

  In addition, the extension length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened, and a compressive load may be applied to a portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled at the time of fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, it is possible to avoid the loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly 6802.

  The fastening portion 6807L is a portion where a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole H23b formed in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. With the fastening screws, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In the present embodiment, the places where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening places by the fastening portions 6807L and the insertion holes H23b.

  The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed to be screwable along the left-right direction at a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330. The right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by inserting the fastening screw. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only to the fastening portion T23b and the fastening portion by the insertion hole 6807R.

  The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by fastening a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, the places where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening places by the fastening portions 6808L and the insertion holes 6808R.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 face each other. It is configured differently. Accordingly, in assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at one time, thereby facilitating the assembling work. The assembling procedure will be described below.

  First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off the inner case member 10330. be able to.

  In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing in such a manner that a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

  Next, when the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and similarly fastened and fixed at one place, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. it can.

  Thereafter, although there is no designation in the order, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing and fastening the fastening screws in the fixing assembly 6802. Further, by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R to fasten and fix, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

  In this way, by forming a place where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, compared to a case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled only in the fastening mode of fastening and fixing to the inner case member 10330, respectively. The number of fastening locations can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening operation can be improved as compared with the case where the insertion direction of the fastening screw is bidirectional.

  The screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. In the operation device 10300, since the operation direction of each operation unit is a direction along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the same as that of each operation unit of the operation device 10300. This is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of. That is, when a load or impact occurs during the operation in the operation direction, no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw is generated. Thus, it is possible to suppress the loosening of the fastening screw due to a load or an impact at the time of operating the operation device 10300.

  In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation portions (including a portion that operates by operation; for example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, and the like), but all the operation portions include levers. Since it is designed to operate in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left and right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

  On the other hand, when the operation part does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, when there is an operation part that performs a pressing operation in a diagonally right and left direction), each operation part A direction found as the balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or may be set for an operation portion where operation instructions are frequently performed (operation instructions are rarely generated). It is also possible to set the direction of fastening (ignoring the operation part that only performs).

  FIG. 223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 form a gap for disposing the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the part where the fitting recess 10322a is formed and the part where the fitting concave part 10322a is formed, the contact is made up and down on a plurality of surfaces opposed to each other.

  In the contacting part, a plate-like part extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlap portion 6803La extending rightward along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

  Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, displacement of the shielding plate portion 6803R downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L is restricted. This can prevent a gap from being formed between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and can suppress the passage of the liquid between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

  In this embodiment, the inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is housed, and the lever member 10340 are driven. The liquid can be prevented from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor, or an electric system (such as a substrate) for driving the drive motor.

  In addition, while the cuts between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right centers of the swing operation member 10310, the cuts (coupling surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same plane as the left and right center positions of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the cut between the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is disposed on the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the portion protruding leftward from the inner case member 10330). Correspondence, see FIG. 218), even when the lower part between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L is wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. The drive motor can be prevented from getting wet.

  Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlap portion 6805Lb extending rightward along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower portion 6805Lb supports the lower plate portion 6805R from behind, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

  The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the lower plate It may flow between the main body box portions 6421 of the forming member 6420, flow toward the through-hole 6412, or flow along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the thousand boxes.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharger 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of liquid by sandwiching the through hole 6412 without a gap. As in the embodiment, by suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid hangs on the player or wets a thousand boxes. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are streaked in a manner of being pushed out from the front side to the back side. Is provided. The streak portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface from the formation mode.

  The streak portion D23 has a role as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. That is, compared with the case of forming a thin plate, the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the streak portion D23 is maintained (or reduced) while the rigidity in the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is increased. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as examples.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and have a role as a portion that fills the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact at the time of operation in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

  That is, when operating the operation device 10300, a gap may be generated between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are vertically extended (elastically deformed or bent), so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a, and to provide a gap. Can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load at the time of operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing the deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made large (because the rigidity is made large), it is possible to suppress occurrence of vibration at the time of shape return or deformation of the shape more than necessary. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for one purpose to take measures against a problem that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

  Since the streak portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, when a downward load is applied at the center, the left and right sides withstand upward (pulling force is generated). . That is, even if a downward load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned to an early stage.

  On the other hand, even if a load is generated in a direction orthogonal to the streak portion D <b> 23, the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side is generated by the deformation allowed due to the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

  Each of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R includes an end streak portion D24 formed in a streak shape so as to be pushed out from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface from the formation mode.

  The end streak portion D24 mainly includes a left and right streak portion D24a formed on the left and right sides and a center streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and each is formed as a measure against loads in different directions.

  The left and right streak portions D24a are streaks arranged above the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and are formed to have a shape that inclines downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operation load.

  In addition, the inclination angle of the right and left muscle portions D24a is formed stepwise to be larger in the left and right sides than in the left and right central sides, as compared with the one arranged in the left and right center sides. That is, the streaks extend in a plurality of directions. Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated.

  In addition, the width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the one arranged on the left and right sides than in the center arranged on the left and right sides. In other words, the deformation width allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced, and the resistance is increased, as the side (the left and right sides) in which the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction corresponds to a large force has a shorter width. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction as the direction in which the load during the operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is shaken) is large.

  On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion arranged from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portion on the front side) to a lower side, and has a shape that rises and inclines toward the back side. Formed from This rising inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when (the inner case member 10330 of) the operation device 10300 falls forward.

  In other words, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is improved in the direction of the central streak portion D24b by the central streak portion D24b, so that the load at the time of the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (inside of the operation device 10300). The resistance to the case member 10330) from falling forward can be improved.

  The central streak portion D24b is formed of a total of seven lines, one at the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central streak portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right central sides toward the rear side. Accordingly, even when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330) is displaced forward by the load at the time of the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the displacement in the left and right direction is generated, the displacement is not affected. The resistance to the displacement (the resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

  The central streak portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right streak portions D24a. Thereby, especially in the connection curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the left-right direction) is smaller than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the vertical direction). It becomes large bending.

  Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212), and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (the position of the lower edge). When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are displaced downward, the upper and lower middle portions and the upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R bend in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are bent. The load (stress) applied to the substrate can be released (stress concentration can be avoided).

  Even in the case of such bending deformation, the lower edge overhanging portions are formed so that the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. The left front cover 10321 is supported between the front projection 10017b and the opposed projection 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214). In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to be formed between the right front cover 10322 and the accommodation recess 17a.

  Further, since the bending easiness of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is made different depending on the direction, the vibration (the V-shaped design member) of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 or the load generated by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be obtained. 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed according to the direction of vibration or load.

  In other words, vibration along the vertical direction and the operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration and operation in the horizontal direction A load (for example, a load generated when a hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when the ball is transferred from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 or the lower plate 50. Can be difficult. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the vibration or load from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 or the lower plate 50 even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swing operation member 10310, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. it can.

  Further, the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c formed on the upper edge thereof are elongated left and right. It is inserted between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposite overhang 10017c (see FIG. 214).

  Here, in the case where the shapes of the plate-shaped overhang portions 10321c and 10322c are compared with the shapes of the lower edge overhang portion 10017b and the opposed overhang portion 10017c, the vicinity of the left and right end portions is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the front upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrude from the front side of the housing recess 17a), the bending of the plate-like projections 10321c and 10322c is loosened (the left and right ends are displaced to the rear side). It is preferable that a deformation error can be dealt with.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the streaks D23 are formed vertically on the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, the rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R in the left-right direction is compared with the rigidity in the up-down direction. Lower. Therefore, when deforming the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c to the side where the curve becomes loose, the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R can assist the deformation of the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c. In addition, it is possible to increase the deformation width of the plate-shaped overhang portions 10321c and 10322c. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

  As described above, the streak portion D23 does not improve (weaken) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the forming direction (left-right direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

  From these facts, the streak portion D23 causes a problem that may occur when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (the same as when assembling the operation device 10300; see FIG. 213) and a problem that may occur when operating the operation device 10300. And both.

  Returning to FIG. In the present embodiment, a flat flat plate portion (a plate-like portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) along the metal main portion 10014a is provided on the lower left front portion of the metal main portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. And a plate-like upper plate portion extending toward the front side so as to be bent at an upper end portion configured to be inclined downward toward the right of the upper portion of the flat plate portion. A back covering portion 10014b formed of a resin material in an aspect is provided. That is, the rear covering portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane orthogonal to a straight line along the arrow LR.

  The back covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines an upper limit position and a right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is abutted (connected) at its rear end with the flat plate portion, and is abutted (connected) with the upper plate portion at its right end. In the region (space) formed on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back covering portion 10014b face each other, spheres, so-called foul spheres and the like that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 are stored. Will be. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

  FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower plate unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle when viewed from below.

  As shown in FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a so as to cover the front side of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or FIG. 212). A base member 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted to the overlying base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device attached to the overlying base member 6410 from below, A ball discharge device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420, and one that is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner that the lower plate forming member 6420 can be prevented from coming off from the rear side at the left end of the covering base member 6410. The intermediate holding member 6440 fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side), A V-shaped design member 6450 formed from disposed on a side upper resin material viewed from the front V-shaped, mainly comprises.

  The covering base member 6410 includes a main body 6411 formed in a substantially box shape having a lower bottom surface formed in a substantially planar shape and an open back surface and an upper surface, and a slight skeleton portion in the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through-hole 6412 formed so as to pass through, a projecting shape portion 6413 projecting downward from the lower surface of the main body 6411 at the center in the left-right direction of the main body 6411 with reference to the through-hole 6412; On the back side of the provided shape portion 6413, there is mainly provided a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protruded shape portion 6413 is substantially equal to other portions of the main body portion 6411.

  By forming the recessed portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the projecting portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the projecting portion 6413. Can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a position where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and will be described later in detail.

  The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the size of the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 described later, and is formed much larger than the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball release lever 52.

  By forming the through-hole 6412 large in advance in this way, the ball discharging speed from the lower plate 50 can be adjusted to the gaming performance realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. Can be made to correspond to the discharging speed of the ball.

  That is, the discharging speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as the size of the bottom opening 6432, the discharging speed of the ball is reduced. It cannot be larger. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 ( By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430), the discharging speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the covering base member 6410. In other words, the ball discharge speed (discharge mode) can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 that is visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

  The demand for changing the ball discharge speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a mode in which it is necessary to transfer payout balls to a thousand boxes, or in a mode in which it is not necessary to transfer payout balls to a thousand boxes (so-called “personal”). Case).

  If it is necessary to transfer the dispensed balls to a thousand boxes, if the balls are discharged at a high speed, there is a possibility that the balls will overflow from the thousand boxes, so the discharge of the balls will be slower than the predetermined speed It is desirable to be done.

  In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison between the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a spherical shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of the number of balls ejected simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

  On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the dispensed balls to the 1000 boxes, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the 1000 boxes, and the upper limit of the desired ball discharging speed greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the paid-out balls flow into the automatic counters provided in each of the pachinko machines 10010, and therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, the balls are incorporated in the automatic counter. The operating speed of the ball sink is exemplified.

  As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but the strength of the main body 6411 may be reduced. There is. In particular, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 However, there is a concern that the load may be limited to a level that can withstand the load during operation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner to compensate for the reduction in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the line shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as the fastening direction, with the covering base member 6410 sandwiched from above and below. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Accordingly, a portion around the through hole 6412 (for example, a left and right frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

  The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 may be designed such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are in contact with each other before the fastening of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 (the state where the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are arranged). (Refer to FIG. 233.) Although a gap is formed before the fastening, a design mode in which the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied may be used.

  Further, the portion to be pressed need not be the entire periphery of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, particularly in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side near the protruding shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (a long plate portion disposed behind the through hole 6412) that may receive an impact each time it is opened and closed. Since a large load is likely to be generated, it is preferable to adopt a design mode of pressing down.

  Since the edge of the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this manner, the strength of the edge of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently ensured. The bottom surface opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to this. That is, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

  The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main box portion 6421 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface, an outlet 6422 vertically opened on the bottom surface of the main box portion 6421, and a main box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 protruding from the back side of the bottom surface of the 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from below, and a ball discharging device 6430 protruding downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 to which fastening screws are fastened, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge of the outlet 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421 It mainly includes a plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end of the plate member, and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the plate-like support portion 6426.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position at the front end of the lower plate 50 and at the right end. The upper surface of the bottom of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball that has flowed into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down to the discharge port 6422. Since the outlet 6422 is provided on the front side near the player, even if the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 where a load from the operation device 10300 is likely to be generated. However, details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different lengths at the left and right positions, which correspond to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially planar shape while the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward toward the right, the lower plate 50 has a lower bottom upper surface (through hole). In order to make the L-shaped plate portion 6423 project toward the right side, the length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened in the rightward direction. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (contacted by line contact or surface contact). ).

  Two fastening portions 6424 are formed at the front end where a load from the player is likely to occur, and one at the rear end where a load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By providing the fastening portion preferentially in a portion where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the lowering portion forming member 6420 from being displaced when the load is generated and the lower plate forming member 6420 is shifted, while limiting the fastening portion. .

  In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the fastening portion 6424 is provided inside the through hole 6412 (that is, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body 6411 is separately provided). It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge of the through-hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 (while performing the fastening without forming). Can be). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 while eliminating the need for forming a through hole other than the through hole 6412.

  The guide rib 6425 is used both for the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball pulling lever 52 and for the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is formed in a plate shape that is long in the left and right directions, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Therefore, the guide of the movement of the ball release lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

  Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Further, even if one of them is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the useful life of the lower plate unit 6400 can be extended.

  The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or another member having flexibility and an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

  The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-described ball emptying lever 52 is disposed, a circular bottom opening 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the up-down direction, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 which are arranged at positions vertically overlapping with the fastening portions 6424 of the 6420 and are fastened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portions 6424, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the fastening holes 6433, And a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

  The ball-pulling lever 52 has a grip portion 52a that protrudes forward so as to be operable by the player in a manner of sliding right and left, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in an assembled state (see FIG. 207). And a pair of rib-like portions projecting upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, the guided ribs 52c being guided by the guide ribs 6425. Are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

  The bottom opening 6432 is vertically disposed opposite to the discharge opening 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removing lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As described above, when the ball is not operated, the ball release lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

  Accordingly, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 can be prevented from being weakened. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 are arranged near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). While the configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from decreasing.

  The details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward beyond the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat surface and left and right sides) except for the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is fitted inside the through-hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball discharge device 6430 is fitted into the through-hole 6412 as it is, a flange is formed. The portion 6431a contacts the lower surface of the edge of the through hole 6412.

  On the other hand, the inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front-rear and left-right directions. As described above, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 abuts in the up-down direction.

  As described above, the ball discharging device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharging device 6430. After the positions of the components are aligned, the fastening is performed. Each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening. Therefore, the assembling work can be facilitated.

  The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 is inserted, and is provided with a plurality of through holes 6441 projecting from the front side and a metal main body 10014a (see FIG. 211). A plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding from the rear side where the screws inserted into the formed through holes are fastened and fixed, and a portion that interferes with the upper left end of the covering base member 6410 in the front-rear direction. And an interference portion 6443 formed in the shape of a dovetail plate.

  FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened, the opening width is narrowed toward the left and right center, and a V-shaped main body 6451 disposed downward toward the left and right center, A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the main body 6451, positioning portions 6453 formed near the lower edge center of the main body 6451, and left and right sides of the main body 6451 A plurality of projecting fastening portions 6454 projecting to the rear side near the ends and formed to be able to screw fastening screws, and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the right side of the main body 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body 6451 and a main body 64 formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the left side of the main body 6451. 1 with a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 aligned in the longitudinal direction, mainly it comprises.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Accordingly, a place where a through-hole is easily formed in order for a person who commits an illegal action to intrude an illegal member into the pachinko machine 10010 can be limited. That is, compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 is provided with a through hole, the case where a through hole is provided in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is lower in difficulty. It can be made to be able to be opened to the right front cover 10322.

  For this reason, it is possible to narrow the number of places to be checked regularly to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since there is a high possibility that the through-hole is formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. Thereby, the checking load can be reduced as compared with the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

  The main body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and can be bent and deformed in a direction to narrow the groove width (and can be bent and deformed in a vertically crushed manner). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, the vertical displacement that can occur when operating the operation device 10300 is performed via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Is transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 bends and deforms in a direction to reduce the groove width of the groove of the main body 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is caused by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

  That is, after at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is operated by the deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, it can be transmitted downstream (for example, the covering base member 6410). Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, and the displacement amount of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. Also, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

  The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with respect to the center in the left and right directions, and a plate-shaped projecting portion projecting rearward on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

  The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw in a state where the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 enters the recess formed on the front side from the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled so as to approach from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

  In the assembled state, at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (the lower right insertion hole 6452 in the present embodiment) is not visible in the lower plate forming member 6420 when viewed in the insertion direction of the fastening screw (FIG. 230 (b)). That is, in a state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering base member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion hole 6452 cannot be loosened, and the V-shaped design member is moved from the covering base member 6410. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a stage before disassembling the 6450, the man-hour required until the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled can be increased.

  In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is drilled in a front-rear long portion 6426c described later in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted. And an insertion portion 6426c1 that is fixed. In addition, the operation device 10300 is arranged so as to cover the insertion portion 6426c1 in rear view (see FIG. 232).

  Therefore, as a premise of disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the operation device 10300 from a position where the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the required man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the inside from the created gap.

  The plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R comes into contact with the upper surface of the front vertically long portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the descending displacement of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426, and conversely, the rising displacement of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6426R is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

  Accordingly, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in a lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) of the operation device 10300 and the fitting portion 6426d are provided. Are fitted, the front side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction with the displacement of the operating device 10300 in the ascending direction.

  Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, the upward displacement of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

  The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed. , The back side (the side closer to the metal main body 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

  The right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin wall shape that can be flexibly deformed by itself, thereby transmitting displacement downstream due to its own deformation. And a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the vibration. As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged more densely than the right reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. Note that FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b) show cross sections in a plane that divides the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction. Further, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to have a common thickness and change the dimension in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction corresponding to the groove width of the main body 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a representative example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom of the main body 6451 to the rear side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6455a, an upper facing portion 6455b arranged in parallel with the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and a mode in which the separation width increases toward the back side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower opposing portion 6455c that is disposed so as to be inclined in an inclined manner.

  The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion to which the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and it is possible to distribute the load at the front and rear positions. Thus, the load resistance of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge of the right front cover 10322. This can prevent the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from being separated from the upper plate portion 6455b or the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can prevent collision and rubbing with each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The lower facing portion 6455c has the right side reinforcement since the distance from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 increases toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the rear side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase). The allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 at the time of displacement can be avoided.

  Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement or load transmitted through the right front cover 10322 is transmitted to the lower plate of the main body 6451.

  In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right reinforcing rib 6455 with the right front cover 10322 as a starting point. The rate at which loads, displacements, and vibrations associated with the operation and driving of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51 can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the game performance in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b disposed in parallel with the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and an overhang portion 6456c projecting rearward from the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower opposing portion 6456d that is disposed in parallel with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.

  The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion in which the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point, and it is possible to distribute the load at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge of the left front cover 10321. This can prevent the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from being separated from the upper plate portion 6456b or the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can prevent collision and rubbing with each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The overhang portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that is inclined in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the rear side. As a result, the overhang portion 6456c is formed not as a portion that is always in contact with the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that first contacts when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhang portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement of the left front cover 10321 when the displacement amount becomes abnormally large.

  Note that the upper surface of the overhang portion 6456c may be formed at the same position as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front and rear positions at which the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

  The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower frame portion and the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portion 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 abuts on the rear covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covering portion 10014b can be reduced. .

  This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (the space where the spheres are stored and where the player can put his / her hands) is provided. It can be prevented from being narrowed.

  That is, although the back covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, a load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back covering portion 10014b. Can be suppressed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface configuring the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with a game ball to generate abnormal noise.

  As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged on the right reinforcing ribs as compared with the arrangement interval of 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, where the weight of the player's hand that touches the ball stored in the upper plate 17 disposed on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven on the left and right, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is densely packed. By arranging them, it is possible to cope with uneven loads.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 different, it is possible to cope with different types of loads. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion and the lower facing portion 6455c of the main body portion 6451 to block the transmission of the load, so that the instantaneous load or impact through the operation device 10300 can be obtained. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so that even if weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, The displacement of the covering portion 10014b can be prevented. As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to cope with a mode of a load that easily causes a problem.

  229 (a) is a top view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower plate unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower plate unit. 6400 is a left side view as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (a) and FIG. 230 (b), a plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is provided so as to straddle the concave shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 on the left and right. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed on the upper surface of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 so as to be in surface contact with the plate-shaped support portion 6426, while being separated from the recessed shape portion 6414. Hereinafter, the details of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described.

  The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are portions of the portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface, similarly to the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is pressed from above. It is a part constituting the front and back, and one shape of the front and back is similar to the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from below and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from above are formed as shapes whose scale is changed by an amount by which the thickness of the main body 6411 can be secured. You. Therefore, one shape can easily be imagined from the other shape.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the width of the protruding portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is disposed closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the projecting shape portion is formed. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the recessed portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are large. Accordingly, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a state of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, but the details will be described later.

  Here, in a playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be displaced up and down as the player operates the operation device 10300. In connection with this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are formed of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410, There is a possibility that shavings are generated due to collision or rubbing.

  If shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, shavings may enter the gaps and the clearance may not be secured, thereby causing an operation failure or shavings entering the detection area of the detection sensor and causing erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings and to reduce the generation amount.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

  That is, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, whereby the main body portion 6411 is received. And other parts can be displaced.

  On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member Since the deformation is converted into the deformation of 6450, the displacement of other parts such as the main body 6411 can be made unnecessary.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, the main body 6411 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane which inclines upward as it goes. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

  When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is often placed on a concrete or flooring floor in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered that it is preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of a sense of stability and avoiding concentration of load. However, in this case, there is a possibility that soil on the floor may adhere to the entire lower surface. The lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is a position that is difficult to be seen by a player, but it is preferable to avoid adhesion of dirt as long as it is a product.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding portion 6413 is formed as a plane extending in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front side. When the installation shape portion 6413 contacts the floor surface, a gap is generated between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, a portion where the installation shape portion 6413 abuts the floor surface and stains are limited to the protruding shape portion 6413. can do. Therefore, when the gaming shop installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is sufficient to wipe off only the dirt on the protruding shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

  In addition, the protruding shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hanging portion for hanging a finger when carrying the front frame 10014. Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged at the center of the front frame on the left and right sides, the front frame is lifted by catching a hand on the lower plate portion, and it is easy to assemble the frame to the rear frame (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction (opening / closing shaft side), it is difficult to lift the front frame 10014 by hooking the lower plate 50 with the hand. Configuration.

  On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking the hand on the operation handle 51, the own weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the base side of the operation handle 41, so that the operation handle 51 may be damaged and is recommended. Is not preferred.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 that also functions as a finger hook portion is disposed at the left and right center positions so that it is recommended that the front frame 10014 be lifted by putting a hand on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. The worker can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by lifting the front frame 10014 by hooking the hand on the protruding shape portion 6413 and pivoting the front frame 10014 to the rear frame.

  Then, by adopting a work procedure of inserting a work of wiping dirt before and after the time of putting a finger, it is possible to make a worker conscious of a place where dirt needs to be wiped, in connection with a carrying operation. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off dirt can be prevented.

  Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a proper and sufficient gap corresponding to the magnitude of the expected deformation amount of the protruding shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body 6411, the gap between the floor and the floor becomes larger toward the front side. This corresponds to an increase in the deformable amount (bending amount) due to the load.

  That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, the gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor can be easily secured even when the protruding shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014. Can be. On the other hand, in the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 bends and deforms to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can be easily brought into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the entire lower surface of the main body 6411 can support the weight of the front frame 10014.

  Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 mounted on the floor weighs more than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 mounted on the floor, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on the vehicle.

  Also, the deformable amount is formed to be larger toward the front side of the protruding shape portion 6413. It works well even during the execution of the game. For example, at the time of exchanging a thousand boxes, a store clerk of the game store slides the thousand boxes back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the protruding shape portion 6413, and at this time, the thousand cars box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 move. May collide. If the impact or load due to the collision is accumulated in the constituent members as fatigue, the constituent members are destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the protruding shape portion 6413 is configured to increase as it approaches the front side where it easily collides with a thousand boxes. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact or load due to the collision with the 1000 boxes by deformation (bending deformation), and it is possible to suppress the destruction of the protruding shape portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable game environment for the player.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). This can reduce the possibility of collision between the box and the main body 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413 when the box is replaced. Thus, the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is damaged can be reduced, so that the player can easily maintain a comfortable playing environment.

  FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400. Note that FIG. 232 illustrates an assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322, and the outline of the other operation device 10300 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are connected to the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b of FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 ( b) See))).

  The main body 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape as viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 are formed in a plate shape extending in the groove width direction of the main body 6451, so that the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 is provided. Is directed in a direction (upward diagonal direction) having a direction component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right centers. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed obliquely upward.

  Accordingly, it is possible to cope with not only the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement. For example, even when the moving direction of the operation portion (for example, the swing operation member 10310) of the operation device 10300 does not have a left-right component as in the present embodiment, the downward load given by the player is left-right. A directional component may be provided, and when such a load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrates) in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the left-right displacement of the operation device 10300 by flexing and deforming based on their own curved shapes (the left-right displacement can be absorbed or the restoring force can be used). The arrangement of the operation device 10300 can be returned, and the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the center in the left and right directions, so that the operation device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before the displacement. Therefore, the design (see FIG. 207) of the front frame 10014 in a front view can be easily maintained.

  FIG. 233 (a) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a lower plate unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229 (a). 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229 (a). Note that in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is enlarged and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in an assembled state of the lower plate unit 6400, the edge of the through hole 6412 is formed by the lower plate forming member 6420 (the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 on the rear side portion). (The lower end) and the ball discharge device 6430 (the flange 6431a thereof). Accordingly, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

  The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted in the front-rear and left-right directions from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224). As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the up-down direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). Accordingly, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

  As described above, the ball release lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 when not operated, so that the degree of decrease in strength due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

  Accordingly, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 can be prevented from being weakened. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 are arranged near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). While the configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from decreasing.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a) to FIG. 233 (c), the shape of the recessed portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width is increased toward the front side and the depth of the recess is increased. That is, the recessed portion 6414 is formed so as to be more easily bent toward the front side.

  Thereby, a sufficient bending performance can be imparted to the recessed portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 is likely to be large. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the covering base member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, broken) by a load. This will be described in detail.

  As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. An operation timing and an operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and have a role of causing the player to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification and attracting the player to the game. Here, the frequency for each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

  For example, as an example of the control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific reach effect is executed (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

  In this state, the player performs a pressing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation for a notification that prompts an operation in the display effect (a notification such as “press a button!”) Or for switching a stage. You. Therefore, most of the load caused by the operation is a load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is a load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215 (a)). Since the frequency of notification is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load is high.

  On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled to vertically displace the swing operation member 10310, and, for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at a downward position. In a state (see FIG. 215 (b)) that prompts an operation.

  The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215 (b)) that is further tilted by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the upward position. Along the load occurs. Since the generation of the notification is limited to the execution of the specific reach effect, the frequency of occurrence is low.

  That is, control is performed such that the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is such that the width is increased toward the front side and the depth of the recess is increased. Is formed so that the corresponding performance is improved.

  That is, as compared with the case where the common shape is used in the front-rear direction, it can be configured so as to be able to respond to the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load at an appropriate place, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It is possible to make it easy to avoid being easily damaged.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the frequency of occurrence of a load during operation is high are both front sides, so that the wider the recessed shape portion 6414 is toward the front side. , Formed at the deep bottom, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of occurrence of the load at the time of operation is reversed, and in this case, the concave shape becomes wider toward the rear side. By forming it at the deep bottom, it can be configured so as to be able to cope with the difference in load occurrence frequency in place as compared with the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, and excessive deformation due to the applied load It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of cracks or insufficient deformation to easily cause damage.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b vertically contacts the main body portion 6411 at a position outside the left and right width ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Touch

  This makes it possible to reduce the rate at which the load from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the recessed shape portion 6414 as compared with the case where the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b contacts the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the concave shape portion 6414 from being damaged by a load when operating the operation device 10300.

  Further, in order to cope with the load, not only the bending of the recessed portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate portion from the upper edge of the recessed portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used. Therefore, the allowable load can be increased.

  FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed by a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and downward from the left, right, and rear edges of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. A drooping plate-shaped portion 6426b hanging down in a plate shape, and a front longitudinal portion which is connected to a front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and is formed to be taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a, and which is opened downward. It mainly includes a 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d that extends from the front vertically long portion 6426c to the rear side and fits with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are appropriately referred to.

  The flat plate-shaped portion 6426a is formed to be wider than the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed shape portion 6414. A hanging plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (between upper and lower sides). That is, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a does not come into contact with the main body portion 6411 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from below (see FIG. 225). The position of the flat plate portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410 is determined.

  As described above, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are not formed in a block shape but in the shape of a box whose lower part is opened, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. Configuration. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 bend and deform, but also the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211). The plate-like support portion 6426 and the cover base member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the protruding shape portion 6413, and the recessed shape portion 6414) disposed below the operation device 10300 can also bend and deform. Breakage can be further prevented.

  The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the bottom upper surface of the main body portion 6411 but does not extend to enter the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is formed between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see below the rear end of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Accordingly, a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414 can be maintained, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be prevented.

  Further, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when the liquid intrudes from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted on the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid entering behind. This makes it easier for the infiltration of the liquid to be stopped by the front frame 10014.

  The front vertical portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operating device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d extending to the rear side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. This allows the load applied to the operation device 10300 from the player to be distributed not only to the main body portion 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be reduced. it can.

  A space is also formed between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. Accordingly, a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414 can be maintained, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be prevented.

  Further, the space between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when the liquid intrudes from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted on the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid entering behind. This makes it easier for the infiltration of the liquid to be stopped by the front frame 10014.

  The fitting portion 6426d is a portion that is formed to be long in the lateral direction so as to be fittable with the fitting concave portion De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to the lower surface and the front vertical portion 6426c formed on the extended base end side.

  Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d withstands even when a load for displacing the operation device 10300 is applied downward. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

  Here, the operation member 10300 is placed above the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load caused by the operation or vibration of the operation member 10300 by the player is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 6426 via the resin member, and transmitted to the covering base member 6410 arranged downstream of the resin member. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

  In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear of the direction of the load transmitted from the operating member 10300 to the main body 6411 are determined. The direction component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

  That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the rear side (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, which affects the manner in which the fired ball flows down, or the board is broken by transmitting a load to the board boxes 100 to 104 or the electronic board. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the rendering device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 235 and 236, the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 described above are not illustrated, and a state in which the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014 a is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 235, the stage effect device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the sound device 6610 arranged in a pair of right and left, and includes an electric decoration substrate 6570 in which light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. , And components that serve as an intermediary for delivering light emitted from the LED to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (leaf spring) 6584d that generates a biasing force in the separating direction with the metal main body 10014a is disposed on the back side of the effect device 6500. This makes it possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the presentation device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a (stably fasten and fix).

  FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect device 6500. 237 and 238 show a state where the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled upward.

  The upper stage production device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying a front side below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to 6600 to 659 to 6 rear rear units disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580 mainly.

  The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. Portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 vertically formed near the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6511, and through which fastening screws can be inserted, and extending downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extension tip, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 configured to be able to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body 10014a into the female screw hole.

  The upper lid member 6510 has a rear side portion where the fastening portion 6513 extends, fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and other components of the presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512. That is, by utilizing the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the front end portion of the upper effect device 6500.

  The fastening portion 6513 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner of falling forward.

  The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper cover member 6510 is configured such that the acoustic device 6610 is formed of the metal main body portion 10014a. Can be prevented from falling off.

  The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface, and an uneven portion 6514 formed to project downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. By this uneven portion 6514, a force that resists a load in a direction perpendicular to the surface can be increased as compared with a case where the upper lid member 6510 of the same thickness is formed of a plate-like member having a smooth surface (the shape can be maintained). Can be easier).

  FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect device 6500. 239 and 240 show a state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is omitted, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In the present embodiment, the front effect devices 6500 are moved by moving the front units 6520 to 6550 obliquely downward and forward with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed, the direction along the surface). Is configured to be decomposable, and details will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a role of receiving, refracting, or transmitting light emitted from a light emitting unit such as an LED, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 have a function of emitting light such as an LED. It has a role as a means and a role to support an illuminated substrate on which a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 241 (a) is a front view of the rear units 6560-6580, FIG. 241 (b) is a front view of the illuminated board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 each include a partition member 6560 formed in such a manner as to partition the internal space into a plurality of portions when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partition member 6560 with light. An illuminated substrate 6570 to be provided and a pair of layers arranged on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and arranged with a slight gap with respect to the illuminated substrate 6570 in an inner region of the outer shape and surface-supported in the outer shape portion , And a back support member 6580.

  It should be noted that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be maintained, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580. Means that.

  The partitioning member 6560 is arranged so as to be opposed to and close to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is configured to divide light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 from the vicinity of the illuminated substrate 6570. You. By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each partition, and the light emission modes of the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 are greatly different. Also, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  The partitioning member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 that is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 that is formed at the left and right central portions of the opposing plate portion 6561, and a left and right lower portion of the opposing plate portion 6561. Left and right light holes 6563 provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back of the opposing plate 6561. A central cylindrical portion 6566 extending in front of the opposing plate portion 6561 in a rectangular cylindrical shape surrounding the central light hole 6562, and a long cylindrical shape enclosing the left and right light holes 6563 toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561. A plate-like connection formed of a left and right cylindrical portion 6567 and a T-shaped plate portion viewed from the front and connecting the opposed plate portion 6561, the central tubular portion 6566, and the left and right tubular portion 6567 on the front side of the opposed plate portion 6561. Department And 568, a mainly includes.

  The opposing plate portion 6561 includes flange portions 6561a to 6561c protruding from the upper edge to the rear side in a left-right elongated shape. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of left and right sides, and extends from a position where a cut is made from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a pair of left and right sides, and extends from a position opposite to the end of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to near the left and right ends of the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568.

  Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate for preventing light from entering and exiting from between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570, and the cut is provided at least on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is configured in a location where light emitted from the LED to be leaked hardly leaks. In other words, even if light is incident from the outside, the light is hardly mixed with light emitted from the LED.

  The cut between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563, and the LED is dared on the electric decoration board 6570. The places where the parts are not arranged are cut off. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

  The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at a location where the fastening portion 6564 is provided. It was done. In other words, even if the light travels to the break, the light that is going to pass through the break is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the phenomenon of light leaking from the break.

  Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c may be configured as a continuous portion without a break, but in this case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently secured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 (Assuming a downward load applied to a member disposed in front of the partitioning member 6560, a gravity or a load given by a player), it is necessary to counter only the force generated by the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fastening portion 6564. Occurs. In the present embodiment, as the number of the fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screw increases, but also the surface area of the illuminated board 6570 decreases, and the place where the LED can be arranged is limited. The 6570 design flexibility is reduced.

  On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into a length enough to secure the rigidity, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can resist the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. Therefore, the number of the fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of working steps can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the illuminated board 6570 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the effect device 6500 is formed as a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction increases toward the center in the left-right direction when viewed from above (see FIG. 237). In general, a load (for example, a hanging load) given by a player is applied at the front side end of the effect device 6500, so that the load given by the player at the left and right central portions of the effect device 6500 is maximum. And becomes gradually smaller as approaching the left and right ends.

  On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c have different lengths. More specifically, the left and right lengths of the second flange portions 6561b disposed on the left and right thereof are longer than the left and right lengths of the first flange portions 6561a formed at the central portion where the load is maximized, Further, the third flange portion 6561c disposed on the left and right thereof is longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left and right lengths are the shortest at the left and right central portions, and gradually increase as approaching the left and right end portions. Thereby, it is possible to generate a counterforce to the load applied to the effect device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

  Thereby, since the deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed, the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 can be stably maintained. The maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separating direction to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being displaced, and the deformation in the approaching direction. This also includes a case where a load in the compression direction is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 due to the displacement or the displacement to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being broken or deformed.

  The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are a plurality of through holes formed in accordance with the pattern of the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 6570. The central light hole 6562 is formed as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are formed as a set of through holes surrounding a plurality of LEDs. .

  The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude more rearward than the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion that extends to the front side in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a that is formed at the bottom end thereof so that a fastening screw can be inserted. A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted from the rear side into the insertion hole 6565a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540 described later. With such a configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in an assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). it can.

  The central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear side ends of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 enters the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper stage production device 6500. The upper surface is disposed at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. Accordingly, the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 bears the load prior to the central cylindrical portion 6566, so that occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566 can be suppressed, and the central cylindrical portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. Can be easily avoided.

  The plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. Accordingly, when a load is transmitted to the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is countered by the resistance generated by the plate-shaped portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. can do. In this case, since the plate-like portion is formed, a counterforce can be generated by bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

  The illuminated board 6570 is a so-called printed board, and is a plate-shaped board portion 6571, and a fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 that is a portion that is pierced or cut out in the board portion 6571 and is inserted. 241 (see FIG. 241), an insertion portion 6572, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 pierced into the substrate portion 6571, into which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a left and right central portion of the substrate portion 6571 (see FIG. b), and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illuminating portion 6574. A second illuminating portion 6575 disposed near the portion, a third illuminating portion 6576 symmetrically disposed along the lower end of the substrate portion 6571, and a connector for connecting an electric wiring (not shown). And 6577, a mainly includes.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side in the front-rear direction, and Are arranged according to a typical positional relationship. That is, the first lighting unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting unit 6576 is located below the partitioning member 6560. Each is arranged at a position below the edge. Accordingly, each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate region partitioned by the partitioning member 6560. Note that the first lighting unit 6574 and the second lighting unit 6575 illuminate an area inside the partition member 6560, whereas the third lighting unit 6576 illuminates an area outside the partition member 6560.

  The third lighting unit 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in a front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third lighting unit 6576 travels obliquely downward by the light receiving member 6558, it is necessary to avoid a situation where the light emitted from the third lighting unit 6576 is blocked by the partitioning member 6560. Accordingly, the third illumination unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

  The thickness of the board portion 6571 is designed to have such a size that the fastening force in the fastening between the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 does not act on the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

  The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in a front view. This can improve the assembly efficiency, but details will be described later.

  The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side. The back support member 6580 is a pair of members that are substantially symmetrical with each other. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 extending in a plate shape to the rear side having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6852, and a front plate A rear box portion 6584 formed in a box shape connected to the left and right edge portions (edge portions opposite to the side where the pair of members opposes) and the lower edge portion of the portion 6581 and opened to the rear side, and a pair of rear box portions A lower box portion 6585 formed in a box shape having a smooth upper surface and being opened downward on the side near the opposite rear box portion 6584 on the side of the portion 6584, the lower box portion 6585, and the front plate portion 6581 and a plate-shaped portion connected to And a notch portion 6587 which is a notch vertically penetrating between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. Prepare for.

  The front plate portion 6581 includes a plurality of fastening supports each including a pair of an oblong rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. Portion 6581a and a through hole formed from a vertically long oval shape having a lateral width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560, and disposed at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front-rear direction. A plurality of positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly drilled in a lower edge portion forming a boundary between the rear box portion 6584 and are capable of inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550, Similarly to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of holes are formed in a long hole shape along a lower edge portion forming a boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and used for positioning the front units 6520 to 6550. A-decided Me slots 6581D, is drilled at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the illuminations substrate 6570 mainly includes a wiring hole 6581e that can be passed back and forth electrical wiring, the.

  The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction constituting a short diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is smaller than the electric decoration board 6570. Is made longer than the left and right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted into the inside of the elliptical rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

  The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

  The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclined direction in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed, and the fastening screw is screwed in along the downward inclined direction. (See FIG. 247).

  This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the illuminated board 6570 than in the case of opening in the front-rear direction, and moves the positions of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d toward the illuminated board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed in the same size, a large area for disposing the illuminated substrate 6570 can be secured, and when the illuminated substrate 6570 is formed in the same size. A region where the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (it can be formed compact).

  The flange portion 6852 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (a load in the hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the forward fall of the partition member 6560.

  The upper plate portion 6583 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting concave portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is formed in a rectangular shape (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) with the upper and rear portions opened and viewed in the left-right direction.

  The rear box portion 6584 includes a projecting portion 6584a projecting more toward the front side than the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmitting portion 6584b made of punching metal that is covered by an opening formed in the projecting portion 6584a, and a right side member. The light receiving portion 6584c formed of a light transmitting member disposed at the right end of the overhang portion 6584a, and the light receiving portion 6584c disposed at a position closest to the center of the upper end (a position close to the front plate portion 6581) and assembled. In FIG. 207, a pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction repelling from the metal main body 10014a and the insertion hole 6512 of the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237). And a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

  The overhang portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed in a shape along the lower edge shape of the electric decoration board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and an upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The sound transmission unit 6584b is a portion through which a sound wave generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. This sound transmission unit 6584b is provided at a position facing the diaphragm 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

  The light receiving unit 6584c receives light emitted from a lighting unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED disposed in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and is displayed as a light emission effect to a player. It is. In the present embodiment, the illumination of the illumination unit 10014c is controlled in a manner different from that of the illuminated substrate 6570. In other words, while the light emission effect of the illuminated substrate 6570 is executed at the time of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal fluctuation effect and a reach effect, or a demonstration effect, the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. This is executed when an effect that is extremely low and extremely advantageous for the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c can be improved.

  The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a from the back side is fastened.

  Notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 formed vertically on the lower surface of the left and right central part (part farthest from diaphragm 6611) of acoustic device 6610 is passed. To form That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through a through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d supporting the back side of the acoustic device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

  The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as sound heading to the back side due to the vibration of the diaphragm 6611, as opposed to being output as sound heading toward the front due to the vibration of the diaphragm 6611. That is, the sound is emitted to the outside through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, sounds with different timbres can be generated simultaneously.

  FIG. 244 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241. FIG. 244 (b) is the CCXLIVb in FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVb line, and FIG. 245 (a) is a partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line in FIG. FIG. 245 (b) is a partial sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. FIG. 246 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. FIG. 246 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line 241. FIG. It is a partial sectional view of an electric decoration board 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610.

  244 (a) to 246 (b) show an enlarged view of the periphery of the flange portion 6582. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illuminated board 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. Thus, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the electric decoration substrate 6570 (the width of the vibration) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580 can be suppressed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), a fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580 is inserted into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the electric decoration substrate 6570 interposed therebetween. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electric decoration board 6570. That is, only the fastening insertion portion 6572 is aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the electric decoration board 6570 is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening location.

  Further, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is in contact with the back surface of the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the illuminated substrate 6570 at the front and rear positions. That is, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be displaced (for example, tilted) in the front and rear direction.

  In addition, the lower edge of the illuminated substrate 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This is the same in FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape such that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape such that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a)). A description will be given of how the partition member 6560 is easily assembled to the back support member 6580 by forming in this manner.

  For example, when the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564 as in the related art, the partitioning member 6560 is aligned with the back support member 6580 in the up, down, left, and right positions. Need to be assembled.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the electric decoration substrate 6570 is disposed in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580, the rear support member 6580 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to perform alignment with respect to, and there is a possibility that the work may be difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b have a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Therefore, it is possible to assemble even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

  As an example of an assembling order, first, the illuminated substrate 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 such that the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570. In this case, the arrangement of the illumination board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be at any position.

  In the present embodiment, since the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member of the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled when the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560. The displacement with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

  Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. That is, rough positioning (for example, positioning such that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) passes through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242) and positioning with a sufficiently long vertical width) may be performed. The working efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

  Next, the partitioning member 6560 is moved relative to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, a fastening screw is screwed in (see FIG. 244 (a)).

  In this state, even if the position of the illuminated board 5670 is shifted, the partition member 6560 is lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)). And the back support member 6580.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is generally difficult to position the illuminated substrate 6570, that is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is non-fixedly arranged between the partition member 6560 and the back support member. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in the assembling mode. In addition, the efficiency of assembly can be improved. In addition, even if the illuminated board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight. It can be prevented from lowering.

  The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T-shape at the left and right central portions (disposed at four places, see FIG. 241), and is arranged in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) outside thereof. (Refer to FIG. 241, arranged at eight locations). The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole that allows light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 to pass therethrough, a portion forming an outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is a front side (a side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined such that the facing distance increases as it goes toward.

  Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from first illumination unit 6574 can be defined. That is, the way of showing the light to the player can be changed according to the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (the inclination angle of the inner wall, the height of the raised wall, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion of the enlarged hole 6562a that is raised toward the front side is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closing portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Accordingly, light that has passed through the enlargement hole 6562a can be made to enter the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 without leaking.

  FIG. 246 (a) illustrates the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) illustrates the positioning slot 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are rearranged along the inclination direction. 6580 and fastened and fixed.

  Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where the front units are assembled in the front-rear direction.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the illuminated substrate 6570 can be positioned so as to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be ensured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box 6584 and the size of the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is disposed. (See FIGS. 235 and 246).

  As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning slot 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. (Not inclined) is due to the fact that the resin die used for manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

  In other words, in order to simply form the resin mold (comprising two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed on the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the support portion 6581a, the fitting concave portion 658a, and the like. In the present embodiment, the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are distorted due to the fact that the pulling direction is set to the same front-back direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting concave portion 6583a. (A shape that changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

  In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated due to fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying the fastening is applied becomes thinner toward the center of the hole, so that the load is unbalanced between the upper edge and the other portion. Is likely to occur, and the fastening screw may be loosened depending on the state of use and the number of years of use.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be employed. However, due to a difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points, the cost is increased. . That is, if a fastening screw having a large head diameter is used only for a fastening portion that causes a problem, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common part, resulting in an increase in cost, and a fastening screw having a large head diameter for all fastening portions. If the method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw is increased, which leads to an increase in material cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610 that is disposed to face the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed in a recessed shape in the front wall 6620 ( (Recessed formation) portion, and includes a retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion in which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

  The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the retaining screw portion and the back support member 6580. In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is disposed in a direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, the further progress of the fastening screw is restricted, and the falling off of the fastening screw is prevented. Can be prevented.

  When the fastening screw is not loose, the retaining plate portion 6621 is formed to have a size that is slightly spaced from the head of the screw. Therefore, transmission of vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the head of the fastening screw can be avoided.

  On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by abutment, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when sound is output from the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

  In addition, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoiding recesses 6622 that are recessed at positions behind the through holes of the fastening support portions 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoiding concave portion 6622 is of such an extent that a contact with the head of the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) can be avoided (a slight gap between the head and the fastening screw). (Dimensions that can be made).

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the front-back direction which is the same as the drawing direction of the resin mold, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. Fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a is loosened. However, if the fastening screw is loosened, the same function as the above-described retaining plate portion 6621 is performed to avoid contact. It can be created in the recess 6622.

  That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by the contact, so that the gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when sound is output from the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

  As described above, by transmitting the vibration generated when the head of the fastening screw comes into contact with the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding recess 6622 due to the occurrence of the loosening of the fastening screw, the configuration of the fastening screw can be grasped. It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the fastening screw is left loose.

  For example, the configuration is such that abnormal noise is generated by the transmission of vibration, or the vibration is detected.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in the present embodiment, while the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, it is arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. Is done. This allows the acoustic device 6610 and the illuminated substrate 6570 to be arranged close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illuminated substrate 6570 and illuminated. Breaking of the substrate 6570 can be avoided.

  Here, when the partitioning member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position except for the effected portion of the illuminated substrate 6570 (that is, the lighting units 6574 to 6576), the ratio of the effected portion on the surface of the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced. For the purpose of securing a large area, the area of the connection portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be reduced.

  Therefore, the problem that the fixing of the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficient is likely to occur. Without measures, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 may be transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the back support member 6580. When the 6560 vibrates, there is a possibility that the effect of rendering is inferior, the fastening portion is loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself is damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the partition member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partition member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the presentation device 6500. In FIG. 247, a fastening location of each component of the effect device 6500, a fastening direction, and a fastening direction are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

  As shown in FIG. 247, the upward staging device 6500 is configured such that the front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, but is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

  This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed of a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted via the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is moved in the thickness direction ( (Vertical direction).

  With the displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is reduced. For example, in the case where the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with reference to the center in the front-rear direction, the front-rear interval of the insertion holes 6512 formed apart in the front-rear direction is reduced. Accordingly, a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the rear side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

  In other words, a load can be applied by sandwiching the partition member 6560 between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540, so that even when the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration is suppressed. Can be.

  Here, even if the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is reduced, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displaced away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 gives the partition member 6560. The load to be applied is likely to be insufficient, and the effect of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, the lower side of the partition unit 6540 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side. Thus, a sufficient load can be secured from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560.

  At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 is provided. The direction of transmission of the vibration can be a direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552.

  Thereby, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening portions can be prevented from moving in the front and rear direction. Therefore, even when the vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 247, by arranging the fastening points, the decorative board 6570 is placed in a non-fixed state close to the acoustic device 6610 in which vibration is likely to occur, while preventing the decorative board 6570 from being damaged. The vibration of the partition member 6560 caused by the transmission of the vibration to the partition member 6560 that prevents the illuminated substrate 6570 from separating from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more can be suppressed.

  That is, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 disposed in the vicinity of the acoustic device 6610 and to improve the shape maintaining performance of the presentation device 6500.

  One purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to correspond to the amount of displacement of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the upper lid member 6510 has a configuration in which the rear side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in a thin plate shape back and forth, the upper lid member 6510 easily bends and displaces in a manner in which the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the rear side. It is about things.

  For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion on the front side of the upper lid member 6510, a mode in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 starting from the rear end portion from the shape of the upper lid member 6510. Can be displaced by bending. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to other members disposed below the upper lid member 6510.

  Since the direction of the compression load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, the direction of the compression load is along the front-back direction on the rear side, which is the base end side. It follows the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

  In the present embodiment, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the upper lid The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be made closer.

  Thereby, in addition to generating a sufficient resistance to the compression load at the fastening position, the component of the compression load applied in the direction in which the fastening screw is sheared (the direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw is broken. Can be suppressed.

  A fastening screw having a fastening direction formed in a direction inclined downward toward the front is used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550. The plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and the back side of the illuminated board 6570. (See the screw insertion portion 6581c in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is provided in a non-fixed manner and is configured to be easily displaced. However, the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the allowable displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, even if the illuminated substrate 6570 is displaced, if the amount of displacement is excessive, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be restricted from being excessively displaced by being able to contact the plate guide unit 6550.

  In addition, since plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of illuminated board 6570 (the side where acoustic device 6610 is arranged), displacement of illuminated board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thus, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generation source.

  In this embodiment, fastening portions (fastening support portions 6581a, insertion holes 6565a, and the like) whose fastening directions are in the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is lowered toward the front side. The fastening portions (the screw insertion portion 6581c, the insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged close to each other.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation (displacement) occurring in one of the fastening portions on the other fastening portion. That is, even when the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and the displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that the inclination is lowered. It is possible to avoid generating a load in a direction inclined with respect to the fastening direction (along the front-rear direction) with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. Thereby, the occurrence of loosening of the screw can be suppressed.

  In addition, by fixing a portion that is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the left and right center side, with a fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, the resistance of the effect device 6500 to a load in the pushing-down direction can be improved.

  On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction descends and inclines toward the front side, where the fastening direction is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the push-down direction than the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, In the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction descends and inclines toward the front side, on the left and right outer sides formed to be short along the front-rear direction, the resistance to the load in the push-down direction decreases. The arrangement area of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be ensured while minimizing the effect of this.

  FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241 (a). It should be noted that the specific portion is shown enlarged.

  As shown in FIG. 248, in the electric decoration board 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 contacts the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. In addition, the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right sides of the partition member 6560 and the left and right sides of the back support member 6580, respectively, but the contact positions do not coincide with each other.

  With this configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 and adjust the easiness of displacement. This will be described below in order. First, an improvement in the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described.

  Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 are in contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, respectively, at a position where they coincide with each other, for some reason (error in resin molding, defective fastening, etc.) If the interval between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the thickness of the illuminated substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570, and if the applied load is large, The decorative substrate 6570 may be broken.

  In addition, even when a compressive force is not applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, so that a load (for example, a load in the compression direction) is generated. May be applied, and the electric decoration substrate 6570 may be cracked by this load.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions in contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 on the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 do not coincide with each other before and after (there is a portion that comes into contact at a shifted position). Even if a load is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load for compressing the illuminated substrate 6570 but a load for bending the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, since it is possible to cope with the deformation of the illuminated substrate 6570, the possibility that the illuminated substrate 6570 is cracked can be reduced.

  Next, adjustment of the likelihood of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described. The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 are inserted through the electric decoration substrate 6570 to prevent displacement, but in the present embodiment, they are concentrated near the left and right centers. (See FIG. 243).

  In addition, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is in contact (contact) with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, contact resistance between the illuminated substrate 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, it is natural that the contact area becomes large and the frictional resistance can be sufficiently secured.

  Therefore, the occurrence of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be easily suppressed in the vicinity of the left and right central portions of the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, even when a peripheral member vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be easily maintained.

  On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially on the lower side) of the illuminated substrate 6570, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and the fastening portion 6564 are not arranged, and a load to be compressed from the front and rear is not generated. The displacement can be easily generated as compared with the left and right central portions of 6570.

  Therefore, when peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily change the direction of light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 or the third lighting unit 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570.

  In the present embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, the vibration mode of the electric decoration board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 to vibrate the right side of the illuminated board 6570 preferentially, and the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 to vibrate the left side of the illuminated board 6570 preferentially. The sound decoration board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different types of vibration depending on whether the sound is output from both the right and left sound devices 6610 and the right and left sides of the light decoration board 6570 are vibrated.

  Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of front units 6520 to 6550. In FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, reference numerals of detailed configurations are omitted for easy understanding.

  249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 for transmitting light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and form an outer frame The state where the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 which abuts on the partitioning member 6560 before and after and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 guided on the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is shown in an exploded state. You.

  At the time of the light emission effect via the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives light from the first lighting unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives light from the second lighting unit 6575, and the guided unit. 6550 receives light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 251 (a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. FIG. 252 (b) is a front view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a plate guide. FIG. 136 is a rear view of the unit 6550.

  FIG. 254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVA-CCLIVA in FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251 (b).

  FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

  The partitioning unit 6540 is formed of a milky white light-transmissive resin material and is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape when viewed from the front, and a light transmitting member 6520 formed by penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center of the milky white member 6541. A through-hole 6542 formed so that the rear part can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are portions projecting inward of the through-hole 6542 to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530 A plurality of insertion holes 6544 through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing are inserted, and a pair of post-guide fastening portions to which fastening screws extending cylindrically to the rear side and passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape opened to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky member 6541, and the box-shaped light receiving portions 65 6 is a plate-like portion extending downward from the lower edge, and formed with a plurality of insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partitioning unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 can be inserted. And a transparent covering member 6548 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material in a shape covering the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and fitted and supported by the milky member 6541. Prepare for.

  The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge portion formed in a curved shape that swells toward the front side as viewed from above as in the case of the upper lid member 6510, is formed into a substantially inverted triangle when viewed from the front, and has a center disposed on the back side when viewed from the side. (See FIG. 254 (a)).

  The milky-white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened on the upper surface. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

  The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side in correspondence with the inclination of the contact plate 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. Thus, the front end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into surface contact with each other, thereby preventing the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. Can be.

  The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed to the rear side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

  The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is provided on the front bottom rear surface and the lower plate upper surface of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Has a jagged decoration with a short left-right width. The jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are densely aligned.

  With this shape, light incident from the back side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape whose upper side is opened in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. And a protruding rib 6547c that protrudes toward the front side in a semi-elliptical shape enclosing.

  By positioning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partitioning unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion where an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted is formed, and receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying the fastening is applied depends on the direction of removal of the resin mold (the front-back direction in the present embodiment). The thickness is reduced toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254 (b)).

  In this case, a load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge portion and the other portions. Therefore, when a small positional deviation repeatedly occurs between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may be loosened. is there.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be employed. However, due to a difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points, the cost is increased. . That is, if a fastening screw having a large head diameter is used only for a fastening portion that causes a problem, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common part, resulting in an increase in cost, and a fastening screw having a large head diameter for all fastening portions. If the method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw is increased, which leads to an increase in material cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 is prevented at a plurality of positions. That is, first, the screw-in portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the protruding rib 6547c of the partitioning unit 6540, whereby the downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented (FIGS. 247 and 254). (B)).

  Secondly, the front-side upper end of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage in the front-rear direction with the rear-side lower end of the transparent covering member 6548 locked to the milky-white member 6541 by the locking protrusion 6548b. (See FIG. 254 (b)). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced to the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540.

  Third, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to abut on the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thus, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

  The displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partitioning unit 6540 can be suppressed by these first to third contact structures, so that the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw-in portion 6554a can be suppressed. Can be.

  The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and has a lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a extending in a plate shape toward the rear side at the V-shaped lower edge connecting portion, and a rear surface extending from the upper edge portion. And a plurality of locking projections 6548b projecting in a plate shape to the side. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

  A jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, similarly to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Accordingly, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the notched portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a. And can emit light uniformly.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined upward toward the rear side (see FIG. 254 (c)). In order to form 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of guided unit 6550, lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the back side similarly to the lower bottom surface of guided unit 6550. .

  If the inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, the direction of pulling out the mold for forming the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. In other words, the drawing direction is the front-back direction near the through-hole 6542, while the drawing direction is the direction that rises and inclines toward the rear side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, so that the difficulty of the mold design only increases. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but is instead formed by the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254 (c)). Further, in the assembled state, the white partitioning member 6560 is disposed opposite the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that forms the inclined surface, so that the transparent covering member 6548 is provided to the player. Can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

  Accordingly, the drawing direction of the molding die for the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-back direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that is covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes with the front and rear drawing directions. While the shape (the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in a direction to enter the inside of the partition unit 6540 in a front view), the light emission of the transparent covering member 6548 is played in a uniform light emitting mode. Can be visually recognized.

  In other words, the partition unit 6540 is tapered toward the rear side (the vertical interval is narrowed), and the rear side portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that are adjacent to each other are formed. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emission effect in a uniform light emission mode.

  In this case, it is difficult to set the direction in which the molding die of the transparent covering member 6548 is removed in the front-back direction, but the transparent covering member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-back direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the direction of rising and falling) as the drawing direction of the forming die, the manufacturing process in which the drawing direction is the resin molding in the front-rear direction (one direction) is performed. The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process.

  Accordingly, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and a portion visually recognized through the transparent covering member 6548 can emit light uniformly.

  The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the front-side bulging portion at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking projection 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

  The guided unit 6550 is formed from a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back support member 6580; An extended plate portion 6552 extending in the form of a plate on the rear side along the lower edge of the left and right central portion, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure holes 6553 drilled at the rear end of the extended plate portion 6552 A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and opposed to the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partition unit 6540 to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed; A plurality of back side fastening portions 6555 to which fastening screws arranged along the lower edge and passing through the screw insertion portions 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580 are fixed. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 projecting in a rib shape between the rear side fastening portions 6555 and inserted into positioning long holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the rear support member 6580, and punching in the front and rear directions in the left and right arms. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 6557 provided, and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in the plurality of through holes 6557.

  In the guided unit 6550, the direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is set as the die removing direction. That is, each component member is formed along an inclined direction that is inclined upward toward the rear side or along a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

  The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6612 passes through the exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6553 and reaches the player.

  Exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed not in a single large hole but in a plurality of small hole shapes in a range opposed to exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6612 (see FIG. 235). Formed). Thereby, the fraudulent act of entering a thin wire such as a piano wire can be suppressed.

  In addition, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed such that the width of the hole becomes narrower as approaching the end of the hole and toward the rear side. Thereby, since the fine wire can be clogged in the hole, after the fine wire is advanced into the back after entering the exhaust pressure through hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking on a specific member, The movement resistance of the fine wire can be increased. As a result, the time required for cheating can be prolonged, so that cheating can be suppressed.

  The front side fastening portion 6554 includes a threaded portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of positioning wall portions 6554b formed on the left and right of the threaded portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are opposed to each other at intervals slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the positioning between the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be performed.

  The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and a cross section perpendicular to the long direction is formed in an L-shape. A guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b which are formed in a box shape which bulges in front of the guided portion 6558a and whose back side is opened and which is formed so as to be able to fit into the through hole 6557; An upper edge extending portion 6558c that extends in the form of a plate to the rear side along the upper edge of the central portion of the portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 opposes).

  The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570. The decorative jagged shape described above is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. This allows light to be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1-2 in FIG. 241 (b)). However, even light can be visually recognized as a uniform light over the entire rear box portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the point light source feeling can be reduced).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (the posture in which the light receiving surface is inclined so that the light traveling direction is along the mounting direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Is attached in a posture intersecting the mounting direction of the light receiving member 6558), so that the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed on the third illumination portion 6576 of the electric decoration board 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received. The light is refracted when passing through the member 6558, and can be advanced in a direction inclined obliquely downward toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed such that an object disposed on the left and right outer sides has a shorter bulging length toward the front side than an object disposed on the left and right inner sides. Accordingly, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected thereunder.

  The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 which is disposed to face the partition member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly at the centrally extending plate portion 6552, and has no partition, so that alignment with the partition member 6560 can be performed. Difficult to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions an area above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partition member 6560 can be easily positioned.

  Returning to FIG. In the description so far, the portion that receives the light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 arranged on the left and right has been described. Hereinafter, the light transmission unit 6520, which is a part that receives light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574, will be described.

  FIG. 257 (a) is a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. FIG. 258 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. FIG.

  The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a color (in this embodiment, orange) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body 6531 formed of an inverted triangle. An opening 6532 that is formed in the center in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) in the front-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6533 that is formed along the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protrudes rearward in a rib shape. And a plurality of fastening portions 6534 which are provided at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so as to be able to screw fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544.

  Since the main body 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is made opaque to light, a portion where light is transmitted inside the outer shape is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape (an enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

  Light emitted from the first illumination portion 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521. However, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so as to be different depending on the front-rear position, the light before the opening 6532 is provided. It is possible to visually recognize a light of a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574 to a player who is visually recognized from the same.

  For example, since the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the lateral width becomes longer (as the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction) as approaching the opening 6532, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is Light that is visually recognized from the vicinity of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position overlapping with the upper plate portion before and after is visually recognized as a pattern that is wider than the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind it while expanding the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first illumination unit 6574 (or the illuminated substrate 6570). The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

  The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is provided at a position where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). Is done).

  FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a tubular shape with a bottom and extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a plane disposed at an intermediate position of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape over the outer periphery along with a cup-shaped member 6523 formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin into a cup-shaped member covered by the transparent tubular member 6521; A shielding member 6524 formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) light-impermeable resin material into a tubular shape so that a portion opposite to the side on which the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered can be inserted; A contact plate portion 6525 formed at the front end portion as a flat plate surface portion capable of contacting the flange portion 6522, and an outer portion extending to the front side along left, right, and lower edges of the contact plate portion 6525. Frame extension And 526, mainly it comprises.

  The bottomed tubular member 6521 is a member that extends in a front and rear cylindrical shape, and has a curved shape in which left and right walls are confined inward. , A plurality of light-receiving projecting portions 6521b projecting rearward from the rear outer portion 6521a at positions opposed to the LEDs, and a region surrounded by the rear outer portion 6521a. 6521c that blocks the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light-transmitting holes 6521d that are formed in the blocking portion 6521c at a position facing the LED, and at least the width of the upper wall and the interval between the left and right walls are toward the front. It mainly includes a main body cylinder portion 6521e that becomes longer as it goes, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521f that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylinder portion 6521e.

  The light receiving protruding portion 6521b is a portion that is inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. In other words, by reducing the distance between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illuminating portion is provided on the light receiving projecting portion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from the 6574 LED. Thereby, it is possible to easily cause total reflection.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 is incident at a short distance, is totally reflected, and travels to the front side, compared with the light of the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 described above. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by an area inside the recessed box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 or the rear box-shaped portion 6558b recessed in the direction away from the LED. 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are caused to emit light. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 has a low light amount and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light. it can.

  The partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed of a light-transmissive milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

  The frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is generally formed in a similar shape to the rear outer portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is compared to the outer shape of the rear outer portion 6521a due to the interposition of the main body tubular portion 6521e. It will be enlarged.

  Therefore, compared to the size of the region where the LEDs are arranged in the first lighting unit 6574, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light that illuminates a large region.

  The shape of the extending distal end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at a distance substantially equal to the bottom rear side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is designed. Thus, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be made to emit light in a uniform light emission mode.

  The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are formed in a size that allows the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction while having a rear surface formed in a flat shape, and fastened with a fastening screw inserted into the bottom. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portions 6543 are fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusing shape (a decorative shape having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and the decorative shape portion And a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat shape in a region surrounding the periphery of the 6523b.

  The decorative shape portion 6523b irregularly reflects light emitted from the back surface to the cup-shaped member 6523. This allows a player who looks at the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side to visually recognize that the surface-emitting light is emitted, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a front view can be improved.

  Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the inside of the thickness of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is not reflected irregularly, and the front surface is not diffused. Can be passed to the side. This allows the player to visually recognize light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f as clear light.

  The shielding member 6524 has a rear-side end formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and has a recessed portion large enough to guide the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. And a pair of left and right guide concave portions 6524a.

  The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are drilled in a size that allows the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to be capable of accommodating the flange portion 6522, and the extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the rear surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate portion.

  That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)). Can be stably maintained. Further, the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 is inserted and fastened and fixed in the order of the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a. The assembly state of the 6520 can be more firmly maintained.

  According to the light transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end surface of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e and advances forward, and the front-side end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. And irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523. Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is set to be short, a line-like shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode in which light is emitted in the shape of an outline along the line. This makes it possible to emphasize the difference between the light emitting mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emitting mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, so that a sharp light emitting effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 261 shows six views of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows six views of the optical transmission unit 6520 in an assembled state. Note that the left side view is omitted because the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically.

  FIG. 261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is the bottom surface of the transparent tubular member 6521 FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  FIG. 262 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. In FIG. 262 (e), the illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent tubular member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the lower bottom face are inclined such that the left and right widths and the up and down widths gradually increase toward the front side. It is said. On the other hand, a part that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface because the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-back direction.

  For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the back side in the pulling direction (rear), but the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion. If the inclination is the same, interference occurs when moving the resin mold on the back side, so that the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) extending in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

  Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the front side in the pulling direction (front), but the frame shape formed on the front side thereof. If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f has the same inclination, interference occurs when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is formed as a surface extending along the front-rear direction (non-inclined surface). (See FIG. 263).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side that is pulled forward and the resin mold on the back side that is pulled rearward is constituted by the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522. Where the surface is formed, and on the other hand, the above-mentioned non-inclined surface is formed, the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 have a length of the non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction compared with a length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. Formed on the shorter side.

  Thus, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress a change in the plate thickness due to a change in the front-rear position, so that the light passing through the inside of the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress a change in the forward and backward positions of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is incident on the inside of the thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where light first arrives, it is possible to easily repeat total reflection until reaching the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. Can be suppressed, so that a player who views the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side can visually recognize sufficient light.

  The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed such that the upper and lower widths become smaller (taper) toward the front side. Thereby, as compared with the case where the vertical width is equal in the front-rear direction, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partitioning unit 6540 are assembled (see FIG. 249 and FIG. 250), the guide concave portion 6524a has the fastening portion Since 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembling can be reduced.

  FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520 along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. FIG. 263 illustrates a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at an assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 for convenience of description.

  As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed in such a size that a slight gap is generated when the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b is inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partitioning member 6560, and the tip thereof is opposed to the opposite plate portion. It is inserted up to the surface position of 6561. Accordingly, the distance between the first illumination unit 6574 and the light receiving projection 6521b can be set without being affected by the thickness of the opposing plate unit 6561.

  The light receiving protruding portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the transverse direction that intersects the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is arranged to face.

  Accordingly, in the short direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b, only light (light having an extremely small angle with respect to the optical axis) that travels substantially straight from the first illumination portion 6574 to the front side is made incident, and other light is made incident. Can be prevented.

  The light thus incident easily travels to the front side in the thick inside of the transparent tubular member 6521, and the angle between the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of the light is small even when reflected at the boundary. Since total reflection easily occurs, it is possible to suppress light from weakening before reaching the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  The length in the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b is set to be about twice as large as the length in the short direction. Therefore, regarding the direction in which the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 spreads, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a larger angle from the optical axis than the case described in the thickness direction of the surface. Can also enter the light receiving protruding portion 6521b.

  On the other hand, the rear outer surface portion 6521a coupled to the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b does not contact the opposing plate portion 6561, and is arranged with a slight space therebetween. Accordingly, of the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574, the light (the light having a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) incident from the end surface of the rear outer shape portion 6521a is reflected to the player. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized.

  That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the light that passes through the inside of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b and travels within the thickness of the main body tubular portion 6521e, and can cut off the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light to be incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

  Light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving projection 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light transmission hole 6521d of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 260). The light passes through and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels in the air, so that the player can visually recognize the light as uniform light.

  Note that the raised end of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c abut on each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the gap between the raised end and the closing portion 6521c.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how the light that has passed through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the arrangement of light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520. FIG. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

  First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (total reflection). Light (light emitted from eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized in a shape as if the shape (substantially gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a was enlarged.

  In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 proceeds to the front side end without being weakened, so that the light transmission unit 6520 corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a in a front view. A strong light emission (light emission like a point light source) occurs at the position where the light is emitted.

  Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangements of the edge light emitting portions 6574a, because the distance L17b between the strong light emission arrangements in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520 is longer. Only light can be visually recognized, and the light effect is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emission arrangements of visible light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the actual arrangements of the edge light emitting portions 6574a, so the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve even if the distance between the LEDs is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a is made to progress radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b). In addition, light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of light visually recognized at a position between light sources is reinforced.

  Accordingly, even in a place where the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs), the linear light can be visually recognized in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 (the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). reference). Therefore, the state in which light is visually recognized as a point can be improved.

  In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first illumination unit 6574 are arranged at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 of the main body tubular portion 6521e and the bottom surface 6521e2 (see FIG. 262 (e)). Therefore, light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the LED light above the optical axis, and light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, and is thus below the frame-shaped extension 6521f. Left and right center overlap.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), although the LED is not arranged at the lower left and right center of the first lighting unit 6574, as shown in FIG. Through this, line-shaped light can be visually recognized at the lower left and right centers.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the space for arranging the first illumination unit 6574, the shape formed by light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light The degree of visual recognition can be reduced, and clear linear light can be visually recognized.

  When the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior of the light transmission unit 6520 is hardly visible due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523. It is said that it is difficult to grasp the position where the intersections occur. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emitting effect from being reduced.

  In addition, when the position where the light overlaps is near the front end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. In other words, it is possible to make an illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, so that even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when many LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

  Light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first lighting portion 6574) disposed inside the transparent tubular member 6521 in front view is reflected inside the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and additionally has the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a that is disposed to face (see FIG. 245 (b)). It progresses radially along.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b is visually recognized as a planar light that spreads as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface light-emitting portion 6574b in a front view. In addition, the light is radiated to the jagged decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light is irregularly reflected and visually recognized as planar light in a front view.

  That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the region where the light radiated from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f in a front view) can be brightly lit.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as light having different impressions, that is, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, it is possible to avoid darkening the boundary by irradiating irregularly reflected light onto the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light. Therefore, it is possible to change the perceived light impression stepwise and continuously.

  Here, as the change in the impression of the visually recognized light, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a change in impression of a light emitting situation such as light and dark or blinking, or a change in color of light.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  As described above, the partition unit 6540 visually recognized in front view on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that swells toward the front side in front view and side view. Therefore, light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction (a direction diffusing with respect to a point on the back side).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 disposed below the left and right of the partitioning unit 6540 has the front side edge located on the back side toward the left and right sides, and the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 depends on the attached posture. , In a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left and right and up and down directions (directions of diffusion with reference to points on the back side).

  This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the light increases as the player approaches the player, as compared to a case where the light is directed only in a mode in which the light travels in the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

  Next, the horizontal rendering device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700.

  In FIG. 265, the illustration of the directing device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and the horizontal directing device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014 a and is viewed from a diagonally right front direction. , FIG. 266 illustrates a side view of the horizontal effect device 6700 from diagonally left front.

  As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal rendering device 6700 is a rendering device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertical portions of the metal main body 10014a, and divides a vertically long elliptical shape in half when viewed from the side. It is formed from a shaped shape.

  In addition, the horizontal effect device 6700 is provided with a pair of left and right devices having similar shapes, but since the internal configuration is the same, the right horizontal effect device 6700 will be described in detail, and the left horizontal effect device 6700 will be described. Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is provided on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a so as to cover the front side of the base member 6710 so that the front and rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized in the upper end portion of FIG. The configuration is such that units 6730 to 6760 are provided.

  The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal main body 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning protrusion (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal body 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted through the through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

  Note that among the components of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In other words, of the components of the horizontal effect device 6700, there is no component that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a except for the base member 6710.

  As shown in FIG. 266, a position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 on the side toward the game area (a position where the rear side end portion of the base member 6710 and the surface position). Is formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is disposed so as to face the glass unit 16 in front and back, as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG.

  With this arrangement, the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 can be easily and integrally displayed. can do.

  FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. 267 and 268 show a state in which the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 267, an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is provided on the front side of the base member 6710, and the illumination board 6720 is mounted on the illumination board 6720 from the front side. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 so as to cover them.

  That is, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the illuminated substrate 6720 whose emission is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the illuminated substrate 6720. Mainly comprising a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 and a light receiving side unit composed of covered units 6730 to 6760 that receive light emitted from the light emitting side unit and allow the player to visually recognize the light. . First, the light emitting side unit will be described.

  FIG. 269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720, FIG. 269 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a right side of the base member 6710. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a view of FIG. 269 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the electric decoration board 6720 in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line.

  As shown in FIGS. 269 (a) to 269 (f), the base member 6710 is provided with a flat support plate 6711 which is disposed to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and which is disposed on the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting forward from the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 that are provided outside the illuminated substrate 6720 and are close to the illuminated substrate 6720 in a front view, and through which fastening screws can be inserted. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (a step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717), which is on the right side of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 (encloses the game area). Gala on the other side of the window A plurality of positioning holes 6716 formed as long holes vertically in the region of the opposite side of the unit 16), and an outer frame extending in a stepped plate shape from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. It mainly includes a plate portion 6717 and an inner frame plate portion 6718 which extends in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the rear side.

  The frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 has its protruding tip facing the back surface near the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720 and makes surface contact with the illuminated substrate 6720. Thus, a gap is provided between the back surface of the portion of the electric decoration substrate 6720 except for the vicinity of the outer shape portion and the support plate portion 6711 (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulation layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illuminated substrate 6720.

  Thus, even when the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transmitted to the metal main body 10014a can be transmitted to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transmitted to the electric decoration board 6720 Can be suppressed (suppressed to a low level), so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the illuminated substrate 6720 becoming hot and malfunctioning.

  The positioning projecting portion 6713 is a portion for positioning the electric decoration substrate 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into two positioning holes 6722 formed in the electric decoration substrate 6720. That is, a positioning hole 6722 is formed in the illuminated substrate 6720 at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 6713 with reference to the disposition of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720 in an assembled state (see FIG. 269 (a)). Is established.

  The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268). The through hole is formed so as to be able to be fitted and through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

  The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

  The positioning hole 6716 is a hole through which the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. In the covering units 6730 to 6760, a pair of thin plate-shaped members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) are disposed to face each other on the left and right sides, and are formed in a substantially cup shape that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 268). ), And is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side portion (edge-shaped portion).

  Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load applied from the player (for example, when the player collides). The load generated by the operation. As described above, since the base member 6710 is fixed to the thin-walled rear side end portion, when a load is applied in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750, deformation occurs. Or the position may be shifted with respect to the base member 6710. In order to prevent this, the number of fixed portions (fastened portions) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a possibility that a problem that the number of steps of the assembling work increases may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while increasing the number of fixed portions is suppressed, by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are connected to the base member. It is possible to suppress displacement (position displacement in the left-right direction) with respect to the 6710.

  In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is disposed close to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712, the player places a left side on the flat plate member 6740. Even if a load in the direction is applied, the flat plate member 6740 abuts on the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 in a plane, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the covering units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

  Therefore, the durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the number of steps of the assembly operation. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by including the unevenness forming portion 6741a in which a fine unevenness is formed in a contact area with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, but the details will be described later. .

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 is disposed so as to face the right side surface of the metal main portion 10014a and is in surface contact therewith, and covers (covers) the right side of the metal main portion 10014a. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the metal main body 10014a.

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed along a front-rear direction from a part of the alignment hole 6716. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the positioning hole 6716 on the front side of the positioning hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the positioning hole 6716 on the back side of the positioning hole 6716.

  The support concave portion 6717a is formed to have a size to be fitted to the projecting portion 6743 or to be opposed to the projecting portion 6743 with a slight gap in an assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the positioning holes 6716, the area in which the projecting portion 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), and thus the flat plate member is provided. The displacement of 6740 with respect to base member 6710 can be suppressed. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported on the base member 6710.

  The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion that is disposed to face the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750, and is formed in a plane shape facing the game area side (inside).

  The illuminated board 6720 is a so-called printed board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary LED chips D1 on which a plurality are mounted in a pattern.

  The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, when the positioning projection 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722, the movement to the left, right, up and down is regulated, and the movement to the front and back is performed by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). Movement is regulated by being caught in the

  A similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in the present embodiment, but as a boundary of a region indicating the configuration of the light receiving units 6730 to 6760, in relation to a region shown by an imaginary line in FIG. And two types.

  That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting portion D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare mainly. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) provided on the front side of the illuminated substrate 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

  As apparent from the state shown in FIG. 267 and FIG. 268 when disassembled and shown in FIG. 270 and FIG. 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed of a light-transmitting resin inside and have a light passing therethrough. The light receiving member 6730 is provided so as to be able to refract the light and to cover the electric decoration substrate 6720 from the front side, and is configured so as to cover the front with another component member.

  FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. FIG. 273 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). is there.

  274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274 (b) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. is there.

  Note that FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side, FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side. Also, in FIG. 272 (b), the cover units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

  The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720, and a light receiving surface portion 6731 disposed to face the illuminated substrate 6720, An inner extending portion 6732 that extends rearward so as to be bent from an inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (The right edge in FIG. 274), an outer extending portion 6733 extending to the rear side so as to be bent, and a plurality of long projecting ribs (in this embodiment, projecting from the rear surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). (5 places) long ribs 6734 and a long fin extending from the front at a position where the base end of the long ribs 6734 (the side coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731) and the front and back surfaces of the light receiving surface portion 6731 coincide. A plurality of (five in this embodiment) fins 6735, a plurality of insertion holes 6736 in which upper and lower end portions are inserted with fastening screws to be fastened to fastening portions 6715 (see FIG. 269 (a)), and a curved plate; It mainly includes a fitting portion 6737 formed of a shape that can fit with the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the member 6750.

  The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with a complicated cut on the back side. In the decorative pattern, long projections are formed concentrically and arranged along a plurality of circles having different diameters with a center on a portion arranged to face the surface light-emitting portion D1b (see an enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter projection at a position opposed to the surface light-emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light emitted from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). 275 (see FIG. 275 (b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter projection is similarly inclined (light that has traveled along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731). (See FIG. 275 (b)).

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted in the vicinity of the shaft of the long protrusion and proceeds to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then the large diameter further separated from the shaft of the long protrusion. By refracting the light at the location and proceeding to the front side, light can be emitted from a wide area of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Further, on the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape having a triangular shape in a front view and a substantially central portion swelling toward the front side is formed so as to be regularly and densely arranged. There is provided a decorative recess 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape at a position on the front side of D1b.

  With the decorative recess 6731a, the intensity of surface light emission on the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be varied (gradual intensity can be imparted). That is, light is collected at the center side of the concave portion due to the shape of the decorative concave portion 6731a, so that the decorative concave portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emission mode than other portions.

  The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending ends thereof come into contact with the electric decoration substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extending ends of the inner extending portions 6732 extend over the entire vertical direction. A portion that does not abut on the extended end portion of the outer extension portion 6733 while being in contact with the illuminated substrate 6720 is formed.

  That is, the outer extension portion 6733 includes the separation end portion 6733a that is formed so as to have an extension length that is shorter than the thickness of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and does not come into contact with the electric decoration substrate 6720 and is separated therefrom. In the present embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to enter and exit from the region between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 satisfactorily, so that it is possible to prevent heat from being trapped.

  Further, in the case where the LED chip D1 is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720 when the illuminated substrate 6720 is in contact with the entire surface of the illuminated substrate 6720 like the inner extended portion 6732. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732 is increased, the area where the LED chip D1 is arranged is more limited.

  On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electric decoration board 6720, the LED chip D1 is located behind the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. Can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extension portion 6733.

  The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left wall portion (opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) of the inner extension portion 6732 is provided with a ridge having a semicircular cross section. The uneven shape formed in a manner to be aligned in the shape is formed. Accordingly, the light emitted to the left through the inner extending portion 6732 emits surface light (spreads radially), which makes it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

  As described later, when a part of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling on the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are visually recognized. However, at a position distant from the fin 6735, the light traveling along the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is more visible than the light D1p. (The magnitude of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

  Thus, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each of the vertically arranged regions. It should be noted that the difference in the form of light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

  For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner And can be visually recognized by being changed for each of the regions arranged.

  The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed to have the same thickness without tapering between the front and rear. It mainly comprises a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed substantially linearly when viewed from the rear, and a V-shaped rib 6734b which is bent and formed substantially V-shaped when viewed from the rear.

  The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the jagged processing on the line is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light in a plane), but in one direction. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly, so that when viewing the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right directions, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized as a mixture.

  That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed as a vertically long part that can be viewed in the left-right direction, light passing through the long rib 6734 is prevented from reaching the eyes of the player in the form of surface light emission. Therefore, a player who visually recognizes the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the left and right can easily visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The linear ribs 6734a are arranged two by two in the upper and lower directions, and are formed so as to extend in the direction inclining toward the upper and lower center positions toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014; see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is coupled to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is spaced from the outer extension 6733.

  Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass directly through the left end 6734a1 and directly enter the inner extension 6732, while light passing through the right end 6734a2 does not pass through the outer extension 6733. The energy of light is reduced in the gap between the two.

  As a result, the brightness visually recognized near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, a portion visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is visually recognized as being bright, whereas a portion visually recognized through the outer extending portion 6733 is visually recognized as being dark.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of the light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the light passing through the left end portion 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a is reduced. The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, near the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (intermediate position) away from the left end portion 6734a1, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. Since it is possible to visually recognize the color and brightness, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the side effect device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while both ends 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The reason why the bent position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is arranged to face the bent position.

  That is, by shifting the position for receiving the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light emitting portion D1a is shifted to the connecting position. Since the incidence can be suppressed, the loss of light incident from the V-shaped rib 6734b to the fin 6735 can be reduced.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to the function of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b is allowed to directly enter the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while light passing through both end portions 6734b2 is emitted to the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light is reduced in the gap between the two.

  As a result, the brightness visually recognized near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, a portion visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is visually recognized as being bright, whereas a portion visually recognized through the outer extending portion 6733 is visually recognized as being dark.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is The light that has passed through and entered the inside extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inside extending portion 6732.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easy to be visually recognized in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (intermediate position) apart from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. Since it is possible to visually recognize the color and brightness, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the side effect device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The fin 6735 is formed so as to decrease in thickness from the extended base end toward the distal end, and has a distal curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and a distal bent fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , Mainly comprising.

  The tip curved fin 6735a is formed such that upper and lower inner edges are curved, and a triangular wave (jagged) notch is formed densely on the left side surface (the inner side surface of the front frame 10014) to form a light diffusion portion. , The right side (the outer side of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  The tip bending fin 6735b has a sloped surface in which the extending tip is inclined rearward from the upper and lower ends toward the upper and lower centers, and has an inclined surface that intersects the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusing portion is formed by forming a notch of a triangular wave (jagged shape) densely on the inner side surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  These fins 6735 are formed such that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, since the left end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light (mainly emitted from the front end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a Is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inside extending portion 6732 side (back side, root side), and the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily made bright.

  In addition, behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is joined to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the long rib 6734 and the inside extending portion 6732 are joined, and the inside extending by the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734. The setting portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, light emission can be performed by combining light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a. Thus, the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The manner in which the light passes through the side surface can be changed from the difference in the manner of forming the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735. In other words, light passing through the left side surface can be visually recognized as uniform light from the surface light emission effect of the notch, but light passing through the right side surface has no surface light emission effect. Light can be visually recognized as local light. In addition, it goes without saying that the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

  One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed in the assembled state (FIG. 266) of the horizontal effect device 6700, and only two positions are disposed at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced.

  As a result, when the positional relationship between the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light-emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is shifted (for example, the positional shift is caused by vibration caused by operation of the player or vibration caused by opening and closing of the front frame 10014). Since the maintenance work for returning the position to the case) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal production device 6700, the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty is low and the time is shortened).

  The fitting portion 6737 is concavely provided in the left-right direction with an inclined shape that tapers toward the rear side, and aligns and positions the light receiving member 6730 with components of the covered units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. And a single concave portion 6737a which is further concaved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are limited (reduced) to one place where the concave portion 6737a is provided (the place where the fastening portion 6753 is provided) on the inner extending portion 6732 side. In addition, the position shift and the position shift with respect to the constituent members of the covered units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the case where the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal presentation device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screw does not transmit light, so that the more fastening locations, the more the shadow is likely to occur. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is increased, light is separated at the fastening portion, and there is a possibility that the light effect effect is reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening portions is reduced, the supporting force is reduced, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the horizontal rendering device 6700 is deformed from the root by a load applied from a player or a load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, and the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the supporting force. ing.

  Thereby, the horizontal production device 6700 is disposed between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light production location and the electric decoration board 6720 on the side of the game area (the glass unit 16; see FIG. 265). However, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points.

  Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed so as to be able to travel to the rear side via the concave portion 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal rendering device 6700 along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the concave portion 6737a is arranged in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and a striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via a fastening portion 6753 fitted into the concave portion 6737a. The main body curved portion 6751 is formed so as to allow light to travel to the rear side. That is, the light is formed to be able to travel toward the back side (the opposite side to the light irradiation direction) of the electric decoration substrate 6720.

  Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a portion where the fastening screw is fastened, and is considered to be unsuitable for a light emission effect because the fastening screw is likely to be a shadow. However, in the present embodiment, the intermediate connection is provided on both the upper and lower sides of the fastening portion 6753. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw up and down, so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by allowing light to travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

  In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is illustrated in an enlarged manner. Of the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, light traveling in a direction in which the angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction is small enters the light-receiving surface portion 6731 while gently refracting, and passes through the decorative concave portion 6731a. The light is further refracted and collected. Thereby, the light emission intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative concave portion 6731a can be increased.

  As described above, the light emission mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is such that the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative concave portion 6731a increases, centering on the decorative concave portion 6731a in which the light intensity is increased by light collection. It is a mode that becomes lower.

  At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative concave portion 6731a, the light is gathered on the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. Compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is viewed without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the viewed light can be increased.

  That is, due to the function of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is irradiated with light having higher intensity (light that can be visually recognized in the vicinity of the decorative concave portion 6731a) than when directly viewing the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. The light intensity is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than directly viewing the light, and the light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player via the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Returning to FIG. 270, a member that covers the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member whose rear side is open is provided. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 constituting the cup-shaped member will be described.

  FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

  After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, whereby the members are fixed inseparably.

  The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed of a colorless, transparent, and light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741 is formed. A fitted plate portion 6742 connected to the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741 with a step, and a rear end portion of the main body plate portion 6741; A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear side to the rear, a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at a position separated from the projecting portion 6743 and configured to allow a fastening screw to be screwed in from the rear side, And a plurality of insertion holes 6745 that are formed in the plate portion 6741 in a size that allows a fastening screw to be inserted.

  The main body plate portion 6741 is provided with a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left surface, and protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the concave shape. , And the right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

  The concavo-convex forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in such a manner as to fill a hexagonal pyramid that is disposed so as to taper leftward, and has an effect similar to that of a reflector. Thereby, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force is applied. Can be prevented from cracking or breaking. Further, the contact friction when sliding the base member 6710 to assemble the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 can be reduced.

  Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when a shock is given from the player or a load is applied when the front frame 10014 is opened or closed. By making it difficult, the durability can be improved, and the assembling of the side effect device 6700 can be facilitated.

  The fitted plate portion 6742 is formed on the right side surface with a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction, and a front-rear direction formed in a step along the groove portion 6742a at a step between the main body plate portion 6741. Hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

  The protruding portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted into the positioning hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. It is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through.

  Further, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions close to the outside of the right edge of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, since the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the concave portions of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 274 (b)), the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member with respect to the flat plate member 6740 are provided. 6730 can be prevented from being displaced.

  The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are provided at four locations vertically. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at the four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of the fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

  The curved plate member 6750 is disposed so as to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, and is curved and formed so as to expand leftward toward the rear side. The curved plate member 6750 is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, and is transparent and colorless. Body part 6751 formed of a conductive resin and having a plurality of stripes on the inner surface thereof, and a curved plate part which is disposed so as to move in parallel to the right from the body curvature part 6751 and is located on the front side of the body curvature part 6751. Corresponding to the fitted plate portion 6752 which is connected to the fitted plate portion 6742 so as to be connected to the edge with a step, a plurality of fastening portions 6753 in which fastening screws can be screwed in from the rear side, and the insertion hole 6745. A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that the fastening screws can be screwed in at the positions where the fastening screws are to be inserted, and a plurality of insertion portions in which the fastening screws are bored at the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 so as to be able to be inserted in the front-rear direction. And 6755 mainly includes a plurality of through holes 6756 which fastening screws are drilled to be inserted in the longitudinal direction in the front side edge portion of the fitting plate portions 6752, a.

  The main body curved portion 6751 has a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting from the right side to the right in a triangular shape tapering toward the rear side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the upper and lower centers, and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction at the front side portion, a flat partitioning portion 6751c for partitioning the stripe shape by a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed by a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin strip on the inner surface near the rear end.

  The decorative projecting portion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. In addition, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 with the curved plate member 6750.

  Thus, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for positioning with the light receiving member 6730. Accordingly, even in a configuration in which the fastening portion 6753 is provided only at one place in the upper and lower central portions (small) as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling.

  The flat partition portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Accordingly, when light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat partition portion 6751c, and thus is visually recognized as clear light. Can be done.

  On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions partitioned by the flat partition portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the curved tip fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

  The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is clearly visible. Can be done.

  On the other hand, light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

  The fitted plate portion 6752, like the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, has a step between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction and a main body curved portion 6751 on the left side surface. And a longitudinal hole 6752b formed in a direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and details thereof will be described later.

  The fastening portion 6753 is a portion which is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged so as to enter the concave portion of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 269 ( a) and FIG. 274 (b)), the displacement of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

  The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is provided at a position (four places) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since the plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the protruding portions 6743 and the fastening portions 6744, when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 is reduced. The wobble can be suppressed. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 in the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so that the locations where light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced, so that the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking light. Large area can be secured.

  The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which a fastening screw can be inserted from the rear side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6664 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side. (See FIG. 277).

  The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed such that the inner side surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 is opposed to the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). Is done. Thereby, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6664 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is inadvertently provided. It can be prevented from being removed.

  The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 forward and backward along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a main body plate portion 6761 that is a flat plate portion having a shape that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a cover member 6760 formed by bending the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 so as to cover the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and extends to the left rear of the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions vertically separated from the center in the vertical direction by approximately the same distance and extends. A plurality of connecting extension portions 6763 connected at the ends and a plurality of fastening screws provided on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and formed to be capable of being screwed into fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750. A fastening portion 6764 and a proximal fastening portion disposed at the rear end of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and formed to allow a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 to be screwed therein. 6 65 (see FIG. 279), and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 which are protruded to the rear side from the rear end of the main plate portion 6761, mainly comprising a.

  The main body plate portion 6761 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is protruded leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

  The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the overhang portion is disposed to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. This can prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced leftward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and protruded rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a.

  The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and the protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhang portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the main body bending portion 6751, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced rightward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The connection extending portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a protruding rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear hole 6751b.

  The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge portion at the connection position of the connection extension portion 6763, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the protruding portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced rightward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Inadvertent removal can be prevented.

  Thus, cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is regulated by the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b, 6752b, and the curved plate member is regulated by the relationship between the fastening portion 6764 and the guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a. 6750 is restricted from moving to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

  The base end fastening portion 6765 is provided at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end of the base member 6710 can be screwed therein. Formed. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

  The projecting portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the positioning hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. In addition, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are provided with the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760 disposed at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. The displacement of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 280 (b) is the CCLXXXb of FIG. FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 in the -CCLXXXb line, and FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving line in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line in FIG. FIG. 147 is a cross-sectional view of member 6730.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the front-back distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be made to enter the long rib 6734 without leakage, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to easily advance to the front side. .

  In addition, at a position where the long rib 6734 is not disposed, the front-back distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or longer than the front-rear width (formation length) of the long rib 6734. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area as a location where light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are provided on the assumption that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. Light can be easily distinguished from the light.

  That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be linearly defined light that travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or light can travel through the long rib 6734. While the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as light that brightens a small-scale area, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is uniform light (light light) ).

  Thus, the present embodiment is compared with the present embodiment in which a lens for condensing light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 is opposed to the illuminated substrate 6720 as in the related art, and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize light (plane light) that spreads over the area of the illuminated substrate 6720, while allowing bright light (linear light) to be visually recognized in a small area. Then, with these different lights, an effect of making only one of them visible or both of them visible can be easily executed by control. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the light effect can be improved.

  Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is employed for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b emit light. By changing the color and brightness of the image, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

  As shown in FIG. 280 (b), the side surface in the thickness direction of the fin 6735 has the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) and the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side surface (the front frame 10014). (Inner side surface of the front side) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front side end (toward the right side). Therefore, the normal line on the left side surface does not point directly to the side (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but a direction having a component facing the front side. Turn to. Thus, light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed to the inner extending portion 6732. Can be advanced. The progress of this light will be described with reference to a schematic diagram.

  FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280 (a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a are schematically illustrated.

  Although the intensity of light emitted from the LED becomes smaller as the angle between the surface of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface becomes larger, the light itself is emitted radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, and therefore, the following description will be given in order.

  The arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that enters the end of the long rib 6734, travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. . The light that has reached the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, so that light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , Can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, light of sufficient brightness can be easily made visible to the player.

  The arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the left side (the inside of the front frame 10014) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed in a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

  The arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of the light that passes through the long rib 6734, proceeds directly to the inner extending portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface. Since this light has not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, the light can be viewed brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

  An arrow L23d indicates a traveling direction of light that cannot reach the inside of the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as a coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed such that its length in the thickness direction is shorter than that of the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and on the left side (the inner side of the front frame 10014). Since the jagged concave portion is formed, the long rib 6734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-back direction.

  Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-rear direction in the same manner, it is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a part (particularly, the long rib In the region (near the left side surface of 6734), entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Thereafter, the arrow L23d reaches the inside extending portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface on the opposite side of the outer extending portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of arrow L23d includes light traveling to the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the back side portion of the illuminated board 6720 can be made to emit light by the illuminated board 6720 provided with the LED chip D1 that irradiates light to the front side on the front side (at least, the illuminated area). Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

  Then, the inner surface of the rear side end of the curved plate member 6750 disposed downstream of the arrow L23d is formed of a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are vertically arranged in rear view (see FIG. 276). Thus, the light that travels along the arrow L23d and reaches the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner in the vertical direction, and the light can illuminate the glass unit 16 brightly.

  Therefore, the light effect can be performed by combining the light irradiated toward the glass unit 16 from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 and the light advanced by the arrow L23d. Design flexibility can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be reduced. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in the angle with the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. The reflected light has an energy loss corresponding to the light transmitted when reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, when the light reaches the inner extending portion 6732, the light is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness. As described above, the difference in the brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction can be reduced, and the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 can be easily made uniform before and after.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 disposed on the left side, the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the right is mostly formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or similar shape). As a special part that is not symmetric, the formation of the long rib 6734 (projection to the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). Thereby, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

  This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the intention is to maintain the effect produced by causing the light to travel to the fins 6735 on the left side, but to suppress the light traveling to the game area side due to the light traveling to the long rib 6734.

  That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the point where the shooting ball enters the game area, that is, the left side of the game area, the intensity of light emitted inward (the game area side) from the horizontal rendering device 6700 is improved. It is aimed at. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shooting ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shooting of the game ball.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, a ball fired by a right strike (highest firing intensity) almost always flows down, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball for adjusting the firing intensity of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls in a short period of time will flow down a narrow area continuously, light is radiated to that area and reflected on the game balls, resulting in the effect of the effect using light. Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to reduce the intensity of light on the right side of the game area, and by facilitating the emission of light from the side effect device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in the present embodiment. Thus, the effect can be improved.

  The arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is light emitted in a direction in which the angle between the long rib 6734 and the axis X23 is large (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). The direction of travel is shown. This light is reflected on the inner surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light. The long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Since the intensity of the light traveling at the arrow L23e is very small in the first place because the light is extended to the position, the light can be configured as light that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  Accordingly, the light traveling along the arrow L23e is visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, so that it is possible to prevent the light effect from being reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emission effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the concave portion 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b reaches the left side surface of the fitting portion 6737 through both the wall portions of the concave portion 6737a, similarly to the contents described with the arrows L23c and L23d.

  The concave portion 6737a is configured as a concave portion in which the fastening portion 6753 (refer to FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide forward and backward, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of the light emitting effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 can be aligned. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing the displacement, and it is possible to reduce the places where the effect of the light emitting effect is reduced.

  In addition, a concave portion 6737a is provided in the vicinity of the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732, whereby the fastening screw The area is prevented from becoming too dark. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the degree of reduction in the effect of the light emitting effect.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board 6570 is provided on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 has been described. However, the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment is different from the operation device 10300 By arranging the effect device 18800 provided with the electric decoration board 18830 below, the light-emitting effect can be executed even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with an effect device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the other configurations are the same. Only the device 18800 will be described, and description of other components will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the rendering device 18800 is a device for emitting light in which the back side and the upper surface side are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side of the lower plate unit 6400. It is arranged between the operation handle 51.

  This rendering device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light-emitting rendering changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operational rendering by a structural device. Next, an internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to describe a structural device.

  FIG. 284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. FIG. Note that FIG. 284 (b) schematically shows a support mode of the illuminated substrate 18830.

  As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the rendering device 18800 is provided with a coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower plate unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the coupling base member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the joining base member 18810; an electric decoration substrate 18830 arranged in a gap between the joining base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820; and the electric decoration substrate 18830 A light-receiving member 18840 formed so that light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside and fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18850 attached to cover the outer surface of the light-receiving member 18840 And mainly comprising.

  The coupling base member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface in which the wall surface on the front side facing the electric decoration substrate 18830 is inclined downward toward the rear side. The inclination angle of the inclined surface is determined by the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 when the oscillating device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is arranged at the upward position and is in the posture before the operation. The inclined surface is formed at an inclination angle parallel to the inclined surface.

  The illuminated substrate 18830 is provided in parallel with the front wall surface of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. The electric decoration board 18830 mainly includes the LED chip D1, an elongated hole 18831 formed in a vertically long shape, and a leaf spring 18832 for generating an upward biasing force.

  The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length of the long hole 18831 in the vertical direction and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (permissible length) at which the electric decoration substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

  The LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (vertex of a pentagon in the present embodiment) on the front side of the illuminated substrate 18830, and irradiate light in the normal direction of the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a direction in which the light is inclined downward toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in a direction along the front-back direction.

  That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (the player's eyes). Even in the direction away from the light effect), it is possible to prevent the effect of the light effect from being reduced.

  The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and is configured to be able to close an opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion from the back of the plate-shaped portion 18841. And a plurality of extension plate portions 18842 that are extended to the main body.

  The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape whose front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmittance, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the coupling base member 18810 to be fixed to the coupling basic member 18810 by fastening. 18821, and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at a position and size capable of receiving the extension plate portion 18842 in the bottom portion on the back side.

  In this embodiment, since the direction in which the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is removed is set in the left-right direction, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chips D1 are arranged at the vertices of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate portion 18842. Thus, the extension plate portion 18842 can be formed as three plate portions having different widths in the upper and lower portions. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also formed at three different positions in the upper and lower portions with different widths.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extension plate portion 18842 starts to extend along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841, but is formed in a curved plate shape that curves gently. Although the radius of curvature of the curvature can be set arbitrarily, in the present embodiment, the curvature is set to such an extent that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illuminated substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. Accordingly, it is possible to make it easy for the light incident on the extension tip (back side end) of the extension plate portion 18842 to reach the plate portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

  The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage at a portion on the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where light performance is not desired, and can be realized in various modes. For example, a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so as to be able to be pasted or a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member formed to be fittable from the front side, and the bottom of the cup disposed on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chips D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 formed for light passage are formed at the apex positions of.

  Note that the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not need to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and can have similar shapes slightly different in size, as described above. In consideration of the way light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the manner in which the light receiving member 18840 is formed is more important in designing the arrangement of the through holes 18851 than in the arrangement of the LED chip D1. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extension plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

  The operation of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illuminated substrate 18830 can be moved in the first shift direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is provided, with the allowable width of the long hole 18831, and the first shift direction is controlled by the operation. The direction matches the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

  That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the electric decoration board 18830 is configured to be slidable by the vibration. When the illuminated substrate 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate portion 18842 is shifted, so that light emitted from the LED chip D1 is less likely to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

  In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, it is difficult for the light to travel through the extension plate portion 18842, so that the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as being dark. That is, it is not possible to determine whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

  In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the electric decoration board 18830 is suppressed, and the electric decoration board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illuminated substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extension plate portion 18842, and then is totally reflected. To be formed so as to be able to advance to the front side.

  That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1 (when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as being dark), the swing operation member 10310 can be pressed in to operate. , The through hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Therefore, when the vibration effect is being performed and the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, it is necessary to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. Can be. Here, for example, control is performed so that the LED chip D1 emits light when a big hit occurs or when the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Thus, the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be improved.

  Accordingly, the player's willingness to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. Therefore, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is increased, and the player is actually given an interest. The user can be made to operate the swing operation member 10310.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the illuminated substrate 18830 is disposed outside the covering base member 6410, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 18830 may be provided so as to penetrate the covering base member 6410 and enter the inside, and may be capable of abutting on the operation device 10300.

  In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the electric decoration substrate 18830, and the electric decoration substrate 18830 slides not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

  In this case, for example, control may be performed so that the LED chip D1 emits light at a timing other than the timing at which the push instruction as the notification effect is generated. If the lens member 10317 is pushed in at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light (push operation), it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1 from a front view.

  In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in at a timing other than the notification (push operation), it is possible to make it easy to miss a notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is easy to suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 at a timing other than the timing when the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 breaks down early or the operating device is operated unnecessarily many times to generate noise. It can suppress annoying acts.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be dividable left and right. However, the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are formed so that they can be split back and forth. I have. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in the present embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are provided so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and is mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

  The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be dividable on a division plane coinciding with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted through insertion holes 19321 a formed in the upper cover 19321 in a direction orthogonal to the division plane, and The cover 19322 is formed so as to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

  Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the swing operation member 10310 is operated at the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened by the shock of the vibration.

  In addition, since the vibration direction Y17a of the swing operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Is orthogonal to the side view (see FIG. 285), so that it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened by an impact generated by operating the lens member 10317.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the projecting-shaped portion 6413 and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross-sectional view, and the plate thickness is substantially constant at the inclined portion. The projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the embodiment are slightly inclined in the vertical direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment, taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left and right ends of the projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 is compared with the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described in the seventeenth embodiment. Is set closer to the vertical direction.

  In addition, the lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment). (The base end of the recess) is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  When the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is brought into contact with and supported by the base end portion (upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the recessed shape portion 16414, the main body portion is supported at the supporting position. Since the supporting thickness in the up-down direction (vertical direction) of the 6411 can be sufficiently ensured, the deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) is operated can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right ends is changed as compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there is no inclination, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the up-down direction (up-down direction in cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient supporting thickness of the main body 6411 can be ensured.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by forming the cross section in an inverted C-shape when viewed in cross section, the direction in which the protruding portion 6413 and the concave portion 6414 are deformed when subjected to an external force is changed to the left and right center sides. Can be made easier. This makes it possible to reduce the degree of fatigue given by external force, as compared with the case where deformation is possible in both the left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 is damaged earlier. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, an effect of “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed. it can).

  In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the overhang operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap occurs between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and to notice that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not obtained until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated forward in this state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotary claw member 347, the degree of ascending of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending end can be sequentially switched). Thus, it is possible to perform an effect in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the driving motor 342 by operating the driving motor 342 in one direction.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (during the downward movement), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the end and immediately before moving upward. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is continuously pressed, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the convex leg 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the convex leg The configuration in which the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 changes the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400, and switches whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430. good.

  In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more, the flexible member 5420 is operated. Can be increased, and a state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. Can increase the variation of the production.

  For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "press a button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press a button. By performing a display such as "Large chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, so that the button (tilting device 310) is pressed with the specified pressing method. The player's willingness to perform the operation can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from being monotonous.

  The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverted from the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 in magnitude. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can contact each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition that the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 is transmitted to the player, and the player is encouraged to reduce the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force, and it is possible to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged to be able to abut on the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member is provided on condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed in to the end of movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it can be arranged so as not to be in contact with accommodation member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively, but the player can change the effect mode (expectation) by stopping the vibration at the time of pushing in such a way that the surroundings are less noticeable. Difference), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player playing this machine, except for the surrounding players, can feel the change in the production mode. it can.

  In addition, as a variation of the effect, when the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are placed in a position where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desired to cause both of these cases to be able to be brought into contact with each other, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by a difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is axially deformed and the disc cam 5344 comes into contact with the release member 346 to generate a frictional force has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially projects in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable portion, a large frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 as compared with the case where the disk cam 5344 abuts on the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board supporting device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board supporting device 600 arranged at the upper position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the front end portion is the rear side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. 621c may be arranged below the upper surface. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be reduced as compared with the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of bent back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a long path before and after the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend back and forth, it is possible to prevent the launch path from interfering with the foul ball passage 145. Can be made easier.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed faintly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the path that bends up and down is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary projection 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, and the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

  The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha contacts the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within a range of a protrusion length corresponding to the depth of the wiring passage recess 464, and further protrudes therefrom. In the range of the length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated from the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently ensured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base body 461B and the tip body 461T correspond to the speaker room, and the intermediate body 461M corresponds to the duct. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the proximal main body 461B and the distal main body 461T, the base main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the distal main body 461T can be shared. May form a large speaker room.

  In addition, the description has been made assuming that the base-side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal-side main body portion 461T, but the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the same volume may be used. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be the position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, of the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the base body portion 461B and the tip body portion 461T are connected to each other). Although the case where they do not overlap in the direction of connection and the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rib portions adjacent to each other (for example, the rib portions 467d and 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted through an opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and By making it more difficult to perform an illegal act that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the illegal act, it is possible to suppress the illegal act. Here, examples of suppression of fraudulent acts include suppression of fraudulent acts themselves, suppression of gaining fraudulent profits by fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts), and the like.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the assembling operation. Can be done. Accordingly, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 expands and contracts with the rotation thereof or a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 rotates about an axis different from the rotation axis may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the drive-side arm member 910 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 is connected to the tip of the second effecting member 940 so that the second effecting member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing control unit 159 when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state will be described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit rear member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut against each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing control unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board supporting device 600 is fixed, but the upper board supporting device 600 is not fixed, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts to the front side), the portion of the game board 13 disposed to face the operation unit back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere. be able to. Thus, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

  In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device arranged above the inner frame 12 is fixed. Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 which are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it possible to remove the function of determining the state of the board supporting device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 from the multifunctional cover member 171, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 does not come into contact with the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the multifunctional cover member 171 made of a synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, the risk of the multifunctional cover member 171 being damaged can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other uses (for example, use as a wiring cover).

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500 in which light applied to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). (The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate about a suitable axis), so that the mode of light applied to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the correspondence between the mode of the light applied to the center frame 86 and the movable role that protrudes inward of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

  That is, for example, out of the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is disposed on the front side and another surface is disposed. Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side and the case where it is arranged. When the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the side of the movable accessory, the movable accessory disposed opposite to the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the position near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member is lit. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory that is disposed to face the opening 565 over a wide area (wider than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the movable character can be switched.

  In this case, for example, the moving effect can be operated in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion, so that the effect can be improved. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface of the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the moving accessory side. At the timing of turning, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thus, switching to change the position where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a for light emission control.

  In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is collected (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and clear light emission is performed), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is emitted. Diffuse (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving object) can be changed.

  Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a position in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). In this case, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture arranged on the back side of the support plate 510), so that a beam (thin width) light is applied to the moving role object and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving role and the liquid crystal. Accordingly, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position distant from the moving role and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal.

  In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is vulnerable to the extent that the broken portion falls, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling. Is also good. In this case, by detecting that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, by issuing an alarm and controlling to forcibly stop the launching of the ball, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts early, and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss of the gaming machine hall) obtained by the person who commits the wrongdoing.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be used to form a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

  Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall of the slits 815 opposed to the inclined surface 2803T. May be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the concave portion.

  In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of light is changed to the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is described. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is a direction inclining upward in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of the person walking to select the game machine to play. , The light can be easily made to travel. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 can improve the effect of attracting customers.

  Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in regions CCVIc and CCVIe which are regions where light is emitted to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions where light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction. While the light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking, the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the balls stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the balls look brilliant. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting pachinko machines 8010.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed near the left and right centers has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

  Further, both a device formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and a device formed near the left and right centers may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for responding to the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for responding to the problem (easiness of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 may be provided separately.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be able to be assembled (exchanged) is not necessarily described. However, it is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured to be inoperable by a player and performs a vibration effect, an electric decoration substrate that performs a light emission effect, or a substrate box. For example, an object that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by a player may be used.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the magnitude of the frequency at which the load is applied. May be.

  Further, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming the number of grooves to be large while forming the width of the groove to be narrow, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed can be obtained in reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. Can be. When a plurality of grooves are formed, each groove does not necessarily have to extend in the front-rear direction. For example, the grooves may be formed radially in a top view.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 is protruded below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 and can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the vertical direction than the finger of the worker carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, a finger can be inserted into a gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 (it can be used as a finger hook portion), so that the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. .

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operation device 10300 to reduce the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a member that generates an elastic urging force (a coil spring, a torsion spring, or the like) may be used, or a device for damping a damper or the like may be used.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor flexibility and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the operation device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is driven to rotate about the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described. However, the drive motor may be in various forms. For example, a load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 from a rotary gear rotated by a drive motor by a simple gear mechanism load transmission, or a mechanism (for example, a rotary cam) intervening in the transmission path may not be shifted to the gear mechanism. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 through the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b, so that the lever member 10340 may be formed to be able to idle when an overload occurs.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction orthogonal to a plane on which a load is applied when operating the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an operation portion that does not move on the plane is provided (for example, when there is an operation portion that performs a pressing operation in a diagonal left and right direction), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation portion is determined. The direction found (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the direction of the fastening, or the fastening part may be set for the operation part where the operation instruction is frequently performed (ignoring the operation part where the operation instruction is rare). The direction may be set. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are united by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, they may be combined with an adhesive, or they may be combined by fitting with matching shapes.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is high (the direction along the up and down direction) and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 are described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, the shape of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, so that an effect of dynamically changing the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration occurs can be performed. it can. The mode of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct drive type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

  Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by irradiating the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are changed according to changes in the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. An effect can be produced so as to change the appearance of light visually recognized through the cover 10322.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that bending can be easily suppressed irrespective of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity of the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened in the direction is improved. The difference can be increased.

  In this case, for example, by setting the forming direction of the right and left streak portions D24a along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover are generated by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the upward position. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position is increased with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  Conversely, the direction in which the left and right streak portions D24a are formed may be a direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position, the swing operation member is The bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the 10310 is arranged at the upward position can be increased. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be detached from the inner case member 10330 and the attachment of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is easy has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled therewith. In this case, at the time of assembling to the inner case member 10330, the assembling can be easily performed by bending the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed after the subsequent assembling to the front frame 10014. By doing so, a displacement suppressing effect due to interference between the projecting interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be exerted.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-shaped support portion 6426 up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R, and the fastening screw extends above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. It may be configured to be inserted through an insertion hole formed in the portion. In this case, not only when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward but also when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the load serving as the base of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450, and the load can be dispersed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 is such that the size of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b fits the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although the case where it is formed with a possible thickness (a dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be configured to be shorter than the size of the gap (the dimensions may be such that a gap between members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the contact (collision) between the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in a flat plate shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is formed in a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582, and the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with the shape, so that they fit together when assembled. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partitioning member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 to the front side in a state where the partitioning member 6560 is located at the position of the assembled state.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in the cross-sectional view has been described. However, the point is that the gap increases toward the front side, and it is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one of the side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, for a player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the opalescent member 6541 and the partition member 6560 disposed behind the player. Is described, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily recognized as a series of regions. It is not something that can be done. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a may be formed in milky white in advance.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the front side, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened by a fastening screw in a fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the rear side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by selecting an arrangement space required by components arranged near the fastening position and a side on which displacement is to be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 in accordance with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510; however, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven so that its front-rear width can be changed, and the degree of the compressive force that may be generated due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

  In other words, if the partition member 6560 is driven to reduce the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 by displacing the rear side edge of the partition member 6560 to the front side, even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed, the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 can be connected to each other. A gap can still be generated between them, and a compression force can be hardly generated. Since the degree of holding the illuminated substrate 6570 can be reduced due to the low generation of the compressive force, the degree of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

  In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the illuminated substrate 6570 in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 can be deformed can be changed. The appearance of the irradiated light can be changed.

  In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (an interval between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is provided), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control, so that the partition member 6560 and the back support member are extended. It may be configured to change to a state where a compressive force can be generated between the member and the member 6580.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that support the electric decoration substrate 6570 therebetween are stacked and arranged on the front side of the front frame 10014. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the illuminated substrate 6570 may be arranged below the back support member 6580, the illuminated substrate 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member distant from the acoustic device 6610), The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 inserted into the partition member 6560. In any case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illuminated board 6570 can be suppressed.

  In addition, while the back support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 disposed on the back side of the front frame 10014, the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You may do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other. Therefore, when the front frame 10014 is closed, the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560. It is possible to easily replace the illuminated substrate 6570 to be replaced or return the positional displacement.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is disposed so as to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise may be generated. Although the description has been given of a case in which it is possible to grasp the information, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that light travels near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the shadow of the fastening screw can be visually recognized from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of a shadow, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be grasped, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw is found compared to the case of grasping with abnormal noise. Can be made easier.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is set to be a direction inclined vertically with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or a portion tilted up and down or left and right may be mixed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed to have a shape that extends linearly in front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape extending in a curved line, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface to suppress diffusion of light from the side surface. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light-shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, a decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fin 6735 can be easily suppressed. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to a side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light of the front side edge can be emphasized, and if it covers a part of the side surface (for example, using a light-shielding tape having a polka dot-shaped hole), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape, the effect of producing light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long ribs 6734 are not extended to the back side in the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended to the back side, it may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Also in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, a case in which light traveling along the long ribs 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front side end of the fin 6735 to improve the light effect in the front view of the fin 6735. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (a notch (cut) or the like) for emitting at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surfaces are inclined in such a manner that the thickness gradually decreases as the fins 6735 move toward the front side, so that light reaches the front ends of the fins 6735 before the fins 6735 reach the front end. The configuration may be such that light is easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by being configured to easily reach the side surface.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is reduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the nails may be fitted based on the shape relationship or fixed by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the shadow effect of the fastening screw from lowering the light effect.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the rear side of the coupling base member 18810, and the illumination board 18830 may be slid by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (the direction along the direction Y17a) is different from the vibration direction of the speaker box (approximately the front-back direction), the displacement mode of the electric decoration board 18830 can be complicated.

  In addition, by generating a sound having a frequency outside the audible sound range from the speaker, a silent effect that allows the player to slide the illuminated board 18830 while maintaining a state where the player cannot hear the sound is executed. can do. At this time, by configuring the vibration of the illuminated board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the player touching the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling the silent production to be executed when a situation change advantageous to the player occurs, the interest in touching the operation device 10300 can be improved.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the illuminated substrate 18830 is supported in a floating (slidable) manner in the vicinity of the operation device 10300; however, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative board 6570 of the presentation device 6500 may be supported in a floating manner. In this case, a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending frontward from a gap between the pair of left and right sound devices 6610 may be floatably supported, or may be fixed to a wall portion of the sound device 6610. May be supported so as to be able to float. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to up and down, but may be left and right or oblique.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to follow any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or may be arranged between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, in the middle). (Angle) of the reference line may extend along the reference line X19.

  The direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the operation frequency of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions are generated. When the frequency of occurrence of the operation is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. .

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points where the player pushes in from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means pressed by a player, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and in a position in which the operating means is protruded from the player with respect to the first state. And an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side of the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the effect is performed in a manner that enhances the expectation of a big hit for the player at the advanced position, the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. However, it was necessary to design the operating means to have a high strength. In this case, there is a problem in that the operation means becomes heavier as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is set to the direction from the back side to the near side for the player, so that the straight up and down linear movement is performed. In this case, the part that cannot be operated is generated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, so that the momentum of the pushing can be released.

  In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulder and elbow from the player's playing position, it is difficult to apply a force in the forward direction, so the force exerted by the player on the operating means should be naturally reduced. Can be.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft disposed on the back side of the player, configured to be capable of tilting up and down around the shaft, and having the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operation means in a direction opposite to a player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the second state in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed easily, so that a new pushing operation method with less pushing acceleration can be provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

  With a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side of the little finger of the left hand is placed near the axle bar, and the thumb side is turned to the operating means from the state where the hand is placed near the operating means with the palm rising up and down Examples include a method of operating in a manner of tilting down, a method of placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft bar, and a method of operating in a manner of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the palm is arranged in a posture facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means is set to a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the operability in the first state is ensured while the second operation is performed. It is possible to prevent destruction by the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is automatically operable, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine A4 acts in a direction in which it does not act in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the driving unit from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further comprises a maintenance means operated by the driving means. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of changing a phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed. In both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is maintained in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. With this configuration, it is possible to change the movement width of the operation device by the urging unit. Therefore, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

  In the gaming machine A5, in the maintenance state, the maintenance unit is configured to be movable in the biasing direction of the biasing unit, and the moving speed of the maintenance unit is increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotating unit. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was only caused by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode in which the operation means moves following the maintenance means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting unit is provided inside the operation device and irradiates light to a player, and the light emitting means is disposed in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the viewpoint of a player, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is illuminated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. The area of the operation means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light is enlarged, so that the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming. In this manner, the power of the player during the operation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the display means to change the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means. Gaming machine A8, which is a feature.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to view the image on the display means.

<The point that the repulsion during normal operation is small while responding to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation device capable of allowing a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which a movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than the first state. A first driving unit for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing unit for generating an urging force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation of a player.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by a spring, and the operating means is automatically operated by a drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means is slow, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform a continuous hit operation. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. Since the return can be speeded up by pushing back the operating means by the two drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a continuous hit determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of a stroke operation unit within a predetermined time, and controls the second drive unit based on a detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. A gaming machine B2, which determines whether to drive.

  According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive unit based on the detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. Therefore, the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press operation). The second driving means operates until the operation is performed), thereby preventing the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

  In the gaming machine B2, an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the end position, and determining whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a moving direction judging means for judging a moving direction of the operating means based on a time relationship between a detected value of the end detecting means and a detected value of the position difference detecting means; The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction of return is the direction of returning to the first state from the pushing end.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction to return to the first state from the pushing end, that is, the player's hand Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separating, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

  Therefore, the second driving device operates in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and it is possible to suppress the high load on the player's hand.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a driving force for moving the operation means can be generated by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation unit is provided, and the second drive unit elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. Supporting means, wherein the supporting means increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving unit is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting unit and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force and the driving force, the driving force applied to the operation means can be adjusted while the rotation of the driving motor is maintained. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the control can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

  In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and contacts the support frame based on the operation means being disposed at the end position. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means. Accordingly, since the support means supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration directing device>
A detecting sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring a speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detecting sensor, and measuring means for the measuring means Threshold determining means for determining whether or not the measurement value measured by the control means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, the threshold determining means When the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means increases as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when it is emphasized that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered, and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although the operation speed can be reduced to reduce the possibility of the operation means being damaged, the force required for the operation of the player increases, and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a weak player. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determining unit determines whether the speed of the operating unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsive unit is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and to reduce the speed of the operating means only when necessary. Therefore, the resilience means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion unit includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation unit, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. Wherein the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is performed, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operation means is disposed at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where the operating means can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation unit and the voice coil motor.

  In the gaming machine C3, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other in the gaming machine C1 or C2, control is performed to increase a current flowing through the voice coil motor.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other, the control to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor is performed, so that the operation means is improved. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operation means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the control unit and the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity. Therefore, even when the moving speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is not delayed. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion unit compares the value measured by the threshold determination unit with a value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold when the value measured by the threshold determination unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold. A game machine C5, wherein a movable area of an end of the repulsion means and an end opposite to a side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the rebounding means, which is the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means, is reduced, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<The transmission of the driving force is blocked by the clutch to prevent breakage of the driving means>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, wherein the releasing means reduces the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 for canceling transmission.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing unit is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving unit and the operating unit via the transmitting unit becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disabled), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine D1, the driving unit is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, A gaming machine D2 characterized in that release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is being performed in the second direction.

  Here, when it is determined whether the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit, the operating unit is operated by the player when driving the driving unit in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. In such a case, a large load may be generated on the driving unit. For this reason, the degree of freedom of the effect at the time of effecting by operating the operation means is reduced.

  When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the locking member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button operation can be made in two modes (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but in both cases, the drive force must be interrupted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. In addition, the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

  As a method of canceling the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is, for example, a meaning excluding a circumferential direction when the driving unit rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means comprises a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Are provided respectively, and are provided with engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth are such that both surfaces opposed to the operating direction of the driving means are separated from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 comprising a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in such a manner that the distance from the contact surface decreases.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages the driving force in a state in which the releasing means is engaged with the pressing surface which is pressed. On the other hand, since the transmission means is provided with the engagement teeth which are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces opposed to the operation direction of the drive means are tapered so as to be away from the contact surface, the transmission means is moved from the drive means by the engagement of the engagement teeth. The driving force can be released.

  Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. Load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving unit between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

  Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

  In addition, in the release state, the resistance does not disappear completely and the resistance is restored periodically. Thus, when the player releases his / her hand, the button can be started to be operated within a short time.

  That is, when the button is driven “as an effect”, if the player is holding the button, one phase of the button operation elapses. If the player releases his hand on the way and moves from the end of the one phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started moving since the load on the player has been released" is reduced. Can come off.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his / her hand and the load is released. This makes it possible to produce a feeling that the player has begun to move because the load on the player has been released.

  The gaming machine D4, wherein in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission unit and the release unit is formed in a saw-tooth shape that engages with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means early. That is, when there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means abut on the plane, and the transmission of the release means is performed. It is possible to suppress the stop of the movement along the direction approaching or moving away from the means. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation of the operation means can be started early.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, release of the driving force transmission is not limited to any one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operation means. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is such that when the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the drive unit for a predetermined period from the start of the operation is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 has a different operation after a lapse of the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode in the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation means.

  Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operation unit with information that is beneficial to the player, such as a jackpot expectation, the player can operate the operation unit for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation unit changes. You can watch over.

  Also, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and Can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the projection of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, A first means for operating the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, wherein the first means suppresses a position of the operation means from changing from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means End means for variably forming a movement end of the game machine, wherein the first means suppresses a change in position of the operation means by engaging with the operation means, One of the means Releasing means for applying a load for releasing engagement with the means to the first means, wherein the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the moving end of the operating means in the end means are single. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being driven by the driving means of (1).

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam and fixed at a first position is fixed, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the operation means is extended by the urging force of the urging means. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhang operation of the operating means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking, the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking is variously changed. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing have been operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required, and the arrangement space for the driving means is increased.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the driving means for changing the end position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. Thus, the number of detectors such as position sensors for detecting the state of the release load unit can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

  In addition, as a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection which rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection, For example, there is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are desynchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are synchronized in other phases.

  In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the operation of the release load means. A game machine E3 characterized in that whether or not the game machine operates synchronously is switched.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the operation of the release load means. It is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate synchronously, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation unit is supported eccentrically with respect to a rotation axis of the first rotation member, and the release load unit is configured to rotate the second rotation member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that the second rotating means A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

  According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and the operation means moves toward the second position, a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared. , Can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with a similar configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position, the operating means, and a second position to which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. And a receiving means arranged so as to be able to contact the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, while the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot be brought into contact with the receiving device, when the operating device is disposed at the second position, the vibrating portion can be brought into contact with the receiving device. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means operable by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibrations to the player via the operating means or a frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, since the vibration is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. . For this reason, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation in which the operating means is released at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some embodiments, the start of the vibration may not be ready before the hand is released, and the player may not notice the vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section contacts the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating section is continuously vibrated, the vibration can be made to be felt by the player only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player, Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to protrude into an occupied area occupied when the operation means is disposed at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 changes to the contact state when the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating section can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, an effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without any particular change in the driving mode.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via supporting means having spring elasticity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the positioning of the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of the vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibration means during the vibration can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means abut. That is, when the vibrating part moves in the direction approaching the receiving means due to the expansion and contraction of the supporting means, it is possible to give momentum.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means may have a deformation resistance along a movement direction of the operation means lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to a difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

  Thus, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating part and the receiving means can be made different. .

  In addition, as a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the support means is formed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibratory means In the case of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a support means, and a rail for guiding the operating means to operate in the direction along the operation direction. And a coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operation direction of the operating means.

  In the gaming machine F3, a portion where the vibrating portion contacts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is separate from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration unit from being transmitted to the drive unit via the operation unit and the transmission unit, so that it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive unit. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

  Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent a player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

  In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a portion of the frame of the gaming machine, a portion near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, or an edge portion of a glass frame, etc. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operation unit, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit, wherein the transmission unit includes a deforming unit that is elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting a driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, a connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, There is a problem that a load is accumulated in a connection portion between the motor and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connection portions may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, and the driving means and the transmission means The load applied to the connection portion with the connection can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, and the deformed portion forms a connection portion with a rotation shaft of the cam member. A gaming machine G2 wherein a fixing force is generated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion for performing elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a portion for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a projecting portion projecting in parallel with a rotation axis, and the projecting portion and the operating means are connected to each other. The gaming machine G3, wherein the rotating shaft is inclined.

  Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member, so that the projecting portion is attached to the cam member. The cam member can be easily formed of a single member as compared with a case where the cam member is slid, and the members can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the deformable portion to elastic deformation is compared with the rotational axis of the cam member in a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational axis and the protruding portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the convex portion and an extending direction of the rotating shaft is used as an axis. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformed portion for each direction, the state after the deformed portion is elastically deformed in the rotation axis direction is better. As compared with the state before the elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. Accordingly, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member is going to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided at a predetermined distance in a direction parallel to a rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deforming portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member is changed in posture, and the cam member and the friction member are changed. Abut on each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

  A gaming machine G6 comprising, in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is displaced in an inclined manner with respect to an axis.

  Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detecting means for detecting the displacement deviation becomes shorter, but as the arrangement interval of the detecting means becomes smaller, the configuration of the detecting means becomes more complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to adopt a configuration that is inexpensive and detects the occurrence of overload early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether at least a part of the cam member is displaced inclining with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. Thus, when an overload occurs, the load applied to the driving unit can be reduced.

<Strand with ball thread prevention. Gaming machine H>
Of the gaming balls fired into the game area, in a gaming machine having a foul ball passage through which a foul ball flowing down toward the launching device can pass, the foul ball passage allows the flowing down game ball to pass therethrough. A gaming machine H1 comprising one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act is performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball with the thread connected into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, an illegal tool with game balls connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls that has been gripped, the thread can be removed from the guide path, and the other ball can be passed through the foul ball passage. A game ball can be connected to the other game ball by a thread, so that a load is externally applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained by manipulating

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means can be used even when a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by hindering the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profit.

  In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends a flow path of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed with the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

  The gaming machine H3, wherein in the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes a load means for applying a load to the backward flowing object without applying a load to the flowing game ball on the inner corner side of the bending.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object flowing backward (for example, a thread-like member) by the load unit.

  In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the concave portion, the collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 is provided with regulating means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage is regulated by the regulating means. When a load is generated, the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened by deforming the load means outward of the foul ball passage.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a part for discharging a game ball to be discharged from a payout device, the receiving plate being a plate in which a foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above a discharge-side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the game ball dispensed from the dispensing device is configured to pass before the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. When an illegal act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area is performed, the payout game ball is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of a payout ball discharging portion, which is a portion for discharging game balls paid out from the payout device, to a receiving plate, which is a plate where a foul ball arrives first on the front side of the front door, is provided. The gaming machine H7, wherein the lower end of the outlet side outlet of the foul ball passage is lower than the lower end.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the paid out game balls.

<Structure of board holding. Gaming machine I>
A game device used during a game, and a receiving device that is open on one side that is opposite to the game device and that can receive the game device from the one side, the receiving device includes the game device. The game device is provided with a state changing unit that can be changed from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an available state, which is a state in which the gaming unit can be used. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a proximity unit that approaches the gaming unit from the one side.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board can be rotated in the rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the position of use, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the pushing is performed again. It is necessary to perform such a repetitive operation, and there is a problem that the operation efficiency may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means which is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into the use state, the pressing of the game board can be prevented. Even if it is halfway, there is an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position in use by applying the pushing force by the proximity means contacting the game board.

  In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side according to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) in accordance with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing unit is configured to make the gaming unit unusable so that the unusable state occurs, and the proximity unit retreats outside the gaming unit. Gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing operation of the gaming means can be improved, and the game efficiency can be improved. Since the operation is performed when the means is disabled, the work efficiency can be further improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state changing unit includes a contact unit that receives a load from the gaming unit when the state changes to a usable state.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means. Therefore, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means allows the state changing means to be used as a series of flows. State can be changed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means as a shaft, and is configured to be received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means includes the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, a load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means by utilizing the width of the gaming means.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is such that the state changing means disables the gaming means. A gaming machine I6, comprising: a closing restricting portion for preventing the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether or not the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to perform. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means keeps the unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire goto. Gaming machine J>
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side which is opposite to the game means and which can receive the game means from the one side, the receiving means includes the game means and A gaming machine J1 comprising: arranging means arranged on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from outside at a plurality of places.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from a rotation axis side of a front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient because there is only one anti-fraud unit.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thereby preventing fraud. Can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the arranging unit is different from a first unit that suppresses entry of a member from the outside at a first location and a second unit that suppresses entry of a member from the exterior at a second location. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that a member is prevented from entering from outside by a method.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J1, the method of arranging means for suppressing the entry of a member from outside differs between the first location and the second location. As compared with the case where the number is increased, the entry of the member from the outside can be further suppressed.

  It should be noted that the method for suppressing the entry from outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by closing a route, or a method of detecting improper activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape opened outward of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further entering.

  In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting an electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the path from the outside to the gaming means on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion. Gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud that penetrates the entry restricting portion due to high heat occurs, a change (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected to detect an external influence. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

  The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, wherein the arranging means includes a dissolving means for guiding a member entering from outside to a dissolving area far from the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, since the member entering from the outside is guided by the arranging means to the cancellation area far from the gaming means, the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree is increased, it is possible to prevent a member entering from outside from reaching the game means.

<Five-piece decorative plate structure. Involve also fraud prevention. Gaming machine K>
A first unit and a second unit, which are arranged to face each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along the first direction; A connecting means for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting part is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first unit and a second unit that are arranged to face each other and are connected at at least one side, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along a first direction. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the first means. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction crossing the first direction, the third means is provided in the first direction. Therefore, the load applied from the vehicle can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided a connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in an approaching third direction and fitting them together.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in a direction intersecting the third direction Resistance to the disassembly of the second means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed outward.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitted portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thus, even if a wrongdo occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the detection of the wrongdoing can be hastened.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening direction is the same as the third direction. .

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

  In one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiating unit that irradiates light toward the first unit or the second unit and is fixed to the connected unit, and one of the first unit or the second unit. And a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside thereof.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from the light guide means.

  In the gaming machine K6, an abutting means is provided for abutting a surface in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K6, the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained at a distance corresponding to the dimension of the contact means. Can be. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the facing direction. Can be.

  This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from being changed even when a load is applied in the facing direction when the first means or the second means is illegally disassembled. can do.

<Point L that utilizes curved light guide means. As point, not reached>
A light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projected means to which light passing through the light guiding means is disposed opposite to the light guiding means, and The gaming machine L1, wherein the projection target device includes a concave facing portion disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end face to the surface (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-265573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target means includes the concave facing part and the convex facing part, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing part and the convex facing part. It is possible to change the light emission intensity of the projection target means with the unit.

  In the gaming machine L1, the projection target means is configured such that the concave-facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex-facing portion is made of a material that transmits less light than the concave-facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is converged at the concave facing portion. The effect of the effect by the light can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L2, there is provided opposite projection means which is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guiding means interposed therebetween, and which projects light passing through the light guiding means. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light guide facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guide facing the convex portion are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the opposite projection unit that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide unit and the portion that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide unit are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, the same light is incident on the light guide means, so that the light is visually recognized through the projected means and the light is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. And can be different.

<Bus reflex speaker arrangement structure. Gaming machine M>
A first means and a second means which are arranged opposite to each other and are fixed to each other, and constitute the internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and perform effects using sound output from the speakers (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine, and is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, so that the effect of producing a low tone is easily performed. However, there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means. By releasing the right and left widths, the vibration wave can be made to travel at an arbitrary distance.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a protruding portion protruding from the first means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion being in contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in a direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. Abuts with each other to prevent the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, an opening is provided to connect the internal space to the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being closed by a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

  The gaming machine M4, wherein in the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the protruding portion and disconnected. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the production means from below, so that the support fastening means can be weighted without pressing the space used for production. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Gaming machine N>
A base member, a first displacement unit that is displaceably supported by the base member, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first displacement unit, and a following state in which the first displacement unit is displaced in a displacement direction. A second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, wherein at least the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacement unit that is displaced in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of the second displacement unit by a driving force of the driving unit.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the extension / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is extended / contracted, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means when performing the operation (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacing means expands and contracts, the direction of displacement of the first displacing means and the second displacing means is the same, so that a slow effect is produced, and the effect of the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means. , Can be visually recognized as the speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the second displacement means felt by the player as a bodily sensation, as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

  In the gaming machine N1, a resistance means for generating a resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means causes the second displacement means to follow the first displacement means in a following state and a non-following state deviating from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of the mode of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is provided so as to be visible from the front surface.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible, so that the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and the player can visually recognize the resistance means. It can be shared with the function as the effect device.

  In the gaming machine N4, a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member is provided, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. Gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N4, the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotation axis of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, the posture of the other members or means also changes, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can be.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As point, not reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening that is opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include operating means operable by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign object is inserted into a gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 has the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign matter is stored through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where foreign matter remains inside.

  In the gaming machine O1, the accommodating unit includes a support unit that supports the first unit, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support unit with the first unit therebetween. Gaming machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the support portion.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured to have a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, since the plurality of second openings are formed from a shape based on the shape of the solid object in different directions, the second opening is formed. The solid object can be easily removed through the section.

  The gaming machine O5, wherein in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to a player than the first means.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially closed at the second opening. Can be done. This allows the player to be aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining remaining can be reduced. .

<Points for devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A game machine comprising: a first means; and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means includes a protruding portion protruding from a lower surface. P1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is provided is configured to be detachable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a planar shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of easy handling. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protrusion formed from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a portion for hanging a finger, thereby suppressing occurrence of a situation in which the first support means slides down from the hand. Can be improved from the viewpoint of easy handling.

  The arrangement of the protruding portions is not limited at all, and may be any as long as it protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may be one that projects vertically, or one that projects frontward.

  In the gaming machine P1, the game machine P1 includes the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means, and the protruding portion is separated from a support position at which the first support means is supported by the second support means. A gaming machine P2, wherein the gaming machine P2 is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion is provided to project downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first support means is centrally applied as the support position. Therefore, the first support means can be further easily held. Thereby, the work of attaching and detaching the first support means to and from the second support means can be facilitated.

  The position apart from the support position is not limited at all. For example, it may be a position closer to the front side when the first support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or may be the other position when the first support means is pivotally supported at one end by the second support means. The position may be near the end, or may be a position on the opposite side of the pivotal support position with respect to the plate storing the game balls.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means includes a gap between the recess and the recessed portion. A gaming machine P3 which is arranged to face the recessed portion.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is formed as a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means is formed. It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shaved powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means are rubbed by the displacement. That is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction due to the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable portion, and the prevention of erroneous sensing due to accumulation of powder at the detection location of the detection device.

  As described above, the recessed shape portion is not only used during non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened for error cancellation, maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, game play). The effect is also exhibited in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

  The gaming machine P4, wherein in the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the projecting shape portion is provided.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent a portion where the recessed portion is formed from becoming extremely thin as compared with other portions, thereby preventing a lack of strength. it can. In addition, since the recessed portion is formed on the back of the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be bent and deformed in and out, so that even if a large load is applied to the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be deformed. Cracking of the formed portion can be suppressed.

  The load applied to the protruding shape portion may be, for example, the self-weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when the first support means is moved, the first load, or the like. An example is a load or the like that is applied by an object (such as a thousand boxes) moved by a player or a clerk near the support means.

  In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a part of the first support means outside the concave shape part, and is supported in such a manner as to contact an overlapping part which overlaps the projecting shape part inward and outward. A gaming machine P5 comprising: a contacting means; and an operation unit positioned at the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed portion, the supporting thickness at the overlapping position for supporting the contacting means can be sufficiently ensured. Deformation of the first support means during operation can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes an impact damping means continuously formed between the operating portion and the shock attenuating means, and the impact damping means is provided on the recessed portion. A gaming machine P6 formed to have a width shorter than the width.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect that the shock transmitted from the operating section to the contacting means can be attenuated by the shock damping means, the distance between the shock damping means and the overlapping portion is increased. Thus, the impact can be attenuated by the deformation (bending) of the contact means.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a shock attenuation means. For example, it may be a lump member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

  In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of depression is greater than that of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first portion where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first portion. By making the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small applied load, small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed portion while maintaining high durability.

  The degree of depression is exemplified by, for example, the depth of the depression (the greater the degree of the depression, the deeper) and the width of the depression (the greater the degree of the depression, the wider).

  In addition, when the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the part facing the first means is smaller than that of the other part, the concave shape corresponding to the other part is used. The degree of depression of the portion may be increased.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the magnitude of the load. For example, the recessed portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game store, or may be based on the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined production state or a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It is good also considering the size of as a standard.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed below the bottom portion of the first support means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider toward the front. Gaming machine P8.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first support means stands alone can be improved. Even in a storage method in which one support means is placed on the floor by itself, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without the first support means falling down.

  What should be considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by examining the magnitude of the load generated at the time of operating the first means and the frequency of occurrence of the load.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined upward in a direction away from the second support means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily made independent by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the protruding portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of portions other than the protruding shape portion.

<Points related to the deformation structure based on the supporting structure and shape of the collar>
In a gaming machine comprising: an operating means operable by a player; first supporting means for supporting the operating means; and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means or the operating means. The gaming machine Q1, wherein the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction to narrow a gap between the operation means and the second support means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which operation means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (for example, see JP-A-2006-106830). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, measures against displacement caused in a region around the operation means due to a load at the time of operation of the manipulation means are insufficient, and measures against displacement caused in a region around the operation means are called. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from a viewpoint.

  For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operation means. At this time, there is a possibility that a gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means in the front side portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, deformation of the first support means prevents a gap from being formed between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operation means can be allowed to descend excessively (subsidence), the supporting mode of the operation means can be simplified.

  The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, the moving direction may be a descending direction, a rising direction, a pushing direction along the front and rear, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

  In addition, as a mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to a case where a normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface spreading in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be shifted toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shape) formed by the contact surface, and the reaction force increases as the position approaches the center of the bottom. Can be done

  Also, a common support means for commonly supporting the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled or fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, is configured to support the operation means, and is configured to be able to hold a game ball, and the operation means is provided via the first support means. And a game ball holding unit connected to the game machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the gaming ball holding portion can be suppressed.

  Further, when the first support means is formed of a flexible member, or when the first support means is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration when operating the operation means is directly held by the game ball. Since it is possible to prevent the game balls from being transmitted to the game unit, it is possible to prevent the game balls held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, thereby preventing generation of abnormal noise.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a structure of vibration transmission prevention (suppression). For example, the configuration may be such that the transmission of vibration is prevented in the first direction, while the transmission of vibration is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal noise, and it is possible to execute a sound effect.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the operation unit includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player, and the first support unit is arranged such that the farther the connection position with the game ball holding unit is from the operation unit, the more the front surface becomes. A gaming machine Q3, which is arranged on the side.

  In the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation section, which is likely to be displaced due to the operation, the connected position is shifted to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the displacement, thereby reducing the game. While suppressing the generation of the gap between the ball holding unit and the first support means, the connection position is located on the front side (closer to the player) at a position far from the operation unit where the position is difficult to be displaced by the operation. In addition, the design can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operation unit includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player, a main unit supported by the first support unit, and the operation unit and the main unit. A connecting portion for connecting, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. The gaming machine Q4 is configured so as to surround the connecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, assembling of the first support means can be facilitated while sufficiently securing the size of the operation unit.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a method of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be respectively connected to the operating means, or one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies, and another divided body connected to the divided body You may let it.

  In addition, various modes are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, fitting may be performed or fastening may be performed.

  In the case of performing the fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, it is possible to disperse the impact generated when the operation unit is operated at a plurality of fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, the occurrence of displacement of the first support means can be suppressed.

  Further, by setting the fastening direction to a direction intersecting (for example, orthogonally) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. The loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact during operation can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects the operation direction of the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, the load at the time of operating the operation unit can be suppressed from being applied in the fastening direction, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation, and the divided body is fixed. Can be prevented from being released.

  It should be noted that various modes are exemplified as directions intersecting the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle around a predetermined rotation axis, a direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined direction). (Direction along the rotation axis).

  Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (when the operation is a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined line. Direction is exemplified.

  In this case, during the game, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed, at least one of a plurality of planes intersecting each straight line The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or may be set in an intersecting portion of a plurality of planes, that is, a direction intersecting any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

  In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening portion of the divided body is formed of a plurality of portions, and a first plane including one fastening portion and a second plane including another fastening portion are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is simultaneously applied to the other fastening points. Can be prevented from being applied, so that it is possible to prevent the divided bodies from being simultaneously displaced or loosened at both fastening locations.

  In addition, the fastening part of the divided body may be arranged at a place where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Also in this case, since another fastening portion is arranged on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, it is possible to prevent the divided body from being displaced or loosening due to the load at the time of operation. Can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes a detection means configured to detect a predetermined operation of the operation unit, and the detection means is arranged at a position distant from a division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the division position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is moved along with the operation of the operation unit at the division position. And the divided body may rub against each other to generate powder (dust). However, since the detecting means is disposed away from the dividing position, the detection of powder (dust) by the detecting means is suppressed. can do. Thereby, occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means which interferes with the divided body in the dividing direction (approaching / separating direction) when viewed from the divided body when the game is available. A gaming machine Q8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction by the interference means.

  The interfering means may be formed so as to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but not to interfere with the operating means before the assembly state, for example, during an assembling operation. For example, when the divided body is formed from a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during the assembling work, so that interference with the interference means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly can be maintained. can do.

  Also, for example, even when the divided body is formed from a hard material, the divided body may be configured so as not to interfere with the interference means in the assembling process. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere when viewed in the assembling direction before fastening (for example, in a direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembling). In this case, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

  The gaming machine Q9 of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second support means includes a receiving recessed portion recessed to receive the first support means.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in the receiving recessed portion, so that the first support means is displaced by the influence of the operation means being displaced. Even in the case of displacement, the operation means and the first support means can be returned to the original position promptly by the repulsive force from the receiving recess.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which a center of a radius of curvature is arranged on an operation portion side of the operation means. Q10.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be ensured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, It can prevent you from feeling. Thereby, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and the operability of the operation unit.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, since the extending direction of the streak portion is different in each region, the first support means having anisotropy in rigidity. Can be configured.

  In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of the streak portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield from the shape of the first support means, or when the load generated at the time of operating the operation means acts in a different manner for each region, the best way to cope with the load is given. The extending direction of the streak portion may be designed as the direction.

<Points related to the support structure between the speaker and the board>
In a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to emit light, the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibration means. Gaming machine R1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the light emission effect.

  More specifically, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, or the like) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the board from receiving the vibration of the speaker. It becomes dark because the light emission effect cannot be performed at the place where it is performed. In this case, in the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where the effect can be produced brilliantly becomes narrow. In the first place, the size of a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like is roughly determined from the standard, and thus it is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, the light emitting means has a displacement width with respect to the vibrating means, so that the light emitting means can permeate the vibration of the vibrating device, and the arrangement of the light emitting means is determined by the vibration generating point of the vibrating means. Can be approached. This allows the front area to be viewed brightly irrespective of the location of the vibration of the vibrating means, thereby improving the light emitting performance.

  The mode of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic unit configured to output a sound, or an operating unit incorporating a vibration device. Further, the present invention is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, but may be a means configured to be capable of vibrating (passively vibrating) against a load of an external force.

  Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in the speaker, an outlet for discharging back pressure of the vibration of the speaker seen in, for example, a bass reflex speaker, and a path connected from the vibrating portion to the outlet are exemplified.

  The vibration device may be a vibration device driven by rotation (for example, a vibrator) or a vibration device that generates vibration by linear driving (for example, a voice coil motor).

  The mode of the close arrangement is not limited at all, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting unit. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibrating means. In this case, the laminating direction may be a front-back direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or a left-right inner The direction may be inclined in the direction.

  In the gaming machine R1, a plurality of the vibrating means are provided, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is provided is provided, and the light emitting substrate is stacked and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. .

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the influence of the vibration generated when the vibration means outputs the sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by changing the vibration means for outputting the sound. ) Can be increased.

  The light emitting substrate may be a single substrate or a plurality of substrates. In the case of a plurality of substrates, it is sufficient that at least one light emitting substrate is stacked on a plurality of vibration units. In this case, a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated by the vibration means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, so that the number of types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine R2, holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, and the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means is configured to emit the light along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that a load is generated in a direction for suppressing displacement of the use substrate.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine R2, the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means can be suppressed.

  Note that the non-fixed state is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding unit are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, merely to prevent slipping), it can be said that the light emitting substrate is not fixed.

  The expression “non-fixed” does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-back position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-back position of the light-emitting substrate is defined (front-back position stable, small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. Also, by enclosing the direction orthogonal to the front and rear with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, displacement in a direction different from the front and rear direction (up, down, left and right) can be suppressed.

  As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibration means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibration means. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing unit for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding unit, Regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the laminating direction, wherein the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the laminating direction. A gaming machine R4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some fixing means are loosened), it is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Thus, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to progress. For example, a mode in which a rod-shaped member is inserted into a through hole or a mode in which a fastening screw is fastened to a screw hole may be used.

  In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared to the first displacement region. A gaming machine R5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change of the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced by the influence of the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emitting substrate. Can be done.

  Thus, by designing the mode of the light emission effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emission effect in the second displacement region differently, an excellent effect can be achieved. For example, as a first refraction unit that receives and refracts light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface light emitting unit that performs uniform light emission by surface light emission is disposed, while receiving and refracting light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means to be provided, an edge light emitting means for totally reflecting light incident from one end (edge) and emitting the light from the other end (edge) so as to show high-brightness light to a player is arranged. Thus, a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, luminance) differs for each region can be performed.

  Note that the mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited at all. For example, a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or a mode defined by the mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

  For example, as a positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, an area which is set at the same position from each vibration means is such that the influence from one vibration means is offset by the influence from the other vibration means. , The displacement may be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the game machine includes a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw is provided. A gaming machine R6, wherein a part and the opposing part are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. Can be prevented.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated about the response after the loosening of the fastening screw occurs. For example, when a loosening occurs in the fastening screw, it may be configured to be able to electrically detect the loosening, or by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibration device, the loosening occurs in the fastening screw. If it is vibrated when it is present, an abnormal sound may be generated to notice the looseness, or the loosened part may be fixed by regular maintenance without providing special notification.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connection means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connection direction occurs more easily than deformation in a connection direction connecting the first member and the second member. Gaming machine R7.

  Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extending or contracting, and the advantageous effect and the adverse effect are periodically changed. Undesirably.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is reduced is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

  Accordingly, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only in a state in which the connecting means is deformed (for example, a state in which a load is applied to the connecting means). The load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibration means while setting the load in the opposite direction of the member and the second member to be low. Of the substrate for use can be suppressed.

  The manner in which the deformation easily occurs in the predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so as to have a different thickness for each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated on the connecting means may be changed for each direction.

  Further, the manner of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device for displacing either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the driving device.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration unit is configured to be capable of changing a direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Gaming machine R8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of action of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical idea of the light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
A light-emitting means configured to emit light; and a light-guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the first light-guiding means guides light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode. A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide unit; and a second light guide unit that guides light emitted from the light emitting unit in a mode different from the first mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that LED light is made incident from an end of a plate-like member and emitted from the surface of the plate-like member (for example, JP-A-2015-159875). Gazette). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

  To be more specific, as in the case of the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when performing a light-emitting effect on an LED substrate formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, luminance, and the like) occurs between a position near and far from the LED, and the effect tends to be reduced. To solve this, the light emission mode is weakened. The number of LEDs in a portion that tends to be (dark) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in impeding cost reduction. Will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or to reduce the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different, the effect is reduced. (Change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emitting effect from the viewpoint of the effect of the effect while reducing the cost.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of the light guide means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform form such as frosted glass, or a resin made of a milky white material or the like may be hardened. It may be a white member, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member whose display itself is projected (projected) similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or the like. May be used.

  In the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured such that the way of illuminating changes stepwise according to the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guide means is provided is formed of a flat plate, the light guide means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In this case, an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly) can be executed.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is provided a housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is provided, wherein the housing means supports the light emitting substrate, and the light guide means Comprises at least a support means fixed at a first position, and a shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, wherein the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. Gaming machine S3, characterized in that the gaming machine S3 is disposed on the side.

  In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened in a state where the shielding means is still assembled, so that the position of the light guide means with respect to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it is easy to repair the displacement between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintenance can be improved.

  The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the shield may be configured so that the player cannot touch the light guide means while viewing it, or the player may not be able to touch or see the light guide means. You may.

  When the first position is formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

  In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 which is arranged at an end in a longitudinal direction.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the light guide means is formed in a long plate shape, and the first position is disposed at the end in the long direction, so that the fixing of the first position is relaxed. By applying a load in the short direction of the light guide means, the displacement of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

  More specifically, the correction of the displacement of the light guide means is compensated for by the deformation of the light guide means in the short direction, or by supplementing with a slip that gives a strong load, so that one of the long direction is compensated. Even if the fixing is loosened only at the end and the fixing is maintained at the other end, the displacement of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

  Further, in the case of a supporting mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the supporting means by the light guiding means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate on the supporting means can be reduced with the bending deformation of the light guiding means. Therefore, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be reduced by loosening the fixing at the first position and flexing and deforming the light guiding means without removing the light guiding means from the supporting means. , The displacement of the light emitting substrate can be corrected.

  Note that the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the design base is designed to be mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not deviate from the outer shape of the light emitting means provided on the light emitting substrate to such a degree that it completely deviates in the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be such as to correct the positional deviation in the above (small adjustment width), or the part to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means may be directed in the irradiation direction based on the design to secure a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position completely out of sight (adjustable width is large).

  In this case, the light-emitting means and the light-guiding means can have the same structure, and the mode of the light-emitting effect visually recognized in the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so as to be able to be played with a different gaming property (for example, when configuring a gaming machine having a different specification), without greatly changing the mechanical configuration of each unit, Since the mode of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means, it is possible to reduce the burden (for example, cost) of manufacturing the gaming machine.

  Note that the non-fixed aspect is not limited at all. For example, an aspect other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally referred to as non-fixed. Further, the term “end” is an expression intended to avoid being limited to the end. That is, the first position may be located at a position including the periphery of the long end.

  In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding unit is fixed to the support unit, and the light guide unit and the shielding unit are configured to be able to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between the light guiding unit and the shielding unit is reduced. A gaming machine S5 comprising a unit, and the displacement prevention unit includes a fixing unit with the support unit.

  Here, it is necessary to connect wiring for conducting electricity to the light emitting substrate. However, a shift or lack of the wiring directly affects the operation failure of the light emitting means. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the displacement between the substrate and the support means does not easily occur.

  In consideration of the effect, it is preferable that the light guide means be easily aligned if the positional shift has occurred, assuming that the positional shift with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is considered that it is better to hold the support means. On the other hand, if a position shift occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated.

  Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix the shielding means to the supporting means serving as a base in consideration of strength. As described above, there are various support modes expected from each means.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine S3 or S4, the position of the light guide means and the shielding means can be easily aligned with each other at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. In addition to the above, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

  In addition, the aspect of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, it is also possible to have concaves and convexes that can be fitted in the same shape, and that the concaves and convexes that can be fitted have a shape that does not change along the assembling direction, or a convex that tapers toward the side closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an enlarged concave shape.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a main body, a detachable extension extending from the main body to a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension. An opposing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, wherein the light emitting means is disposed such that light incident on the opposing extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 comprising a unit.

  According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light-emitting portion from entering a portion other than the opposed extension portion, and thus the separated extension portion and the opposed extension portion, and other portions Can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating light) at a short width boundary can be performed.

  The mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiating light, the width of the irradiating light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, and a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means forms a covering portion covered by the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, wherein the facing extension portion extends from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

  According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S6, light can be made to enter the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of emitting light in the frame portion can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide can be improved.

  According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the opposite side in the emission direction.

  In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, and is coupled to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and from the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being separated.

  According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension, the end capable of entering light into the frame in the longitudinal direction and the end whose incidence is restricted are defined. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing a light emitting effect using the frame portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is disposed at a projection position of the facing extension portion and the separating extension portion, and an inclination angle of a tip shape of the separating extending portion with respect to a light irradiation direction is set. The gaming machine S9, wherein the smaller the smaller, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the opposed extending portion and the separated extending portion.

  According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the distal end of the separated extension has a shape inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the luminous intensity of the light emitting means is increased. The light emission effect can be performed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, while maintaining the same. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension portion can emit light to the same extent.

<Technical idea of top light emitting means. The point to change the way of shining according to the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-emitting unit configured to emit light, and a light-receiving unit configured to receive light, the light-receiving unit includes a first light-receiving unit configured to receive light emitted from the light-emitting unit in a first mode; A gaming machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving unit that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit in a mode different from the first mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to make LED light enter from an edge of a planar member and emit from a surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

  To be more specific, as in the case of the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when performing a light-emitting effect on an LED substrate formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, luminance, and the like) occurs between a position near and far from the LED, and the effect tends to be reduced. To solve this, the light emission mode is weakened. The number of LEDs in a portion that tends to be (dark) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in impeding cost reduction. Will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or to reduce the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different, the effect is reduced (change). Do) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emitting effect from the viewpoint of the effect while reducing the cost.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a mode of a light receiving means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform form such as frosted glass, or a resin made of a milky white material or the like may be hardened. It may be a white member, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member whose display itself is projected (projected) similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or the like. May be used.

  The gaming machine T2, wherein in the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured so that the manner of illuminating changes stepwise in accordance with a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is provided is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly) can be executed.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is provided a housing unit for housing the light emitting unit, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting unit is provided, and the housing unit is disposed to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine T3, comprising: a partitioning unit for partitioning a region to be divided, wherein the light receiving unit is configured to change a lighting method for each region partitioned by the partitioning unit.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, since the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the way of light of the light receiving means changes, the way of light of the light receiving means changes rapidly. In this case, the sense of incongruity given to the player can be reduced. Thereby, even when the number of the light emitting substrates is small, the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, the positioning is performed by supporting the light emitting substrate by the partitioning means in a direction opposing the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, the alignment work between the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means can be facilitated, so that the assembling work can be facilitated, and the light emitting substrate can be used at the time of use. It is possible to suppress the displacement between the and the partitioning means.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through-hole formed corresponding to a shape of a light-emitting portion provided on the light-emitting substrate, and the light-receiving means is inserted through the through-hole. A gaming machine T5 comprising a unit.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be reduced without being affected by the size of the partitioning unit, and the light incident inside the insertion unit can be reduced. It becomes easy to make total reflection, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of light emitted from the light emitting unit from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-penetrating through hole that is formed to correspond to the shape of the light emitting part provided on the light emitting substrate, and does not receive the insertion part. A gaming machine T6, wherein the opening is formed in such a manner that the opening becomes larger as the distance from the light emitting substrate increases, and the surface of the gaming machine T6 comes into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T5, the through-hole into which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and additionally, the light receiving means The leakage of light can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means has a cross-sectional shape larger on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be.

  In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving unit includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting unit side, and a cutout boundary surface that intersects with the light conductive portion. The gaming machine T8, wherein the front-rear surface in the extension direction is disposed at a position shorter than the inclined surface.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punching boundary surface portion is formed. Even so, the thickness of the light conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the total reflection in the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

  In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving unit may include a light conducting unit extending from the light emitting unit, and the light conducting unit may be formed in a line shape including a base end of the insertion unit. A gaming machine T9.

  According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily recognized as linear light (light in which light from a point light source is mixed). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Point consisting of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine having a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means comprises: a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to the direction.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structural bodies with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

  For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, a light-emitting member such as an LED cannot be disposed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front in one cross section where the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the area where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

  In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means, so that the size of the area where the support plate can be arranged is The size of the light emitting substrate is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, since the inserting direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is constituted by the first direction and the second direction which are inclined with respect to each other, all the fixing means are along the front-back direction. As compared with the case where the player is inserted, a wider effect area on the side to be visually recognized by the player can be secured.

  In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means includes an outer surface having a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Gaming machine U2.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing portions of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force.

  Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are formed of a resin molded product, and the direction of pulling out the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction which is inclined with respect to each other, and the direction of pulling out. Since it is inclined, the fixing force may be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common component. can do.

  The configuration of the suppression means is not limited at all. For example, a loosening prevention means for preventing the loosening of the fixing may be used, or a loosening restricting means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

  In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means includes a notifying means capable of notifying the fixing failure of the fixing means.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine U3, the fixing means is notified of the fixing failure by the notification means, so that early detection that the fastening screw is loosened can be achieved.

  Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically informing such as a detecting means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. As a structural means, for example, a transmission change means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light effect change means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen in the appearance, Vibration notification means that makes the player notice by contacting a vibrating part of the vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or enhance vibration is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the game machine includes a third unit disposed between the first unit and the second unit, and the third unit includes a third unit disposed between the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5, which is disposed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate the resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set to a plurality of directions. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

  The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured so that the first means side is visually recognized by the player, while the second means side is not visually recognized by the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the space is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the structure can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U5, fourth means is provided on the opposite side of the third means with respect to the first face, and the first face is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Gaming machine U6.

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means can be made to be able to interfere with each other in a front view. Can be secured large.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals, so that one of the fixing means The deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be prevented from being generated in the other fixing means. That is, since the deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid the loosening of the fixing means.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1 characterized by the following. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by the following. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized by combining the above. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame (second support means)
12 inner frame (accepting means)
13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (closing means)
14d2 auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate, part of game ball holder)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
159 Opening / closing control section (blockage control section)
173 Long cover member (part of solution)
178 Inverted cup part (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of solution means)
180 Binding movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operating devices 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311 gL, 3311 gL Left detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft bar)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of storage means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing (part of support)
340, 5340, 6340 Driving device (driving means, first driving means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaging teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging teeth)
343d coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (projecting part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of terminal means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second driving means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 speaker connection line (passing member)
460 Front side assembly (1st means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding part)
500 Right panel unit (production means)
500L left heavy plate unit (1st means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of the connection part)
532 Inclined rib (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Projecting part (part of connecting part)
600 Board support device (state changing means)
620 Claw member before rotation (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (contact means)
801 Supporting base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of terminal means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means and repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (part of receiving means, repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engaging member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge section)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate (regulator)
10310 Swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation unit)
10321 Left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of game ball holder)
6413 Protrusion-shaped portion 6414 Recessed-shaped portion 6427 Resin member (impact attenuation means)
6451 Body part (part of receiving recessed part)
6455 Right reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left reinforcement rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of connection means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protruding part (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light transmitting hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Body tube part (part of light conducting part)
6522 Flange (Punch boundary surface)
6540 Partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Fastening part after guiding (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Protruding rib (part of suppression means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppression means)
6550 Plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate (part of outer surface)
6554a Threaded part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Partition member (first member, part of first means, part of storage means, part of partition means)
6562a Enlarged hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large-diameter cylindrical part (part of regulation means)
6570 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate)
6574a Edge light emitting section (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting section (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of storage means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance concave part (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guide means)
6731 Light receiving surface (part of second light guide means, part of main body, covering part)
6732 Inside extension (part of frame)
6733 Outside extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of first light guide means, facing extension)
6735 Fin (part of the first light guide means, separated extension part)
6736 Insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of displacement prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decoration projecting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R Insertion hole (part of support part)
18830 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 Streak D24 End streak (part of streak)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a Deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 clearance

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine for light guide to light to the light guide unit (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-159875 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect. SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the effect of a light-emitting effect.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the light emitting means is configured to be capable of emitting light, a light guiding means capable of guiding light, a housing means for housing the light emitting means , and the light emitting means. and a predetermined substrate means is disposed, said guiding means includes a first light guiding means capable light in a first aspect the light of the light emitting means, the light of the first of said light emitting means A second light guide unit capable of guiding light in a mode different from the mode , wherein the accommodation unit supports the predetermined substrate, and the light guide unit is fixed by at least a predetermined fixed portion, and means having a transparent portion covering said light guide means, said predetermined fixed part is Ru is disposed outside the outer shape of the unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating XIVc− in FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17A is a front view of the driving device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a release member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). 10 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibrating apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG.59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 67 (a). It is. (A) is a sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in (a) of FIG. 6, and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIIb in (a) of FIG. It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disk cam. FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) in which the back pack was opened to the inner frame with the inner frame opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing a lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 96A is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating a binding movable member and a harness, FIG. 96B is a schematic top view of FIG. 96A, and FIG. FIG. 96D is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the image, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is a schematic top view of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which schematically illustrate a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side view schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of (a) of FIG. 124, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (a) of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper plate member along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launching unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the ball launch unit which shows the state of sending out the ball by the ball feeder in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a ball launch unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after a ball is launched. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back board, a side substrate, and a 2nd effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fit device in a twelfth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a twelfth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial back view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) and (c) are the back views of a fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb in FIG. 206 (a). It is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member, and (c) is a partial expansion perspective view of a light guide member which typically shows the downward recessed part recessed in a light guide member in area CCVIc of FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIe of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic sectional view of a right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of a left reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of a lower plate unit, and (b) is a front view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow R. It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and (b) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229 (a); (C) is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line of FIG. 229 (a). FIG. 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the above-mentioned production device. (A) is a front view of a rear side unit, (b) is a front view of an electric decoration board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241. FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 24B is a sectional view illustrating the partition member along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illuminated substrate, a back support member, and an acoustic device along the line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 24B is a sectional view illustrating a partition member along the line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. It is a side view schematic diagram of an upper presentation apparatus. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit and a guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit. (A) is a front view of the board guide unit, and (b) is a rear view of the board guide unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the division | segmentation unit and guided unit in the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line of FIG.251 (b), (b) is a division unit and guided unit in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line of FIG.251 (b). 25C is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and an outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit and the outer frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is It is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a transparent cylindrical member, (e) is a rear view of a transparent cylindrical member. (A) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. FIG. 7 is a right side view as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 10E is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 243 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the optical transmission unit along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of light visually recognized through the light transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal production device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal production device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a horizontal production device. (A) is a front view of a base member and an electric decoration board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is It is a top view of a base member, (e) is a bottom view of a base member, (f) is sectional drawing of the base member and electric decoration board in CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line of FIG. 269 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a covering unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a covering unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of a light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member. (A) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is a sectional view of the horizontal staging device taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and (b) is a sectional view of the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274 (b). FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. (A) is a sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate and the light receiving member along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272 (b), and (b) is a base member along the line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb of FIG. 272 (b); It is sectional drawing of an electric decoration board and a light receiving member, (c) is sectional drawing of the base member, electric decoration board, and a light receiving member in CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of FIG.272 (b). FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram of a base member, an illuminated substrate, and a light receiving member schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is sectional drawing of the rendering device in CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line of FIG. 282, (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the rendering device in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb of FIG. 284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. FIG. 292 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit in the twentieth embodiment, taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 which are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general prize port 63, the first prize port 64, the second prize port 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And so on.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place, is indicated by a lighting state, the number of retained balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device is used to display a round during a jackpot. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (opened state), a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared to the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only in the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can be easily placed in the second winning opening 640 during the probable change and during the working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or during the time saving, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning port 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640 a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 can be created during the probability change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where the winning is possible.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 can aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine 10 is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into a player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Will be arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) by the player performing the tilting (rotating) operation of the tilting device 310.

  A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

  Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

  FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6A. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed in a first state (an initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the up-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is shifted from the first state. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by, for example, a player when a specific display (for example, a display of “press a button”) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Here, for example, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward, such as when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the near side depending on the degree of tilt. This is a mode in which the palm shifts and the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation by vigorously dropping his hand downward.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

  Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

  The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the viewpoint of the player will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 9, an example of the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312 a 1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the viewpoint of the player to such a degree that the operation surface 312 a 1 is visually recognizable in the first state, but is invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed outward from the player's viewpoint). This makes it possible to greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310 between the first state and the second state.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protection lens member 311i is configured such that the area of the protection lens member 311i gradually increases, and accordingly, the LED device 341f (FIG. 12), the difference between the first state and the second state is greater. Can greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered with the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist about an axis), the tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

  Accordingly, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported on a shaft 314 in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a direct impact to the tilting device 310, and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state, move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding from the side.

  As described above, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for providing the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. Thus, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at left and right ends at a rear end (a rear end in FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining a pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. And a large opening in the center with a concave portion arranged facing the lower frame member 320 and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. And an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm that is fastened and fixed below the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A driving device 340 for transmitting a driving force to the tilting device 310 via a system member 345, and a protective cover device fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protecting the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left, right, and rear. 350.

  The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-like member horizontally disposed at the upper end portion on the far side of the tilting device 310 and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in a pair on the right and left below the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal position at the horizontal center position of the bottom plate portion 321. An opening 325 that is an opening that is opened by shaving a portion disposed below the portion 322.

  The bottom plate portion 321 is configured to define the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by abutting on the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. You.

  The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a formed in the center on the near side, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection groove of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and a left and right side of the opening 325. And an insertion hole 321c symmetrically formed.

  The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

  The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection holes 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

  The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

  The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and extends upward from the upper surface thereof and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

  The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

  The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distance (position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

  Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and gaps (slits, detecting grooves) into which a detecting part can be inserted. Means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

  On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the driving device 340 is configured to protrude the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), so that after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325, the driving device By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and compared with the vertical width including from the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 The vertical width can be shortened.

  The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 that is an opening having a size to be hooked by the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed in a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

  The protective cover device 350 is configured so as to be vertically dividable and covered in three directions except the near side, and is fixed to a lower end portion of the driving device 340 and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340. A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; And a detection sensor 353R.

  Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate 321 of the lower frame member 320 in an assembled state (see FIG. 10). Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the projecting protrusion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

  The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. The disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are arranged in such a manner as to be arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged at a specific phase. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR with different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2 Kind.

  Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14A is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. FIG. 15 is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured such that a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and having upper and lower openings, and an upper opening of the case main body 311 is covered. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and a state sandwiched between the rear ends of the case body 311 and the lid 312. , A torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and a ring-shaped member for fixing the case main body 311 and the lid 312 inseparably at the rear ends of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. And a ring member BR1.

  The case body 311 includes a bottom plate 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate 311a, and left and right sides of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending from the flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And an insertion groove 311e, which is a groove arranged at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-like portion 311f formed in a hook shape and locking a central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A left detection piece 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair on the left and right below the bottom plate 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end of the bottom plate 311a toward the front. An extension portion 311h to be provided and a protective lens member 311i which is disposed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And a protruding projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

  The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

  The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

  The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to the driving device 340. Is provided.

  The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

  In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the shaft 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22), the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared with the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle becomes the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

  The extended portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked by the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is configured in an embodiment.

  The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from the top (see FIG. 14A), and also has a curved shape when viewed from the left and right directions (see FIG. 14C). The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The overhanging protruding portion 311j is formed so as to protrude at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes down the tilting device 310. In the state (see FIG. 29), the tip is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a and the tip protrudes below the lower frame member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape large enough to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

  In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312 c emits light emitted from the LED device 341 f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by rigidity in the axial direction. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light is emitted from the LED device 341f in a wide range.

  The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end formed of a shape matching the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the center.

  The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, and has two arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions. , Is provided.

  Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (left disk cam 344L, right disk cam) that are non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343. 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a second projection 342c of the disk cam 344 that are pivotally supported by the shaft 341c of the main body member 341. A release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhang portion 344c3 in the rotation direction, a rotating claw member 347 that is axially supported coaxially with the release member 346 and that relatively operates with the rotation of the release member 346; The first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-shaped spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the rotating claw member 347 to fall down, and a direction in which the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are separated from each other. A second spring SP2, which is a torsion spring-shaped spring member that generates a force.

  The main body member 341 is bent at the left and right in the rearward direction and formed in a U-shape in a top view, and is formed at the same position of a plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a opposed to the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344; and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position displaced to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b so as to have an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. An extension 341d extending from the motor housing 341a below the shaft 341c, an illumination support 341e extending frontward and upward from the motor accommodation 341a, and an illumination support 341e. And an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end and having an LED light source disposed therein.

  The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). Thereby, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

  The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing 341a.

  The fixing member 342a supports the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

  The arm member 345 is bored in one end at a perfect circular shape, and is bored in a shaft support hole 345a supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

  The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a is in contact with the shaft 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

  The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disk cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is rotatably supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement; a coil spring 343d for pressing the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly equipped.

  The cylindrical member 343a includes fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 each having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. You. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed to have a length that can move to a position that does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

  The transmission gear 343b has a perfectly circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from a surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c. 343b2.

  Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

  The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

  In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are formed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having an apex angle of about 100 °.

  Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a becomes impossible, so the engagement between the clutch 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c. Accordingly, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thus, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

  Note that the movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when a load in the axial direction is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

  The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the disc cam 344 has a left disc cam 344L and a right disc cam 344R roughly mirrored in shape, and differs only in the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. The description will be omitted, and the description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

  FIG. 20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb of FIG. is there. Note that FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is located at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a protruding in a cylindrical shape inward, a circular rib 344b protruding inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. An engagement rib 344c having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and having a portion projecting radially outward at two locations; and an outer portion between the circular rib 344b and the engagement rib 344c. It mainly includes a connection pin 344d projecting in a cylindrical shape in the direction and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

  The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position forming an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the others are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

  The center shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer periphery is fitted in the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Be composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

  The circular-diameter rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thus, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

  In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is provided. From the overhang portion 344c1, the first retraction portion 344c2, and the first overhang portion 344c1 that withdraw from the first overhang portion 344c1 radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (the angle θ1 = 50 ° in the present embodiment). At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (the angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), a second overhang portion 344c3 that projects again radially outward and an angle θ3 (an angle in the present embodiment) from the second overhang portion 344c3. (θ3 = 20 °), and a second retraction part 344c4 that retreats radially inward at a shifted position.

  In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position where the distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state is the longest (see FIG. 22). That is, the connection pin 344d is provided on the opposite side of the shaft 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the center shaft 344a.

  The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one of them will be described.

  FIGS. 21A and 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B illustrates the release member 346. In contrast, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

  The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide slots 347b). (See FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A projection pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape about the center axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. And an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting at the maximum diameter.

  The engagement portion 346d is a portion configured to be able to abut on the engagement rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

  The rotary claw member 347 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. The guide slot 347b of the release member 346 is guided along the guide slot 347b (the guide pin 346b is drilled so as to include the movement trajectory of the protrusion pin 346b inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. The insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

  In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engagement portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate integrally in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engagement portion 346d rotates in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 is rotated until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached, and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

  Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in a case where a player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

  FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 23 shows a state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand that performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. Thereby, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is disposed in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

  Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is continuously hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. However, depending on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. Cannot be returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there have been problems that the product cost increases and space cannot be saved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibrating operation is provided at a position facing the protruding projection 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. You.

  As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

  Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long-presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, the load of returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation can be improved. Thereby, the player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

  Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (a tilting operation) from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

  25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned, and FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 performs a reciprocating rotation operation. In FIG. 29, a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state in FIG. 28 is shown, and in FIG. 30, a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach a second initial state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 of the engagement rib 344c abuts on the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustratedIn addition, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be ensured to be large. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c has an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. Direction, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and the release member 346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310.

  The change in the posture of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises by the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

  At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the operation of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward operation of the tilting device 310 has an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, By the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle (upper angle in FIG. 27) between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347, and thus the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

  In this state, the cover 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can also be irradiated in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing light can be improved.

  In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount. By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. And in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 28) as well as in the vertical direction.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in a direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotary claw member 347, thereby When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated with the tilting device 310. It returns to a position where it can be engaged (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player has depressed the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is vertically moved as shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting the hand on the tilting device 310.

  That is, the purpose is to generate a driving force that assists the raising of the tilting device 310 with the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 24), and to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. Can be used for

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 is It is buried in the lower surface, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

  Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pushed and operated, it is determined whether or not the vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the end of the pushing. Only let me know.

  Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in such a case, the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

  Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when the jackpot is determined, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 Can be improved as a prefetch means. Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction until the second projecting portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 (from the state shown in FIG. 29). By rotating the driving device 340 a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction, the driving device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

  The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotation direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c.

  In addition, from the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first protrusion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes through the engagement portion 346d, the reverse rotation is performed. In this way, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (moving up) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( (Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down through the second state (a tilting operation).

  FIGS. 31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 31, from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31), and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). FIG. 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 shows a state shown in FIG. 34 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is reciprocatingly rotated, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

  At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released), the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed. 310 can be set to a position that can be arranged in the second state (a position in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 moves upward at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the state change is obstructed by the disk cam 344 (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating by a predetermined angle at a slow speed, and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is moved backward by the same amount (counterclockwise). By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, in response to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f. And in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 33) as well as in the vertical direction.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the mode of the up-down operation of the tilting device 310, two types of up-down operation (tilting operation) of the up-down operation shown in FIG. 28 and the up-down operation shown in FIG. Immediately after the restriction on the movement of the device 310 in the upward direction is released, the operation can be performed immediately. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

  Thereby, as compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in expectation of a jackpot), and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only a load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and a load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345 is not generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and then pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), when the player releases his / her hand, the tilting device 310 is set to the first state. Can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. I do. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up-and-down operations (tilting operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one of the operations.

  35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 rotates backward (more clockwise in FIG. 35) than in the state shown in FIG. 35, and then the disc cam 344 rotates forward until it comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. In FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 36 counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protection cover device 350. The state where the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes when the engagement rib 344 c pushes up the release member 346, but the projection pin 346 b of the release member 346 moves in the space of the guide elongated hole 347 b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotation pawl member 347 stays in the posture shown in FIG.

  That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the tilting device 310 being lifted can be maintained.

  From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotating cam 344 is subsequently rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 7, the driving device 340 can be in the second initial state.

  In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but it is necessary to go through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up-and-down operation (tilting operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

  Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

  This is, for example, an operation that occurs due to forgetting to release the hand that pressed and operated the tilting device 310 to concentrate on the production. In this case, the tilting device 310 is lifted even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs the reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for vertically moving (tilting operation) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is useless, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts below the first state), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the driving device 340 in which the driving device 340 is turned on (see FIG. 14), the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the driving motor 342 is stopped).

  In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, since the tilting device 310 does not perform the ascending operation due to the player's hand being placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

  When the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, when the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state, the circle is left as it is. Rather than rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and unnecessary load is not applied to the driving device 340, so that the life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, the hand of the player holding and tilting the tilting device 310 with the tilting device 310 in the second state is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left alone, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a for fixing the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving in a state where the disc cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotation direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is driven via the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2. The power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thus, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can idle. Thus, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

  When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned ON while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not set to the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and a notification is displayed by, for example, displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

  This makes it possible to select a case where the player has intentionally performed an erroneous operation, to notify only at that time that the erroneous operation is to be stopped, and to stop the drive motor 342 early to prevent a failure. be able to.

  When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the occurrence of the phase shift, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive device 340 can be specified to be in the first initial state by detecting that the left detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 with the state as an initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are adjusted again.

  Accordingly, when an effect is performed by operating the tilting device 310, there is a difference between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, it is possible to perform an effect by appropriately operating the tilting device 310.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

  FIGS. 40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in FIG. 38. In FIG. 41, the disk cam 344 is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW. Also, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves up to the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the state in the first state shown in FIG.

  This is due not only to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it goes from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CW direction. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346 from below. In this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw is rotated. There is no load in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

  Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. Is an operation different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

  For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39). Due to the difference, the player notices the control mode being performed, and the effect to be executed is grasped by the player, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, a load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the operation of the tilting device 310 thereafter is made different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 becomes Since only the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction in the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the first state when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player is given the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. Can be watched over.

  That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the driving motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) suddenly in order to perform an effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. Thus, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 performs an up / down operation without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

  FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) by a predetermined amount from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the driving device 340. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhang portion 344c1 does not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 are engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 reciprocally while maintaining the positional relationship that does not pass through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

  In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) with the change in the posture of the release member 346. When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the first state (rotation) by releasing the hand of the player. When the pawl member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310, an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward (up to the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising) and continues to move up and down can be implemented.

  Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, a difference in the effect is provided between the above-described first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a different meaning from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. The user can know whether the user has been moving up or down in the third operation mode.

  The difference in the effect is that the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). Is performed) when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after releasing the hand after pushing the tilting device 310). If the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up in the first embodiment has been described, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment has the The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 45B is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. It is a side view.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking operation of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

  FIG. 46A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. The small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide elongated holes 347b). (See FIG. 48).

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation member as functional members supported by the shaft portion 341 c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 across the plate member 2347 and configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory about the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47); , Mainly comprising. In the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a shape curved so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a forward end at an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in the shape of a hook (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to overlap in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper of FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly provided. Prepare.

  The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

  The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be attracted to a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 described later.

  The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

  The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

  The rotating plate member 2347 includes, in addition to the shaft support hole 347a, the guide long hole 347b, the insertion hole 347c, and the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. A long supporting hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

  The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347. The side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are such that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated forward (see FIG. 46 (counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft 314 (see FIG. 47).

  Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid in a state where the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. The wobble can be suppressed.

  The release member 2346 includes a functional support hole 2346e that is a long hole formed in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the projection pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

  The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the direction opposite to the shaft support hole 346a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. To slide.

  Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 keeps the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d without time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. Reflected on speed.

  That is, when the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 is quickly slid, while when the rotation speed of the release member 2346 is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in a straight line direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

  That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 is slid by the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 is slid by being pulled in the large angle state. It does not move. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the slide claw member 2348 is engaged with the tilting device 2310, so that the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising.

  FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in a time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346. In FIG. 48, the disk cam 344 is changed from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47), and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 48 (clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2.

  In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet 2311a1 and the hook 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes down the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to a change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will not be done.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-shaped part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

  Accordingly, the slide claw member 2348 is caused to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, thereby causing the slide claw member 2348 to rotate backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a different speed from the upward movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the releasing member 2346 is released, the releasing member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 returns to the first state.

  By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, the association between the operation mode and the jackpot expectation degree makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching. Attention can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. The tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 by securing a large magnetic force. The load can be increased.

  That is, normally, when the player places his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 and the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. If the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand (even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), the player lifts the hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

  Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the rising direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing a hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

  For example, by associating the difference in the load with the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading. Can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player. However, the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured so that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or in the state of being pushed by the player. You. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detecting piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detecting piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane disposed at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The extension length of the left detection piece 3311gL is longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR, and the extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

  FIGS. 51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. No (left detection sensor 324L is off and right detection sensor 324R is off).

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L while the right detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the right side. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  By detecting a change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing, it is in the state of being pushed. , Or in the state of returning.

  That is, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

  FIGS. 52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG. 52 (a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52 (b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the pushing end to the first state. . 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detecting sensor 324L and the right detecting piece 311gR is inserted into the right detecting sensor 324R. (The left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state arranged at the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

  When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

  Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves downward. Rather than causing the tilting device 3310 to move upward, the load that causes the tilting device 3310 to rise more effectively can be applied by causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves upward.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 effectively, the tilting device 3310 can be compared with a case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be performed comfortably.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed by the player. However, the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case main body 4311.

  The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating a pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54A, the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. A state where the sensor 4321e has passed downward is illustrated. In FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are sensors of a photocoupler type, and are disposed in such a manner that the detection grooves are oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on a circular orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

  When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing down on the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321d. 4321e. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

  Here, in the case where the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which the acceleration can be applied is long). The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 robust as a safety measure when the player pushes with full power, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

  Further, an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end may be built in, and the tilting device 4310 may be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who decides to perform the pushing operation gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined by the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary.

  That is, for example, when the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. If the driving is not performed and the above-described timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

  Accordingly, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is low, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated with a small force. Pushing operation can be performed.

  Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pushing as the reaction force to the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. The control is performed in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.

  FIGS. 55A and 55B are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. .

  In FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the projecting protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state in which the tilting device 4310 is reaching the pushing end from the first state. The set portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are in contact with each other.

  When the tilting device 4310 is pushed in, the direction in which the projecting protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving the button. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be applied, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

  At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disk brake, but has a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force. Therefore, damage to members is suppressed, and durability can be ensured.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

  Accordingly, the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 contact each other is suppressed, and the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and stops descending. Therefore, it is unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 to the end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

  Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is vibrated to transmit the vibration to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment includes the lower frame member 5320 And a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and the vibration is transmitted to a player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is a driving device 5340. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

  A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is provided on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch is provided on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

  FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 houses a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. A flexible member 5420 and a receiving member formed in a bottomed dish shape having an open upper surface, which separately accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 and which is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 mainly.

  The transmission device 5410 includes a driving motor 5411 formed of a rotating electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a rotation shaft of the driving motor 5411 pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to a pivot. And mainly comprising.

  The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of right and left fixed portions 5411a formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

  The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

  The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the side opposite to the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction of the drive motor 5411, and a main body 5421 in an assembled state. The left and right sides of the main body 5421 are connected to a pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding in the form of a rib, and the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of columnar projecting legs 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421.

  The main body 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411 and has a container-shaped depth. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the axial end face of the drive motor 5411 and the open end face of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

  The rib-shaped legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 are provided by the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-shaped leg 5422.

  Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be made fine.

  In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is housed. 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432.

  When the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 reaches the bottom and the load applied when the flexible member 5420 is inserted is released (assembly load released state), the depth of the first accommodation portion 5431 is The protruding leg 5424 has a protruding depth.

  The depth of the second storage portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 to apply the flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is set so as to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

  The concave groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly extended below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in an assembly load state. You.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is set to the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, is pushed into the player three times from the first state, An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when it is arranged at the end position of the pushing, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg 5424 with respect to a change in the angle of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be evenly pushed right and left on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (when tilting left and right on the sheet of FIG. 59B) at the time of pressing. Thus, the protruding leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d formed so as to be able to insert the protruding legs 5424. Since the width of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is protruded. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the projecting leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424, and to easily move the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

  FIGS. 60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows that the protruding legs 5424 are in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). An assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first storage portion 5431 is illustrated. Note that the outer shapes of the second storage portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), when a load is applied to the vibration device 5400 from the assembly load release state and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding legs 5424 and the lower rib-like legs are provided. As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

  In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is pushed. It is possible to reduce the impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57). Further, since the load is based on the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) is used. The lifting speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is reduced. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous tapping operation of the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 can be used as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not abut on the inner wall of the second storage portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load released state, no vibration occurs due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.

  In addition, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the fine vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the housing member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembly load state, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced up and down due to deformation of the upper protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

  When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be reduced, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

  In addition, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg 5422 extends along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421, and is uniformly spaced left and right from the center axis. Since the flexible member 5420 is moved downward, the radially outer end of the rib-shaped leg 5422 is moved right and left outward (in the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422). It deforms in such a manner as to move in the direction of smaller resistance (see FIG. 60B). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, a horizontal load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second storage portion 5432 is partially reduced by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 below the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. Thus, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

  61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In (b), a state where the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibration device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

  The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is moved to a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second storage portion 5432 becomes the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. Note that, in the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

  That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs against) the second housing portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared to the assembly load released state, so that different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

  The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 generates a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (FIG. 61B, upward) as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to and away from each other in the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is changed in the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ). By this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). Direction) can be reinforced.

  As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By using a combination of the generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force for pushing back the tilting device 310.

  That is, during a period from the start of the contact of the tilting device 310 to the protruding leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes the tilting device 310 back. After the tilting device 310 reaches the termination region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Accordingly, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made lighter and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is used due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined to be higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

  For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

  Accordingly, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof has risen upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 by the radius Ra. Thereby, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

  That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression size of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). By doing so, it is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 from being generated.

  Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of the pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 is used only when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

  Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed, and the pushing operation of the player is detected. The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

  That is, in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in a mode in which the player releases his / her hand immediately after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (the mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed in. In such a case, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of the vibration cannot be made in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the tilting device 310 is pressed, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration is ready to be generated, so that the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pressing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by the vibration.

  In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

  Accordingly, the state where vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

  Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The drive device 5340 is different from the drive device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft 5343. Other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have symmetric shapes, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

  The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft 5343 are arranged at the connection portion with the transmission shaft 5343. It is.

  That is, the right disk cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support tubular portion P1 that extends cylindrically from the disk portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is provided, and an axial direction of the support tubular portion P1. Along the length of the extension distance, about a half of the extension distance, an axially symmetrical long hole shape, a long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion, and a shaft of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. And a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the end in the direction toward the disk portion along the axial direction.

  The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as a region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

  The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole concave portion C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

  The long hole concave portion C1 is formed so that the shape of the concave cross section is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the long hole concave portion C1.

  Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole concave portion C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed in an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This can prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

  The holding arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a protruding from a surface of the pair of arm portions facing the arm of the other side toward a direction approaching the arm portion of the other side. . The engagement convex portion A1a engages with the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

  The tip shape of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the columnar member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the radial overlapping length in the state where the engaging projection A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65) (B) the length in the left-right direction).

  The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (a long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is concave along the axis near the axis. (A side surface on the opening side of C1) and a surface position.

  Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (the lower side in FIG. 63B) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a outside the concave surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the column member 5343a protruding from the concave surface portion C2 is longer than the e-ring. (See FIG. 65 (b)).

  Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

  The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

  The columnar member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the insertion groove 5343a3 interposed between the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the cross-sectional shape, a groove into which an e-ring is fitted, and a fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring; When the disk cam 5344 is fitted until reaching the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, the engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages, is mainly used. Prepare. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is disposed outside the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the left-right direction in the assembled state.

  The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

  Before the e-ring is fitted, the column is formed before the e-ring is fitted because a mechanism in which the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

  In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b by the e-ring. And the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 can be prevented by the e-ring.

  With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft 5343, the column member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging projection A1a is provided. From the opposite end, insert into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted. At this time, before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a is formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between each other can be expanded. Thereafter, when the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging protrusion A1a, the engaging protrusion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

  On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 functions not only in one-touch assembly but also in this embodiment as a structure for preventing destruction. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66B is a right disk cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

  FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole concave portion C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial falling displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the column member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected. Are in contact with each other, so that the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial tilt displacement increases.

  Therefore, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Is applied, the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be restricted.

  That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), On the plane parallel to the plane of the disk portion, the disk portion is axially deformed with the support shaft r1 connecting the connection pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 as the center. As a result, the distal end position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating the operation when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 18 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. 67 (b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343R is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connection pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay on the spot and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disk cam 5344R can perform the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the manner of connection with the arm member 345 due to the shaft falling deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

  In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd by the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the pivotal support of the arm member 345 by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and in order to absorb the displacement, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to fall over the shaft.

  Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a) due to the shaft falling deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right circular. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this displacement can partially absorb the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd, the drive motor can be moved while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the motor 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other by the axial deformation of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but is repelled by the second spring. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotation claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repelled in the direction. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  Therefore, when the release member 346 contacts the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 is independent of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344. Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. Accordingly, the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be reduced. Can be reduced irrespective of the rotation direction.

  In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed to have a line-symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). The right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed irrespective of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). Shaft can be deformed by resistance.

  FIG. 68A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the external shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

  FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and falls down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. Is shown of the player's hand gripping.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not, the right disk cam 5344R. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting, so that the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  Note that the items described as the right disk cam 5344R also apply to the left disk cam 5344L.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

  Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation in the axial direction, the occurrence of overload can be noticed at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven during a period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R, and the right detection sensor 353R. Since the input to 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

  In this case, a period of time required to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs is required before the occurrence of the overload is detected, so that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)), the overload occurs. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

  The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects with the engagement rib 344c. In addition, the input section is disposed in a manner to protrude toward the support cylinder P1. In a no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in an overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are formed in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

  Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib 344c are formed of separate members, and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, since the right disk cam 6344R is formed by mirroring the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will not be described.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

  The left disk cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by a cylindrical member 343a, and the disk member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and is rotatable relative to the disk member 6344L1 is provided.

  The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment disposed at the center position of the disk portion, and is annularly and axially spaced apart from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in a radially outward direction. An annular rib 6344f protruding along is provided.

  The ring member 6344L2 has a ring main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

  The annular main body 6344g is formed such that its inner peripheral diameter is larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b. In the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about.

  The axial end face of the annular body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 abuts on the annular rib 6344f. Accordingly, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the disk member 6344L1 is in contact with the surface. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

  The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is set to be three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (while the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations). , The second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the number of receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

  The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and an auxiliary column thereof. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

  With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a description will be given of how the tilting device 310 is lifted up from the first state of the tilting device 310 by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released.

  FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to the state illustrated in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated one rotation in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state illustrated in FIG. (A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) while the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by more than one rotation and then reversed by that amount). Is illustrated. FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state illustrated in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 has been moved up.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is actuated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

  In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 is lifted instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is the second state. It was limited to the position where it was arranged (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relatively, the connecting pin 344d, which is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c are provided. Can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, and tilted downward by the angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the releasing from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotating claw member 347. (Without waiting for the rotation of 344), and the position at which it reaches can be changed.

  Accordingly, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by a difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises and reaches from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 ascending or to increase the degree of expectation of the type where the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is lower.

  However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is improved. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

  In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can be encouraged to do so. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method of operating the tilting device 310 randomly can be suppressed.

  Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 includes a disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are provided on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can be relatively rotated. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of a right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. FIG. 75A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa, and FIG. 75B is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R has a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. A ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7340 and an engaging portion 7630 which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engagement member 7344R3 having the following.

  The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a center shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR at a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the outside in the radial direction. This is a member having a shape in which the portion 344c is partially omitted (the portion between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

  The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in a surface state in an assembled state, and has a first circular concave portion 7410 which is a circular concave portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and Radially between a second circular concave portion 7420 which is a circular concave portion having a diameter smaller than the first circular concave portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be bored, and a fixing protruding radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430. And a projection 7440.

  The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular long hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position shifted from an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole extending from the bottom end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1. And a return portion 7433 that projects from the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 toward the second elongated hole 7432 with the first elongated hole 7431 side as a fulcrum.

  The size of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the size of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. Direction (shorter direction).

  The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75B) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outside the second elongated hole 7432.

  The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a sufficient height to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

  Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a) to FIG. 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. And a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the center and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

  The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. You. Thus, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

  The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)). Is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420. This prevents the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from being excessive while enabling the engaging member 7344R3 to be able to operate in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

  The thick portion 7520 has a deformed through hole 7521 formed in the axial direction, and a concave portion formed in the deformed through hole 7521 radially outward at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (in the present embodiment, equally divided into 5). And an equidistant concave portion 7522 to be provided.

  The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is different from a shape that is disposed radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Be composed.

  FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. The arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on the side, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77 (b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and the extension portion The engaging portion 7630 extending in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620 and the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 are provided on the side facing the engaging portion 7630. And a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 that is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the distal end of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

  The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof has The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface.

  The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly smaller than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in the assembled state with a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

  As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

  Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described. FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c). 78F is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78F is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78E.

  FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c) and 78 (d) show a state where only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1, and FIG. 78 (e). ) And FIG. 78 (f), a state where the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is illustrated. For easy understanding, illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f).

  As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first long hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78A and 78B). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

  Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 in the depth direction of FIG. 78D until the position of the engaging portion 7630 and the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide. Moving.

  At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the displacement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 is suppressed. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

  In addition, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven out of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the direction in which the second elongated hole 7432 extends, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force to the second position. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

  In a state in which the second elongated hole 7432 is inserted inward, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, and the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), so that the movement of the extension 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Accordingly, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

  After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. I do. When the load is released from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

  Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

  Next, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

  The rotating claw member 7347 of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide slot 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes, the projecting pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement.

  The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

  In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

  FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the releasing member 7346, and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate. In FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80) shows a state where the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80). FIG. 80 (a) shows a state where the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 and pushed to the end. FIG. 80 (b) shows a state where the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a), and FIG. 81 shows a state where the right disk cam is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the engagement member 7344R3 has been separated from the release member 7346 by the rotation of the engagement member 7344R in the backward rotation direction is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347 ( Angle small state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in a state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state in which it protrudes outward is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the outermost diameter side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in the small angle state. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the small angle state of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is formed. When the inner peripheral surface and the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c are in contact with each other, the outer peripheral surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346, and the disc cam 7344 is moved. (See FIG. 80 (a)).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member 7346 is released. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engagement portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the modified through hole 7521.

  Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

  Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one originally provided equally recessed portion 7522 to another different equally recessed portion 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are provided. Are relatively rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects radially outward. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted.

  That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 79 from FIG. 79 (a), the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d provided on the ring member 7344R2 can be equally divided into concave portions 7522. Can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval of the concave portions (72 degrees).

  With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. FIGS. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as centers, and other unnecessary parts are not illustrated.

  FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) in chronological order. FIG. 82 (a) shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other. In FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed upward by the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). (B) shows a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates forward, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate backward (FIG. 82 (a)). When rotating in the (rotational direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Can only be done.

  Therefore, a load is not generated enough to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is moved radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 and separates therefrom. Maintain the overhang state. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, the relative rotation of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

  By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344 from these configurations, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation occurs (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

  In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

  Thus, a state that is not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a position that is invisible to the player. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, a description will be given of a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state according to the present embodiment. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of operation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disc cam 7344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 84 and 85, the state where the second protruding part 344c3 is brought into contact with the engaging part 346d is shown in FIGS. 84 and 85. The contact state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

  That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

  On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

  Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 reaches from the first state by the ascending operation immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) can be changed. Thus, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of the operation device 7300 as the effect device can be improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (unfolded) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. FIG. In FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate as an upper side and a lower side and aluminum plate as a left and right side. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 supporting structure (the hinge 18 and the like) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11 are provided. The member may be provided in a game arcade.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. The left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base side) and the right side is a rotation tip side in front view. (Opening / closing front end side) so as to be rotatable forward.

  As shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening and closing base side) and the right side is the rotation when viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as a moving tip side (opening / closing tip side).

  As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And a function to lock the front frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 12. In these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, each is released.

  The front frame 14 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a columnar portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft). The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having a hole.

  Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 above the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot support plate portion 12e having a fitting concave portion 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed to have a fitable size. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are vertically connected, the diameter of the upper cylinder is smaller than that of the upper cylinder). (A small shape) is axially supported by being externally fitted to the support pin 19a.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (such as the decorative portions 8029 to 8033) and units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) on the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). The window unit 14 c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area on the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And The fixed frame is formed of a synthetic resin into an annular shape slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the laminated glass. Have been.

  In addition, the glass unit 16 is formed to be colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, the game area may be formed not colored and transparent but colored and transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14 c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, the illumination unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c incorporates a light emitting unit that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that lights up during payout of a prize ball.

  In addition, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly 450 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window 14c. . As shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are swelled toward the near side below the window 14c, and are vertically arranged side by side.

  The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them toward the ball firing unit 112a while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

  In addition, it is not necessary to provide a portion for storing game balls at a plurality of locations separately in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is used as a single storage portion. Is also good.

  An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the near side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for the game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as the periphery of the lower plate 50 other than the upper plate 17 or may be provided at a plurality of positions. In addition, the operation device 300 is a push-button switch as an operation method. Alternatively, the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( FIG. 92).

  A payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed at an upper corner portion (a corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) of the passage forming unit 140, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. 143 is divided into right and left by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, respectively.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and is then discharged to lower plate 50. The foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

  In addition, the foul ball passage 145 joins with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 are guided by a ball removal operation by the player. It is formed as follows.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to upper right and left corners, and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrates and one end of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 are provided. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is provided, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

  In a portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring passage groove 14h communicated to the left and right electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, and the electric decoration portions 8031 and An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

  Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the near side in FIG. 89). A connector of a conductive wiring or a connector having one end connected to the internal substrates of the illumination portions 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

  The multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the turning front end of the front frame 14 are provided as a pair above and below the turning front end of the inner frame 12, and the board support device 600 (which holds the base plate 60 of the game board 13). (See FIG. 126). The upper and lower devices are positioned so as to face each other, and can be in contact with each other depending on the situation. The details will be described later.

  On the rear side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member formed of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a configuration in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b, which is disposed in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed above the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides in plane with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. It is composed of a shape.

  The long cover member 173 is a wall portion which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

  The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

  In other words, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It protrudes to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, a change in the wiring position (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed can be absorbed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14 a and the front frame An inverted cup-shaped portion 178 that is a portion formed of a resin material and that opens downward is disposed between the vertically long plate portion and the rotating base end side of 14.

  The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion for improperly pushing and expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area to take measures against cheating. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

  In addition, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed from a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the end of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated enters and is pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat dissolves the inverted cup portion 178 and can pass through the inverted cup portion 178. 173 also melts. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wire accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) to each other in plane. Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. When the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that fraudulent acts can be easily found.

  The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcedly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the distal end thereof becomes a wall portion. 178a.

  Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Further, even if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the tip of the rotation of the front frame 14 (travels in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  Also, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to a person who commits wrongdoing through the piano wire from increasing, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below the 173a, it is possible for the person who commits the wrongdoing to find the wrongdoing before fleeing and to easily secure the person who does the wrongdoing. .

  In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the wrongdoing cannot determine it, so that he or she thinks that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Until the front end of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the front end of the piano wire is seen from the front side through the window 14c), the operation of inserting the piano wire deeper is naturally performed by a person who commits an illegal act (piano wire). Without questioning that the insertion was not successful). Therefore, it is possible for the person who commits the misconduct to notice that the misconduct has been found, and to prolong the time required to escape.

  Note that the detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be provided on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operation handle 51. In the case where the detection device is provided on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally provided on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the entry of the piano wire.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball struck by the launching solenoid 701 formed by an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward an area therebetween, and a ball feeder 720 are provided.

  The ball feeder 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one onto the firing rail 730. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730 by the input of the electric signal to the firing solenoid 701, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

  On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. Has been established. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and a body-side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162 are opened toward the rear side such that one end thereof can communicate with a through hole penetrating through the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) is formed so that the end of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. You.

  When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door-side upper plate passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161, and a front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 for restricting the outflow of game balls from the main body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body-side lower dish passage portion 162 is provided in the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowance position where the outflow of the game ball is allowed.

  An urging member (a coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is kept at the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls fall down is avoided. I have.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14 resists the shutter 163 against the above-described biasing force. Is pushed back to the allowed position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

  The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, the places where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and the places where the connector CN3 is provided are configured by separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different. This is intended to prevent malfunction in advance.

  With reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, a portion of the front frame 14 below the window 14c will be described. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded and shown. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are exploded and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, below the window 14 c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14 c, the front side of the upper plate 17, the diagonally upper right of the lower plate 50, and The operation device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operation device 300.

  The cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a width substantially equal to the width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right ends of the cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorations 8031 and 8032, respectively.

  The cover cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 at least by fastening portions 370a formed at the left and right ends, and has a body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project toward the front side. The main body curved portion 371 is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions and the left and right end portions toward the sides closer to each other in the width direction. And a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a main body curved portion 371 or a hanging portion 372. A light-transmitting portion 373 fastened to at least one of them, a left-side flat support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface on the right end of the main body curved portion 371. And a support groove 376 recessed from the back side of the right side plane support portion 375 and having a concave width increasing (tapered) toward the back side. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a rear side edge portion in a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The front left edge 371a of the front side of the front device 17 in the front-rear direction and the front left edge 371a of the operation device 300 are formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300, and the upper edge of the upper side in the assembled state. The rear middle edge 371b abutting on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge 371b is formed on the opposite side of the rear left edge 371a so as to match the front side edge of the ball lending operation unit 40. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball letting operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

  The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and is provided between the hanging portion 372 and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner of the front frame 14. This is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed by screwing the recessed portion 15a at a position on the front side with respect to a recessed portion 15a described later. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

  The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In addition, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is arbitrarily determined. In the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, six LEDs emit light upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs emit light downward (disposed on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Respectively.

  Light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting unit 373. I do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310 and then transmits light. Through the section 373.

  Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting unit 373 is smaller than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

  Further, as another effect control method, it is possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, in accordance with the change of the tilting device 310 from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is increased (in a stepwise manner) while the tilting device 310 is changed to the first state. By controlling the light amount to change slightly (in a stepwise manner) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state, light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373 due to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is controlled. Can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

  The left side flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 vertically in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. . This can suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated part 8031.

  In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right-side flat support portion 375 vertically contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. . Accordingly, the downward displacement of the electric decoration 8032 can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 are displaced. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portions 8031, the illuminated portions 8032, and the cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

  The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front end of the right side flat support portion 375. And the position match.

  The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the cover 370 and the illuminated part 8032 to each other can be dispensed with.

  Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is provided on the main frame 14a at the back of the main frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

  Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or a piano wire having a heated end is pressed and melted), the front frame is not affected. It functions as an entry preventing member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and it is possible to prevent the illustrated wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

  The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the open front side is a passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box part 151 fitted to the fitting part 140, and a flat plate-like plate part 152 that covers the back surface of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

  Since the fitting box 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the foul ball passage are formed. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates at the lower end of the passage 145 in the front-back direction, but also when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. Can be prevented.

  Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back of the foul ball passage 145 and the ball emptying passage 147, a wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, a wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness before and after the operation device 300 is reduced (a place obliquely above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a case where a through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

  Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation portion rear member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the rear side, and the operation portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The upper and lower positions are fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of the left and right long plate member. In addition, a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough, and a screw which is formed above and below the through hole 156 and which fastens and fixes the operation unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a is inserted. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 that are vertically arranged in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140, and a pivot base end that is larger than the through hole 156. And an opening / closing restricting portion 159 protruding rearward on the side.

  The connecting insertion hole 158 is disposed so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is formed in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction, and protrudes from the rear side. And a screw-in portion 148b formed as a hole through which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed in a position matching the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

  With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158 so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear surface are connected. The operation unit rear member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by aligning the position with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b. be able to.

  An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end of the operation portion rear member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed and the lower edge thereof at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c that extends rearward from a plate that forms the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 so as to divide the region. In an assembled state (see FIG. 89), the wall 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of contacting the wall 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Therefore, in order to align the operation unit rear member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extension wall portion 148c. The right and left surfaces make it possible to quickly and easily adjust the position and posture of the operation unit rear member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140.

  The opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front of and behind the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). Under a predetermined condition, there is an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear side of the operation portion rear member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part. Can be reduced. Therefore, the same thickness as the thickness of the other part of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength depends on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low and the strength of the part formed as thin as possible) (Thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the formability.

  The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be secured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to a U-shape. For example, as compared with a flat cross section, a cross section of a curved (wave) shape, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

  Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or from another member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a from the rear side. It may be composed of a metal part that is extended. However, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is made of a synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board surface supporting device 600 is in contact with the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. Chipping or denting can be prevented. Thereby, the worker who changes the state of the board support device 600 and attaches or detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of being injured by touching a chip or a dent formed in the board support device 600.

  Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock further disposed on the rotation distal end side. It is possible to ensure a long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location 20. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are locked by mistake when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

  As a path through which a foreign substance such as a wire enters, for example, a path passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even when following the gap of the operation device 300.

  The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operation device 300 is inserted into a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

  Thus, even if a foreign matter such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the substantially case-shaped operation device 300. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign substances such as wires from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300, a liquid is considered. For example, a player who feels bad about the game result may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to which drinking water can be poured, and if no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) may fail. There is a possibility that.

  Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like, but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it is configured to be separable and independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, on the bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess. It is not a complete case shape, and a clearance gap is formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap). The concave portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

  In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, is connected to wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent failure.

  Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the up-down direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be splashed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the failure of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

  With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is splashed on the return player, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the player touches the upper surface of the operation device 300 and touches the touched portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

  Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

  FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that binds the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 extending leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173 c.

  In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are respectively connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. It is guided and bound by the binding movable member 180.

  On the other hand, a harness connected to each of the illumination portions 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once provided in the relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. Are connected (collected) to each other, a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

  The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the direction of rotation along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to the main body 181 in the direction of rotation of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184 that are disposed in a U-shape as viewed from above and that can lock the binding arm portion 183. It extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 and has an opening. Mainly includes that the temporary retaining portion 185, a.

  Note that while the binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm 183, the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than the binding arm 183.

  The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a cross section formed in a substantially horseshoe shape on the upper side and having a through hole in the center and having a through hole in the center, and protrudes from the lower left and right corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stopper extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extended end curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-like support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96 (a)), and a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d. And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed of a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

  The plate member 14d includes, at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, a hole group 14d1 including a through-hole arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

  When a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, a pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b are fitted into corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d at the time of fixing.

  The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate members 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by reducing the distance between the extension end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is located on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is secured in a region for accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

  The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is fitted inside the base end portion of the movable arm portion 182, and the movable arm portion 182 is formed. It is pivoted (see FIG. 96).

  The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from a shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a base end portion supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long and thin shape that is continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivot position.

  The base end portion 182a has left and right ends (a portion where a straight line connected to an axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a rear end portion (the end with the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. The approaching portion) extends in the rotational direction from the side wall. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls becomes gradually shorter as approaching the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

  Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on circumstances. .

  Since a pair of the binding arm portions 183 have the same shape, only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. The bundling arm 183 has small width portions 183a formed near the distal end with a width equal to the width of the root and large width portions 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at equal intervals. It is formed. In a fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking arm 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93B).

  The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly larger in thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, since the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in a fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm 183.

  The locking portion 184 is formed on the movable arm portion 182 side with a large opening 184a, and is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with the large opening portion 184a interposed therebetween, and has a larger opening width than the large opening portion 184a. And a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

  The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through without being close to the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot pass (is locked).

  According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, by arranging it on the small opening 184b side, the size of the inner area (tightness) easily surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be reduced. Can be adjusted.

  The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which the binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound.

  The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing a lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial sectional view of FIG.

  94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 ( In b), the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d, and comes into contact with a vertically long metal part constituting the left part of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable by about 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). This angle is usually used in view of the situation of installation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the amusement shop (a situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is juxtaposed on the left and right and if it is rotated by 90 degrees or more, it may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). In this case, the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 is sufficiently larger.

  Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can be rotated with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm 182, the possibility of the movable arm 182 being degraded due to elastic deformation and broken can be reduced.

  Next, the manner of supporting the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is regulated by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and broken.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). FIG. 96 (c) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

  96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. You. That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, the horizontal line is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally, and can be supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

  Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upper extending wall 173c across the intermediate stopper 181c. To HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

  In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Accordingly, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

  FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

  97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 about the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

  From the one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the inner end is formed by rotating the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 about the cylindrical fastening part 181e. Since the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14 is supported, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b) and FIG. 96 (d)).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are the main bodies of the front frame 14 irrespective of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path passing near a vertically long metal part (a part where the base end part 182a of the movable arm part 182 abuts in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left part of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from approaching the rotation front end side of the front frame 14 by forcibly circling the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from hindering the work of the worker when performing the work by opening and closing the front frame 14, and to fit the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit that is bent only once on the rotation base end side (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above the inverted cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). The intermediate stopper 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. For example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. In addition, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  That is, when a wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 to melt and penetrate the wire and advance the wire toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

  When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), thereby making it possible to quickly detect a fraud. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who performs wrongdoing from gaining wrongful profit.

  More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, a ball can be fired even when the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the time the fraud is committed to the time the fraud is discovered (it is possible to detect the fraud early).

  In this case, a wire is entered into the game area, and after the game area is manipulated (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. , It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball from firing a ball, thereby preventing improper profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

  Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is used. 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, there is a possibility that the person who commits the wrongdoing may not be able to collect the bills and the remaining ball of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his own wrongdoing. Therefore, deterrence against wrongdoing can be exerted.

  Further, in order to eliminate the possibility that it is impossible to collect the bills and the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) and perform fraud, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit is 0 yen, the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, so that the gaming machine shop can easily notice the fraud.

  In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a gaming machine store that outputs a disconnection error (CR error) of a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) checks the disconnection error (CR error). This makes it possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide openings 53 are arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. Is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (area of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right part of the ball guide opening 53.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50. And S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extending directions are directed (switched) at least once to both left and right sides.

  The S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thus, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while securing the vertical dimension of the window 14c (see FIG. 86) large, so that the vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area is reduced. Because of the large number of balls that can be temporarily secured on the lower plate 50 (and the upstream side thereof), the stress of ball refilling given to the player (when the balls of the lower plate 50 are gone, remove the balls from a thousand boxes A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress due to a request for replenishment or the like can be provided.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, as regions whose extending directions are bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. And a region NEa2.

  Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 so that the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed. , Is provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, a side wall Na disposed on the opposite side to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end. And walls N, Nb, Nc extending from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

  The proximity wall Nc has a surface Nc1 opposite to the ceiling wall Nb and is formed to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of a sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire or small-diameter metal represented by a piano wire or the like). This function will be described later. The distance between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending area NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from penetrating deeper. In other words, as shown in FIG. 99, a path that proceeds to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance is considered as an approach path of the wire HM that is illegally inserted. In this case, In this case, the wrongdoer advances the wire HM while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side.

  When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the wrongdoer, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances rightward through the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. Will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without leakage.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when the wire HM enters the gap Nin. In addition, the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (sandwiched), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and furthermore, the wire HM can be prevented from being held, and fraudulent acts can be quickly found. it can.

  On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not catch and moves further, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the wire HM projects in a posture with the tip facing downward. Even if it does, the tip of the wire HM will proceed downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 disposed upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area disposed upstream of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

  Thereby, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an incorrect payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area to cause the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device and making it easy to win a fraud, it is possible to prevent an illegal payout ball from being obtained and a person who commits an illegal act to obtain an illegal profit.

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE where the ball ball passage portion 147 joins is approximately twice as large as the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thus, when the sphere flowing down the ball passage 147 is disposed in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in a portion downstream from the merging region CE.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The passage portion 145a has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so that the rear-side bottom plate portion of the passage-forming unit 140 projects downward as it goes downward.

  In a region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 is located at the same position as the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in a region downstream of the passage portion 145a, The rear bottom plate portion is located at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a and the surface position.

  That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the front and rear width is set to be larger in a region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in a region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage 145a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged upstream and downstream of the passage 145 so that the number of balls that can be stayed can be increased. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being aligned in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from simultaneously entering the passage portion 145a.

  In other words, the approach of the ball to the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. Thereby, even when two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. The possibility of being interposed between the upper and lower walls can be reduced.

  The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball is directed rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a that descends downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. A curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape to the rear side and that is curved in such a manner that the direction of extension extends upward toward the rear side.

  The ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side), while the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be.

  Thereby, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (since the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While the width of 145 is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 has a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) where the S-shaped path SL2 is formed. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage 145.

  Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illuminated portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

  The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right directions, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032. In this lower support structure, the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400 has, like the support groove 376 of the cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side. (See FIG. 118), and fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

  Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 need not be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Note that, based on the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling the upper panel unit 400 to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening the upper panel unit 400 after fastening the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

  Further, fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 which are divided into right and left are respectively replaced with left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. With the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 include the main body frame 14a. The state disassembled from 14a is shown.

  The upper side plate member 14 e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is provided in the concave portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. It has a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted.

  The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side thereof, and fastens the screw passing through the through-hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby forming the upper frame. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

  FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes formed in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, while the cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

  In the actual assembling procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main frame 14a. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are superimposed in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a main body frame is provided. 14a (see FIG. 104), and is mainly provided with a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 which is fastened and fixed.

  The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted from the back side to the front side into the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted toward the front side.

  The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extension portion 511a in a plate shape from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is in an assembled state. In FIG. 86, a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension 511a contacts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a board member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, A pin support hole 515 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

  The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b in which the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side in a shape overlapping with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and the base member 511b comes into contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

  The base portion 511b is capable of abutting on the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115 (b)). Can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

  In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560 than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is shifted. The outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface substantially at the same position as the side surface of the base 511b. The rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the rear end of the support plate portion 510, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is connected to the support plate portion 510. Abuts on the left side surface 511c.

  The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. . In other words, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other toward the light guide member 540 from directly behind the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

  Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide 540 and exits from any of the surfaces of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and the path thereof will be described later.

  The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 provided on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 from the rear side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the rear fastening portion 527.

  The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 from the rear side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the rear fastening portion 556.

  The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width set to be approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined.

  That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut on the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projections 566). (In the case where the position is displaced up and down by about the same diameter as the above), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thus, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down by the positional shift with respect to the support plate portion 510, the positional shift is eliminated, and the fastening is easily performed. Fixation can be performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window 14c (see FIG. 86) and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is made of a light-transmissive colorless resin material.

  The right heavy plate unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 facing the left heavy plate unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front end is opposed to the light guide member 540 in the front-rear direction. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

  Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 is a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is exploded and shown.

  The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, an upper fastening portion 522 disposed at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. A lower fastening portion 523 disposed at a lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521; A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and the inner lens member 530 is formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525. And a plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and protrudingly provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the rear side. Support plate 5 0 a plurality of rear fastening portion 527 screws that secure is screwed to, mainly comprises.

  The main body plate portion 521 has a front-side end portion 521a having a corrugated shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front-side end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the corrugation. Is provided.

  The rear side base 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that is in contact with (shapes in shape with) the left side surface of the base 511b of the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  The connection plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connection plate portion 521c.

  In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals increase in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect produced by light can be made different for each opening 524.

  The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and is recessed in the left outer surface in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

  The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left outer side in the left-right direction. That is, screws are inserted into the outer cover member 560 at two locations at the upper end and at one location at the lower end, and are fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

  The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  The openings 524 are arranged side by side in four places at the top and bottom, and function as windows for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

  The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary between the rear side base 521b and the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in this embodiment, where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the rear side base 521b is curved in a design-like manner to the right between the above-described boundary portions. That is, the surface of the rear side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates left and right as it goes up and down.

  In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the design surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity, which is liable to be a dead space, is formed on the reverse surface of the design-shaped overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 is provided. Efficiency can be improved.

  The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. In other words, the inner lens member 530 has a wavy shape in which the front end 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520. Is done.

  The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. And support holes 531b and 531c into which the projecting portions 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 are inserted.

  The support hole 531b is formed in a front portion of the front end 531a in a wave shape, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied near the support hole 531b.

  The support hole 531c is formed in a wave-like rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the support hole 531c can contact the light guide member 540 is provided on the rear side. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is enhanced by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced even when a load is applied near the support hole 531c. be able to.

  In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is formed in the left and right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through-hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

  The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

  The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, similarly to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that extends leftward toward the back side, and thus has a shape in which the left-right width increases toward the back side (the front side end portion when viewed from above). ).

  The inner lens member 530 includes an overhang portion 533 that extends leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes, on the side opposite to the overhanging side, a light scattering portion 533a that is provided in a wavy shape and that has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

  The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a concave portion for changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the rear side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern on both left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is changed to the left and right directions through the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. You. The light guide member 540 is hot-bent to a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and has a width in the thickness direction from an end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to a front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

  Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is depressed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a and emits the light from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by forming a template having a pattern in which a conical portion having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a bottom circle of about 1 mm is dispersedly arranged in a grid at about 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that has reached the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

  The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, and is preferably an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, or an amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, and AS resin (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound) can be exemplified. Among them, in particular, by using an acrylic resin, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.

  In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the heat bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front side end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the right and left sides are formed. Is also formed from a wavy shape.

  The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. There is no particular limitation on the degree of the corrugation, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By using such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting three-dimensional freedom while maintaining good mechanical properties with little distortion after hot bending. .

  The details of the wavy shape waving right and left will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left, and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. A wave shape of a mode of being located to the right (positioning away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

  As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending a base material having a concave portion. As a method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) which are curved while being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + a heating temperature of 10 to 40 ° C. This is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferable that the heat treatment be performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

  At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material at the time of heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is maintained, and the light source light before and after the heat bending process is performed. Fluctuating angle can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and unevenness in luminance distribution in the light guide plate. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

  The light guide member 540 is provided with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting a light guide plate, and a screw that extends vertically from upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and is fastened to the outer cover member 560. And a fastening portion 542 to be performed.

  The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at a position other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect of the light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

  The outer lens member 550 is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a rightward extension in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 to form an outer cover. An overhang portion 554 that can be visually recognized through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a projecting portion provided on the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. A plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551, and the front side end portion 551a that forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a corrugated shape and is slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. You.

  The front-side end 551a is provided on the front side at a position where the curve forming the corrugated shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of protrusions that are fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). An installation part 551b is provided.

  A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) bulging toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed on the surface of the front end 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540. Are formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, The light emission at the front end face can be a strip-shaped light emission mode that extends vertically.

  The insertion hole 553 is provided in a concave deep portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled from the outer cover member 560.

  In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550, and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) facing the player can be enlarged.

  The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member is provided. The surface 540 and the main body plate portion 551 abut on each other (see FIG. 114B).

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 faces the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being displaced from the light guide member 540, and to accurately input light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be done.

  The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface at an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. In addition, a plurality of screws having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and an elongated hole formed in an oval shape with a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface at the lower end of the main body plate portion 561 that is capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and a diameter of a screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a slightly larger vertical width, a long hole shape longer than the vertical width, and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side; and a main body plate portion 561. At the front end portion, a receiving surface which is capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and a vertical width smaller than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 formed in a long hole shape with a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an opening formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes a portion 565 and a plurality of protruding portions 566 protruding from the main body plate portion 561 to the rear side.

  The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 by fitting the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape protruding to the front side by the cover 370. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stable and supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

  The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an unauthorized act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

  With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

  In addition, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the protruding portions 551b are arranged on the back side of the support holes 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the protruding portions. The state where the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

  The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are abutted in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112 (b)). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

  In this manner, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting the projections 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500 and fitting them. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end on the front side of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are disposed at the front side end of the right panel unit (the front side from the front side surface of the light guide member 540). The number of screws for fastening and fixing the light guide member 540 can be reduced, and the region where light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, so that light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the band.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening portions) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the light member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered front end) can be expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

  When the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are connected. , And the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R form surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and have a positional relationship in which the surfaces can abut. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. Panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, respectively. At least two types of the assembling procedure can be considered. .

  The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right heavy board unit 500R is fastened. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. Thereafter, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing the plate unit 500R and the support plate 510 respectively. These two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

  As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker performing maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of a part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the working time can be reduced.

  In either case, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b. When sliding the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R in the plane direction, at least one of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

  As described above, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted is such that the right panel unit 500 is pryed open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and It helps prevent illegal acts that enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the machine 500.

  That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, by removing the screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled, and an illegal act can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front. If the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are not easily disassembled unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 is provided from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to decompose. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c).

  Light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is applied to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved right and left by the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

  Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape waving in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thus, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

  In addition, since the opposite side (the right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 is closer to the outer lens member 550 at a position corresponding to the uppermost one of the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to is diffused and can be used for production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. The effect can be improved.

  It should be noted that the difference in the mode of producing light is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region, or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, it is possible to make the mode of producing light on both the left and right sides different. .

  The light guide member 540 always has a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also set to the second opening from the top in correspondence with the vertical width being increased as the opening 524 goes upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2). Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is larger. , Which is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

  Accordingly, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 does not change, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit light condensed for each of the openings 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

  Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4１R1) and the center of the concave surface. The normal coming out is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be strengthened, and the effect of light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as a length connecting the middle point of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 facing the upper and lower portions is a vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the upper and lower width W4.

  In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 are formed such that the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. Accordingly, in a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection is performed. In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent light from being excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

  The center point of each of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each of the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. Is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

  The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in a region KE at the boundary between the openings 524. Here, the region KE is a band-like region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 provided adjacently above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE corresponds to the opening 524 provided adjacently below the same. Matches the top of Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a to the region KE travels in a state where the light is hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114C).

  In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the action of condensing light is reduced, the player can visually recognize the light. The difference in the amount of light is small.

  On the other hand, by making the region KE a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Can be improved in durability.

  In addition, by forming a convex shape to the left in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed to the right, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance of the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

  That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

  For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with no gap. At this time, since the right side shape of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE has a concave shape, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

  In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, which is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

  Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. Can be done.

  In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shorter than the upper and lower portions thereof (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter). Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the light amount is weak. The effect may be performed using the light that reaches the front end.

  That is, a light effect is prepared that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but can be visually recognized through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). By setting the degree of expectation of the jackpot high in the effect, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to a side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of fatigue of the eyes of the player can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

  Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, and is visually recognized by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and does not visually recognize the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and visually recognizes the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

  As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the cheating player is not aware of it, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

  Note that, by inverting the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player, and may not be visible to the clerk.

  FIG. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A.

  The light guide member 540 has a shape that tapers gradually from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the part farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm in order to maintain mechanical strength, and has the same width across the entire region in the vertical direction with the same gradient. to shrink.

  Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face is long, the width is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and is disposed at a position depressed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily visually recognized as dark than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion opposed to the support hole 531c is more than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion opposed to the support hole 531b. Since the width (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of a surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

  Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531c and the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531b are increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. This makes it easy to make the degree of light emission visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 vertically uniform with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 at the forefront (the difference in strength is small). )can do.

  FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In FIG. 116, an example of a path (a traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. Spreads and proceeds to the outside.

  Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is fixed, the light emission mode (coarse, dense, light and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the light can be visually recognized by the player in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

  Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 (the player side) is not right next to the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (Refer to the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

  Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the description will be continued. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the lower right end at the upper end of the right panel unit 500. ), And is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

  FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; , Mainly comprising. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The electric decoration unit 401 is a unit in which decoration indicating the model name or the like is provided on the front side surface, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light, thereby performing the effect by light.

  The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on a rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 to form a cylindrical inner side. A tubular portion 405 having a shape formed by penetrating the wavy wall portion 403; and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body 402 is formed in a box shape such that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. Note that the LEDs included are disposed on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body 402.

  The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, so that the position for assembling in the left-right direction is easily determined, and the work of assembling the electric decoration unit 401 to the upper frame member 410 is performed. It is the part that improves the performance.

  The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a horizontally long groove shape which vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed as a recess.

  The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring, which passes the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body 402 is provided to the upper frame member 410 side.

  The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 410e and the upper side plate member 14e, so that access to the inside is prevented. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

  FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge; and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. A left corner supporting member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and fitted to the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position extending from the opening 414 to the front side. And the lens member 440 constituting the illuminated portion 8033 while being prevented from dropping to the rear side by being pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. Provided.

  The main body member 411 is a left and right long member having openings formed on both left and right sides for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker cover 27 being disposed so as to cover the opening. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 which is opposed to the tubular portion 405 of the electric decoration unit 401 is smaller than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through-hole 413 formed to penetrate in a slightly large inner shape, and an opening 414 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

  The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the electric decoration unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

  The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thus, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the electric decoration unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Thus, the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached.

  The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

  The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, so that the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

  The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed groove 417 from the back side at the lower left end face. A supported groove 418 to be formed, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed at a position symmetrical to the left and right near the upper end portion, and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a second portion that is formed so that a screw can be screwed at a position closer to the top and bottom. And a fastening portion 419b.

  The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front end). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

  The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (see FIG. 86). 4), the load (weight and the like) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

  The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the electric decoration 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight and the like) given from the illuminating unit 8031 can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

  The fastening portion 419 is provided at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the screw does not reach the tip. And an enlarged rib 419a to be provided.

  As described later, the enlarged rib 419a connects the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (See FIG. 125 (a)), which will be described in detail later.

  In the present embodiment, the ribs 419a having the same shape are arranged at three locations around the fastening part 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening part 419.

  The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided at a position lower than the main body member 411, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122). Are formed at positions corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of the main body member 411, which will be described later in detail.

  The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at a lower front side edge of the main body member 421, An L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, and then extends upward from the extending end thereof, and has an L-shaped cross section, and a main body plate portion 421. An opening 424 mainly includes a plurality of small-diameter through-holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left-right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically.

  In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically can be increased, and the strength can be improved.

  The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings through which vibration generated toward the front side passes in the speaker assembly 450.

  The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through-hole 430R2 formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

  FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

  The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are jointly fastened to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connection holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L each having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave so that the sound can be heard, and a speaker 451 inserted through the through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape substantially matching the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and after forming a space between the front assembly 460 in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). And a side assembly 480.

  The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits a production sound in connection with a game, and one end is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. A speaker connection line 453 (for example, an electric wire composed of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and is connected to a terminal of the speaker connection line 453. When the connector is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  A front cover of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is scattered. It is possible to reproduce and output high quality sound without any delay. Further, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without deteriorating the sound quality.

  The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 formed in a cup shape having a left / right long side and an open back side, and a plurality of concave portions provided in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. And an extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the outer side in the vertical direction. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end to the front side of the main body 461; a light passing through hole 465 formed in the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction; A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted at the right side; a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side; The screw inserted into the side assembly 480 A plurality of fastening portions 468 to be connected and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a lower end of the distal end side main body portion 461T. And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side.

  The main body 461 includes, as regions divided in the left-right direction, a base-side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base-side main body 461B (see FIG. 121). The main body 461M is mainly provided with an intermediate main body 461M connected to the left side (left side) and a distal end side main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body 461M. The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T have a continuous space formed between the base body 461B, the middle body 461M, and the rear body 480.

  The main body 461 includes a rear side wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

  The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

  The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 463a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

  In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is configured such that the screws inserted into the through holes 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a are screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is so tight that the screws are tightened. Pressed against rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

  According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the sound effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

  The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage concave portion 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is shown so as to be visible.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

  The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole through which light emitted from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

  The passage forming rib 467 abuts the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap between the front and rear, and bends a plurality of times into a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). Are formed. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

  The front recessed portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (ie, slightly protrudes from the outer shape).

  The rear assembly 480 has a main body 481 formed in a cup shape having a long left and right side and an open front side, and a concave semicircular tip from the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extension plate extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside in the vertical width. 483, a wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed in the upper right corner of the main body 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side and a through hole through which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Through holes 488 and front assembly In the corresponding position in the longitudinal direction a front recess 471 of the 60 to the side recess 491 after being recessed toward the front side to the rear side, mainly comprising a.

  The main body part 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. And a front side wall portion 481H formed to have a shape fitted inside the rear side wall portion 461H.

  The speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall fitted on the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H on the entire outer periphery, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

  The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting to the front side beyond the wire pressing convex portion 484 at positions where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right with an interval allowing passage of the speaker connection line 453. 481Ha.

  The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha is a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha have a tapered shape that spreads left and right toward the front side (front end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 extends from the wire passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts right and left, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary projections 481Ha.

  As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembling. In the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

  The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

  The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the common tightening hole 14a2 and the common tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

  In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear side of the main body frame 14a by the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

  The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed to have a width to be fitted into the wiring passing concave part 464, and has a depth greater than the depth of the wiring passing concave part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is provided with a projecting length that is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the outer periphery of the covering portion.

  That is, by passing the speaker connection line 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464 are compressed. A gap can be prevented from being formed between the opening surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes.

  The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole through which light emitted from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through-hole 485 is formed from a circular opening having a size surrounding one LED. The light-passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through-hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is assembled (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

  The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, abuts each other without any gap in front and rear, and is formed in a plurality of spaces formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. These are ribs forming a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends twice. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes.

  The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, and is formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear plate of the main body 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

  Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed such that a front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and at that time, a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, a compressive force in the rearward direction is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the compression force closes the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

  At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is low and the passage-forming rib 487 may bend right and left, the compressive force does not work well, and the gap may not be able to be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is reduced by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), (Strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be.

  The rear recess 491 is formed in a shape that is inverted from the front recess 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening in cooperation with the front recess 471. The opening is formed so as to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outward from the outer shape). It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b), for easy understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is shown by imaginary lines, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are arranged to face each other are facing each other. Is shown in a state of being deployed toward the front side of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper surface. Can be matched. That is, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-rear direction.

  In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the rear side of the base body 461B of the front assembly 460. Is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 extends toward the distal end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and alternately move up and down toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

  By forming the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are assembled during assembly. The wiring can be prevented from being caught between the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

  Since the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, the rigidity of the main body 461 is enhanced by the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can be.

  Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e forms a bent passage for passing the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 in cooperation with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

  Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 proceeds linearly. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided while avoiding the passage forming rib 467. Will progress.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest to the left and right direction (for example, the rib portion 467b) is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (the arrow L and U directions).

  On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) and is closest to the rib portion (for example, in the left-right direction). When the rib 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrow L, D).

  Therefore, when the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are alternately arranged up and down as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, The traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws can be made longer as compared with the left and right width of the space.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of concave portions 471, 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be generated by the concave portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately near the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Directions of arrows L and U).

  Therefore, the concave portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 for holding down the wiring, and are alternately arranged at a plurality of positions (books) toward the left side. Rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e arranged at five locations in the embodiment.

  Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the rigidity of the main body 481 is enhanced by the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can be.

  Here, each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches in the front-rear direction with each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See FIG. 2).

  The operation of each of the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e is similar to the operation of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be generated by the concave portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left between the concave portion 482 disposed immediately near the rear concave portion 491 and the concave portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). Direction (arrows L and U). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

  Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in the vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is once narrowed at a position where the concave portions 462, 482 and the concave portions 463b, 483b are vertically arranged. Further, the vertical width is increased at once at a position further away from the speaker 451, and thereafter communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471, 491. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is attached is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) advances toward the distal end side main body portion 461T on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the front-end-side main body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order. As a result, the sound is emitted outside the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the back surface of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491, and an opening 424 ( 120 (see FIG. 120), it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so that the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is reproduced and output with high sound quality without being interrupted. Can be.

  The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, and converts the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 into the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out by the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it is possible to amplify the heavy bass. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of a sense of reality, and can enhance the interest and excitement of the player for the game.

  In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

  Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is used as a path avoiding the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (audio ) Sound tuning can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 have the following purposes. The speaker assembly 450 is disposed at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

  Further, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125A), and the respective rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screws being screwed into the fastening portions 468, the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of the extension plates 463, 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other so that the front assembly 460 and the rear The deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

  In addition, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. Before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

  For this reason, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portion is formed from the fastening portion 14e1. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

  An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is considered. It can be easily suppressed.

  In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally penetrated into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front recess 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed in a closed box shape. The gap between the openings formed by the wiring pressing projections 484 is closed by the speaker connection lines 453. Therefore, when wires, piano wires, and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly passes through an opening different from the location where the wire has entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e and extending the tip from 450.

  In addition, since the through-hole formed as an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes through the upper side plate member 14e is disposed near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, a wire or a piano wire is provided. For example, the distance between the front recess 471 and the opening formed by the rear recess 491 where the speaker and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 can be increased.

  Therefore, even when such misconduct is performed, the success rate of the misconduct can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent the occurrence of the wrongful profit.

  FIG. 124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of the arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). is there. In FIG. 124 (a) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Are omitted.

  As shown enlarged in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side. The outer surface 481Ho (the upper surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side and is fitted to the inner surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

  In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before the assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib 487c receives a compressive load from the rib 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by the elastic deformation, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the ribs in contact with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M has a shorter front-to-rear dimension than the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. For this reason, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (narrowed) in the intermediate main body 461M as compared with the distal-side main body 461T. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461 </ b> T disposed above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is inside the intermediate main body portion 461 </ b> M. It is largely secured in such a manner as to bulge in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal-side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal-side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to make the bass sound easier to hear by the vibration wave Ws.

  FIG. 125A is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fixed to the fastening portion 419 with the screws inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a, so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and The upper side plate member 14e is a portion for sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at a surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at a position below the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is placed at a position above the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 of 450.

  The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 are located. The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are configured to be fastened and fixed without the interposition of the side assembly 480.

  The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

  In the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the rear side is provided inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is provided inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending to the front side is provided inside).

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are provided in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the reproduction output from the speakers 451 provided in the other speaker assemblies 450R and 450L is performed. In addition to avoiding conflict with the sound to be played, it is possible to reproduce a high-quality sound as a transparent sound without hindering the reproduced sound.

  In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side at a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 does not abut (stick) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14e, but has a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 is line-contacted particularly at the lower end.

  In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the portion projecting from the upper side plate member 14e and abutting on the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin). It is not done.

  For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be provided, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

  In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, sound can be made thicker.

  Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

  Regarding the shape, it may be protruded in a long plate shape, may be protruded in a spike shape, or may be protruded in a rounded dot shape. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

  Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the side or the front of the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, when it is arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed in a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. The positioning may be performed by the following. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the function as the insulator can be achieved by tightening screws inserted into the through holes 483a. The sound effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

  At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) or the same as the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a through hole provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction and a screw inserted into a through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is provided. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper plate member 14e.

  Further, regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) is fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, The upper frame member 410 can be prevented from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

  The same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to be the same as the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

  126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

  First, in order to describe the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left front support portion 12 a and a left rear support portion 12 b are separated from each other in order to support the left end of the game board 13. Will be arranged.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the left front front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13. A flat surface 12a2 extending leftward and rightward from the left end is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

  The left end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a center portion opened in a cup shape. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion projecting from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

  The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a manner that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects toward the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction (rightward) on the side where the game board 13 is arranged in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. Thereby, the workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 by the worker can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) show the board support device 600. It is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. In FIGS. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and FIG. 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIG. 128 and Z39, for easy understanding, a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted.

  When the operator attaches the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent. The part is slid between the left front support part 12a and the left rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis directed in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the near side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is pivoted around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front face of the game board 13). Rotate so as to approach the inner frame 12. In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

  In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left and right direction with an arrangement and a length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose upper front end is cut as an inclined surface, are provided in the left-right direction.

  With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view. Each time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so that the game board 13 can ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side so that the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay. . Therefore, the workability of the operation of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game store. Thereby, the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 can be prevented from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same inclination angle as the rear inclination at the time of setting the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

  In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and released in a later-described state, and the rear face of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

  Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 (the portion disposed on the front side from the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to retreat from the route, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pressing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the rear side, a load is applied to the claw member 640 after the rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost simultaneously.

  In addition, the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c, and the vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board support device 600 does not contact the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600 (game The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Accordingly, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached with the state change of the board supporting device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

  Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the rear side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be reduced by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

  When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has its left end supported at two upper and lower positions by a left front support portion 12a and a left rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126). 13 when the right end of 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in a fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. In addition, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

  For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction to push the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. Is regulated.

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is disposed at the lower rear end of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices provided on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be capable of changing its position in the plane direction of the game board 13, and a control board disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back is connected in the rotating direction of the game board 13.

  The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture inclined in such a manner that the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

  The inner frame 12 is provided with a board supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. In addition, since the pair of upper and lower board supporting devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one board supporting device 600 will be described, and description of the other board supporting device 600 will be omitted.

  130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the board supporting device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board support device 600 A release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board supporting device 600 is rotatable by a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A pre-rotation claw member 620 pivotally supported, and a regulated pre-claw member rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620. 630 and a post-rotation claw member 640 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is disposed on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are disposed to face left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612; An arcuate concave portion 614 is provided on the back side of the support hole 612 along the arc centered on the support hole 612 and is recessed in the plate portion 611a from below, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A bar-shaped regulating rod 615 and a flange extending right and left from the plate portion 611a and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in an assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). A pair of fixing plates 616, mainly comprises.

  The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the base end side of the insertion, inserted into the support hole 612, and then pressed at the end at the insertion end side. , Are fixed to the support holes 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

  Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the front upper corner of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 which are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of support holes which are formed in a straight line on the back side of the plate portion 621a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. And a hole 624.

  When the second shaft member P62 is inserted through the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.

  The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed to face left and right, and includes a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in side view, a connection plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connection plate portion 621b from the rear end of the connection plate portion 621b. And a rear extension plate 621c extending downward at an angle of about 45 degrees, and extending perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the rear end of the extension portion 621a2 toward the opposite plate portion 621a. A hanging back plate 621d to be provided, and a front extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate 621d to the front side at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate 621d. And mainly comprising.

  The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be perpendicular to each other.

  The rear-side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can contact the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts to contact the main body plate portion 611.

  Thus, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the operation is completed, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while the force required at the start of pushing is reduced, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

  The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back of the hanging back plate 621d.

  A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate 621d close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to separate the lower end of the claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate 611 after the rotation.

  The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate 631 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a letter shape in a side view, and is disposed to face left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 which are formed in a straight line in the plate portion 631a to be formed, and which are supported by the second shaft member P62, and inclined forward from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that is extended by extension, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

  The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is disposed to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

  The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby restricts a free posture change of the pre-regulating claw member 630.

  The post-rotation claw member 640 is a body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the body plate portion 641 and is disposed to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 and the pair of plates 641a, which are formed in a straight line through the plate 641a and connected to the third shaft member P63. And an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

  The front connecting plate 641b is a part that contacts the back side of the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

  The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in an unlocked state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the inclined extension plate 643 has a tilt angle that makes contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

  FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process in which the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. In FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), it is fixed to the multifunctional cover member 171 and the board supporting device 600 which are arranged close to the board supporting device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  That is, FIG. 134 (a) illustrates the released state of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) illustrates the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed immediately behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thus, the simple operation of pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 causes the claw member 640 after rotation to rotate too much about the first shaft member P61 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61). Accordingly, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state after the rotation.

  Here, the biasing force in the direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 by the torsion spring NBa as described above. Therefore, when other external force does not act, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 abuts on the restriction bar 615, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated. While the front side where the extending portion 621a2 is disposed tilts, the front side rises in a manner in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  More specifically, while the regulating rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134 (a)). Until 135 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed to face the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 side of the inclined extension plate 633. The leading end is disposed close to the hanging back plate 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

  In the angle range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (range between FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 135 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, a change in the posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 during operation due to the downward load is caused by a change in the posture in the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). (Posture change), the reaction force to the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 to the downward load is restricted.

  In addition, since the game board 13 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

  Thus, rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a downward load applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in which the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

  In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the rear-side extension board 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt), the rear-side extension board is used. Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in a state where the board surface supporting device 600 is released and the front claw member 620 is rotated by a load from the front frame 14, the front frame 14 is disposed on the front frame 14. Depending on the state of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state, the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state, and is stable at a halfway angle May occur.

  Assuming that the board supporting device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the gap between the back of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front of the game board 13 is obtained. May be shortened, which may hinder the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function disposed on the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 contacts the pre-regulation claw member 630, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it is possible to remind the clerk who has performed the operation of closing the front frame 14 that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

  If the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is fixed, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation claw Depending on the state of the contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stabilized at a halfway angle occur (only, The board supporting device 600 reaches a fixed state).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is set to the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the restriction bar 615.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear side extension plate 621 c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

  That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. I have.

  Thereby, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the store clerk pushing the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 90% of the game board becomes stable). The case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the case where the load is applied to the panel support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14. In this case, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

  Accordingly, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (see FIG. )), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the pawl member 640 after the rotation is displaced by the game board 13, and the pawl member 620 before the rotation is accordingly rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d, so the claw member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. Of the torsion spring NBb is applied as a resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistance portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

  Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 moves from a portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) to a portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 gradually increases.

  As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed to the rear side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135A and the second shaft member P62 is displaced by the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620, The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are separated for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given from the regulating bar 615 to the pre-regulation claw member 630 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135B, the dimensional relationship is such that the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be moved to the front claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , And then the board support device 600 can be fixed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the rear side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface supporting device 600 (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the board is to be replaced, and the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed). Thus, the working efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward and the claw member 630 is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation continues as it is. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

  When the board support device 600 is released in a state where the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is released.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 abuts on the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. This can eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

  Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support apparatus 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support apparatus 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are shifted up and down. In addition, there is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the front claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the displacement amount of the pre-regulation claw member 630. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

  Accordingly, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (a degree that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted from being returned by the restriction bar 615), Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the positions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the release state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and rotates before the rotation. And the claw member 640 after the rotation can be displaced in a direction in which the angle between the claw member 640 and the claw member 640 is increased.

  Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, so that the game board at a position supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, a relationship between the board supporting device 600 disposed below and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139 show the front frame 14 in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14.

  In FIG. 136, the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 is shown, and in FIG. 138, the board supporting apparatus 600 is shifted from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). 139) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139 in a state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is shown by imaginary lines. Is done.

  136 to 139, the relationship between the board supporting device 600 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. 136 and 137 are shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is detached, but to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged. Is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 137, when the board supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board supporting device 600 is avoided. . In addition, since the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared with the disposition of the board support device 600 in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 is provided. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is disposed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening / closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

  Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are in opposite directions, so that the reaction force becomes excessively large. This is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 138, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is provided, the front lower end of the game board 13 may abut on the rear side extension plate 621c in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139) when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, the opening / closing control unit 159 And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

  Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) do not become opposite directions, and it is easy to push in with a normal load as described above. (See FIG. 135 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is pushed through the opening / closing regulating portion 159, and the board supporting device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, closing the front frame 14 is allowed.

  FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

  The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) illustrates a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) illustrates a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b), only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The front surface of the base member 710 is pivotally supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. And a ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721 which is provided.

  The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is provided on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A fastening portion 716 in which a screw which is cylindrically protruded toward the front side and is screwed to fasten and fix the ball receiving member 731 is provided at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716 a bulging linearly from the base member 710 to the front side; , And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

  The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 into which the bar-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 713 formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. A protrusion 714 protruding toward the front side near the right side of the locking portion 713 and a suction force generating solenoid 741 are disposed so as to be opposed to each other when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142A). And a problem determination convex portion 715 that is provided to be convex.

  The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A). An opposing plane 714a formed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and an inclined surface that is opposite to the opposing plane 714a and that is inclined rightward toward the back side. And a surface 714b.

  When the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination protrusion 715 does not abut the suction force generating solenoid 741, but loosens the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 ( In a state of being floated from the cover member 721, the cover member 721 is formed at a protruding height which abuts and restricts the rotation of the cover member 721.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosened, and to form a case in which the cover member 721 cannot be closed so that the sales force is applied to the clerk. It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed beforehand.

  The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by the base member 711, a regulation state that regulates the falling of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a regulation state of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). And a switching device 740 that is controlled to change the state between an allowable state in which the air flows down to the firing rail 730.

  The cover member 721 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material into a cup shape with the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) opened, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. , A hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the right and left opposite sides of the bar portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passing at a position displaced toward the bar portion 722 side from the hook portion 723 A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship protruding slightly upward from a lower edge of an inner end of the ball passage opening 724; And a shaft rod portion 726 that supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

  The switching device 740 is an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a member made of a synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft bar portion 726, and the attraction force generating solenoid 741 generates a magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the metal plate 743 is a sheet metal member that is locked on the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741; A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and is inclined downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. And a regulating projection 745 that extends toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the shaft bar 726.

  The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and has a falling plate portion 724a that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction. A rib portion 724b, which is disposed above the falling plate portion 724a, extends downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and has a tip end surface which is inclined downward toward the back side; A left inner side surface 724c, which is provided continuously with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and to the right.

  When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, the sphere P8 flows down in a manner of being separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so that the sphere P8 and the cutting metal 725 are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged to protrude inside the sphere passage opening 724. The collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

  The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, there is provided a ball receiving member 731 which is disposed at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the long direction are parallel and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and passing the fastening screw, and a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a. And a regulating groove 731b having a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

  When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through-hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731. The ball P8 can be slid along the straight line that is output, whereby the standby position (the distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P <b> 81 (the firing intensity when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. In addition, since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

  The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and extends diagonally upward and to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a. The base is formed by screws inserted into a plurality of (two in this embodiment) mounting holes 732 formed in the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

  Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is provided. Is suppressed.

  The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and contacts the front and rear two places on the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the ball P8 upward. It is configured to guide.

  FIG. 144 (a) to FIG. 144 (c) are front views of the sphere launching unit 112a showing a sphere sending state by the sphere feeding device 720 in a time series. 144 (a) to 144 (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

  144 (a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the state in which the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), as shown in FIG. 144 (a). In the case of, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P <b> 8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745. Retreats above the sphere, and the regulation of the downward flow of the sphere P8 is released, whereby the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711, whereby further downward flow is regulated, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, the ball P8 riding on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thus, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

  Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

  FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725 a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 is inserted and a falling plate portion 724 a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and a notch with a sharp acute end formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the same plate as the base plate of the lower blade portion 725b. And an upper blade portion 725c extending from the main body.

  The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined more rearward than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes above the falling plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

  The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and entered is described.

  FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the sphere launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 is fired. In FIGS. 146 and 147, some components of the ball firing unit 112a are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the firing rail 730 stays in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current flows through the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously protrudes, giving a firing force to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is hit along the firing rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

  Here, the ball P8 is struck while one end of the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It has been known that the player can loosen the ball P8 to repeatedly detect the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the firing of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is located at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in such a manner that the yarn Y8 moves closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the ball P8 is struck in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the firing rail 730 under the falling plate portion 724a, and the middle portion of the yarn Y8 of the falling plate portion 724a. Since the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c projecting above the falling plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. .

  While the player holds the end (the other end) on the near side of the thread Y8, a load accompanying the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  When the firing strength of the ball P8 is low, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not cut due to insufficient tensile force, but in this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of an improper act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. Are substantially the same.

  In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is provided. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance / retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

  The reciprocating operation unit 900 raises and lowers the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 921 (the reciprocating operation, that is, the operation of moving inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the third The operation includes at least one of an operation of retreating to the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other end is connected to the other end. Is driven by a drive motor 921 via an arm gear 924 while being pivotally supported by the rear plate 1100, and drives the drive-side arm member 910 to rotate. A driving motor 921 for generating a driving force, and a transmission unit 920 including a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive-side arm member 910, and a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930; And a long plate-like driven arm member 950 for connecting the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800 on the left and right opposite sides of the driving arm member 910.

  Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. In FIG. 154, the supporting substrate 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The petal operating device 800 is configured such that a member such as a petal 802 is supported on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

  A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the right side of the upper end in the central body portion of the supporting base material 801, and a driving shaft of the central motor 804 is moved forward through a small gap formed in the supporting base material 801. A first gear 804 </ b> G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

  An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the center motor 804 in the center main body portion of the supporting base material 801. The opening 801P is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes, and extends inside. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and having a screw insertion hole at a distal end portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a detection arc plate 880d of the loose fitting device 880 described below can pass. It is formed.

  An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed, below the central motor 804 (see FIG. 156).

  A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long, generally elliptical area in the center and cover the peripheral area from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region, and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper portion.

  In the present embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that slightly extends up and down as a whole. However, since the petal operating device 800 is disposed so as to be movable up and down as described later, The operating space can be reduced by forming the 801 into a vertically long shape rather than the left and right long shape.

  At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively linked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap with the position of the opening 801P as described later. The outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be arranged at any position as long as they do not interfere with each other. In the present embodiment, however, they can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged on the right (see FIG. 156).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a slightly inclined position toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the supporting base material 801 and the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the supporting base material 801 from being increased, and the driving base arm member 910 is connected to the driving base arm member 910 via the driving arm member 910. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

  FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which constitute a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

  FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

  Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and has a shape that curves so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

  Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery thereof has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical in shape to each other, but are slightly similar in unevenness and the like, but are formed in approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is formed so that the specific color (red) is dark without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

  Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole inside at two locations, that is, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and the radial center portion. I have.

  The petals 802 are located closer to the rounded tip (counterclockwise in front view, right side of FIG. 157 (a) in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where they are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803 than to the rear side 802a. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp edge side (clockwise in front view, left side in FIG. 157 (a) of the drawing) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side 802a.

  The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side. Petals 802 are arranged so as to gather toward the same center with the tip on the inner peripheral side.

  The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced back and forth, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b overlap at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the matching positional relationship can be set, the difference (size difference) in the shape of the entire petal 802 between the assembled position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be remarkable.

  The five petals 802 have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

  As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member separated from each other and fixed to the five petals 802.

  Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has an outer peripheral edge portion extending forward.

  In the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arrangement state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S which extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes therein are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). The member 803 is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 in the lateral direction.

  The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be located substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803. Further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along portions on both side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes inside at two positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

  The screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat member 803 from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed behind the flat plate member 803.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a similar front shape in which five similar shaped portions are annularly continuous, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

  156 will be described again. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape at the front and rear at two adjacent locations among five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at the middle one of the three locations except the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having a screw hole is formed integrally inside the extension, and a positioning boss 813a extends from a leading edge of a location where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815. Each of the center slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 814 is counterclockwise viewed from the front by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the present pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

  Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight space therebetween.

  In this manner, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a circular shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of these three slits, that is, of the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the small diameter side are the two-sided slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extension (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803.

  The slit member 810 is connected to a side end of a flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 are formed, and has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral ends of the center slit 814 and both-side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Has an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

  Thereby, the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

  Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the pair of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged closer together so as to be closer to the inside, whereby the outer shape of the slit member 810 is also made compact.

  In other words, it is assumed that the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. In the case where the slits 810 are formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the both-side slits 815 can be laid out more densely. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

  As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and has a small thickness at both ends of the slide member 820 and a tip portion having a semicircular shape in a front view. An extending portion to be formed, a central portion that is bulged out of the rendering portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 projecting from the front to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state; a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side; Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects the long direction at right angles. And both side slits 815.

  On the other hand, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

  Thus, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slit 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

  As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the posture in which the flat plate member 803 faces a fixed outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. Is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide.

  FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. 160 and 161 refer to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

  As described above, the rotating plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side, with a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and formed around the peripheral wall.

  The guide rail 832 is formed such that the peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to extend so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape in a front view. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830.

  The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a small gap of play. The ridge corner at the extended end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be angled.

  The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a clockwise direction in a front view along a direction substantially intermediate between a tangent to the pivot opening 831 and a normal line. Further, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape further toward the clockwise direction in front view than the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  The end of the guide rail 832 on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end protrudes forward from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

  Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830 </ b> G that extends rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a peripheral wall shape and has teeth on the outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

  Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five places as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is not linear but linear. As a result, the pivotal opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 is smoothly pivotably supported.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a third gear 810G slightly smaller in diameter than the second gear 830G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is further fixed to the rear side of the second gear 830G so as to be concentric. Are arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

  A circular pivot opening 810a is formed at the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, three portions of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) are provided. A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screw insertion portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

  The third gear 810 </ b> G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830 </ b> G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into positioning hole 810c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through screw insertion hole 810b.

  As a result, the slit member 810 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G, and is braked by the oil damper 805. Is held on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

  FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut out along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to increase the diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

  A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front screw portion 857 having screw holes therein at two places on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and a side from the front screw portion 857 to the lumen portion 856 side. A holding portion 858, which is formed in a shape having a counterbore at a deviated position toward the rear side, and two support protrusions 859 extending slightly short forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

  The inner peripheral surface of the lumen 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing portions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft 852, and A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from the rear screw portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is disposed in front of the center shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

  By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the center shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 and positioning the screw, the screw is screwed into the front screwing portion 857 of the center shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  An insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the center shaft member 851 in a size that allows the screw-in portion 869 of the center decoration member 868 to be fitted inside.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the front surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location at the center and at many locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles multiplexed (doubled) around the one location. The LEDs 865 are respectively arranged and fixed, and emit light forward.

  In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, laterally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to. Note that the horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the front LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward.

  On the front side of the LED board 861, a center decoration member 868 is arranged. The center decoration member 868 is formed of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, is extended in a columnar shape from the base of a long plate to the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the center. It has a pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

  The screw portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. A screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 abuts on the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED board 861 interposed therebetween, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the center decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thus, the center decoration member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861.

  The loose fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member. A main body cylindrical member 883 which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and which is loosely and rotatably fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a front and rear cylindrical shape and internally having a screw hole at two of the four locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed and the above-mentioned four places where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four positions corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with the same protrusion length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a in the outer diameter direction in the shape of a rib and at the same time in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b is formed to extend therethrough.

  A decorative member 884 formed on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861 and covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 149), and the decorative member 884 is externally mounted. A rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the diameter and has a bottomed cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion and abuts against the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

  The back cover 886 is entirely plated on its front and back surfaces (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010), whereby the side surface is mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, light emission can be performed by reflecting the light of the horizontal LED 866 disposed on the back side of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

  The decorative member 884 is a member that performs light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 provided on the LED substrate 861, and has a hibiscus flower shape, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. In addition, an opening 885 is formed in a central portion with a size that allows the center decoration member 868 to be inserted.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 thus configured is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G. A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported by the support base material 801 and meshing with each other are meshed with each other.

  One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with one of the gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

  A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and around the pivot opening 880a, a screw insertion hole is provided at a position corresponding to the two screw insertion portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. 880b is provided with a positioning hole 880c at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

  The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and has a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into positioning hole 880c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into screw insertion portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through screw insertion hole 880b.

  As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off, and the slit is formed. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

  The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the rear side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. As the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152), and is provided so as to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d can be detected regardless of the posture of the fourth gear 880G from which rotation (the minimum angle). The detection of 72 ° can be performed, and the rotation of 72 ° or more can be ensured by the detection).

  The assembly of the center shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the rear ends of the shaft portions 852 project slightly rearward from the pivotal openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

  A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and similarly from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw part 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

  At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wire is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801 </ b> P of the support base 801 (not shown).

  With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base material 801, and the slit member 810 is formed in the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 as shown in FIG. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted to the outside, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to fit.

  At this time, since the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight places along the circumferential direction by the threaded portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, the rear peripheral wall of the slit member 810 is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the slit member 810 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 810, whereby the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is moved. It is pivoted smoothly and freely.

  FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800, the driving arm member 910 and the driven arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 vertically moves up and down (moves forward and backward) when a vertical load is applied from the driving arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIG. 150 to FIG. 152 are appropriately referred to.

  The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest portion inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and at the lower left corner in front view. A support pillar 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear housing part 1120 recessed above the support pillar 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be housed from the front side, A rail fixing portion 1130, and a support slot 1140 formed as a slot that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the right and left opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly equipped.

  The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910, and is a pair of left and right holes arranged near the outer periphery at the front end thereof so that a screw can be screwed therein. It has a threaded portion 1111 to be formed, and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side as a pair of upper and lower portions on the same surface as the leading edge of the threaded portion 1111.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the rear. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110; a connecting protrusion 912 that is formed in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member; A transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the long main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operating device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member. And a support portion 914.

  The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting protrusion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913, and a flange 926 that projects radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction therewith, the support column 1110 is rotated about an axis.

  The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are connected to each other while slightly crossing each other. The gear accommodating portion 1120 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating portion 1121, a second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and a drive-side arm member disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating portion 1121 with the second accommodating portion 1122 interposed therebetween. 910 and a third housing portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 to be fitted is housed.

  The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and slidably supported up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on a line. The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

  The support slot 1140 is a slot that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined and disposed so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° as viewed from the front, and from the vicinity of the outer periphery. An extension wall 1141 is provided to extend to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member that is formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

  A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported projection 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported projection 951 in a state in which the collar is internally fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the elongated support hole 1140.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side substrate 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

  The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front and rear direction in a long hole shape extending left and right. It is connected to the connection protrusion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction and formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. And is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front-end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

  The base-side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a formed along a locus at which the connection protrusion 912 rotates at the upper end around the support column 1110, and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. And a displacement portion 932b.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape on the front side on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed at the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting column 1150 having a fixing plate 1001S, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting column 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. And a support protrusion 1002S protruding rearward in a columnar shape in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and a circular hole in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is concavely formed in the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Concentric with A convex portion 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the circular arc shape, mainly comprises.

  The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed at the tip thereof with the support projected portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. In this state, a screw for retaining the screw is inserted from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S in this state, and the slide plate 930 is configured to be slidably supported.

  The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the convex ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. Part. The protruding ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at a regular position, but is formed at a protruding height at which the second directing member 940 can abut if it is displaced or bent from the regular position. Is done.

  The second effect member 940 has a main body that is formed in such a manner that a lower end portion is bifurcated and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the pivoted support post 941, and is located on the rear side at the right corner in front view. A shaft-supported column portion 941 that is formed in a columnar shape and supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed adjacent to the shaft-supported column portion 941 and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. 942.

  The pivoted support portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entrance 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). A threaded portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the end with the shaft-supported column portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S across the collar. When the screw is screwed into the cover member 945, the cover member 945 serves as a stopper. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the front end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin-made collar is fastened and fixed at the front end, thereby preventing the slide plate 930 from falling off. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are linked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal-side insertion hole 933.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thus, even if the second effect member 940 is likely to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate concave portion 1004S and resistance is generated, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. The rear plate 1100 has three screwing portions 1161 configured to be able to screw screws when fastening a plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and a radially outward direction within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924. Sensor 1162 for detecting the flange portion 926 projecting from the front, a shaft support 1163 on which a collar for guiding a coil spring SP8 for generating a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported, and a support slot. A cover support portion 1164 disposed in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at a lower right side of 1140, a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden in the board cover 1000C in a front view; And a screw portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

  Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even when the auxiliary projection 942 is broken due to long-term use, and a portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in a front view is missing, the screw-in portion 1006S causes 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

  As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixedly fastened to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged back and forth and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side substrate 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S are easily suppressed. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the up / down operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170, and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG. 171, and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

  168 and 169 show a state in which the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving arm member 910. ) Is shown at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end side of the movement range. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the driving side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is fitted into the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive arm member 910 rotates idly). can do.

  170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

  170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked to each other, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as linked. Can be done.

  Here, by moving the second production member 940 in a manner that the second production member 940 projects toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally arranged, the second production member 940 operates as if following the petal operation device 800. It can be seen visually.

  Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

  177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

  179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is at the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 expands from the initial position (assembly position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. Through the middle position, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and the rotating operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position. Operation) and return to the initial position (convergence position).

  In the initial position (assembly position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is positioned inside the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 (end on the side of the circular opening 811). 174 and FIG. 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most gathered position toward the central decoration member 868 at the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is It is in a gathering state that composes flowers.

  When the petal 802 is in the initial position (assembly position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c). When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G, the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate clockwise in rear view as shown by an arrow A10.

  At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831 so that the rotation plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, via the third gear 810G as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move.

  Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates counterclockwise in front view as shown by an arrow A11 on the front side surface thereof. At the same time, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward in the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

  At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. It is guided and moves.

  At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds the torque, and accordingly, With the slit member 810 kept stopped, the slide pin 823 moves linearly outward along the central slit 814 with the rotation of the rotating plate 830.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals 802 expand radially outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to the inclination. Be faster.

  That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the operation of expanding the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

  Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively small as compared with the above-described case, Assuming that the moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the center slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Any reduction is even more pronounced.

  At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise as viewed from the front along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal to the pivot opening 831 from the center end as shown in FIG. Thereafter, it extends outwardly while being curved in an arc toward the clockwise direction in a front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to spirally spread outward as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

  As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise direction in the front view from the direction D15, the reduction of the load on the slide pin 823 and the reduction of the moving speed are all more remarkable.

  That is, in the case of the center slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by tilting the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further bending it in an arc shape.

  In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. For this reason, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is reduced at the expense of the movement speed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the center slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of departure. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

  As described above, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a problem such as deviation and secure the reliability of power transmission, while increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 by the central slit 814. , And roles are divided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially to the full open state, and the expanding operation ends.

  In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially separated, so that the petals 802 can be continuously viewed outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. 802 is arranged. Thereby, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is one size larger (FIG. 178 (b)).

  When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 is thereafter locked to the outer end of the center slit 814. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the end of the expanding operation can be maintained.

  After the end of the expanding operation, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 starts to rotate counterclockwise in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830 by completely removing the braking by the oil damper 805. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

  At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expanding operation, the rotating operation is immediately continued so as to continue from the expanding operation to the rotating operation. Can be migrated.

  When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). To rotate. Therefore, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 is larger than that in the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  When the above rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the reverse clockwise direction as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is rotated. First, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven clockwise in rear view as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b) while being stopped by being stopped by the oil damper 805. Performs the reverse convergence operation.

  That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement, and at the same time, the five petals 802 move from the fully open position to the center decorative member 868 at the center. Then, they gather to return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and end the gathering operation.

  Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is rotated again by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are turned as shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). In the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  When the petals 802 rotate clockwise in a front view in an assembled state as shown by an arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in front view) as shown by an arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 is larger than that in the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  By controlling the central motor 804 from the gathering operation to the rotation operation as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift, or to shift immediately so as to continue without interruption. You can also

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operating device 800 is rotating.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the inner configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

  That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

  The notch 9145b is formed in a series of areas including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the depth of the notch is approximately equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

  The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the plate member 14 d (see FIG. 91), and faces upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand loads.

  The thin plate blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8, thereby illegally operating the ball inside the game area and obtaining an illegal profit. And is arranged for cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

  148 will be described again. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the force of the ball to be fired. If the force of the fire is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. The ball could be fired without it.

  On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 via the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that the ball directly enters the game area.

  On the other hand, for example, when the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly struck, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the ball P8 is attached to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the person who commits the wrongdoing can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and an improper profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when performing a wrongdoing using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin plate blade 145 is formed in the foul ball passage 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

  In other words, when the wrongdoer pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the yarn Y8 and cutting the yarn Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, formed on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

  Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin blade portion 9153 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin blade portion 9153 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin blade portion 9153 can be improved.

  Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 is disposed below the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the dispensed ball. That is, since the person who commits the wrongdoing is afraid of the discovery of the wrongdoing, after holding the ball P8, the player holds the ball P8 close to the body (for example, in a pants pocket, etc.) in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious. ), It is easy to perform an illegal act such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state where the yarn Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (contacts the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 extends through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

  In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front plate side lower plate passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and rebounds, and the ball guide opening is formed. The lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on or hitting the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the bottom 53, and a bottom opening disposed behind the ball release lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate portion is formed. The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 comes into contact with the yarn Y8, so that the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed which is inclined downward toward the right. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage 9142.

  Accordingly, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (facing to the ball ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

  In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (the area of about 1/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53. 9053a is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing regulation step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion that connects to the left end (left end) of the lower bottom near the exit of the spherical passage 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

  A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door-side lower plate passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

  Note that the vertical width of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and abutting on the climbing regulation step portion 9053a from climbing to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts the ball in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. With reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, differences from the eighth embodiment will be described.

  184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, and FIG. The state seen from diagonally below is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage 10145.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 10140 in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side so as to cover below the notch 10145c.

  The notch 10145c is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the concave is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere. You. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d for guiding the ball to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

  In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary projection 14d2 is provided to project from the side surface on the back side toward the back side. The auxiliary projection 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not shown in FIG. 186.

  The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 in the front-rear direction is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are broken or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. Can be prevented, and the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

  The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the rear side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (the front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protrusion 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 increases as the distance from the passage 145a increases. This makes it easier to insert the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage 145a into the gap on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the gap where the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

  The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a portion forming a bifurcated blade portion, and extends to the left in a mode in which the first thin blade portion 10153 is slightly inclined upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, an acute concave portion 10155 whose concave deep portion is an acute angle is formed.

  The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members provided for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

  The acute angle concave portion 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thus, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, the yarn Y8 can enter the acute-angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged.

  Since the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side as compared with the first thin blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 which is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by a wrongdoer. Can easily enter the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

  The plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. You. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left and right opposite directions.

  For example, a person who commits a wrongdoing releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand and tries to avoid the discovery of the wrongdoing by the ball P8 flowing backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and being discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right opposite direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the lower end side extended end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

  This allows the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 to stay inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, thereby increasing the time during which the yarn Y8 is exposed to the game area, thereby expediting the discovery of fraud.

  Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided at a deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 coming to the wrongdoer's hand is cut, the yarn is adhered to the sticky member provided in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is moved to the game area. , And is kept in place, so that it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a low firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described. A receiving foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a tip member 2062a formed and disposed close to the ball firing unit 112a and a gap V11 having a width allowing the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b.

  A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the main body upper dish passage portion 161. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than a width that allows one ball to pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the ball preventing member 68 is disposed above the ball.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the main body-side upper dish passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body-side lower dish passage 162 is provided in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main unit upper plate passage 161. When the ball on the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device is turned on. It is configured such that the payout of the ball from 133 stops.

  That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is dispensed from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering the above-mentioned misconduct in which a ball is adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8 and one of the balls is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, thereby causing the yarn Y8 to enter the inside of the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the payout ball to the yarn Y8 can be caused without depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls on the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

  FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is appropriately referred to.

  The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with a metal long screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the near side.

  Specifically, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to protrude cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b, and has a threaded groove formed therein for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is brought into contact with the base member 68b1 in a state where the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4. A long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as an attachment hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole, and a screw is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in this state. By being inserted, the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

  Note that the closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface, which are the side that contacts the guide member 2062b, match the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

  The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that the surface of the guide member 2062b, which constitutes the outer frame of the game area, descends and falls as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) of the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, , About one-third of the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

  With this configuration, when the ball is fired toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower end of the gradient increasing unit 2062d collides with the ball. That can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d. And it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball firing unit 112a side.

  The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the slope increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 with a width (about 2 [mm] in the present embodiment) smaller than the diameter of the sphere and capable of entering the thread between the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side up to a certain position. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a location where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

  A cutout 2062b3 for a semicircle is provided in the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. The notch 2062b is provided for exposing the long screw B11.

  As described above, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 during fraudulent acts performed through the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

  That is, due to the arrangement of the cuts 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 disposed deep in the cuts 2062b1 when receiving a load that pulls both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at the position where the shot ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

  In addition, the person who performs the wrongdoing performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes toward the player (the ball P8 is fixed). (See FIG. 182) to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, so that near the gap V11 close to the player, the yarn Y8 is shifted toward the front. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c near the front side, the yarn Y8 can be easily inserted into the cut 2062c as compared with the case where the cut 2062c is arranged near the back side.

  A button-type switch SW11 provided with a detection unit projecting downward is provided in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. For this reason, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is provided so as to be able to switch between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

  FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) illustrates a state where the weight portion 68a2 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) The weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used for fraudulent activity is shown for reference, and the button type switch SW11 is turned ON. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is turned on. It is illustrated that the SW 11 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and provides enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows off under its own weight. Even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting of the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the state is returned to the state shown in FIG. This is because you can do it.

  On the other hand, for an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that progresses while filling a passage such as an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 has a large resistance. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

  For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is caused to travel through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, to reach the inside of the game area, and to try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, The nail (not shown) implanted in the game board 13 is bent, the ball is gripped and put into a winning opening, the tip of the device is used as a guide plate to the winning opening, or a laser is emitted from the tip. Cheating nails).

  FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that enters illegally is shown by imaginary lines.

  In the present embodiment, when the distal end of the device such as the endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the distal end is moved while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the distal end of the endoscope. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to repel the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from moving further.

  Here, in the case where the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed and enters the inside, the fraud cannot be prevented as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, control is performed so as to sound an alarm when the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Fraudulent activity can be detected early.

  Further, when the button-type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state where the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. (See FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be minimized, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

  The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball preventing member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball preventing member 68 on the side provided on the game board 13 is broken or bent due to long-term use, Can be exchanged. As a result, as compared with a case where the replacement member of the return ball preventing member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it is possible to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement, and it is possible to eliminate the trouble of searching for a storage location forgotten. The effect described above can be obtained. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided) may be used.

  In addition, whether or not the above-described effect of preventing the illegal action is exhibited when the return ball preventing member 68 is broken or bent and replaced is determined by the degree of breakage of the return ball preventing member 68. However, the perpetrators of the wrongdoing cannot know whether or not the exchange has been performed, and even if they have been replaced, the degree of damage cannot be understood. it can.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully opened position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is configured in an embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the rear end outer edge in comparison with the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, A restricting portion 2888 projecting rearward from the extending end of the flange portion 2887. The loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the difference in the back cover 2886, and has the same components as the loose fitting device 880 in other portions. .

  The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single regulating portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

  FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . 193 and FIG. 194 illustrate an operation example of the petal operation device 2800 in a time series, and FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 194 (a), FIG. 193 (b), and FIG. State is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and a pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a pair of screw insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are provided on opposite sides with the screw insertion portion 803H as a center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

  The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined at about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating section 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

  If the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise in front view) while the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

  At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture illustrated in FIG. 194A (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815). Thus, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture inclined with respect to the center slit 814 and both side slits 815. The posture of the petals 802 changes as much as possible.

  As described above, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received by the change in the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

  That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the sliding member 2820 has only a small width sliding rib 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed, and the sliding member 2820 has the slits 814 and 815. Can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction.

  On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a against the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T against the inner inner wall against the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the width of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both-side slit 815, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

  Accordingly, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the sliding member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance against the movement of the slits 814 and 815 of the sliding member 2820 in the longitudinal direction. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the oil damper 805 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture.

  In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by breaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

  FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) has continued rotating in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanding position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) to the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during the expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

  FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 show the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position in chronological order.

  In FIG. 196 (a), from the state shown in FIG. 195, the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 becomes the normal posture. Will be returned.

  Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) is greater than the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830. The rotation operation of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petals 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petals 802 to the gathering position.

  Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If so, contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petals 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

  In addition, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that the petals 802 slightly change their posture even when they come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the gathering position or the fully opened position, or at the fully opened positions. By setting the position where the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be passed, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

  Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petals 802 are expanded, the petals 802 are used as a mark as to whether the petal passes through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the difference in the distance, it is possible to cause a difference between the rotation of the petal 802 expanded to the maximum and the rotation of the petal 802 performed halfway.

  Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the pattern can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

  Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be provided at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

  At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing the posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be transmitted to the player, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (while flickering) while causing a slight change in posture by contacting the regulating portion 2888. .

  In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulating portion 2888 is the tip position. However, if the abutment position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the position of the petal 802 when it changes its posture is changed. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is configured to be fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes posture can be changed in a plurality of types.

  Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates and rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position is described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment is described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 independently rotates according to the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partial enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 illustrate, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 198 (a). In FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotating plate 830 are shown by imaginary lines.

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. The rotation of the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 together with the rotation exceeds the resistance to be applied is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, and the description is omitted here.

  In addition, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

  Here, when rotating the rotating plate 830 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 is With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional recesses 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

  That is, the difference between the slit member 3810 and the slit member 810 is that the width of the central slit 814 is increased in the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 on the clockwise side in front view. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view, both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view. Of the wall extending along the radial direction of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a that is recessed so as to widen the width in the short direction and the two side slits 815 that are arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view. And a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view so as to widen the width of the slits 815 in the lateral direction.

  The clockwise concave portion 3815a is disposed to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from the position opposed to the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (the lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed.

  The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is positioned on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 (the lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed continuously.

  The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth greater than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the central concave portion 3814a.

  The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts rotating clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move downward in FIG. 198 (a) (the right end of the slide rib 803a moves clockwise). (See FIG. 198 (b)).

  Accordingly, the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

  When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). With reference to FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 199 (b), it rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the portion that first comes into contact with 3810 as a fulcrum.

  Since the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recess 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recess 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is used. Abutment between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise-side recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

  Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a clockwise depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A surrounding recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

  Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. . Accordingly, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwing portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) reach a posture in which the posture is orthogonal to the front view. When the slide rib 803a on the center in the radial direction accommodated in the slits 815 on the clockwise side abuts against the wall of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be viewed from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

  That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)), the rotation plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in front view, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated. The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is reached, the rotation of the rotating plate 830 causes the slit member 3810 to rotate along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction. And the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

  This allows the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation involved in rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 194 (b)). )), The flat member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates along with the slit member 3810). Rotational operation) is interposed (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

  On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation associated with rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 ( a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)). In other words, the rotation operation (rotational operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expanding operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) in a front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 matching the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are formed. The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position from the position of the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 195 (a)) during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then move to the gathering position. Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the second state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, in the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been described in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. In addition, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other components will be described with some supplementary explanations.

  The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed to face the protection lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left and right center positions. The first through hole 8326a and the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 has an oblong rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b formed along the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in front view. And a through hole 8326c.

  The through holes 8326a to 8326c are provided for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the drinking water described above and the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having: The coin-shaped foreign object may be used, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or the tilting device 310 and the upper frame may be meaningless by the player of interest. It may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330.

  Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the possibility of foreign matter being inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) disposed at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the more easily the position is shifted (deformed) right and left near the front end. Note that the positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation utilizing rattling caused by the sum of design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation).

  For this reason, in the case where the design is made such that the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a one-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right (for example, left), the gap V13 formed on the other (for example, right) becomes an upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. And a gap V13 having a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the gaps V1 and V2.

  That is, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be equal to or less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the right and left, a coin-shaped foreign matter may be inserted.

  Further, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also adjusted by the play near the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 14B). The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load facing the rear side and displacing (deforming), so that a coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

  In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted in the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin Foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 202 (a) and FIG. 202 (b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured so as to be narrowed inward toward the left and right toward the center in the vertical direction, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) projects outward from above the constriction of the case main body 311. , A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter the lower frame member 8320.

  If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may hinder the light emission effect.

  In the first place, if the coin-shaped foreign matter is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed with the operation device 8300, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable that the operation device 300 be disassembled as soon as it is detected. However, in a state where the through-hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

  FIG. 203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. FIG. 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a bottom view of the operation device 8300. FIG. It is sectional drawing of operation device 8300 in CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

  The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the left-right direction as the center in the left-right direction of the vibration device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the (vibration device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58)). You. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right central positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

  The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is disposed below the upper surface of the extension 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 rides on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (to the left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state). A slope D81 that is inclined downward toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310 by being curved toward the front, and a gradient D82 that is downwardly inclined toward the front side when the tilting device 310 is tilted, Along the first through-hole 8326a, the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed along the first through hole 8326a (see FIG. 201).

  This makes it possible to minimize the required size of the first through hole 8326a while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, thereby maintaining the design flexibility of the lower frame member 8320. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be more easily ensured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded right and left.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter. The size of the target object is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

  The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 continuously provided on the left, right, up and down of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (members that have been mirror-finished). Is fixed), so that the light that has passed through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

  With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, since the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that reduces the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

  When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through-hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is equal to the coin-shaped amount. Is weaker than when no foreign matter is present (a coin-like foreign matter is shadowed). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the light amount and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as clues. The possibility of remaining on the member 8320 can be reduced. Note that this effect is not limited to the case where it is visually recognized through the first through hole 8326a, and the same applies to the case where it is visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

  The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the left and right widths of the second through hole 8326 are set to about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set to a size capable of discharging the largest coin-like foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin). Is formed with a width in the normal direction of about 2 [mm].

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged near the left and right centers of the bottom plate 321, the second through holes 8326 b can be easily formed even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate 321. Thus, coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed.

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used for discharging outward beforehand.

  The third through hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and allows the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 to move. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed as it stands (posture).

  That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

  When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c only by removing the cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 92). The cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws through which the fastening portions 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 are inserted in the front-rear direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation part 15a is formed, the cover cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be reduced.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

  Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203B). In each of the above embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even in the unlikely event that a coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which the coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be promptly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

  Thus, even if a normal operation is not performed due to the coin-shaped foreign matter entering the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state. However, the board support apparatus 600 in the fourteenth embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinal displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut against it. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is Is shown in a closed state. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmitting device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmitting device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 disposed so as to be vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 which is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12; A longitudinally-displaceable member 2652, which is disposed so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertically-displaceable member 2651 and is supported to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinally-displaceable member 2652, A portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two positions in the front and back, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and is in contact with the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to be in front of the front and rear displacement member 2652. And an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward the urging member.

  The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is located at a position where a slight gap is provided between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

  The longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)), and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and being pushed backward. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

  Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downward toward the distal end is formed at the rear distal end of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position to a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. , A continuous slope.

  The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a lower position at a position in front of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at an upper position at a position behind the longitudinal displacement member 2652. Is set.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

  Thereby, the load which the claw member 640 after rotation applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 abuts on the hanging back plate portion 621d of the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

  Here, the specifications required for the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the board against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is used as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of selection of the operator and the workability can be improved.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are crawled above the inverted cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated by the heated piano wire. Although the case where the burnout is detected by the piano wire and the early detection of the fraud has been described, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment has a configuration in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with the heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent burnout of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

  FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detecting device 2280. FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to a tensile shape (stored shape) by application of heat. Is done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross section at a front / rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

  The fraud detection device 2280 has a main body box portion 2281 which is formed in a box shape with the back side and the lower surface side open and is stacked above the inverted cup portion 2178, and a rear side opening portion which covers the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. And a back cover member 2282 attached from the main body, and a space is formed between the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

  The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner, and extends from the lower corner to abut on the left surface of the wall 2178a of the inverted cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening upward from the lower corner. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a protruding portion 2285 protruding upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a concave portion provided on the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 from the rear side. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and one end projecting to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending to the right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess formed from the back side, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286. Accessible The second conductive portion 2287 formed as described above, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 is supported by the protruding portion 2285. And a shape memory spring 2288 disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

  The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one ends of separate wirings are respectively connected to portions protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other ends of the wirings are connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 come into contact and become conductive (see FIG. 205 (b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and control is performed so that an error signal is output with the disconnection being an input.

  When the error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. The game is controlled so that it is impossible to play the game.

  Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

  The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire can be used as it is to cover the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

  According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and proceeds further, is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 disposed at the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

  The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has a characteristic of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the transformation temperature of the shape memory spring 2288 is set to a temperature (about 80 °) about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. .

  Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to a transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2286 are connected. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of wrongdoing can be achieved.

  An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in a vertically long shape and drilled in the front-rear direction. Overhang. When the temperature returns to the low-temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator presses down the extending portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed in a curved shape to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both surfaces. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upwardly concave shape formed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrating the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206 (d) is a light guide schematically showing the downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) shows an upward concave portion 254 recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) provided on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in accordance with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

  Although concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is determined for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

  That is, a region CCVIb disposed above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc disposed above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a lower and inner lens member 530 based on the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b is arranged such that flat surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the upper side and the rear side. Is formed.

  Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. Difficult to reflect in the left and right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and in a posture in which curved surfaces are disposed on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the area CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and on the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and having a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the area CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543e has a hot press in a posture in which flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in a region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle with respect to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approximately (1 mm conical shape). Therefore, light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

  According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), light travels in the direction of collecting light toward the inner lens member 530, and travels in the direction of spreading light toward the outer lens member 550. Can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof. The effect can be improved.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 15 is formed flat is described. However, in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. Thereby, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower plate unit 6400 is improved. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207 will be described such that the near side of the drawing is the front (front) side and the far side of the drawing is the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 10300 in which a state in which the oscillating member 10310 is arranged in the upward position in FIG. 207 and a front surface device arranged below the operation device 10300. A lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, a horizontal rendering device 6700 that covers the left and right portions of the front frame 10014, and mainly performs a luminous effect, and covers an upper portion of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs the luminous effect and And an effect device 6500 for performing sound effects.

  Note that the above-described glass unit 16 is disposed in an area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16 according to each of the above. This is the same as the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawing, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the rear side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 illustrates the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). It is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be viewed from the opening where the glass unit 16 is provided.

  FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 209 illustrates a direction view (a radial direction of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300. You.

  The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 that are formed in a thin plate shape and have flexibility enough to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially symmetrical recess in which the degree of the recess toward the rear side increases as approaching the left and right center, and the center of the housing recess 17a and the operation device It is arranged so that the left and right centers of 10300 coincide.

  The rear side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves to the rear side as it approaches the center in the left and right direction. In other words, the closer the fitting position is to the left and right center, the more the front frame 10014 moves toward the main body frame (metal main body 10014a).

  Therefore, at the left and right center positions where the amount of load transmission during the operation of the operation device 10300 is likely to be large, the vertical position of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-back position from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

  On the other hand, in the left and right positions (positions left and right away from the center) where the amount of load transmitted when operating the operation device 10300 is likely to be small, even if the front-back position from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position is long, the operation is not performed. There is no hindrance to the effect of suppressing the displacement of the device 10300 in the vertical direction, and a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body 10014a by arranging the fitting position in this way. A wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, and the like can be secured.

  FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 illustrates a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11 around the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19.

  The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion that is pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. Since the components to be newly described are respectively provided on the front frame 10014, the following description will be focused on the front frame 10014.

  FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that FIGS. 211 and 212 illustrate a state where the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 have been removed from the front frame 10014.

  The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member forming a skeleton, includes a metal main body 10014a integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are connected to the metal main body 10014a. Is fixed. That is, both the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are provided with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal body 10014a side (back side), and the metal body 10014a has a fastening portion. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) into the through hole from the rear side of the metal main body 10014a, screwing it into the fastening portion, and tightening.

  As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held in a state of being sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear of the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, a configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be sequentially described.

  FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. 213 and 214, the illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a, is shown in a direction from the back side, and is provided with insertion holes 6801R and 6801L for easy understanding. Assembling direction lines connecting the fastening points are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When assembling the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 is formed in a plate shape protruding from the front side of the front frame 10014 in a plate shape. The contact is made so as to ride on the upper surface of the protrusion T10.

  Below the operation device 10300, a bottom member De fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is provided. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting concave part De1 (see FIG. 212) formed to open to the front side, and a concave part De2 that is open on the opposite side (lower side) and the rear side of the inner case member 10330 side. Prepare.

  The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear, the bottom of which is open. The recessed portion De2 is formed in a size that can be fitted to the plate-shaped protrusion T10. By fitting with the part De2, the positioning of the operation device 10300 with respect to the front frame 10014 can be performed. In addition, since the plate-shaped protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-shaped protrusion T10. Note that the fitting here may be any condition as long as the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-shaped protrusion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of the gap.

  At the tip of the plate-shaped projection T10, a pair of left and right left and right columns is formed to project in the form of a thin column, and a fastening screw is formed at an intermediate position between the pair of columnar projections. A female screw hole is formed.

  The pair of columnar projecting portions is inserted into a recess formed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2 to align the plate-shaped convex portion T10 with the bottom member De. The fastening screw to be screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion De2, and by tightening the fastening screw, the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

  As described above, while the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-shaped protrusion T10, the front half on the opposite side (see FIG. 215 (a)) supports the plate-shaped support. The portion 6426 is disposed above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. That is, the front half portion of the bottom member De is vertically opposed to the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed to be able to contact the resin member 6427.

  Here, the condition that the contact is possible is not limited in any way. For example, a mode in which the operating device 10300 is normally in contact with the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De are normally separated while a load is applied to the operating device 10300, The resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be in contact with each other when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward by executing a vibration effect or the like.

  After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, a fastening screw inserted from the rear side is fastened to the front frame 10014, whereby the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014.

  That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is covered with a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed to be able to screw fastening screws, and one of the fastening portions 10333. And a metal plate portion 10334 which is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and which can receive a compressive force with fastening and fixing.

  The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to abut on an edge of an insertion hole H10a formed with a diameter that allows a fastening screw to be inserted into the metal main body 10014a. On the front side of the metal main body 10014a, an intermediate plate made of a hard resin is provided, but a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be inserted through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal main body 10014a.

  Here, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger around the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 where the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged, as compared with the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of this through-hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 covered on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

  Accordingly, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a by fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main portion 10014a can be electrically connected to each other, they can have the same role as a so-called ground wire. Thereby, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be secured.

  Further, by disposing the metal plate portion 10334 therebetween, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a function of a washer. Thereby, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal main body 10014a.

  Note that the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to the present embodiment, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through-hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the pawls are formed to be displaced back and forth, a function of a spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

  The places where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts required for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom of design on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

  On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the rear side is a problem because the operation device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300 in the sinking direction (downward). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is employed in which the fastening position is concentrated on the back side and the sinking displacement on the front side of the operation device 10300 is suppressed. This will be described below in order.

  First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting concave portion De1 formed on the lower front side fits with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). Thereby, the vertical movement of the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and the sinking displacement is suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a plate-like portion on the rear side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the rear side of the swing operation member 10310.

  That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-shaped protrusion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half, a plurality of partial protrusions 10321d that further project from the plate-like protrusion 10321c, Mainly equipped.

  Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-shaped overhang 10322c that projects in a plate shape along the back side edge of the upper half. Note that the right front cover 10322 has no portion corresponding to the partial overhang 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-like overhang 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

  The plate-like overhangs 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhang 10321d are configured to be inserted and fitted into the housing recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodation recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge overhang 10017b whose lower edge overhangs the left and right sides of the accommodation recess 17a with a substantially equal overhang width, and a left and right of the accommodation recess 17a. At a position slightly longer than the thickness of the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhang 10017b on both sides, the lower edge overhang 10017b is opposed to the lower edge overhang 10017b so as to overhang the front side. A plurality of opposed overhanging portions 10017c forming a groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b, and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the upper side of which is drilled in the front-rear direction with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b as a long hole at the surface position. And an escape hole 10017e drilled in the front-rear direction at a position aligned with the right opposing overhang 10017c.

  When assembling the operating device 10300 into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the groove between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposed overhang 10017c, and a plurality of partial overhangs 10321d are provided. Are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, whereby the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a.

  In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction by fitting the plate-like overhangs 10321c and 10322c into the groove between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposed overhang 10017c. Is suppressed.

  In addition, the plurality of partial overhangs 10321d are inserted (fitted) into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with the housing recess 17a. It is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Further, the housing concave portion 17a is formed in an arch shape that is open on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are abutted and housed inside the arch, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

  With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the displacement of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310. (Return to the original position early).

  Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, the player mainly operates with his left hand. In a general game posture (a posture facing the pachinko machine 10010), the player moves the left and right center of the pachinko machine 10010. In operating the operation device 10300 to be arranged, the left hand is extended diagonally to the front right, so that the load at the time of the operation rarely has a left-right component.

  Therefore, since a load in the left-right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as a load applied in the rear direction, the operation device 10300 may be displaced rearward and left-right.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are disposed therebetween. The restoring force of the possible deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 occurs in the left and right direction and the front and rear direction in the direction of returning the operation device 10300 to the original position. Accordingly, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be quickly restored.

  From the above configurations, displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the operation device 10300 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a can be suppressed.

  The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which a later-described fixed assembly 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembling part 6802 can be disposed at a position protruding outward from the plate-shaped protruding part 10321c.

  Next, the surroundings of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215 (a), 215 (b), 216 (a), and 216 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207.

  FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment). FIG. 215 (b), FIG. 216 (a) and FIG. 216 (b) , The state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position (the depressed position in the present embodiment) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a) and FIG. 215 (b), the operating device 10300 includes a lever support shaft in which a lever member 10340 that supports the swing operation member 10310 with a shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported at 10331d1. Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is displaced by the movement of the shaft support bar 10363 arranged on an arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1, and is centered on the shaft support bar 10363. It is possible to displace in a mode in which the displacement in the rotation direction is combined, and the displacement is generated by the operation of the player.

  That is, by gripping the swing operation member 10310 arranged at the upward position and applying a load rearward, the swing operation member 10310 can be pushed in a manner of rotational displacement around the shaft support rod 10363. (Push operation).

  Also, by gripping the swing operation member 10310 arranged at the upward position and applying a load downward toward the near side, the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. Can be operated (press operation).

  When the swing operation member 10310 is located at the downward position, the operation of the posture correcting device 10312 (the operation of applying a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b) causes the swing operation. The posture in which the member 10310 is pushed rearward with respect to the lever member 10340 (a backward posture, a posture in which the member 10310 is backwardly moved from the initial position by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340). Therefore, since the angle of the posture change of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340 can be suppressed. .

  In addition, when an operation (push operation) of pressing the lens member 10317 displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 in a state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position is performed, the swing at the time of the operation is performed. The operating member 10310 is rotated and displaced about the shaft support rod 10363 and displaced in a manner of falling forward, so that the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 can be changed to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216 (b)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the load for operation can be applied to the swing operation member 10310 from a plurality of directions, and if the load is different, the form of displacement of the swing operation member 10310 is also different. It can be configured differently.

  The lever member 10340 is driven to rotate about a lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. Thus, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pressed down and is arranged at the downward position, the rotation of the lever member 10340 is controlled by the drive motor, so that the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position.

  A vibration device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is provided at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. It is configured to be transmitted.

  The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to and separate from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical bobbin member around which a copper wire is wound (located on the lever member 10340 side). And a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are coaxially arranged and are disc-shaped plates. And a pressing member (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected. The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder has a polarity that changes in the axial direction.

  The vibration device 10366 is configured to be able to generate linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

  Accordingly, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by maximizing the energy of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, and the effect of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be improved.

  Next, details of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300.

  As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are disposed behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have outer ends (ends opposite to the swing operation member 10310) that are curved, and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is disposed on the swing operation member 10310 side. You. Accordingly, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swinging operation member 10310 can be secured, and the swinging operation member 10310 can be held by a player. Space for inserting a finger can be secured.

  In addition, since the curvature of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310, the designability can be improved, and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be caused separately in the whole. Thus, the allowable width of the deformation of the curved portion can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include insertion holes 6801R and 6801L that are drilled in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to both right and left ends of the accommodation recess 17a can be inserted. A fixing assembly 6802 for fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 inseparably from the inner case member 10330 by fastening screws.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a by insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the places farthest from the load (mainly a load along a plane passing through the center in the left-right direction and orthogonal to the left-right direction) applied to the operation device 10300, and the load is difficult to be transmitted. The loosening of the fastening screw that is inserted through the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a can be suppressed.

  The fixed assembling part 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the formation position of the fixed assembling part 6802 is at the center in the left-right direction of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 This is a position shifted to the right from a position where the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c are located on the rearmost side). That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed to the right beyond the left and right center, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left and right center. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

  In the present embodiment, since the rear boundary of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is displaced from the center in the left-right direction, one member (book part) is provided at the central portion (the portion located at the rearmost side) of the housing recess 17a. In the embodiment, since the positioning with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), the assembly can be made easier as compared with the case where the positioning is performed by both members.

  Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembling part 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when the operation device 10300 is operated. Here, on the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the swing operation member 10310 as a portion operated by the player can be arranged in close proximity (particularly in the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Because there is a point, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may be loosened due to the transmission of the load when the operation device 10300 is operated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the fixed assembling part 6802 to be shifted left and right from the left and right center where the load at the time of operation is maximum, the transmitted load is reduced as compared with the load at the time of operation. As a result, the loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly 6802 can be suppressed.

  As described above, by shifting the fixed assembling part 6802 from the left and right center to the left and right and similarly shifting the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the assembling efficiency can be improved and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be prevented. It can be made hard to occur.

  Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the fixed assembling portion 6802. That is, in the fixed assembling part 6802, the fastening screw inserted into the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

  However, with respect to the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembling portion 6802 is inserted into a through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 220) and the upper plate portion thereof Is fixed only when the fixed assembling portion 6802 is sandwiched from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the number of fastening portions formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced as compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.

  Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the front left cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with many fastening portions, the rigidity of the fastening screws makes the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 difficult to bend and may be easily broken.

  On the other hand, in order to make it easy to bend while maintaining the fastening portion, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be thinned, but in this case, the durability is reduced or cheating is caused. Or there is a risk of

  On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening portions as in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

  219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operation device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operation device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be disassembled to the left and right in an integrated state with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fixed to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point in the front-rear direction (adjustable slots 10323a, 10324a). Is done.

  Therefore, before the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the front left cover 10321 is relatively movable with respect to the left cover member 10323, and the front right cover 10322 is relatively movable with respect to the right cover member 10324. It is possible to easily adjust the position where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. This will be described below.

  The operation device 10300 is disposed on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed in a shape along the curved surfaces of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. A left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right.

  The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are provided with adjusting slots 10323a and 10324a, respectively, which are formed in the outer upper end portion and formed in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

  The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction. Even when the shapes vary, the left and right positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slots 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are also fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces facing in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is fitted rightward from the end face of the right front cover 10322 that comes into contact with the left front cover 10321, and the right front cover 10322 is prevented by the fitting concave portion 10322a from slipping back and forth. Wall member 10322b attached in a manner, and in a state where the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the wall is stopped by the left end cover 10321 being stopped from moving to the left. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

  With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is loaded from the posture correcting device 10312 (see FIG. 215)). Is a place that repeatedly receives). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to shifting from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After being fastened and fixed, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

  Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, when correcting the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left cover member 10323 and the It becomes necessary to make a correction by loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shifting the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.

  In addition, when the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully fastened to the inner case member 10330 and the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are determined by forcibly fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in anticipation of this, After the front right cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure), the return of the work procedure of fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream of the assembly procedure) occurs. However, the operation itself becomes complicated, which is not preferable in terms of simplification (simplification) of the operation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be relatively moved with respect to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. After being fastened and fixed to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, the assembly operation can be simplified.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 include shielding portions 6803L and 6803R, respectively, in which the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the front edge are arranged to face each other. When the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing a gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), the piano wire enters the gap and enters the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against an illegal act or a mischievous act of pouring a liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in the present embodiment, the clearance is set to 0.3 mm).

  On the other hand, when the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is shifted due to the influence of a load (shock) at the time of operation and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are operated when the operation device 10300 is operated. 6803L and 6803R may rub against each other to generate resin shavings. Resin shavings have little effect when small, but if a large amount of clogging occurs in the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by a so-called photocoupler type, shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is. For this reason, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be employed is limited.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembling portion 6802 as the fastening portion of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is located at the center in the left and right direction (where the load during operation and the load during operation are maximized). Since it is arranged at a position left and right away from the, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to prevent the loosening of the fastening screw.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R and the guide portion 10344a, to prevent generation of resin shavings, and to suppress erroneous detection. In the present embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is provided on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

  The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swing operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

  Then, when the pushing operation in the backward direction is performed on the swing operation member 10310, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, since no load is applied to the detection switch FC and the metal plate MB, the durability can be improved as compared with the case where a load is applied.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, and a fan-shaped front view below the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R. And lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R formed continuously as the plate portions.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved surface (that is, a lever support shaft 10331d1 (FIG. 215) in which the back surface thereof can abut on the upper curved surface portion of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. (See FIG. 2), and a surface having a center angle of about 90 degrees centered at about 90 °).

  Each of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R includes a protruding interference portion 6805a that protrudes from the rear surface to the rear surface. The protruding interference portion 6805a is disposed slightly inside the inner edges Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and is a front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to protrude more toward the back side.

  Accordingly, in a state where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively assembled (see FIG. 220), the protruding interference portion 6805a controls the displacement to the left and right outside to the inside edge. Regulated to Rm1. Therefore, since the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being disassembled in a manner in which they are separated from each other.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, spread outward in a front view, and bend toward the front side at the spread front ends. Bending portions 6806L and 6806R are provided.

  The left front cover 10321 includes fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L that are formed at the right end thereof so that fastening screws can be screwed therein and are disposed in a plurality of vertical directions. The right front cover 10322 includes insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, and 6808R that are provided at the left end and are vertically arranged at a plurality of positions and through which fastening screws can be inserted.

  The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening portions and the insertion holes dispersedly arranged in the vertical direction (the direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). This makes it possible to disperse the load and impact associated with the operation of the operation device 10300 to the respective fastening portions, and to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws.

  Further, since a position shift can be suppressed at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion which is easily recognized by the player (particularly, the design portion which can be easily viewed in front view) The performance of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R (see FIG. 207) can be prevented from deteriorating. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

  The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a formed in the left and right direction is inserted in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and is fixed with the fastening screw sandwiching the inner case member 10330. . It should be noted that, instead of the so-called “co-fastening” mode, the distal end of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner to abut on the left surface of the plate portion where the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the fastening load does not generate a compressive load on the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

  In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to a load when operating the operation device 10300, the operation of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent within the above-described gap. Therefore, when a small displacement that can occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, it is possible to avoid the displacement of the fixed assembly 6802 in the same manner.

  In addition, the extension length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened, and a compressive load may be applied to a portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled at the time of fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, it is possible to avoid the loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly 6802.

  The fastening portion 6807L is a portion where a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole H23b formed in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion protruding toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. With the fastening screws, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In the present embodiment, the places where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening places by the fastening portions 6807L and the insertion holes H23b.

  The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed to be screwable along the left-right direction at a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330. The right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by inserting the fastening screw. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only to the fastening portion T23b and the fastening portion by the insertion hole 6807R.

  The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by fastening a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, the places where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only the fastening places by the fastening portions 6808L and the insertion holes 6808R.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 face each other. It is configured differently. Accordingly, in assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at one time, thereby facilitating the assembling work. The assembling procedure will be described below.

  First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened and fixed at one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off the inner case member 10330. be able to.

  In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing in such a manner that a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

  Next, when the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and similarly fastened and fixed at one place, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. it can.

  Thereafter, although there is no designation in the order, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing and fastening the fastening screws in the fixing assembly 6802. Further, by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R to fasten and fix, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

  In this way, by forming a place where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, compared to a case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled only in the fastening mode of fastening and fixing to the inner case member 10330, respectively. The number of fastening locations can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the fastening work of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening operation can be improved as compared with the case where the insertion direction of the fastening screw is bidirectional.

  The screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. In the operation device 10300, since the operation direction of each operation unit is a direction along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the same as that of each operation unit of the operation device 10300. This is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of. That is, when a load or impact occurs during the operation in the operation direction, no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw is generated. Thus, it is possible to suppress the loosening of the fastening screw due to a load or an impact at the time of operating the operation device 10300.

  In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation portions (including a portion that operates by operation; for example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 10340, and the like), but all the operation portions include levers. Since it is designed to operate in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left and right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

  On the other hand, when the operation part does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, when there is an operation part that performs a pressing operation in a diagonally right and left direction), each operation part A direction found as the balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or may be set for an operation portion where operation instructions are frequently performed (operation instructions are rarely generated). It is also possible to set the direction of fastening (ignoring the operation part that only performs).

  FIG. 223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 form a gap for disposing the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Except for the part where the fitting recess 10322a is formed and the part where the fitting concave part 10322a is formed, the contact is made up and down on a plurality of surfaces opposed to each other.

  In the contacting part, a plate-like part extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side not visible to the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlap portion 6803La extending rightward along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223 (a)).

  Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, displacement of the shielding plate portion 6803R downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L is restricted. This can prevent a gap from being formed between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and can suppress the passage of the liquid between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

  In this embodiment, the inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is housed, and the lever member 10340 are driven. The liquid can be prevented from coming into contact with the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor, or an electric system (such as a substrate) for driving the drive motor.

  In addition, while the cuts between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right centers of the swing operation member 10310, the cuts (coupling surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same plane as the left and right center positions of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the cut between the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is disposed on the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the portion protruding leftward from the inner case member 10330). Correspondence, see FIG. 218), even when the lower part between the shielding plate parts 6803R and 6803L is wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. The drive motor can be prevented from getting wet.

  Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlap portion 6805Lb extending rightward along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower portion 6805Lb supports the lower plate portion 6805R from behind, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

  The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the lower plate It may flow between the main body box portions 6421 of the forming member 6420, flow toward the through-hole 6412, or flow along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the thousand boxes.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharger 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of liquid by sandwiching the through hole 6412 without a gap. As in the embodiment, by suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid hangs on the player or wets a thousand boxes. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are streaked in a manner of being pushed out from the front side to the back side. Is provided. The streak portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface from the formation mode.

  The streak portion D23 has a role as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. That is, compared with the case of forming a thin plate, the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the streak portion D23 is maintained (or reduced) while the rigidity in the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is increased. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as examples.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and have a role as a portion that fills the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact at the time of operation in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

  That is, when operating the operation device 10300, a gap may be generated between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are vertically extended (elastically deformed or bent), so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a, and to provide a gap. Can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load at the time of operation is mainly directed), thereby reducing the deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made large (because the rigidity is made large), it is possible to suppress occurrence of vibration at the time of shape return or deformation of the shape more than necessary. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for one purpose to take measures against a problem that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

  Since the streak portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, when a downward load is applied at the center, the left and right sides withstand upward (pulling force is generated). . That is, even if a downward load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned to an early stage.

  On the other hand, even if a load is generated in a direction orthogonal to the streak portion D <b> 23, the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side is generated by the deformation allowed due to the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

  Each of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R includes an end streak portion D24 formed in a streak shape so as to be pushed out from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface from the formation mode.

  The end streak portion D24 mainly includes a left and right streak portion D24a formed on the left and right sides and a center streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and each is formed as a measure against loads in different directions.

  The left and right streak portions D24a are streaks arranged above the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and are formed to have a shape that inclines downward toward the back side. This downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operation load.

  In addition, the inclination angle of the right and left muscle portions D24a is formed stepwise to be larger in the left and right sides than in the left and right central sides, as compared with the one arranged in the left and right center sides. That is, the streaks extend in a plurality of directions. Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated.

  In addition, the width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the one arranged on the left and right sides than in the center arranged on the left and right sides. In other words, the deformation width allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced, and the resistance is increased, as the side (the left and right sides) in which the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction corresponds to a large force has a shorter width. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction as the direction in which the load during the operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is shaken) is large.

  On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion arranged from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portion on the front side) to a lower side, and has a shape that rises and inclines toward the back side. Formed from This rising inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when (the inner case member 10330 of) the operation device 10300 falls forward.

  In other words, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is improved in the direction of the central streak portion D24b by the central streak portion D24b, so that the load at the time of the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (inside of the operation device 10300). The resistance to the case member 10330) from falling forward can be improved.

  The central streak portion D24b is formed of a total of seven lines, one at the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central streak portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right central sides toward the rear side. Accordingly, even when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330) is displaced forward by the load at the time of the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the displacement in the left and right direction is generated, the displacement is not affected. The resistance to the displacement (the resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

  The central streak portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right streak portions D24a. Thereby, especially in the connection curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the bending in the left-right direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the left-right direction) is smaller than the bending in the vertical direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the vertical direction). It becomes large bending.

  Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212), and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (the position of the lower edge). When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are displaced downward, the upper and lower middle portions and the upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R bend in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are bent. The load (stress) applied to the substrate can be released (stress concentration can be avoided).

  Even in the case of such bending deformation, the lower edge overhanging portions are formed so that the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. The left front cover 10321 is supported between the front projection 10017b and the opposed projection 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214). In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to be formed between the right front cover 10322 and the accommodation recess 17a.

  Further, since the bending easiness of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is made different depending on the direction, the vibration (the V-shaped design member) of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 or the load generated by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be obtained. 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed according to the direction of vibration or load.

  In other words, vibration along the vertical direction and the operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration and operation in the horizontal direction A load (for example, a load generated when a hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when the ball is transferred from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 or the lower plate 50. Can be difficult. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the vibration or load from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 or the lower plate 50 even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swing operation member 10310, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. it can.

  Further, the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c formed on the upper edge thereof are elongated left and right. It is inserted between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposite overhang 10017c (see FIG. 214).

  Here, in the case where the shapes of the plate-shaped overhang portions 10321c and 10322c are compared with the shapes of the lower edge overhang portion 10017b and the opposed overhang portion 10017c, the vicinity of the left and right end portions is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the front upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrude from the front side of the housing recess 17a), the bending of the plate-like projections 10321c and 10322c is loosened (the left and right ends are displaced to the rear side). It is preferable that a deformation error can be dealt with.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the streaks D23 are formed vertically on the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, the rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R in the left-right direction is compared with the rigidity in the up-down direction. Lower. Therefore, when deforming the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c to the side where the curve becomes loose, the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R can assist the deformation of the plate-shaped overhangs 10321c and 10322c. In addition, it is possible to increase the deformation width of the plate-shaped overhang portions 10321c and 10322c. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

  As described above, the streak portion D23 does not improve (weaken) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the forming direction (left-right direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

  From these facts, the streak portion D23 causes a problem that may occur when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (the same as when assembling the operation device 10300; see FIG. 213) and a problem that may occur when operating the operation device 10300. And both.

  Returning to FIG. In the present embodiment, a flat flat plate portion (a plate-like portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) along the metal main portion 10014a is provided on the lower left front portion of the metal main portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. And a plate-like upper plate portion extending toward the front side so as to be bent at an upper end portion configured to be inclined downward toward the right of the upper portion of the flat plate portion. A back covering portion 10014b formed of a resin material in an aspect is provided. That is, the rear covering portion 10014b has a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane orthogonal to a straight line along the arrow LR.

  The back covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines an upper limit position and a right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is abutted (connected) at its rear end with the flat plate portion, and is abutted (connected) with the upper plate portion at its right end. In the region (space) formed on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back covering portion 10014b face each other, spheres, so-called foul spheres and the like that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 are stored. Will be. Next, details of the lower plate unit 6400 constituting the lower plate 50 will be described.

  FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower plate unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle when viewed from below.

  As shown in FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is a cover that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a so as to cover the front side of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or FIG. 212). A base member 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted to the overlying base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device attached to the overlying base member 6410 from below, A ball discharge device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420, and one that is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner that the lower plate forming member 6420 can be prevented from coming off from the rear side at the left end of the covering base member 6410. The intermediate holding member 6440 fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side), A V-shaped design member 6450 formed from disposed on a side upper resin material viewed from the front V-shaped, mainly comprises.

  The covering base member 6410 includes a main body 6411 formed in a substantially box shape having a lower bottom surface formed in a substantially planar shape and an open back surface and an upper surface, and a slight skeleton portion in the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through-hole 6412 formed so as to pass through, a projecting shape portion 6413 projecting downward from the lower surface of the main body 6411 at the center in the left-right direction of the main body 6411 with reference to the through-hole 6412; On the back side of the provided shape portion 6413, there is mainly provided a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protruded shape portion 6413 is substantially equal to other portions of the main body portion 6411.

  By forming the recessed portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the projecting portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the projecting portion 6413. Can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a position where the operation device 10300 is held from below, and will be described later in detail.

  The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the size of the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 described later, and is formed much larger than the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball release lever 52.

  By forming the through-hole 6412 large in advance in this way, the ball discharging speed from the lower plate 50 can be adjusted to the gaming performance realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. Can be made to correspond to the discharging speed of the ball.

  That is, the discharging speed of the ball from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as the size of the bottom opening 6432, the discharging speed of the ball is reduced. It cannot be larger. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 ( By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430), the discharging speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the covering base member 6410. In other words, the ball discharge speed (discharge mode) can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 that is visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

  The demand for changing the ball discharge speed is not limited to the case where the playability of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a mode in which it is necessary to transfer payout balls to a thousand boxes, or in a mode in which it is not necessary to transfer payout balls to a thousand boxes (so-called “personal”). Case).

  If it is necessary to transfer the dispensed balls to a thousand boxes, if the balls are discharged at a high speed, there is a possibility that the balls will overflow from the thousand boxes, so the discharge of the balls will be slower than the predetermined speed It is desirable to be done.

  In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison between the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a spherical shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of the number of balls ejected simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

  On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the dispensed balls to the 1000 boxes, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the 1000 boxes, and the upper limit of the desired ball discharging speed greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the paid-out balls flow into the automatic counters provided in each of the pachinko machines 10010, and therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, the balls are incorporated in the automatic counter. The operating speed of the ball sink is exemplified.

  As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but the strength of the main body 6411 may be reduced. There is. In particular, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a place where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 However, there is a concern that the load may be limited to a level that can withstand the load during operation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner to compensate for the reduction in strength due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the line shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as the fastening direction, with the covering base member 6410 sandwiched from above and below. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Accordingly, a portion around the through hole 6412 (for example, a left and right frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

  The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 may be designed such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are in contact with each other before the fastening of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 (the state where the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are arranged). (Refer to FIG. 233.) Although a gap is formed before the fastening, a design mode in which the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied may be used.

  Further, the portion to be pressed need not be the entire periphery of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, particularly in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side near the protruding shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (a long plate portion disposed behind the through hole 6412) that may receive an impact each time it is opened and closed. Since a large load is likely to be generated, it is preferable to adopt a design mode of pressing down.

  Since the edge of the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this manner, the strength of the edge of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently ensured. The bottom surface opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to this. That is, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

  The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main box portion 6421 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface, an outlet 6422 vertically opened on the bottom surface of the main box portion 6421, and a main box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 protruding from the back side of the bottom surface of the 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from below, and a ball discharging device 6430 protruding downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 to which fastening screws are fastened, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge of the outlet 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421 It mainly includes a plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end of the plate member, and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the plate-like support portion 6426.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position at the front end of the lower plate 50 and at the right end. The upper surface of the bottom of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball that has flowed into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows down to the discharge port 6422. Since the outlet 6422 is provided on the front side near the player, even if the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 where a load from the operation device 10300 is likely to be generated. However, details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different lengths at the left and right positions, which correspond to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, while the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially planar shape while the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward toward the right, the lower plate 50 has a lower bottom upper surface (through hole). In order to make the L-shaped plate portion 6423 project toward the right side, the length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened in the rightward direction. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (contacted by line contact or surface contact). ).

  Two fastening portions 6424 are formed at the front end where a load from the player is likely to occur, and one at the rear end where a load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By providing the fastening portion preferentially in a portion where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the lowering portion forming member 6420 from being displaced when the load is generated and the lower plate forming member 6420 is shifted, while limiting the fastening portion. .

  In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the fastening portion 6424 is provided inside the through hole 6412 (that is, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body 6411 is separately provided). It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge of the through-hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 (while performing the fastening without forming). Can be). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 while eliminating the need for forming a through hole other than the through hole 6412.

  The guide rib 6425 is used both for the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball pulling lever 52 and for the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is formed in a plate shape that is long in the left and right directions, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is required. Therefore, the guide of the movement of the ball release lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

  Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Further, even if one of them is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the useful life of the lower plate unit 6400 can be extended.

  The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or another member having flexibility and an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

  The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-described ball emptying lever 52 is disposed, a circular bottom opening 6432 formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the up-down direction, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 which are arranged at positions vertically overlapping with the fastening portions 6424 of the 6420 and are fastened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portions 6424, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the fastening holes 6433, And a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

  The ball-pulling lever 52 has a grip portion 52a that protrudes forward so as to be operable by the player in a manner of sliding right and left, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in an assembled state (see FIG. 207). And a pair of rib-like portions projecting upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, the guided ribs 52c being guided by the guide ribs 6425. Are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

  The bottom opening 6432 is vertically disposed opposite to the discharge opening 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removing lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As described above, when the ball is not operated, the ball release lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

  Accordingly, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 can be prevented from being weakened. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 are arranged near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). While the configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from decreasing.

  The details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 includes a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward beyond the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat surface and left and right sides) except for the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is fitted inside the through-hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball discharge device 6430 is fitted into the through-hole 6412 as it is, a flange is formed. The portion 6431a contacts the lower surface of the edge of the through hole 6412.

  On the other hand, the inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front-rear and left-right directions. As described above, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 abuts in the up-down direction.

  As described above, the ball discharging device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharging device 6430. After the positions of the components are aligned, the fastening is performed. Each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening. Therefore, the assembling work can be facilitated.

  The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 is inserted, and is provided with a plurality of through holes 6441 projecting from the front side and a metal main body 10014a (see FIG. 211). A plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding from the rear side where the screws inserted into the formed through holes are fastened and fixed, and a portion that interferes with the upper left end of the covering base member 6410 in the front-rear direction. And an interference portion 6443 formed in the shape of a dovetail plate.

  FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened, the opening width is narrowed toward the left and right center, and a V-shaped main body 6451 disposed downward toward the left and right center, A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the main body 6451, positioning portions 6453 formed near the lower edge center of the main body 6451, and left and right sides of the main body 6451 A plurality of projecting fastening portions 6454 projecting to the rear side near the ends and formed to be able to screw fastening screws, and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the right side of the main body 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body 6451 and a main body 64 formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 on the left side of the main body 6451. 1 with a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 aligned in the longitudinal direction, mainly it comprises.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. Accordingly, a place where a through-hole is easily formed in order for a person who commits an illegal action to intrude an illegal member into the pachinko machine 10010 can be limited. That is, compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 is provided with a through hole, the case where a through hole is provided in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is lower in difficulty. It can be made to be able to be opened to the right front cover 10322.

  For this reason, it is possible to narrow the number of places to be checked regularly to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since there is a high possibility that the through-hole is formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. Thereby, the checking load can be reduced as compared with the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

  The main body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and can be bent and deformed in a direction to narrow the groove width (and can be bent and deformed in a vertically crushed manner). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, the vertical displacement that can occur when operating the operation device 10300 is performed via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Is transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 bends and deforms in a direction to reduce the groove width of the groove of the main body 6451, so that at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is caused by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

  That is, after at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is operated by the deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, it can be transmitted downstream (for example, the covering base member 6410). Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, and the displacement amount of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. Also, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

  The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with respect to the center in the left and right directions, and a plate-shaped projecting portion projecting rearward on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

  The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw in a state where the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 enters the recess formed on the front side from the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled so as to approach from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

  In the assembled state, at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (the lower right insertion hole 6452 in the present embodiment) is not visible in the lower plate forming member 6420 when viewed in the insertion direction of the fastening screw (FIG. 230 (b)). That is, in a state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering base member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion hole 6452 cannot be loosened, and the V-shaped design member is moved from the covering base member 6410. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a stage before disassembling the 6450, the man-hour required until the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled can be increased.

  In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is drilled in a front-rear long portion 6426c described later in the front-rear direction, and a fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted. And an insertion portion 6426c1 that is fixed. In addition, the operation device 10300 is arranged so as to cover the insertion portion 6426c1 in rear view (see FIG. 232).

  Therefore, as a premise of disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the operation device 10300 from a position where the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the required man-hours such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the inside from the created gap.

  The plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R comes into contact with the upper surface of the front vertically long portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the descending displacement of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426, and conversely, the rising displacement of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6426R is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

  Accordingly, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in a lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) of the operation device 10300 and the fitting portion 6426d are provided. Are fitted, the front side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction with the displacement of the operating device 10300 in the ascending direction.

  Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R, the upward displacement of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

  The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed. , The back side (the side closer to the metal main body 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

  The right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin wall shape that can be flexibly deformed by itself, thereby transmitting displacement downstream due to its own deformation. And a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing the vibration. As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged more densely than the right reinforcing rib 6455. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. Note that FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b) show cross sections in a plane that divides the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction. Further, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to have a common thickness and change the dimension in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction corresponding to the groove width of the main body 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a representative example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom of the main body 6451 to the rear side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6455a, an upper facing portion 6455b arranged in parallel with the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and a mode in which the separation width increases toward the back side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower opposing portion 6455c that is disposed so as to be inclined in an inclined manner.

  The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion to which the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and it is possible to distribute the load at the front and rear positions. Thus, the load resistance of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge of the right front cover 10322. This can prevent the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from being separated from the upper plate portion 6455b or the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can prevent collision and rubbing with each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The lower facing portion 6455c has the right side reinforcement since the distance from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 increases toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the rear side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase). The allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 at the time of displacement can be avoided.

  Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement or load transmitted through the right front cover 10322 is transmitted to the lower plate of the main body 6451.

  In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right reinforcing rib 6455 with the right front cover 10322 as a starting point. The rate at which loads, displacements, and vibrations associated with the operation and driving of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51 can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the game performance in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b disposed in parallel with the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and an overhang portion 6456c projecting rearward from the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower opposing portion 6456d that is disposed in parallel with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.

  The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion in which the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point, and it is possible to distribute the load at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge of the left front cover 10321. This can prevent the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from being separated from the upper plate portion 6456b or the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can prevent collision and rubbing with each other. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The overhang portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that is inclined in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the rear side. As a result, the overhang portion 6456c is formed not as a portion that is always in contact with the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that first contacts when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhang portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement of the left front cover 10321 when the displacement amount becomes abnormally large.

  Note that the upper surface of the overhang portion 6456c may be formed at the same position as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front and rear positions at which the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

  The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower frame portion and the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower facing portion 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 abuts on the rear covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covering portion 10014b can be reduced. .

  This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (the space where the spheres are stored and where the player can put his / her hands) is provided. It can be prevented from being narrowed.

  That is, although the back covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, a load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back covering portion 10014b. Can be suppressed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface configuring the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with a game ball to generate abnormal noise.

  As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged on the right reinforcing ribs as compared with the arrangement interval of 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, where the weight of the player's hand that touches the ball stored in the upper plate 17 disposed on the left side is likely to be applied, and the load is likely to be uneven on the left and right, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is densely packed. By arranging them, it is possible to cope with uneven loads.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 different, it is possible to cope with different types of loads. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion and the lower facing portion 6455c of the main body portion 6451 to block the transmission of the load, so that the instantaneous load or impact through the operation device 10300 can be obtained. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so that even if weight is applied for a long time via the upper plate 17, The displacement of the covering portion 10014b can be prevented. As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to cope with a mode of a load that easily causes a problem.

  229 (a) is a top view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower plate unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower plate unit. 6400 is a left side view as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (a) and FIG. 230 (b), a plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is provided so as to straddle the concave shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 on the left and right. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed on the upper surface of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 so as to be in surface contact with the plate-shaped support portion 6426, while being separated from the recessed shape portion 6414. Hereinafter, the details of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described.

  The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are portions of the portion that bulges (extends) downward from the lower surface, similarly to the deformation when a part of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is pressed from above. It is a part constituting the front and back, and one shape of the front and back is similar to the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from below and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from above are formed as shapes whose scale is changed by an amount by which the thickness of the main body 6411 can be secured. You. Therefore, one shape can easily be imagined from the other shape.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the width of the protruding portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (a), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is disposed closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the projecting shape portion is formed. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a location where the left and right widths of the recessed portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are large. Accordingly, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a state of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially sufficiently bent, but the details will be described later.

  Here, in a playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be displaced up and down as the player operates the operation device 10300. In connection with this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are formed of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410, There is a possibility that shavings are generated due to collision or rubbing.

  If shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, shavings may enter the gaps and the clearance may not be secured, thereby causing an operation failure or shavings entering the detection area of the detection sensor and causing erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings and to reduce the generation amount.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

  That is, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, whereby the main body portion 6411 is received. And other parts can be displaced.

  On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), and the V-shaped design member Since the deformation is converted into the deformation of 6450, the displacement of other parts such as the main body 6411 can be made unnecessary.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, the main body 6411 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a plane along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is on the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane which inclines upward as it goes. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

  When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is often placed on a concrete or flooring floor in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered that it is preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of a sense of stability and avoiding concentration of load. However, in this case, there is a possibility that soil on the floor may adhere to the entire lower surface. The lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is a position that is difficult to be seen by a player, but it is preferable to avoid adhesion of dirt as long as it is a product.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding portion 6413 is formed as a plane extending in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front side. When the installation shape portion 6413 contacts the floor surface, a gap is generated between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, a portion where the installation shape portion 6413 abuts the floor surface and stains are limited to the protruding shape portion 6413. can do. Therefore, when the gaming shop installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is sufficient to wipe off only the dirt on the protruding shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

  In addition, the protruding shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hanging portion for hanging a finger when carrying the front frame 10014. Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged at the center of the front frame on the left and right sides, the front frame is lifted by catching a hand on the lower plate portion, and it is easy to assemble the frame to the rear frame (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction (opening / closing shaft side), it is difficult to lift the front frame 10014 by hooking the lower plate 50 with the hand. Configuration.

  On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking the hand on the operation handle 51, the own weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the base side of the operation handle 41, so that the operation handle 51 may be damaged and is recommended. Is not preferred.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 that also functions as a finger hook portion is disposed at the left and right center positions so that it is recommended that the front frame 10014 be lifted by putting a hand on the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400. The worker can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by lifting the front frame 10014 by hooking the hand on the protruding shape portion 6413 and pivoting the front frame 10014 to the rear frame.

  Then, by adopting a work procedure of inserting a work of wiping dirt before and after the time of putting a finger, it is possible to make a worker conscious of a place where dirt needs to be wiped, in connection with a carrying operation. Therefore, forgetting to wipe off dirt can be prevented.

  Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a proper and sufficient gap corresponding to the magnitude of the expected deformation amount of the protruding shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body 6411, the gap between the floor and the floor becomes larger toward the front side. This corresponds to an increase in the deformable amount (bending amount) due to the load.

  That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, the gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor can be easily secured even when the protruding shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014. Can be. On the other hand, in the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 bends and deforms to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 can be easily brought into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the entire lower surface of the main body 6411 can support the weight of the front frame 10014.

  Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 mounted on the floor weighs more than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 mounted on the floor, a part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on the vehicle.

  Also, the deformable amount is formed to be larger toward the front side of the protruding shape portion 6413. It works well even during the execution of the game. For example, at the time of exchanging a thousand boxes, a store clerk of the game store slides the thousand boxes back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the protruding shape portion 6413, and at this time, the thousand cars box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 move. May collide. If the impact or load due to the collision is accumulated in the constituent members as fatigue, the constituent members are destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the protruding shape portion 6413 is configured to increase as it approaches the front side where it easily collides with a thousand boxes. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact or load due to the collision with the 1000 boxes by deformation (bending deformation), and it is possible to suppress the destruction of the protruding shape portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable game environment for the player.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). This can reduce the possibility of collision between the box and the main body 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413 when the box is replaced. Thus, the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is damaged can be reduced, so that the player can easily maintain a comfortable playing environment.

  FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400. Note that FIG. 232 illustrates an assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322, and the outline of the other operation device 10300 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are connected to the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b of FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 ( b) See))).

  The main body 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape as viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 are formed in a plate shape extending in the groove width direction of the main body 6451, so that the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 is provided. Is directed in a direction (upward diagonal direction) having a direction component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right centers. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed obliquely upward.

  Accordingly, it is possible to cope with not only the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement. For example, even when the moving direction of the operation portion (for example, the swing operation member 10310) of the operation device 10300 does not have a left-right component as in the present embodiment, the downward load given by the player is left-right. A directional component may be provided, and when such a load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrates) in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the left-right displacement of the operation device 10300 by flexing and deforming based on their own curved shapes (the left-right displacement can be absorbed or the restoring force can be used). The arrangement of the operation device 10300 can be returned, and the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the center in the left and right directions, so that the operation device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before the displacement. Therefore, the design (see FIG. 207) of the front frame 10014 in a front view can be easily maintained.

  FIG. 233 (a) is a sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a lower plate unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229 (a). 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229 (a). Note that in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is enlarged and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in an assembled state of the lower plate unit 6400, the edge of the through hole 6412 is formed by the lower plate forming member 6420 (the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 on the rear side portion). (The lower end) and the ball discharge device 6430 (the flange 6431a thereof). Accordingly, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

  The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be abutted in the front-rear and left-right directions from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224). As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 contacts the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the up-down direction (see FIG. 233 (c)). Accordingly, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

  As described above, the ball release lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 when not operated, so that the degree of decrease in strength due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closing plate. This can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233 (b)).

  Accordingly, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 can be prevented from being weakened. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the outlet 6422 and the bottom opening 6432 are arranged near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300). While the configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from decreasing.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a) to FIG. 233 (c), the shape of the recessed portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width is increased toward the front side and the depth of the recess is increased. That is, the recessed portion 6414 is formed so as to be more easily bent toward the front side.

  Thereby, a sufficient bending performance can be imparted to the recessed portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 is likely to be large. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the covering base member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, broken) by a load. This will be described in detail.

  As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. An operation timing and an operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and have a role of causing the player to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification and attracting the player to the game. Here, the frequency for each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

  For example, as an example of the control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific reach effect is executed (see FIG. 215 (a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

  In this state, the player performs a pressing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 for an operation for a notification that prompts an operation in the display effect (a notification such as “press a button!”) Or for switching a stage. You. Therefore, most of the load caused by the operation is a load generated when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is a load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215 (a)). Since the frequency of notification is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load is high.

  On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled to vertically displace the swing operation member 10310, and, for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at a downward position. In a state (see FIG. 215 (b)) that prompts an operation.

  The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215 (b)) that is further tilted by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the upward position. Along the load occurs. Since the generation of the notification is limited to the execution of the specific reach effect, the frequency of occurrence is low.

  That is, control is performed such that the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is such that the width is increased toward the front side and the depth of the recess is increased. Is formed so that the corresponding performance is improved.

  That is, as compared with the case where the common shape is used in the front-rear direction, it can be configured so as to be able to respond to the difference in the frequency of occurrence of the load at an appropriate place, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It is possible to make it easy to avoid being easily damaged.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the frequency of occurrence of a load during operation is high are both front sides, so that the wider the recessed shape portion 6414 is toward the front side. , Formed at the deep bottom, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of occurrence of the load at the time of operation is reversed, and in this case, the concave shape becomes wider toward the rear side. By forming it at the deep bottom, it can be configured so as to be able to cope with the difference in load occurrence frequency in place as compared with the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, and excessive deformation due to the applied load It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of cracks or insufficient deformation to easily cause damage.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b vertically contacts the main body portion 6411 at a position outside the left and right width ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Touch

  This makes it possible to reduce the rate at which the load from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the recessed shape portion 6414 as compared with the case where the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b contacts the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the concave shape portion 6414 from being damaged by a load when operating the operation device 10300.

  Further, in order to cope with the load, not only the bending of the recessed portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate portion from the upper edge of the recessed portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used. Therefore, the allowable load can be increased.

  FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed by a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and downward from the left, right, and rear edges of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. A drooping plate-shaped portion 6426b hanging down in a plate shape, and a front longitudinal portion which is connected to a front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and is formed to be taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a, and which is opened downward. It mainly includes a 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d that extends from the front vertically long portion 6426c to the rear side and fits with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are appropriately referred to.

  The flat plate-shaped portion 6426a is formed to be wider than the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed shape portion 6414. A hanging plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (between upper and lower sides). That is, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a does not come into contact with the main body portion 6411 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from below (see FIG. 225). The position of the flat plate portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410 is determined.

  As described above, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are not formed in a block shape but in the shape of a box whose lower part is opened, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. Configuration. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 bend and deform, but also the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211). The plate-like support portion 6426 and the cover base member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the protruding shape portion 6413, and the recessed shape portion 6414) disposed below the operation device 10300 can also bend and deform. Breakage can be further prevented.

  The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends to the bottom upper surface of the main body portion 6411 but does not extend to enter the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, a space is formed between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see below the rear end of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Accordingly, a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414 can be maintained, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be prevented.

  Further, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when the liquid intrudes from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted on the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid entering behind. This makes it easier for the infiltration of the liquid to be stopped by the front frame 10014.

  The front vertical portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operating device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d extending to the rear side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. This allows the load applied to the operation device 10300 from the player to be distributed not only to the main body portion 6411 but also to the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be reduced. it can.

  A space is also formed between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. Accordingly, a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414 can be maintained, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be prevented.

  Further, the space between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even when the liquid intrudes from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower plate unit 6400, the liquid transmitted on the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid entering behind. This makes it easier for the infiltration of the liquid to be stopped by the front frame 10014.

  The fitting portion 6426d is a portion that is formed to be long in the lateral direction so as to be fittable with the fitting concave portion De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to the lower surface and the front vertical portion 6426c formed on the extended base end side.

  Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d withstands even when a load for displacing the operation device 10300 is applied downward. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from being excessively displaced.

  Here, the operation member 10300 is placed above the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load caused by the operation or vibration of the operation member 10300 by the player is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 6426 via the resin member, and transmitted to the covering base member 6410 arranged downstream of the resin member. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

  In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear of the direction of the load transmitted from the operating member 10300 to the main body 6411 are determined. The direction component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

  That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur when the load generated from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the rear side (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, which affects the manner in which the fired ball flows down, or the board is broken by transmitting a load to the board boxes 100 to 104 or the electronic board. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the rendering device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In FIGS. 235 and 236, the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 described above are not illustrated, and a state in which the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014 a is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 235, the stage effect device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the sound device 6610 arranged in a pair of right and left, and includes an electric decoration substrate 6570 in which light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. , And components that serve as an intermediary for delivering light emitted from the LED to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (leaf spring) 6584d that generates a biasing force in the separating direction with the metal main body 10014a is disposed on the back side of the effect device 6500. This makes it possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the presentation device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a (stably fasten and fix).

  FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect device 6500. 237 and 238 show a state where the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled upward.

  The upper stage production device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying a front side below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to 6600 to 659 to 6 rear rear units disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580 mainly.

  The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. Portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 vertically formed near the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6511, and through which fastening screws can be inserted, and extending downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A female screw hole is formed from the back surface of the extension tip, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 configured to be able to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body 10014a into the female screw hole.

  The upper lid member 6510 has a rear side portion where the fastening portion 6513 extends, fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and other components of the presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512. That is, by utilizing the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the front end portion of the upper effect device 6500.

  The fastening portion 6513 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner of falling forward.

  The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper cover member 6510 is configured such that the acoustic device 6610 is formed of the metal main body portion 10014a. Can be prevented from falling off.

  The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface, and an uneven portion 6514 formed to project downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. By this uneven portion 6514, a force that resists a load in a direction perpendicular to the surface can be increased as compared with a case where the upper lid member 6510 of the same thickness is formed of a plate-like member having a smooth surface (the shape can be maintained). Can be easier).

  FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect device 6500. 239 and 240 show a state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper effect device 6500 is omitted, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. In the present embodiment, the front effect devices 6500 are moved by moving the front units 6520 to 6550 obliquely downward and forward with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 (the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed, the direction along the surface). Is configured to be decomposable, and details will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a role of receiving, refracting, or transmitting light emitted from a light emitting unit such as an LED, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 have a function of emitting light such as an LED. It has a role as a means and a role to support an illuminated substrate on which a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 241 (a) is a front view of the rear units 6560-6580, FIG. 241 (b) is a front view of the illuminated board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 each include a partition member 6560 formed in such a manner as to partition the internal space into a plurality of portions when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partition member 6560 with light. An illuminated substrate 6570 to be provided and a pair of layers arranged on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and arranged with a slight gap with respect to the illuminated substrate 6570 in an inner region of the outer shape and surface-supported in the outer shape portion , And a back support member 6580.

  It should be noted that surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be maintained, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580. Means that.

  The partitioning member 6560 is arranged so as to be opposed to and close to the front side of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is configured to divide light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 from the vicinity of the illuminated substrate 6570. You. By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each partition, and the light emission modes of the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 are greatly different. Also, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  The partitioning member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 that is arranged to face the illuminated substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 that is formed at the left and right central portions of the opposing plate portion 6561, and a left and right lower portion of the opposing plate portion 6561. Left and right light holes 6563 provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back of the opposing plate 6561. A central cylindrical portion 6566 extending in front of the opposing plate portion 6561 in a rectangular cylindrical shape surrounding the central light hole 6562, and a long cylindrical shape enclosing the left and right light holes 6563 toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561. A plate-like connection formed of a left and right cylindrical portion 6567 and a T-shaped plate portion viewed from the front and connecting the opposed plate portion 6561, the central tubular portion 6566, and the left and right tubular portion 6567 on the front side of the opposed plate portion 6561. Department And 568, a mainly includes.

  The opposing plate portion 6561 includes flange portions 6561a to 6561c protruding from the upper edge to the rear side in a left-right elongated shape. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of left and right sides, and extends from a position where a cut is made from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564. The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a pair of left and right sides, and extends from a position opposite to the end of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to near the left and right ends of the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568.

  Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate for preventing light from entering and exiting from between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570, and the cut is provided at least on the illuminated substrate 6570. It is configured in a location where light emitted from the LED to be leaked hardly leaks. In other words, even if light is incident from the outside, the light is hardly mixed with light emitted from the LED.

  The cut between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563, and the LED is dared on the electric decoration board 6570. The places where the parts are not arranged are cut off. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

  The cut between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at a location where the fastening portion 6564 is provided. It was done. In other words, even if the light travels to the break, the light that is going to pass through the break is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the phenomenon of light leaking from the break.

  Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c may be configured as a continuous portion without a break, but in this case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently secured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 (Assuming a downward load applied to a member disposed in front of the partitioning member 6560, a gravity or a load given by a player), it is necessary to counter only the force generated by the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fastening portion 6564. Occurs. In the present embodiment, as the number of the fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screw increases, but also the surface area of the illuminated board 6570 decreases, and the place where the LED can be arranged is limited. The 6570 design flexibility is reduced.

  On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into a length enough to secure the rigidity, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can resist the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. Therefore, the number of the fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of working steps can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the illuminated board 6570 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the effect device 6500 is formed as a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction increases toward the center in the left-right direction when viewed from above (see FIG. 237). In general, a load (for example, a hanging load) given by a player is applied at the front side end of the effect device 6500, so that the load given by the player at the left and right central portions of the effect device 6500 is maximum. And becomes gradually smaller as approaching the left and right ends.

  On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c have different lengths. More specifically, the left and right lengths of the second flange portions 6561b disposed on the left and right thereof are longer than the left and right lengths of the first flange portions 6561a formed at the central portion where the load is maximized, Further, the third flange portion 6561c disposed on the left and right thereof is longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left and right lengths are the shortest at the left and right central portions, and gradually increase as approaching the left and right end portions. Thereby, it is possible to generate a counterforce to the load applied to the effect device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

  Thereby, since the deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed, the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 can be stably maintained. The maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separating direction to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being displaced, and the deformation in the approaching direction. This also includes a case where a load in the compression direction is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 due to the displacement or the displacement to prevent the illuminated substrate 6570 from being broken or deformed.

  The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are a plurality of through holes formed in accordance with the pattern of the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 6570. The central light hole 6562 is formed as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are formed as a set of through holes surrounding a plurality of LEDs. .

  The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude more rearward than the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are aligned.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion that extends to the front side in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a that is formed at the bottom end thereof so that a fastening screw can be inserted. A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted from the rear side into the insertion hole 6565a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540 described later. With such a configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in an assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). it can.

  The central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear side ends of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 enters the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper stage production device 6500. The upper surface is disposed at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. Accordingly, the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 bears the load prior to the central cylindrical portion 6566, so that occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylindrical portion 6566 can be suppressed, and the central cylindrical portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. Can be easily avoided.

  The plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. Accordingly, when a load is transmitted to the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is countered by the resistance generated by the plate-shaped portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. can do. In this case, since the plate-like portion is formed, a counterforce can be generated by bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

  The illuminated board 6570 is a so-called printed board, and is a plate-shaped board portion 6571, and a fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 that is a portion that is pierced or cut out in the board portion 6571 and is inserted. 241 (see FIG. 241), an insertion portion 6572, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 pierced into the substrate portion 6571, into which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted, and a left and right central portion of the substrate portion 6571 (see FIG. b), and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illuminating portion 6574. A second illuminating portion 6575 disposed near the portion, a third illuminating portion 6576 symmetrically disposed along the lower end of the substrate portion 6571, and a connector for connecting an electric wiring (not shown). And 6577, a mainly includes.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side in the front-rear direction, and Are arranged according to a typical positional relationship. That is, the first lighting unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting unit 6576 is located below the partitioning member 6560. Each is arranged at a position below the edge. Accordingly, each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate region partitioned by the partitioning member 6560. Note that the first lighting unit 6574 and the second lighting unit 6575 illuminate an area inside the partition member 6560, whereas the third lighting unit 6576 illuminates an area outside the partition member 6560.

  The third lighting unit 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in a front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third lighting unit 6576 travels obliquely downward by the light receiving member 6558, it is necessary to avoid a situation where the light emitted from the third lighting unit 6576 is blocked by the partitioning member 6560. Accordingly, the third illumination unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

  The thickness of the board portion 6571 is designed to have such a size that the fastening force in the fastening between the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 does not act on the fastening insertion portion 6572. That is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

  The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in a front view. This can improve the assembly efficiency, but details will be described later.

  The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side. The back support member 6580 is a pair of members that are substantially symmetrical with each other. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 extending in a plate shape to the rear side having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6852, and a front plate A rear box portion 6584 formed in a box shape connected to the left and right edge portions (edge portions opposite to the side where the pair of members opposes) and the lower edge portion of the portion 6581 and opened to the rear side, and a pair of rear box portions A lower box portion 6585 formed in a box shape having a smooth upper surface and being opened downward on the side near the opposite rear box portion 6584 on the side of the portion 6584, the lower box portion 6585, and the front plate portion 6581 and a plate-shaped portion connected to And a notch portion 6587 which is a notch vertically penetrating between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. Prepare for.

  The front plate portion 6581 includes a plurality of fastening supports each including a pair of an oblong rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. Portion 6581a and a through hole formed from a vertically long oval shape having a lateral width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560, and disposed at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front-rear direction. A plurality of positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly drilled in a lower edge portion forming a boundary between the rear box portion 6584 and are capable of inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550, Similarly to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of holes are formed in a long hole shape along a lower edge portion forming a boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and used for positioning the front units 6520 to 6550. A-decided Me slots 6581D, is drilled at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the illuminations substrate 6570 mainly includes a wiring hole 6581e that can be passed back and forth electrical wiring, the.

  The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction constituting a short diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is smaller than the electric decoration board 6570. Is made longer than the left and right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted into the inside of the elliptical rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the illuminated substrate 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244 (a)).

  The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

  The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclined direction in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed, and the fastening screw is screwed in along the downward inclined direction. (See FIG. 247).

  This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the illuminated board 6570 than in the case of opening in the front-rear direction, and moves the positions of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d toward the illuminated board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed in the same size, a large area for disposing the illuminated substrate 6570 can be secured, and when the illuminated substrate 6570 is formed in the same size. A region where the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (it can be formed compact).

  The flange portion 6852 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (a load in the hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the forward fall of the partition member 6560.

  The upper plate portion 6583 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting concave portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is formed in a rectangular shape (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) with the upper and rear portions opened and viewed in the left-right direction.

  The rear box portion 6584 includes a projecting portion 6584a projecting more toward the front side than the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmitting portion 6584b made of punching metal that is covered by an opening formed in the projecting portion 6584a, and a right side member. The light receiving portion 6584c formed of a light transmitting member disposed at the right end of the overhang portion 6584a, and the light receiving portion 6584c disposed at a position closest to the center of the upper end (a position close to the front plate portion 6581) and assembled. In FIG. 207, a pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction repelling from the metal main body 10014a and the insertion hole 6512 of the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237). And a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

  The overhang portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed in a shape along the lower edge shape of the electric decoration board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and an upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The sound transmission unit 6584b is a portion through which a sound wave generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. This sound transmission unit 6584b is provided at a position facing the diaphragm 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

  The light receiving unit 6584c receives light emitted from a lighting unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED disposed in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and is displayed as a light emission effect to a player. It is. In the present embodiment, the illumination of the illumination unit 10014c is controlled in a manner different from that of the illuminated substrate 6570. In other words, while the light emission effect of the illuminated substrate 6570 is executed at the time of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of occurrence, a normal fluctuation effect and a reach effect, or a demonstration effect, the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a probability of occurrence. This is executed when an effect that is extremely low and extremely advantageous for the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c can be improved.

  The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a from the back side is fastened.

  Notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 formed vertically on the lower surface of the left and right central part (part farthest from diaphragm 6611) of acoustic device 6610 is passed. To form That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through a through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d supporting the back side of the acoustic device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

  The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as sound heading to the back side due to the vibration of the diaphragm 6611, as opposed to being output as sound heading toward the front due to the vibration of the diaphragm 6611. That is, the sound is emitted to the outside through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker). By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, sounds with different timbres can be generated simultaneously.

  FIG. 244 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241. FIG. 244 (b) is the CCXLIVb in FIG. FIG. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVb line, and FIG. 245 (a) is a partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line in FIG. FIG. 245 (b) is a partial sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. FIG. 246 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. FIG. 246 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line 241. FIG. It is a partial sectional view of an electric decoration board 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610.

  244 (a) to 246 (b) show an enlarged view of the periphery of the flange portion 6582. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the illuminated board 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. Thus, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the electric decoration substrate 6570 (the width of the vibration) due to the vibration of the back support member 6580 can be suppressed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), a fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580 is inserted into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the electric decoration substrate 6570 interposed therebetween. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electric decoration board 6570. That is, only the fastening insertion portion 6572 is aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the electric decoration board 6570 is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening location.

  Further, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is in contact with the back surface of the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the illuminated substrate 6570 at the front and rear positions. That is, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be displaced (for example, tilted) in the front and rear direction.

  In addition, the lower edge of the illuminated substrate 6570 is not supported by the back support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This is the same in FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape such that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape such that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a)). A description will be given of how the partition member 6560 is easily assembled to the back support member 6580 by forming in this manner.

  For example, when the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564 as in the related art, the partitioning member 6560 is aligned with the back support member 6580 in the up, down, left, and right positions. Need to be assembled.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the electric decoration substrate 6570 is disposed in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580, the rear support member 6580 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is assembled when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to perform alignment with respect to, and there is a possibility that the work may be difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b have a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape). Therefore, it is possible to assemble even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

  As an example of an assembling order, first, the illuminated substrate 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 such that the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illuminated substrate 6570. In this case, the arrangement of the illumination board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be at any position.

  In the present embodiment, since the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can come into contact with the illuminated substrate 6570, the partition member of the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled when the illuminated substrate 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560. The displacement with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

  Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. That is, rough positioning (for example, positioning such that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) passes through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242) and positioning with a sufficiently long vertical width) may be performed. The working efficiency of inserting the 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

  Next, the partitioning member 6560 is moved relative to the back support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, a fastening screw is screwed in (see FIG. 244 (a)).

  In this state, even if the position of the illuminated board 5670 is shifted, the partition member 6560 is lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)). And the back support member 6580.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is generally difficult to position the illuminated substrate 6570, that is, the illuminated substrate 6570 is non-fixedly arranged between the partition member 6560 and the back support member. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in the assembling mode. In addition, the efficiency of assembly can be improved. In addition, even if the illuminated board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight. It can be prevented from lowering.

  The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T-shape at the left and right central portions (disposed at four places, see FIG. 241), and is arranged in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) outside thereof. (Refer to FIG. 241, arranged at eight locations). The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole that allows light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 to pass therethrough, a portion forming an outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is a front side (a side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined such that the facing distance increases as it goes toward.

  Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from first illumination unit 6574 can be defined. That is, the way of showing the light to the player can be changed according to the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (the inclination angle of the inner wall, the height of the raised wall, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion of the enlarged hole 6562a that is raised toward the front side is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closing portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Accordingly, light that has passed through the enlargement hole 6562a can be made to enter the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 without leaking.

  FIG. 246 (a) illustrates the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246 (b) illustrates the positioning slot 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are rearranged along the inclination direction. 6580 and fastened and fixed.

  Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where the front units are assembled in the front-rear direction.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the illuminated substrate 6570 can be positioned so as to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be ensured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box 6584 and the size of the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is disposed. (See FIGS. 235 and 246).

  As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning slot 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. (Not inclined) is due to the fact that the resin die used for manufacturing the back support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

  In other words, in order to simply form the resin mold (comprising two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed on the back support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the support portion 6581a, the fitting concave portion 658a, and the like. In the present embodiment, the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are distorted due to the fact that the pulling direction is set to the same front-back direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting concave portion 6583a. (A shape that changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

  In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the back side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated due to fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying the fastening is applied becomes thinner toward the center of the hole, so that the load is unbalanced between the upper edge and the other portion. Is likely to occur, and the fastening screw may be loosened depending on the state of use and the number of years of use.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be employed. However, due to a difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points, the cost is increased. . That is, if a fastening screw having a large head diameter is used only for a fastening portion that causes a problem, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common part, resulting in an increase in cost, and a fastening screw having a large head diameter for all fastening portions. If the method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw is increased, which leads to an increase in material cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610 that is disposed to face the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed in a recessed shape in the front wall 6620 ( (Recessed formation) portion, and includes a retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion in which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

  The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the retaining screw portion and the back support member 6580. In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is disposed in a direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, the further progress of the fastening screw is restricted, and the falling off of the fastening screw is prevented. Can be prevented.

  When the fastening screw is not loose, the retaining plate portion 6621 is formed to have a size that is slightly spaced from the head of the screw. Therefore, transmission of vibration of the acoustic device 6610 via the head of the fastening screw can be avoided.

  On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by abutment, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when sound is output from the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

  In addition, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoiding recesses 6622 that are recessed at positions behind the through holes of the fastening support portions 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoiding concave portion 6622 is of such an extent that a contact with the head of the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) can be avoided (a slight gap between the head and the fastening screw). (Dimensions that can be made).

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the front-back direction which is the same as the drawing direction of the resin mold, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and is sufficient. Fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a is loosened. However, if the fastening screw is loosened, the same function as the above-described retaining plate portion 6621 is performed to avoid contact. It can be created in the recess 6622.

  That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by the contact, so that the gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, when sound is output from the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

  As described above, by transmitting the vibration generated when the head of the fastening screw comes into contact with the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding recess 6622 due to the occurrence of the loosening of the fastening screw, the configuration of the fastening screw can be grasped. It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the fastening screw is left loose.

  For example, the configuration is such that abnormal noise is generated by the transmission of vibration, or the vibration is detected.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in the present embodiment, while the illuminated substrate 6570 is arranged close to the back support member 6580, it is arranged without being fixed to the back support member 6580. Is done. This allows the acoustic device 6610 and the illuminated substrate 6570 to be arranged close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the illuminated substrate 6570 and illuminated. Breaking of the substrate 6570 can be avoided.

  Here, when the partitioning member 6560 is connected to the back support member 6580 at a position except for the effected portion of the illuminated substrate 6570 (that is, the lighting units 6574 to 6576), the ratio of the effected portion on the surface of the illuminated substrate 6570 is reduced. For the purpose of securing a large area, the area of the connection portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be reduced.

  Therefore, the problem that the fixing of the partition member 6560 is likely to be insufficient is likely to occur. Without measures, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 may be transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the back support member 6580. When the 6560 vibrates, there is a possibility that the effect of rendering is inferior, the fastening portion is loosened, or the partition member 6560 itself is damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the partition member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partition member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the presentation device 6500. In FIG. 247, a fastening location of each component of the effect device 6500, a fastening direction, and a fastening direction are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

  As shown in FIG. 247, the upward staging device 6500 is configured such that the front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, but is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

  This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed of a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted via the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is moved in the thickness direction ( (Vertical direction).

  With the displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is reduced. For example, in the case where the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with reference to the center in the front-rear direction, the front-rear interval of the insertion holes 6512 formed apart in the front-rear direction is reduced. Accordingly, a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the rear side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

  In other words, a load can be applied by sandwiching the partition member 6560 between the back support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540, so that even when the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration is suppressed. Can be.

  Here, even if the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is reduced, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displaced away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 gives the partition member 6560. The load to be applied is likely to be insufficient, and the effect of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the guided unit 6550, the lower side of the partition unit 6540 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side. Thus, a sufficient load can be secured from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560.

  At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254 (a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 is provided. The direction of transmission of the vibration can be a direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552.

  Thereby, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening portions can be prevented from moving in the front and rear direction. Therefore, even when the vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 247, by arranging the fastening points, the decorative board 6570 is placed in a non-fixed state close to the acoustic device 6610 in which vibration is likely to occur, while preventing the decorative board 6570 from being damaged. The vibration of the partition member 6560 caused by the transmission of the vibration to the partition member 6560 that prevents the illuminated substrate 6570 from separating from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more can be suppressed.

  That is, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 disposed in the vicinity of the acoustic device 6610 and to improve the shape maintaining performance of the presentation device 6500.

  One purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to correspond to the amount of displacement of the upper lid member 6510. That is, since the upper lid member 6510 has a configuration in which the rear side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in a thin plate shape back and forth, the upper lid member 6510 easily bends and displaces in a manner in which the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the rear side. It is about things.

  For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end portion on the front side of the upper lid member 6510, a mode in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 starting from the rear end portion from the shape of the upper lid member 6510. Can be displaced by bending. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the upper lid member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to other members disposed below the upper lid member 6510.

  Since the direction of the compression load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, the direction of the compression load is along the front-back direction on the rear side, which is the base end side. It follows the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

  In the present embodiment, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the upper lid The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be made closer.

  Thereby, in addition to generating a sufficient resistance to the compression load at the fastening position, the component of the compression load applied in the direction in which the fastening screw is sheared (the direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw is broken. Can be suppressed.

  A fastening screw having a fastening direction formed in a direction inclined downward toward the front is used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550. The plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and the back side of the illuminated board 6570. (See the screw insertion portion 6581c in FIG. 246 (a)). In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 6570 is provided in a non-fixed manner and is configured to be easily displaced. However, the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the allowable displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570. That is, even if the illuminated substrate 6570 is displaced, if the amount of displacement is excessive, the illuminated substrate 6570 can be restricted from being excessively displaced by being able to contact the plate guide unit 6550.

  In addition, since plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of illuminated board 6570 (the side where acoustic device 6610 is arranged), displacement of illuminated board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. Thus, it is possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generation source.

  In this embodiment, fastening portions (fastening support portions 6581a, insertion holes 6565a, and the like) whose fastening directions are in the front-rear direction are gathered on the left and right center sides (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is lowered toward the front side. The fastening portions (the screw insertion portion 6581c, the insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged close to each other.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation (displacement) occurring in one of the fastening portions on the other fastening portion. That is, even when the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and the displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that the inclination is lowered. It is possible to avoid generating a load in a direction inclined with respect to the fastening direction (along the front-rear direction) with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. Thereby, the occurrence of loosening of the screw can be suppressed.

  In addition, by fixing a portion that is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the left and right center side, with a fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, the resistance of the effect device 6500 to a load in the pushing-down direction can be improved.

  On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction descends and inclines toward the front side, where the fastening direction is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the push-down direction than the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, In the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction descends and inclines toward the front side, on the left and right outer sides formed to be short along the front-rear direction, the resistance to the load in the push-down direction decreases. The arrangement area of the illuminated substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 can be ensured while minimizing the effect of this.

  FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241 (a). It should be noted that the specific portion is shown enlarged.

  As shown in FIG. 248, in the electric decoration board 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 contacts the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. In addition, the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right sides of the partition member 6560 and the left and right sides of the back support member 6580, respectively, but the contact positions do not coincide with each other.

  With this configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 and adjust the easiness of displacement. This will be described below in order. First, an improvement in the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described.

  Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 are in contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, respectively, at a position where they coincide with each other, for some reason (error in resin molding, defective fastening, etc.) If the interval between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the thickness of the illuminated substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570, and if the applied load is large, The decorative substrate 6570 may be broken.

  In addition, even when a compressive force is not applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, so that a load (for example, a load in the compression direction) is generated. May be applied, and the electric decoration substrate 6570 may be cracked by this load.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions in contact with the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 on the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 do not coincide with each other before and after (there is a portion that comes into contact at a shifted position). Even if a load is applied to the illuminated substrate 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load for compressing the illuminated substrate 6570 but a load for bending the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, since it is possible to cope with the deformation of the illuminated substrate 6570, the possibility that the illuminated substrate 6570 is cracked can be reduced.

  Next, adjustment of the likelihood of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described. The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 are inserted through the electric decoration substrate 6570 to prevent displacement, but in the present embodiment, they are concentrated near the left and right centers. (See FIG. 243).

  In addition, since the illuminated substrate 6570 is in contact (contact) with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, contact resistance between the illuminated substrate 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, it is natural that the contact area becomes large and the frictional resistance can be sufficiently secured.

  Therefore, the occurrence of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be easily suppressed in the vicinity of the left and right central portions of the illuminated substrate 6570. Therefore, even when a peripheral member vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be easily maintained.

  On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially on the lower side) of the illuminated substrate 6570, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and the fastening portion 6564 are not arranged, and a load to be compressed from the front and rear is not generated. The displacement can be easily generated as compared with the left and right central portions of 6570.

  Therefore, when peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily change the direction of light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 or the third lighting unit 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570.

  In the present embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, the vibration mode of the electric decoration board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 to vibrate the right side of the illuminated board 6570 preferentially, and the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 to vibrate the left side of the illuminated board 6570 preferentially. The sound decoration board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different types of vibration depending on whether the sound is output from both the right and left sound devices 6610 and the right and left sides of the light decoration board 6570 are vibrated.

  Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of front units 6520 to 6550. In FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, reference numerals of detailed configurations are omitted for easy understanding.

  249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 for transmitting light incident from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illuminated substrate 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and form an outer frame The state where the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 which abuts on the partitioning member 6560 before and after and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 guided on the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is shown in an exploded state. You.

  At the time of the light emission effect via the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives light from the first lighting unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives light from the second lighting unit 6575, and the guided unit. 6550 receives light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 251 (a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. FIG. 252 (b) is a front view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a plate guide. FIG. 136 is a rear view of the unit 6550.

  FIG. 254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVA-CCLIVA in FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. FIG. 254 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251 (b).

  FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

  The partitioning unit 6540 is formed of a milky white light-transmissive resin material and is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape when viewed from the front, and a light transmitting member 6520 formed by penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center of the milky white member 6541. A through-hole 6542 formed so that the rear part can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are portions projecting inward of the through-hole 6542 to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530 A plurality of insertion holes 6544 through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing are inserted, and a pair of post-guide fastening portions to which fastening screws extending cylindrically to the rear side and passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape opened to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky member 6541, and the box-shaped light receiving portions 65 6 is a plate-like portion extending downward from the lower edge, and formed with a plurality of insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partitioning unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 can be inserted. And a transparent covering member 6548 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material in a shape covering the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and fitted and supported by the milky member 6541. Prepare for.

  The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge portion formed in a curved shape that swells toward the front side as viewed from above as in the case of the upper lid member 6510, is formed into a substantially inverted triangle when viewed from the front, and has a center disposed on the back side when viewed from the side. (See FIG. 254 (a)).

  The milky-white member 6541 includes a pair of fastening portions 6541a to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened on the upper surface. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

  The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side in correspondence with the inclination of the contact plate 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. Thus, the front end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be brought into surface contact with each other, thereby preventing the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. Can be.

  The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed to the rear side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

  The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is provided on the front bottom rear surface and the lower plate upper surface of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Has a jagged decoration with a short left-right width. The jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are densely aligned.

  With this shape, light incident from the back side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape whose upper side is opened in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. And a protruding rib 6547c that protrudes toward the front side in a semi-elliptical shape enclosing.

  By positioning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partitioning unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion where an insertion hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted is formed, and receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying the fastening is applied depends on the direction of removal of the resin mold (the front-back direction in the present embodiment). The thickness is reduced toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254 (b)).

  In this case, a load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge portion and the other portions. Therefore, when a small positional deviation repeatedly occurs between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may be loosened. is there.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw having a large head diameter may be employed. However, due to a difference from the quality required of the fastening screw used for other fastening points, the cost is increased. . That is, if a fastening screw having a large head diameter is used only for a fastening portion that causes a problem, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common part, resulting in an increase in cost, and a fastening screw having a large head diameter for all fastening portions. If the method is adopted, the material required for the fastening screw is increased, which leads to an increase in material cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 is prevented at a plurality of positions. That is, first, the screw-in portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the protruding rib 6547c of the partitioning unit 6540, whereby the downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented (FIGS. 247 and 254). (B)).

  Secondly, the front-side upper end of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage in the front-rear direction with the rear-side lower end of the transparent covering member 6548 locked to the milky-white member 6541 by the locking protrusion 6548b. (See FIG. 254 (b)). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced to the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540.

  Third, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to abut on the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thus, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

  The displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partitioning unit 6540 can be suppressed by these first to third contact structures, so that the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw-in portion 6554a can be suppressed. Can be.

  The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and has a lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a extending in a plate shape toward the rear side at the V-shaped lower edge connecting portion, and a rear surface extending from the upper edge portion. And a plurality of locking projections 6548b projecting in a plate shape to the side. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

  A jagged decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, similarly to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Accordingly, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be cut out, the notched portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a. And can emit light uniformly.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined upward toward the rear side (see FIG. 254 (c)). In order to form 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of guided unit 6550, lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the back side similarly to the lower bottom surface of guided unit 6550. .

  If the inclined surface is to be formed by the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, the direction of pulling out the mold for forming the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. In other words, the drawing direction is the front-back direction near the through-hole 6542, while the drawing direction is the direction that rises and inclines toward the rear side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, so that the difficulty of the mold design only increases. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but is instead formed by the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254 (c)). Further, in the assembled state, the white partitioning member 6560 is disposed opposite the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that forms the inclined surface, so that the transparent covering member 6548 is provided to the player. Can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

  Accordingly, the drawing direction of the molding die for the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-back direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that is covered on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes with the front and rear drawing directions. While the shape (the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in a direction to enter the inside of the partition unit 6540 in a front view), the light emission of the transparent covering member 6548 is played in a uniform light emitting mode. Can be visually recognized.

  In other words, the partition unit 6540 is tapered toward the rear side (the vertical interval is narrowed), and the rear side portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that are adjacent to each other are formed. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emission effect in a uniform light emission mode.

  In this case, it is difficult to set the direction in which the molding die of the transparent covering member 6548 is removed in the front-back direction, but the transparent covering member 6548 does not have a portion formed along the front-back direction in the first place. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the direction of rising and falling) as the drawing direction of the forming die, the manufacturing process in which the drawing direction is the resin molding in the front-rear direction (one direction) is performed. The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process.

  Accordingly, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and a portion visually recognized through the transparent covering member 6548 can emit light uniformly.

  The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the front-side bulging portion at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking projection 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

  The guided unit 6550 is formed from a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back support member 6580; An extended plate portion 6552 extending in the form of a plate on the rear side along the lower edge of the left and right central portion, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure holes 6553 drilled at the rear end of the extended plate portion 6552 A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and opposed to the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partition unit 6540 to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed; A plurality of back side fastening portions 6555 to which fastening screws arranged along the lower edge and passing through the screw insertion portions 6581c (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the back support member 6580 are fixed. A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 projecting in a rib shape between the rear side fastening portions 6555 and inserted into positioning long holes 6581d (see FIG. 241 (a)) of the rear support member 6580, and punching in the front and rear directions in the left and right arms. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 6557 provided, and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in the plurality of through holes 6557.

  In the guided unit 6550, the direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is set as the die removing direction. That is, each component member is formed along an inclined direction that is inclined upward toward the rear side or along a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

  The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6612 passes through the exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6553 and reaches the player.

  Exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed not in a single large hole but in a plurality of small hole shapes in a range opposed to exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6612 (see FIG. 235). Formed). Thereby, the fraudulent act of entering a thin wire such as a piano wire can be suppressed.

  In addition, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed such that the width of the hole becomes narrower as approaching the end of the hole and toward the rear side. Thereby, since the fine wire can be clogged in the hole, after the fine wire is advanced into the back after entering the exhaust pressure through hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking on a specific member, The movement resistance of the fine wire can be increased. As a result, the time required for cheating can be prolonged, so that cheating can be suppressed.

  The front side fastening portion 6554 includes a threaded portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of positioning wall portions 6554b formed on the left and right of the threaded portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are opposed to each other at intervals slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the positioning between the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be performed.

  The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and a cross section perpendicular to the long direction is formed in an L-shape. A guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b which are formed in a box shape which bulges in front of the guided portion 6558a and whose back side is opened and which is formed so as to be able to fit into the through hole 6557; An upper edge extending portion 6558c that extends in the form of a plate to the rear side along the upper edge of the central portion of the portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 opposes).

  The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570. The decorative jagged shape described above is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. This allows light to be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1-2 in FIG. 241 (b)). However, even light can be visually recognized as a uniform light over the entire rear box portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the point light source feeling can be reduced).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (the posture in which the light receiving surface is inclined so that the light traveling direction is along the mounting direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guide unit 6550). Is attached in a posture intersecting the mounting direction of the light receiving member 6558), so that the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed on the third illumination portion 6576 of the electric decoration board 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received. The light is refracted when passing through the member 6558, and can be advanced in a direction inclined obliquely downward toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed such that an object disposed on the left and right outer sides has a shorter bulging length toward the front side than an object disposed on the left and right inner sides. Accordingly, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected thereunder.

  The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 which is disposed to face the partition member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly at the centrally extending plate portion 6552, and has no partition, so that alignment with the partition member 6560 can be performed. Difficult to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper edge extending portion 6558c serves as a partition that partitions an area above the extending plate portion 6552, so that the partition member 6560 can be easily positioned.

  Returning to FIG. In the description so far, the portion that receives the light emitted from the second illumination section 6575 and the third illumination section 6576 arranged on the left and right has been described. Hereinafter, the light transmission unit 6520, which is a part that receives light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574, will be described.

  FIG. 257 (a) is a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. FIG. 258 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. FIG.

  The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a color (in this embodiment, orange) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body 6531 formed of an inverted triangle. An opening 6532 that is formed in the center in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) in the front-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6533 that is formed along the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protrudes rearward in a rib shape. And a plurality of fastening portions 6534 which are provided at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so as to be able to screw fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544.

  Since the main body 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is made opaque to light, a portion where light is transmitted inside the outer shape is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape (an enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241 (a)).

  Light emitted from the first illumination portion 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521. However, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so as to be different depending on the front-rear position, the light before the opening 6532 is provided. It is possible to visually recognize a light of a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574 to a player who is visually recognized from the same.

  For example, since the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the lateral width becomes longer (as the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction) as approaching the opening 6532, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is Light that is visually recognized from the vicinity of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position overlapping with the upper plate portion before and after is visually recognized as a pattern that is wider than the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind it while expanding the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first illumination unit 6574 (or the illuminated substrate 6570). The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

  The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is provided at a position where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). Is done).

  FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a tubular shape with a bottom and extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin, and a plane disposed at an intermediate position of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape over the outer periphery along with a cup-shaped member 6523 formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin into a cup-shaped member covered by the transparent tubular member 6521; A shielding member 6524 formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) light-impermeable resin material into a tubular shape so that a portion opposite to the side on which the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered can be inserted; A contact plate portion 6525 formed at the front end portion as a flat plate surface portion capable of contacting the flange portion 6522, and an outer portion extending to the front side along left, right, and lower edges of the contact plate portion 6525. Frame extension And 526, mainly it comprises.

  The bottomed tubular member 6521 is a member that extends in a front and rear cylindrical shape, and has a curved shape in which left and right walls are confined inward. , A plurality of light-receiving projecting portions 6521b projecting rearward from the rear outer portion 6521a at positions opposed to the LEDs, and a region surrounded by the rear outer portion 6521a. 6521c that blocks the LED in a plate shape, a plurality of light-transmitting holes 6521d that are formed in the blocking portion 6521c at a position facing the LED, and at least the width of the upper wall and the interval between the left and right walls are toward the front. It mainly includes a main body cylinder portion 6521e that becomes longer as it goes, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521f that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylinder portion 6521e.

  The light receiving protruding portion 6521b is a portion that is inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. In other words, by reducing the distance between the partition member 6560 and the illuminated substrate 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illuminating portion is provided on the light receiving projecting portion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from the 6574 LED. Thereby, it is possible to easily cause total reflection.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 is incident at a short distance, is totally reflected, and travels to the front side, compared with the light of the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 described above. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by an area inside the recessed box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 or the rear box-shaped portion 6558b recessed in the direction away from the LED. 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are caused to emit light. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 has a low light amount and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light. it can.

  The partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed of a light-transmissive milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

  The frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is generally formed in a similar shape to the rear outer portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is compared to the outer shape of the rear outer portion 6521a due to the interposition of the main body tubular portion 6521e. It will be enlarged.

  Therefore, compared to the size of the region where the LEDs are arranged in the first lighting unit 6574, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light that illuminates a large region.

  The shape of the extending distal end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is such that each portion is arranged at a distance substantially equal to the bottom rear side surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is designed. Thus, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be made to emit light in a uniform light emission mode.

  The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are formed in a size that allows the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction while having a rear surface formed in a flat shape, and fastened with a fastening screw inserted into the bottom. A pair of terminal fastening portions 6523a to which the portions 6543 are fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusing shape (a decorative shape having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and the decorative shape portion And a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat shape in a region surrounding the periphery of the 6523b.

  The decorative shape portion 6523b irregularly reflects light emitted from the back surface to the cup-shaped member 6523. This allows a player who looks at the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side to visually recognize that the surface-emitting light is emitted, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a front view can be improved.

  Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light that has passed through the inside of the thickness of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is not reflected irregularly, and the front surface is not diffused. Can be passed to the side. This allows the player to visually recognize light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f as clear light.

  The shielding member 6524 has a rear-side end formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and has a recessed portion large enough to guide the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. And a pair of left and right guide concave portions 6524a.

  The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are drilled in a size that allows the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to be capable of accommodating the flange portion 6522, and the extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the rear surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate portion.

  That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)). Can be stably maintained. Further, the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 is inserted and fastened and fixed in the order of the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a. The assembly state of the 6520 can be more firmly maintained.

  According to the light transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end surface of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e and advances forward, and the front-side end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. And irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523. Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is set to be short, a line-like shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode in which light is emitted in the shape of an outline along the line. This makes it possible to emphasize the difference between the light emitting mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emitting mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, so that a sharp light emitting effect can be executed. This will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 261 shows six views of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows six views of the optical transmission unit 6520 in an assembled state. Note that the left side view is omitted because the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically.

  FIG. 261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is the bottom surface of the transparent tubular member 6521 FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  FIG. 262 (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. In FIG. 262 (e), the illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the transparent tubular member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the lower bottom face are inclined such that the left and right widths and the up and down widths gradually increase toward the front side. It is said. On the other hand, a part that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface because the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-back direction.

  For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylinder portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the back side in the pulling direction (rear), but the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion. If the inclination is the same, interference occurs when moving the resin mold on the back side, so that the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) extending in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

  Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the front side in the pulling direction (front), but the frame shape formed on the front side thereof. If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f has the same inclination, interference occurs when the resin mold is moved. Therefore, the outer surface of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is formed as a surface extending along the front-rear direction (non-inclined surface). (See FIG. 263).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side that is pulled forward and the resin mold on the back side that is pulled rearward is constituted by the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522. Where the surface is formed, and on the other hand, the above-mentioned non-inclined surface is formed, the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 have a length of the non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction compared with a length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. Formed on the shorter side.

  Thus, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress a change in the plate thickness due to a change in the front-rear position, so that the light passing through the inside of the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress a change in the forward and backward positions of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is incident on the inside of the thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where light first arrives, it is possible to easily repeat total reflection until reaching the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. Can be suppressed, so that a player who views the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side can visually recognize sufficient light.

  The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed such that the upper and lower widths become smaller (taper) toward the front side. Thereby, as compared with the case where the vertical width is equal in the front-rear direction, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partitioning unit 6540 are assembled (see FIG. 249 and FIG. 250), the guide concave portion 6524a has the fastening portion Since 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembling can be reduced.

  FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520 along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. FIG. 263 illustrates a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged at an assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 for convenience of description.

  As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed in such a size that a slight gap is generated when the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b is inserted into the direct entry hole 6562b of the partitioning member 6560, and the tip thereof is opposed to the opposite plate portion. It is inserted up to the surface position of 6561. Accordingly, the distance between the first illumination unit 6574 and the light receiving projection 6521b can be set without being affected by the thickness of the opposing plate unit 6561.

  The light receiving protruding portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the transverse direction that intersects the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is arranged to face.

  Accordingly, in the short direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b, only light (light having an extremely small angle with respect to the optical axis) that travels substantially straight from the first illumination portion 6574 to the front side is made incident, and other light is made incident. Can be prevented.

  The light thus incident easily travels to the front side in the thick inside of the transparent tubular member 6521, and the angle between the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of the light is small even when reflected at the boundary. Since total reflection easily occurs, it is possible to suppress light from weakening before reaching the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  The length in the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b is set to be about twice as large as the length in the short direction. Therefore, regarding the direction in which the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 spreads, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a larger angle from the optical axis than the case described in the thickness direction of the surface. Can also enter the light receiving protruding portion 6521b.

  On the other hand, the rear outer surface portion 6521a coupled to the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b does not contact the opposing plate portion 6561, and is arranged with a slight space therebetween. Accordingly, of the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574, the light (the light having a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) incident from the end surface of the rear outer shape portion 6521a is reflected to the player. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized.

  That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the light that passes through the inside of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b and travels within the thickness of the main body tubular portion 6521e, and can cut off the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light to be incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

  Light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving projection 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light transmission hole 6521d of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 260). The light passes through and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels in the air, so that the player can visually recognize the light as uniform light.

  Note that the raised end of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c abut on each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light from leaking from the gap between the raised end and the closing portion 6521c.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how the light that has passed through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the arrangement of light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520. FIG. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are referred to as appropriate.

  First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (total reflection). Light (light emitted from eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized in a shape as if the shape (substantially gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a was enlarged.

  In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 proceeds to the front side end without being weakened, so that the light transmission unit 6520 corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a in a front view. A strong light emission (light emission like a point light source) occurs at the position where the light is emitted.

  Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangements of the edge light emitting portions 6574a, because the distance L17b between the strong light emission arrangements in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520 is longer. Only light can be visually recognized, and the light effect is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emission arrangements of visible light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the actual arrangements of the edge light emitting portions 6574a, so the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve even if the distance between the LEDs is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a is made to progress radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b). In addition, light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of light visually recognized at a position between light sources is reinforced.

  Accordingly, even in a place where the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 are not arranged (between the LEDs), the linear light can be visually recognized in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 (the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). reference). Therefore, the state in which light is visually recognized as a point can be improved.

  In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first illumination unit 6574 are arranged at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 of the main body tubular portion 6521e and the bottom surface 6521e2 (see FIG. 262 (e)). Therefore, light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the LED light above the optical axis, and light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2, and is thus below the frame-shaped extension 6521f. Left and right center overlap.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), although the LED is not arranged at the lower left and right center of the first lighting unit 6574, as shown in FIG. Through this, line-shaped light can be visually recognized at the lower left and right centers.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the space for arranging the first illumination unit 6574, the shape formed by light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light The degree of visual recognition can be reduced, and clear linear light can be visually recognized.

  When the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior of the light transmission unit 6520 is hardly visible due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523. It is said that it is difficult to grasp the position where the intersections occur. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emitting effect from being reduced.

  In addition, when the position where the light overlaps is near the front end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. In other words, it is possible to make an illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, so that even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when many LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

  Light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right center sides of the first lighting portion 6574) disposed inside the transparent tubular member 6521 in front view is reflected inside the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and additionally has the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a that is disposed to face (see FIG. 245 (b)). It progresses radially along.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b is visually recognized as a planar light that spreads as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface light-emitting portion 6574b in a front view. In addition, the light is radiated to the jagged decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light is irregularly reflected and visually recognized as planar light in a front view.

  That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the region where the light radiated from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264 (b)). The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f in a front view) can be brightly lit.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as light having different impressions, that is, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, it is possible to avoid darkening the boundary by irradiating irregularly reflected light onto the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the planar light. Therefore, it is possible to change the perceived light impression stepwise and continuously.

  Here, as the change in the impression of the visually recognized light, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a change in impression of a light emitting situation such as light and dark or blinking, or a change in color of light.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  As described above, the partition unit 6540 visually recognized in front view on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that swells toward the front side in front view and side view. Therefore, light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction (a direction diffusing with respect to a point on the back side).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 disposed below the left and right of the partitioning unit 6540 has the front side edge located on the back side toward the left and right sides, and the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 depends on the attached posture. , In a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left and right and up and down directions (directions of diffusion with reference to points on the back side).

  This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the light increases as the player approaches the player, as compared to a case where the light is directed only in a mode in which the light travels in the front-rear direction. Can be improved.

  Next, the horizontal rendering device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700.

  In FIG. 265, the illustration of the directing device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 is omitted, and the horizontal directing device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014 a and is viewed from a diagonally right front direction. , FIG. 266 illustrates a side view of the horizontal effect device 6700 from diagonally left front.

  As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal rendering device 6700 is a rendering device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertical portions of the metal main body 10014a, and divides a vertically long elliptical shape in half when viewed from the side. It is formed from a shaped shape.

  In addition, the horizontal effect device 6700 is provided with a pair of left and right devices having similar shapes, but since the internal configuration is the same, the right horizontal effect device 6700 will be described in detail, and the left horizontal effect device 6700 will be described. Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 is provided on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a so as to cover the front side of the base member 6710 so that the front and rear stacking relationship can be visually recognized in the upper end portion of FIG. The configuration is such that units 6730 to 6760 are provided.

  The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal main body 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal body 10014a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning protrusion (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal body 10014a. Then, a fastening screw inserted through the through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

  Note that among the components of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In other words, of the components of the horizontal effect device 6700, there is no component that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a except for the base member 6710.

  As shown in FIG. 266, a position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 on the side toward the game area (a position where the rear side end portion of the base member 6710 and the surface position). Is formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is disposed so as to face the glass unit 16 in front and back, as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG.

  With this arrangement, the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 can be easily and integrally displayed. can do.

  FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. 267 and 268 show a state in which the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 267, an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is provided on the front side of the base member 6710, and the illumination board 6720 is mounted on the illumination board 6720 from the front side. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 so as to cover them.

  That is, the horizontal presentation device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the illuminated substrate 6720 whose emission is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the illuminated substrate 6720. Mainly comprising a light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 and a light receiving side unit composed of covered units 6730 to 6760 that receive light emitted from the light emitting side unit and allow the player to visually recognize the light. . First, the light emitting side unit will be described.

  FIG. 269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720, FIG. 269 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a right side of the base member 6710. 269 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a view of FIG. 269 (a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the electric decoration board 6720 in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line.

  As shown in FIGS. 269 (a) to 269 (f), the base member 6710 is provided with a flat support plate 6711 which is disposed to face the illuminated substrate 6720 and which is disposed on the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting forward from the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 that are provided outside the illuminated substrate 6720 and are close to the illuminated substrate 6720 in a front view, and through which fastening screws can be inserted. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (a step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717), which is on the right side of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 (encloses the game area). Gala on the other side of the window A plurality of positioning holes 6716 formed as long holes vertically in the region of the opposite side of the unit 16), and an outer frame extending in a stepped plate shape from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. It mainly includes a plate portion 6717 and an inner frame plate portion 6718 which extends in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the rear side.

  The frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 has its protruding tip facing the back surface near the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720 and makes surface contact with the illuminated substrate 6720. Thus, a gap is provided between the back surface of the portion of the electric decoration substrate 6720 except for the vicinity of the outer shape portion and the support plate portion 6711 (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulation layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illuminated substrate 6720.

  Thus, even when the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transmitted to the metal main body 10014a can be transmitted to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transmitted to the electric decoration board 6720 Can be suppressed (suppressed to a low level), so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the illuminated substrate 6720 becoming hot and malfunctioning.

  The positioning projecting portion 6713 is a portion for positioning the electric decoration substrate 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into two positioning holes 6722 formed in the electric decoration substrate 6720. That is, a positioning hole 6722 is formed in the illuminated substrate 6720 at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 6713 with reference to the disposition of the base member 6710 and the illuminated substrate 6720 in an assembled state (see FIG. 269 (a)). Is established.

  The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268). The through hole is formed so as to be able to be fitted and through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

  The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to two upper and lower fastening portions 6715.

  The positioning hole 6716 is a hole through which the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. In the covering units 6730 to 6760, a pair of thin plate-shaped members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) are disposed to face each other on the left and right sides, and are formed in a substantially cup shape that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 268). ), And is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side portion (edge-shaped portion).

  Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load applied from the player (for example, when the player collides). The load generated by the operation. As described above, since the base member 6710 is fixed to the thin-walled rear side end portion, when a load is applied in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750, deformation occurs. Or the position may be shifted with respect to the base member 6710. In order to prevent this, the number of fixed portions (fastened portions) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a possibility that a problem that the number of steps of the assembling work increases may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while increasing the number of fixed portions is suppressed, by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are connected to the base member. It is possible to suppress displacement (position displacement in the left-right direction) with respect to the 6710.

  In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is disposed close to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712, the player places a left side on the flat plate member 6740. Even if a load in the direction is applied, the flat plate member 6740 abuts on the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 in a plane, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the covering units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

  Therefore, the durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the number of steps of the assembly operation. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by including the unevenness forming portion 6741a in which a fine unevenness is formed in a contact area with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, but the details will be described later. .

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 is disposed so as to face the right side surface of the metal main portion 10014a and is in surface contact therewith, and covers (covers) the right side of the metal main portion 10014a. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the metal main body 10014a.

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a that is recessed along a front-rear direction from a part of the alignment hole 6716. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the positioning hole 6716 on the front side of the positioning hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the positioning hole 6716 on the back side of the positioning hole 6716.

  The support concave portion 6717a is formed to have a size to be fitted to the projecting portion 6743 or to be opposed to the projecting portion 6743 with a slight gap in an assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the positioning holes 6716, the area in which the projecting portion 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), and thus the flat plate member is provided. The displacement of 6740 with respect to base member 6710 can be suppressed. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported on the base member 6710.

  The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion that is disposed to face the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750, and is formed in a plane shape facing the game area side (inside).

  The illuminated board 6720 is a so-called printed board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary LED chips D1 on which a plurality are mounted in a pattern.

  The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, when the positioning projection 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722, the movement to the left, right, up and down is regulated, and the movement to the front and back is performed by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). Movement is regulated by being caught in the

  A similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in the present embodiment, but as a boundary of a region indicating the configuration of the light receiving units 6730 to 6760, in relation to a region shown by an imaginary line in FIG. And two types.

  That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting portion D1a disposed inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b disposed outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare mainly. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) provided on the front side of the illuminated substrate 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

  As apparent from the state shown in FIG. 267 and FIG. 268 when disassembled and shown in FIG. 270 and FIG. 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed of a light-transmitting resin inside and have a light passing therethrough. The light receiving member 6730 is provided so as to be able to refract the light and to cover the electric decoration substrate 6720 from the front side, and is configured so as to cover the front with another component member.

  FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. FIG. 273 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and FIG. 273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b). is there.

  274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274 (b) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. is there.

  Note that FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side, FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side. Also, in FIG. 272 (b), the cover units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

  The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the illuminated substrate 6720, and a light receiving surface portion 6731 disposed to face the illuminated substrate 6720, An inner extending portion 6732 that extends rearward so as to be bent from an inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207), and an outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (The right edge in FIG. 274), an outer extending portion 6733 extending to the rear side so as to be bent, and a plurality of long projecting ribs (in this embodiment, projecting from the rear surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). (5 places) long ribs 6734 and a long fin extending from the front at a position where the base end of the long ribs 6734 (the side coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731) and the front and back surfaces of the light receiving surface portion 6731 coincide. A plurality of (five in this embodiment) fins 6735, a plurality of insertion holes 6736 in which upper and lower end portions are inserted with fastening screws to be fastened to fastening portions 6715 (see FIG. 269 (a)), and a curved plate; It mainly includes a fitting portion 6737 formed of a shape that can fit with the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the member 6750.

  The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with a complicated cut on the back side. In the decorative pattern, long projections are formed concentrically and arranged along a plurality of circles having different diameters with a center on a portion arranged to face the surface light-emitting portion D1b (see an enlarged view of FIG. 274 (b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter projection at a position opposed to the surface light-emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light emitted from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). 275 (see FIG. 275 (b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter projection is similarly inclined (light that has traveled along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731). (See FIG. 275 (b)).

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted in the vicinity of the shaft of the long protrusion and proceeds to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then the large diameter further separated from the shaft of the long protrusion. By refracting the light at the location and proceeding to the front side, light can be emitted from a wide area of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Further, on the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape having a triangular shape in a front view and a substantially central portion swelling toward the front side is formed so as to be regularly and densely arranged. There is provided a decorative recess 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape at a position on the front side of D1b.

  With the decorative recess 6731a, the intensity of surface light emission on the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be varied (gradual intensity can be imparted). That is, light is collected at the center side of the concave portion due to the shape of the decorative concave portion 6731a, so that the decorative concave portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emission mode than other portions.

  The inner extending portion 6732 and the outer extending portion 6733 are configured such that the extending ends thereof come into contact with the electric decoration substrate 6720 in the front-rear direction, and the extending ends of the inner extending portions 6732 extend over the entire vertical direction. A portion that does not abut on the extended end portion of the outer extension portion 6733 while being in contact with the illuminated substrate 6720 is formed.

  That is, the outer extension portion 6733 includes the separation end portion 6733a that is formed so as to have an extension length that is shorter than the thickness of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and does not come into contact with the electric decoration substrate 6720 and is separated therefrom. In the present embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a allows air to enter and exit from the region between the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 satisfactorily, so that it is possible to prevent heat from being trapped.

  Further, in the case where the LED chip D1 is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720 when the illuminated substrate 6720 is in contact with the entire surface of the illuminated substrate 6720 like the inner extended portion 6732. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732 is increased, the area where the LED chip D1 is arranged is more limited.

  On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electric decoration board 6720, the LED chip D1 is located behind the separated end 6733a of the outer extending portion 6732. Can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chip D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extension portion 6733.

  The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the left wall portion (opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) of the inner extension portion 6732 is provided with a ridge having a semicircular cross section. The uneven shape formed in a manner to be aligned in the shape is formed. Accordingly, the light emitted to the left through the inner extending portion 6732 emits surface light (spreads radially), which makes it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

  As described later, when a part of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes for each region. That is, at the peripheral position of the end of the fin 6735, the light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling on the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are visually recognized. However, at a position distant from the fin 6735, the light traveling along the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is more visible than the light D1p. (The magnitude of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

  Thus, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each of the vertically arranged regions. It should be noted that the difference in the form of light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

  For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner And can be visually recognized by being changed for each of the regions arranged.

  The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed to have the same thickness without tapering between the front and rear. It mainly comprises a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed substantially linearly when viewed from the rear, and a V-shaped rib 6734b which is bent and formed substantially V-shaped when viewed from the rear.

  The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the jagged processing on the line is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light in a plane), but in one direction. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly, so that when viewing the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right directions, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized as a mixture.

  That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed as a vertically long part that can be viewed in the left-right direction, light passing through the long rib 6734 is prevented from reaching the eyes of the player in the form of surface light emission. Therefore, a player who visually recognizes the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the left and right can easily visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The linear ribs 6734a are arranged two by two in the upper and lower directions, and are formed so as to extend in the direction inclining toward the upper and lower center positions toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014; see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is coupled to the inner extension 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is spaced from the outer extension 6733.

  Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass directly through the left end 6734a1 and directly enter the inner extension 6732, while light passing through the right end 6734a2 does not pass through the outer extension 6733. The energy of light is reduced in the gap between the two.

  As a result, the brightness visually recognized near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, a portion visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is visually recognized as being bright, whereas a portion visually recognized through the outer extending portion 6733 is visually recognized as being dark.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of the light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the light passing through the left end portion 6734a1 of the linear rib 6734a is reduced. The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, near the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (intermediate position) away from the left end portion 6734a1, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. Since it is possible to visually recognize the color and brightness, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the side effect device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while both ends 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The reason why the bent position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is that the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is arranged to face the bent position.

  That is, by shifting the position for receiving the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light emitting portion D1a is shifted to the connecting position. Since the incidence can be suppressed, the loss of light incident from the V-shaped rib 6734b to the fin 6735 can be reduced.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to the function of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b is allowed to directly enter the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while light passing through both end portions 6734b2 is emitted to the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light is reduced in the gap between the two.

  As a result, the brightness visually recognized near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, a portion visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is visually recognized as being bright, whereas a portion visually recognized through the outer extending portion 6733 is visually recognized as being dark.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is The light that has passed through and entered the inside extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inside extending portion 6732.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easy to be visually recognized in the left-right direction only when the light enters the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position (intermediate position) apart from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. Since it is possible to visually recognize the color and brightness, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the side effect device 6700 from the left and right directions to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The fin 6735 is formed so as to decrease in thickness from the extended base end toward the distal end, and has a distal curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and a distal bent fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , Mainly comprising.

  The tip curved fin 6735a is formed such that upper and lower inner edges are curved, and a triangular wave (jagged) notch is formed densely on the left side surface (the inner side surface of the front frame 10014) to form a light diffusion portion. , The right side (the outer side of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  The tip bending fin 6735b has a sloped surface in which the extending tip is inclined rearward from the upper and lower ends toward the upper and lower centers, and has an inclined surface that intersects the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusing portion is formed by forming a notch of a triangular wave (jagged shape) densely on the inner side surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  These fins 6735 are formed such that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, since the left end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light (mainly emitted from the front end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a Is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inside extending portion 6732 side (back side, root side), and the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily made bright.

  In addition, behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is joined to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the long rib 6734 and the inside extending portion 6732 are joined, and the inside extending by the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734. The setting portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, light emission can be performed by combining light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a. Thus, the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

  Note that the jagged shape is described as a process performed on a surface to be irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be performed, or wave-shaped stripe processing may be performed.

  The manner in which the light passes through the side surface can be changed from the difference in the manner of forming the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735. In other words, light passing through the left side surface can be visually recognized as uniform light from the surface light emission effect of the notch, but light passing through the right side surface has no surface light emission effect. Light can be visually recognized as local light. In addition, it goes without saying that the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

  One of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed in the assembled state (FIG. 266) of the horizontal effect device 6700, and only two positions are disposed at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced.

  As a result, when the positional relationship between the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light-emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is shifted (for example, the positional shift is caused by vibration caused by operation of the player or vibration caused by opening and closing of the front frame 10014). Since the maintenance work for returning the position to the case) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal production device 6700, the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty is low and the time is shortened).

  The fitting portion 6737 is concavely provided in the left-right direction with an inclined shape that tapers toward the rear side, and aligns and positions the light receiving member 6730 with components of the covered units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. And a single concave portion 6737a which is further concaved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are limited (reduced) to one place where the concave portion 6737a is provided (the place where the fastening portion 6753 is provided) on the inner extending portion 6732 side. In addition, the position shift and the position shift with respect to the constituent members of the covered units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the case where the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal presentation device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screw does not transmit light, so that the more fastening locations, the more the shadow is likely to occur. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal effect device 6700 is increased, light is separated at the fastening portion, and there is a possibility that the light effect effect is reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening portions is reduced, the supporting force is reduced, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the horizontal rendering device 6700 is deformed from the root by a load applied from a player or a load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, and the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to maintain the supporting force. ing.

  Thereby, the horizontal production device 6700 is disposed between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light production location and the electric decoration board 6720 on the side of the game area (the glass unit 16; see FIG. 265). However, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points.

  Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed so as to be able to travel to the rear side via the concave portion 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal rendering device 6700 along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the concave portion 6737a is arranged in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and a striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via a fastening portion 6753 fitted into the concave portion 6737a. The main body curved portion 6751 is formed so as to allow light to travel to the rear side. That is, the light is formed to be able to travel toward the back side (the opposite side to the light irradiation direction) of the electric decoration substrate 6720.

  Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a portion where the fastening screw is fastened, and is considered to be unsuitable for a light emission effect because the fastening screw is likely to be a shadow. However, in the present embodiment, the intermediate connection is provided on both the upper and lower sides of the fastening portion 6753. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw up and down, so that the player can visually recognize the light while suppressing the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by allowing light to travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

  In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is illustrated in an enlarged manner. Of the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, light traveling in a direction in which the angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction is small enters the light-receiving surface portion 6731 while gently refracting, and passes through the decorative concave portion 6731a. The light is further refracted and collected. Thereby, the light emission intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative concave portion 6731a can be increased.

  As described above, the light emission mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is such that the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative concave portion 6731a increases, centering on the decorative concave portion 6731a in which the light intensity is increased by light collection. It is a mode that becomes lower.

  At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative concave portion 6731a, the light is gathered on the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. Compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is viewed without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the viewed light can be increased.

  That is, due to the function of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is irradiated with light having higher intensity (light that can be visually recognized in the vicinity of the decorative concave portion 6731a) than when directly viewing the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. The light intensity is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than directly viewing the light, and the light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player via the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Returning to FIG. 270, a member that covers the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member whose rear side is open is provided. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 constituting the cup-shaped member will be described.

  FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

  After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, whereby the members are fixed inseparably.

  The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed of a colorless, transparent, and light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741 is formed. A fitted plate portion 6742 connected to the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741 with a step, and a rear end portion of the main body plate portion 6741; A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear side to the rear, a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at a position separated from the projecting portion 6743 and configured to allow a fastening screw to be screwed in from the rear side, And a plurality of insertion holes 6745 that are formed in the plate portion 6741 in a size that allows a fastening screw to be inserted.

  The main body plate portion 6741 is provided with a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left surface, and protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the concave shape. , And the right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

  The concavo-convex forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in such a manner as to fill a hexagonal pyramid that is disposed so as to taper leftward, and has an effect similar to that of a reflector. Thereby, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force is applied. Can be prevented from cracking or breaking. Further, the contact friction when sliding the base member 6710 to assemble the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 can be reduced.

  Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when a shock is given from the player or a load is applied when the front frame 10014 is opened or closed. By making it difficult, the durability can be improved, and the assembling of the side effect device 6700 can be facilitated.

  The fitted plate portion 6742 is formed on the right side surface with a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction, and a front-rear direction formed in a step along the groove portion 6742a at a step between the main body plate portion 6741. Hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, and the details will be described later.

  The protruding portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted into the positioning hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. It is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through.

  Further, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions close to the outside of the right edge of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, since the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the concave portions of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 274 (b)), the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member with respect to the flat plate member 6740 are provided. 6730 can be prevented from being displaced.

  The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are provided at four locations vertically. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at the four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of the fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

  The curved plate member 6750 is disposed so as to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, and is curved and formed so as to expand leftward toward the rear side. The curved plate member 6750 is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, and is transparent and colorless. Body part 6751 formed of a conductive resin and having a plurality of stripes on the inner surface thereof, and a curved plate part which is disposed so as to move in parallel to the right from the body curvature part 6751 and is located on the front side of the body curvature part 6751. Corresponding to the fitted plate portion 6752 which is connected to the fitted plate portion 6742 so as to be connected to the edge with a step, a plurality of fastening portions 6753 in which fastening screws can be screwed in from the rear side, and the insertion hole 6745. A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that the fastening screws can be screwed in at the positions where the fastening screws are to be inserted, and a plurality of insertion portions in which the fastening screws are bored at the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 so as to be able to be inserted in the front-rear direction. And 6755 mainly includes a plurality of through holes 6756 which fastening screws are drilled to be inserted in the longitudinal direction in the front side edge portion of the fitting plate portions 6752, a.

  The main body curved portion 6751 has a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting from the right side to the right in a triangular shape tapering toward the rear side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the upper and lower centers, and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction at the front side portion, a flat partitioning portion 6751c for partitioning the stripe shape by a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed by a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position. And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin strip on the inner surface near the rear end.

  The decorative projecting portion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. In addition, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 with the curved plate member 6750.

  Thus, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for positioning with the light receiving member 6730. Accordingly, even in a configuration in which the fastening portion 6753 is provided only at one place in the upper and lower central portions (small) as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the curved plate member 6750 from wobbling.

  The flat partition portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Accordingly, when light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat partition portion 6751c, and thus is visually recognized as clear light. Can be done.

  On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions partitioned by the flat partition portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the curved tip fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

  The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front-rear direction view and the side view. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b is visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is clearly visible. Can be done.

  On the other hand, light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and visually recognized.

  The fitted plate portion 6752, like the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, has a step between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction and a main body curved portion 6751 on the left side surface. And a longitudinal hole 6752b formed in a direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and details thereof will be described later.

  The fastening portion 6753 is a portion which is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged so as to enter the concave portion of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 269 ( a) and FIG. 274 (b)), the displacement of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

  The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is provided at a position (four places) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since the plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the protruding portions 6743 and the fastening portions 6744, when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 is reduced. The wobble can be suppressed. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 in the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so that the locations where light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced, so that the light emission effect can be visually recognized without blocking light. Large area can be secured.

  The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which a fastening screw can be inserted from the rear side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6664 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side. (See FIG. 277).

  The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed such that the inner side surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 is opposed to the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). Is done. Thereby, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6664 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is inadvertently provided. It can be prevented from being removed.

  The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 forward and backward along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a main body plate portion 6761 that is a flat plate portion having a shape that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a cover member 6760 formed by bending the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761 so as to cover the curved plate member 6750. A curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and extends to the left rear of the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions vertically separated from the center in the vertical direction by approximately the same distance and extends. A plurality of connecting extension portions 6763 connected at the ends and a plurality of fastening screws provided on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and formed to be capable of being screwed into fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750. A fastening portion 6764 and a proximal fastening portion disposed at the rear end of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and formed to allow a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 to be screwed therein. 6 65 (see FIG. 279), and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 which are protruded to the rear side from the rear end of the main plate portion 6761, mainly comprising a.

  The main body plate portion 6761 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is protruded leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6761a are provided.

  The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the overhang portion is disposed to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. This can prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced leftward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and protruded rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a.

  The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and the protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the overhang portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the main body bending portion 6751, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced rightward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The connection extending portion 6763 includes a protruding rib 6763a protruding rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear hole 6751b.

  The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the rear side edge portion at the connection position of the connection extension portion 6763, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the protruding portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced rightward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Inadvertent removal can be prevented.

  Thus, cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is regulated by the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b, 6752b, and the curved plate member is regulated by the relationship between the fastening portion 6764 and the guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a. 6750 is restricted from moving to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

  The base end fastening portion 6765 is provided at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end of the base member 6710 can be screwed therein. Formed. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

  The projecting portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the positioning hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. In addition, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are provided with the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760 disposed at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. The displacement of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 280 (b) is the CCLXXXb of FIG. FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 in the -CCLXXXb line, and FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving line in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line in FIG. FIG. 147 is a cross-sectional view of member 6730.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the front-back distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be made to enter the long rib 6734 without leakage, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to easily advance to the front side. .

  In addition, at a position where the long rib 6734 is not disposed, the front-back distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or longer than the front-rear width (formation length) of the long rib 6734. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area as a location where light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are provided on the assumption that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. Light can be easily distinguished from the light.

  That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be linearly defined light that travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or light can travel through the long rib 6734. While the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as light that brightens a small-scale area, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is uniform light (light light) ).

  Thus, the present embodiment is compared with the present embodiment in which a lens for condensing light emitted from the illuminated substrate 6720 is opposed to the illuminated substrate 6720 as in the related art, and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize light (plane light) that spreads over the area of the illuminated substrate 6720, while allowing bright light (linear light) to be visually recognized in a small area. Then, with these different lights, an effect of making only one of them visible or both of them visible can be easily executed by control. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the light effect can be improved.

  Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is employed for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b emit light. By changing the color and brightness of the image, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

  As shown in FIG. 280 (b), the side surface in the thickness direction of the fin 6735 has the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) and the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side surface (the front frame 10014). (Inner side surface of the front side) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front side end (toward the right side). Therefore, the normal line on the left side surface does not point directly to the side (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720, that is, a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction), but a direction having a component facing the front side. Turn to. Thus, light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed to the inner extending portion 6732. Can be advanced. The progress of this light will be described with reference to a schematic diagram.

  FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of the base member 6710, the illuminated substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280 (a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a are schematically illustrated.

  Although the intensity of light emitted from the LED becomes smaller as the angle between the surface of the illuminated substrate 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface becomes larger, the light itself is emitted radially. In the present embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, and therefore, the following description will be given in order.

  The arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that enters the end of the long rib 6734, travels by totally reflecting the inside of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. . The light that has reached the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, so that light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , Can reduce light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is long, light of sufficient brightness can be easily made visible to the player.

  The arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the left side (the inside of the front frame 10014) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed in a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

  The arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of the light that passes through the long rib 6734, proceeds directly to the inner extending portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface. Since this light has not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, the light can be viewed brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

  An arrow L23d indicates a traveling direction of light that cannot reach the inside of the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as a coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed such that its length in the thickness direction is shorter than that of the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and on the left side (the inner side of the front frame 10014). Since the jagged concave portion is formed, the long rib 6734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735 when viewed in the front-back direction.

  Therefore, even if the light travels in the front-rear direction in the same manner, it is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731, and a part (particularly, the long rib In the region (near the left side surface of 6734), entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and light that reaches this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Thereafter, the arrow L23d reaches the inside extending portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface on the opposite side of the outer extending portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of arrow L23d includes light traveling to the back side of the illuminated substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the back side portion of the illuminated board 6720 can be made to emit light by the illuminated board 6720 provided with the LED chip D1 that irradiates light to the front side on the front side (at least, the illuminated area). Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

  Then, the inner surface of the rear side end of the curved plate member 6750 disposed downstream of the arrow L23d is formed of a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are vertically arranged in rear view (see FIG. 276). Thus, the light that travels along the arrow L23d and reaches the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner in the vertical direction, and the light can illuminate the glass unit 16 brightly.

  Therefore, the light effect can be performed by combining the light irradiated toward the glass unit 16 from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 and the light advanced by the arrow L23d. Design flexibility can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be reduced. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in the angle with the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. The reflected light has an energy loss corresponding to the light transmitted when reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, when the light reaches the inner extending portion 6732, the light is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness. As described above, the difference in the brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction can be reduced, and the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 can be easily made uniform before and after.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 disposed on the left side, the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the right is mostly formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or similar shape). As a special part that is not symmetric, the formation of the long rib 6734 (projection to the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). Thereby, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

  This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the intention is to maintain the effect produced by causing the light to travel to the fins 6735 on the left side, but to suppress the light traveling to the game area side due to the light traveling to the long rib 6734.

  That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the point where the shooting ball enters the game area, that is, the left side of the game area, the intensity of light emitted inward (the game area side) from the horizontal rendering device 6700 is improved. It is aimed at. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shooting ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shooting of the game ball.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, a ball fired by a right strike (highest firing intensity) almost always flows down, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball for adjusting the firing intensity of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls in a short period of time will flow down a narrow area continuously, light is radiated to that area and reflected on the game balls, resulting in the effect of the effect using light. Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to reduce the intensity of light on the right side of the game area, and by facilitating the emission of light from the side effect device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in the present embodiment. Thus, the effect can be improved.

  The arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and is light emitted in a direction in which the angle between the long rib 6734 and the axis X23 is large (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). The direction of travel is shown. This light is reflected on the inner surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light. The long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Since the intensity of the light traveling at the arrow L23e is very small in the first place because the light is extended to the position, the light can be configured as light that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  Accordingly, the light traveling along the arrow L23e is visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, so that it is possible to prevent the light effect from being reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 280 (a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emission effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the concave portion 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b reaches the left side surface of the fitting portion 6737 through both the wall portions of the concave portion 6737a, similarly to the contents described with the arrows L23c and L23d.

  The concave portion 6737a is configured as a concave portion in which the fastening portion 6753 (refer to FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide forward and backward, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753. Therefore, there is a possibility that the effect of the light emitting effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 can be aligned. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing the displacement, and it is possible to reduce the places where the effect of the light emitting effect is reduced.

  In addition, a concave portion 6737a is provided in the vicinity of the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732, whereby the fastening screw The area is prevented from becoming too dark. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the degree of reduction in the effect of the light emitting effect.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board 6570 is provided on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 has been described. However, the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment is different from the operation device 10300 By arranging the effect device 18800 provided with the electric decoration board 18830 below, the light-emitting effect can be executed even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with an effect device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the other configurations are the same. Only the device 18800 will be described, and description of other components will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the rendering device 18800 is a device for emitting light in which the back side and the upper surface side are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side of the lower plate unit 6400. It is arranged between the operation handle 51.

  This rendering device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light-emitting rendering changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operational rendering by a structural device. Next, an internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to describe a structural device.

  FIG. 284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. FIG. Note that FIG. 284 (b) schematically shows a support mode of the illuminated substrate 18830.

  As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the rendering device 18800 is provided with a coupling base member 18810 coupled to the lower plate unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the coupling base member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the joining base member 18810; an electric decoration substrate 18830 arranged in a gap between the joining base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820; and the electric decoration substrate 18830 A light-receiving member 18840 formed so that light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside and fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18850 attached to cover the outer surface of the light-receiving member 18840 And mainly comprising.

  The coupling base member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface in which the wall surface on the front side facing the electric decoration substrate 18830 is inclined downward toward the rear side. The inclination angle of the inclined surface is determined by the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 when the oscillating device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is arranged at the upward position and is in the posture before the operation. The inclined surface is formed at an inclination angle parallel to the inclined surface.

  The illuminated substrate 18830 is provided in parallel with the front wall surface of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. The electric decoration board 18830 mainly includes the LED chip D1, an elongated hole 18831 formed in a vertically long shape, and a leaf spring 18832 for generating an upward biasing force.

  The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length of the long hole 18831 in the vertical direction and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (permissible length) at which the electric decoration substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

  The LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (vertex of a pentagon in the present embodiment) on the front side of the illuminated substrate 18830, and irradiate light in the normal direction of the surface of the illuminated substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a direction in which the light is inclined downward toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light in a direction along the front-back direction.

  That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is downwardly inclined toward the front side (the player's eyes). Even in the direction away from the light effect), it is possible to prevent the effect of the light effect from being reduced.

  The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and is configured to be able to close an opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion from the back of the plate-shaped portion 18841. And a plurality of extension plate portions 18842 that are extended to the main body.

  The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape whose front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmittance, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the coupling base member 18810 to be fixed to the coupling basic member 18810 by fastening. 18821, and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at a position and size capable of receiving the extension plate portion 18842 in the bottom portion on the back side.

  In this embodiment, since the direction in which the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is removed is set in the left-right direction, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chips D1 are arranged at the vertices of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate portion 18842. Thus, the extension plate portion 18842 can be formed as three plate portions having different widths in the upper and lower portions. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also formed at three different positions in the upper and lower portions with different widths.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extension plate portion 18842 starts to extend along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841, but is formed in a curved plate shape that curves gently. Although the radius of curvature of the curvature can be set arbitrarily, in the present embodiment, the curvature is set to such an extent that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the illuminated substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. Accordingly, it is possible to make it easy for the light incident on the extension tip (back side end) of the extension plate portion 18842 to reach the plate portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

  The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage at a portion on the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where light performance is not desired, and can be realized in various modes. For example, a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) formed so as to be able to be pasted or a member formed in a cup shape from a resin material may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member formed to be fittable from the front side, and the bottom of the cup disposed on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chips D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 formed for light passage are formed at the apex positions of.

  Note that the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not need to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and can have similar shapes slightly different in size, as described above. In consideration of the way light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the manner in which the light receiving member 18840 is formed is more important in designing the arrangement of the through holes 18851 than in the arrangement of the LED chip D1. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the position of the base of the extension plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

  The operation of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illuminated substrate 18830 can be moved in the first shift direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is provided, with the allowable width of the long hole 18831, and the first shift direction is controlled by the operation. The direction matches the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300.

  That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the electric decoration board 18830 is configured to be slidable by the vibration. When the illuminated substrate 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate portion 18842 is shifted, so that light emitted from the LED chip D1 is less likely to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

  In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, it is difficult for the light to travel through the extension plate portion 18842, so that the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as being dark. That is, it is not possible to determine whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

  In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the electric decoration board 18830 is suppressed, and the electric decoration board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the urging force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the illuminated substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extension plate portion 18842, and then is totally reflected. To be formed so as to be able to advance to the front side.

  That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1 (when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as being dark), the swing operation member 10310 can be pressed in to operate. , The through hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Therefore, when the vibration effect is being performed and the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, it is necessary to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. Can be. Here, for example, control is performed so that the LED chip D1 emits light when a big hit occurs or when the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Thus, the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be improved.

  Accordingly, the player's willingness to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased. Therefore, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is increased, and the player is actually given an interest. The user can be made to operate the swing operation member 10310.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the illuminated substrate 18830 is disposed outside the covering base member 6410, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 18830 may be provided so as to penetrate the covering base member 6410 and enter the inside, and may be capable of abutting on the operation device 10300.

  In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the electric decoration substrate 18830, and the electric decoration substrate 18830 slides not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

  In this case, for example, control may be performed so that the LED chip D1 emits light at a timing other than the timing at which the push instruction as the notification effect is generated. If the lens member 10317 is pushed in at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light (push operation), it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1 from a front view.

  In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in at a timing other than the notification (push operation), it is possible to make it easy to miss a notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is easy to suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 at a timing other than the timing when the pushing instruction is generated, the operating device 10300 breaks down early or the operating device is operated unnecessarily many times to generate noise. It can suppress annoying acts.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be dividable left and right. However, the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are formed so that they can be split back and forth. I have. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in the present embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are provided so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and is mainly described as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

  The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be dividable on a division plane coinciding with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted through insertion holes 19321 a formed in the upper cover 19321 in a direction orthogonal to the division plane, and The cover 19322 is formed so as to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

  Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before the swing operation member 10310 is operated at the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened by the shock of the vibration.

  In addition, since the vibration direction Y17a of the swing operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216 (a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Is orthogonal to the side view (see FIG. 285), so that it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened by an impact generated by operating the lens member 10317.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the projecting-shaped portion 6413 and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross-sectional view, and the plate thickness is substantially constant at the inclined portion. The projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the embodiment are slightly inclined in the vertical direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment, taken along a line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left and right ends of the projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 is compared with the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described in the seventeenth embodiment. Is set closer to the vertical direction.

  In addition, the lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment). (The base end of the recess) is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  When the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is brought into contact with and supported by the base end portion (upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the recessed shape portion 16414, the main body portion is supported at the supporting position. Since the supporting thickness in the up-down direction (vertical direction) of the 6411 can be sufficiently ensured, the deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) is operated can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right ends is changed as compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there is no inclination, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the up-down direction (up-down direction in cross-sectional view). Even in this case, a sufficient supporting thickness of the main body 6411 can be ensured.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by forming the cross section in an inverted C-shape when viewed in cross section, the direction in which the protruding portion 6413 and the concave portion 6414 are deformed when subjected to an external force is changed to the left and right center sides. Can be made easier. This makes it possible to reduce the degree of fatigue given by external force, as compared with the case where deformation is possible in both the left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 is damaged earlier. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, an effect of “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed. it can).

  In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the overhang operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap occurs between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and to notice that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not obtained until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated forward in this state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotary claw member 347, the degree of ascending of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending end can be sequentially switched). Thus, it is possible to perform an effect in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the driving motor 342 by operating the driving motor 342 in one direction.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (during the downward movement), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the end and immediately before moving upward. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is continuously pressed, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the convex leg 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the convex leg The configuration in which the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 changes the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400, and switches whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430. good.

  In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more, the flexible member 5420 is operated. Can be increased, and a state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. Can increase the variation of the production.

  For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "press a button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press a button. By performing a display such as "Large chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, so that the button (tilting device 310) is pressed with the specified pressing method. The player's willingness to perform the operation can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from being monotonous.

  The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverted from the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 in magnitude. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can contact each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition that the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 is transmitted to the player, and the player is encouraged to reduce the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force, and it is possible to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged to be able to abut on the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member is provided on condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed in to the end of movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it can be arranged so as not to be in contact with accommodation member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively, but the player can change the effect mode (expectation) by stopping the vibration at the time of pushing in such a way that the surroundings are less noticeable. Difference), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player playing this machine, except for the surrounding players, can feel the change in the production mode. it can.

  In addition, as a variation of the effect, when the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are placed in a position where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desired to cause both of these cases to be able to be brought into contact with each other, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by a difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is axially deformed and the disc cam 5344 comes into contact with the release member 346 to generate a frictional force has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially projects in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable portion, a large frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 as compared with the case where the disk cam 5344 abuts on the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board supporting device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board supporting device 600 arranged at the upper position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the front end portion is the rear side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. 621c may be arranged below the upper surface. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be reduced as compared with the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of bent back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a long path before and after the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend back and forth, it is possible to prevent the launch path from interfering with the foul ball passage 145. Can be made easier.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed faintly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the path that bends up and down is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary projection 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, and the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

  The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha contacts the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within a range of a protrusion length corresponding to the depth of the wiring passage recess 464, and further protrudes therefrom. In the range of the length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated from the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently ensured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base body 461B and the tip body 461T correspond to the speaker room, and the intermediate body 461M corresponds to the duct. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the proximal main body 461B and the distal main body 461T, the base main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the distal main body 461T can be shared. May form a large speaker room.

  In addition, the description has been made assuming that the base-side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal-side main body portion 461T, but the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the same volume may be used. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be the position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, of the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the base body portion 461B and the tip body portion 461T are connected to each other). Although the case where they do not overlap in the direction of connection and the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rib portions adjacent to each other (for example, the rib portions 467d and 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted through an opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and By making it more difficult to perform an illegal act that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the illegal act, it is possible to suppress the illegal act. Here, examples of suppression of fraudulent acts include suppression of fraudulent acts themselves, suppression of gaining fraudulent profits by fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts), and the like.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the assembling operation. Can be done. Accordingly, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 expands and contracts with the rotation thereof or a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 rotates about an axis different from the rotation axis may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the drive-side arm member 910 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 is connected to the tip of the second effecting member 940 so that the second effecting member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing control unit 159 when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state will be described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit rear member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut against each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing control unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board supporting device 600 is fixed, but the upper board supporting device 600 is not fixed, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts to the front side), the portion of the game board 13 disposed to face the operation unit back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere. be able to. Thus, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

  In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device arranged above the inner frame 12 is fixed. Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 which are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it possible to remove the function of determining the state of the board supporting device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 from the multifunctional cover member 171, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 does not come into contact with the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the multifunctional cover member 171 made of a synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, the risk of the multifunctional cover member 171 being damaged can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other uses (for example, use as a wiring cover).

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500 in which light applied to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). (The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate about a suitable axis), so that the mode of light applied to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the correspondence between the mode of the light applied to the center frame 86 and the movable role that protrudes inward of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

  That is, for example, out of the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is disposed on the front side and another surface is disposed. Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side and the case where it is arranged. When the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the side of the movable accessory, the movable accessory disposed opposite to the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the position near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member is lit. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory that is disposed to face the opening 565 over a wide area (wider than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the movable character can be switched.

  In this case, for example, the moving effect can be operated in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion, so that the effect can be improved. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface of the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the moving accessory side. At the timing of turning, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thus, switching to change the position where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a for light emission control.

  In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is collected (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and clear light emission is performed), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is emitted. Diffuse (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving object) can be changed.

  Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a position in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). In this case, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture arranged on the back side of the support plate 510), so that a beam (thin width) light is applied to the moving role object and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving role and the liquid crystal. Accordingly, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position distant from the moving role and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal.

  In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is vulnerable to the extent that the broken portion falls, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling. Is also good. In this case, by detecting that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, by issuing an alarm and controlling to forcibly stop the launching of the ball, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts early, and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss of the gaming machine hall) obtained by the person who commits the wrongdoing.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be used to form a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

  Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall of the slits 815 opposed to the inclined surface 2803T. May be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the concave portion.

  In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of light is changed to the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is described. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is a direction inclining upward in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of the person walking to select the game machine to play. , The light can be easily made to travel. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 can improve the effect of attracting customers.

  Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in regions CCVIc and CCVIe which are regions where light is emitted to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions where light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction. While the light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking, the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the balls stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the balls look brilliant. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting pachinko machines 8010.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed near the left and right centers has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

  Further, both a device formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and a device formed near the left and right centers may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for responding to the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for responding to the problem (easiness of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 may be provided separately.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be able to be assembled (exchanged) is not necessarily described. However, it is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured to be inoperable by a player and performs a vibration effect, an electric decoration substrate that performs a light emission effect, or a substrate box. For example, an object that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by a player may be used.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular concave portions and convex portions may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the magnitude of the frequency at which the load is applied. May be.

  Further, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming the number of grooves to be large while forming the width of the groove to be narrow, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed can be obtained in reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. Can be. When a plurality of grooves are formed, each groove does not necessarily have to extend in the front-rear direction. For example, the grooves may be formed radially in a top view.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 is protruded below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 and can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the vertical direction than the finger of the worker carrying the front frame 10014. In this case, a finger can be inserted into a gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 (it can be used as a finger hook portion), so that the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. .

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operation device 10300 to reduce the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a member that generates an elastic urging force (a coil spring, a torsion spring, or the like) may be used, or a device for damping a damper or the like may be used.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor flexibility and flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the operation device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is driven to rotate about the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described. However, the drive motor may be in various forms. For example, a load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 from a rotary gear rotated by a drive motor by a simple gear mechanism load transmission, or a mechanism (for example, a rotary cam) intervening in the transmission path may not be shifted to the gear mechanism. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 through the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b, so that the lever member 10340 may be formed to be able to idle when an overload occurs.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction orthogonal to a plane on which a load is applied when operating the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an operation portion that does not move on the plane is provided (for example, when there is an operation portion that performs a pressing operation in a diagonal left and right direction), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation portion is determined. The direction found (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the direction of the fastening, or the fastening part may be set for the operation part where the operation instruction is frequently performed (ignoring the operation part where the operation instruction is rare). The direction may be set. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are united by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, they may be combined with an adhesive, or they may be combined by fitting with matching shapes.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is high (the direction along the up and down direction) and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 are described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, the shape of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, so that an effect of dynamically changing the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration occurs can be performed. it can. The mode of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct drive type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

  Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, by irradiating the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are changed according to changes in the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. An effect can be produced so as to change the appearance of light visually recognized through the cover 10322.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations so that bending can be easily suppressed irrespective of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity of the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened in the direction is improved. The difference can be increased.

  In this case, for example, by setting the forming direction of the right and left streak portions D24a along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover are generated by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the upward position. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position is increased with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  Conversely, the direction in which the left and right streak portions D24a are formed may be a direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position, the swing operation member is The bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the 10310 is arranged at the upward position can be increased. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be detached from the inner case member 10330 and the attachment of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is easy has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled therewith. In this case, at the time of assembling to the inner case member 10330, the assembling can be easily performed by bending the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed after the subsequent assembling to the front frame 10014. By doing so, a displacement suppressing effect due to interference between the projecting interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be exerted.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-shaped support portion 6426 up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R, and the fastening screw extends above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. It may be configured to be inserted through an insertion hole formed in the portion. In this case, not only when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward but also when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the load serving as the base of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450, and the load can be dispersed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 is such that the size of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b fits the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted. Although the case where it is formed with a possible thickness (a dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be configured to be shorter than the size of the gap (the dimensions may be such that a gap between members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the contact (collision) between the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in a flat plate shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is formed in a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582, and the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with the shape, so that they fit together when assembled. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partitioning member 6560 from separating from the back support member 6580 to the front side in a state where the partitioning member 6560 is located at the position of the assembled state.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in the cross-sectional view has been described. However, the point is that the gap increases toward the front side, and it is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one of the side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, for a player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the opalescent member 6541 and the partition member 6560 disposed behind the player. Is described, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily recognized as a series of regions. It is not something that can be done. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a may be formed in milky white in advance.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the front side, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened by a fastening screw in a fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the rear side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by selecting an arrangement space required by components arranged near the fastening position and a side on which displacement is to be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 in accordance with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510; however, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven so that its front-rear width can be changed, and the degree of the compressive force that may be generated due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 may be changed.

  In other words, if the partition member 6560 is driven to reduce the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 by displacing the rear side edge of the partition member 6560 to the front side, even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed, the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 can be connected to each other. A gap can still be generated between them, and a compression force can be hardly generated. Since the degree of holding the illuminated substrate 6570 can be reduced due to the low generation of the compressive force, the degree of displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

  In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the illuminated substrate 6570 in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 can be deformed can be changed. The appearance of the irradiated light can be changed.

  In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (an interval between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is provided), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control, so that the partition member 6560 and the back support member are extended. It may be configured to change to a state where a compressive force can be generated between the member and the member 6580.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that support the electric decoration substrate 6570 therebetween are stacked and arranged on the front side of the front frame 10014. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the illuminated substrate 6570 may be arranged below the back support member 6580, the illuminated substrate 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member distant from the acoustic device 6610), The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 inserted into the partition member 6560. In any case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the illuminated board 6570 can be suppressed.

  In addition, while the back support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 disposed on the back side of the front frame 10014, the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You may do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other. Therefore, when the front frame 10014 is closed, the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560. It is possible to easily replace the illuminated substrate 6570 to be replaced or return the positional displacement.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is disposed so as to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise may be generated. Although the description has been given of a case in which it is possible to grasp the information, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that light travels near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the shadow of the fastening screw can be visually recognized from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of a shadow, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be grasped, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw is found compared to the case of grasping with abnormal noise. Can be made easier.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is set to be a direction inclined vertically with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or a portion tilted up and down or left and right may be mixed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed to have a shape that extends linearly in front view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape extending in a curved line, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described where the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface to suppress diffusion of light from the side surface. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light-shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, a decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fin 6735 can be easily suppressed. Further, a light-shielding tape may be attached to a side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light of the front side edge can be emphasized, and if it covers a part of the side surface (for example, using a light-shielding tape having a polka dot-shaped hole), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light-shielding tape, the effect of producing light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long ribs 6734 are not extended to the back side in the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended to the back side, it may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Also in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, a case in which light traveling along the long ribs 6734 in the front-rear direction is emitted from the front side end of the fin 6735 to improve the light effect in the front view of the fin 6735. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (a notch (cut) or the like) for emitting at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surfaces are inclined in such a manner that the thickness gradually decreases as the fins 6735 move toward the front side, so that light reaches the front ends of the fins 6735 before the fins 6735 reach the front end. The configuration may be such that light is easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by being configured to easily reach the side surface.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is reduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the nails may be fitted based on the shape relationship or fixed by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the shadow effect of the fastening screw from lowering the light effect.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electric decoration board 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the rear side of the coupling base member 18810, and the illumination board 18830 may be slid by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (the direction along the direction Y17a) is different from the vibration direction of the speaker box (approximately the front-back direction), the displacement mode of the electric decoration board 18830 can be complicated.

  In addition, by generating a sound having a frequency outside the audible sound range from the speaker, a silent effect that allows the player to slide the illuminated board 18830 while maintaining a state where the player cannot hear the sound is executed. can do. At this time, by configuring the vibration of the illuminated board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the player touching the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling the silent production to be executed when a situation change advantageous to the player occurs, the interest in touching the operation device 10300 can be improved.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the illuminated substrate 18830 is supported in a floating (slidable) manner in the vicinity of the operation device 10300; however, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative board 6570 of the presentation device 6500 may be supported in a floating manner. In this case, a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending frontward from a gap between the pair of left and right sound devices 6610 may be floatably supported, or may be fixed to a wall portion of the sound device 6610. May be supported so as to be able to float. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to up and down, but may be left and right or oblique.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to follow any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or may be arranged between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, in the middle). (Angle) of the reference line may extend along the reference line X19.

  The direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the operation frequency of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions are generated. When the frequency of occurrence of the operation is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. .

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points where the player pushes in from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means pressed by a player, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and in a position in which the operating means is protruded from the player with respect to the first state. And an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side of the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the effect is performed in a manner that enhances the expectation of a big hit for the player at the advanced position, the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. However, it was necessary to design the operating means to have a high strength. In this case, there is a problem in that the operation means becomes heavier as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is set to the direction from the back side to the near side for the player, so that the straight up and down linear movement is performed. In this case, the part that cannot be operated is generated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, so that the momentum of the pushing can be released.

  In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulder and elbow from the player's playing position, it is difficult to apply a force in the forward direction, so the force exerted by the player on the operating means should be naturally reduced. Can be.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft disposed on the back side of the player, configured to be capable of tilting up and down around the shaft, and having the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operation means in a direction opposite to a player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the second state in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed easily, so that a new pushing operation method with less pushing acceleration can be provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

  With a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side of the little finger of the left hand is placed near the axle bar, and the thumb side is turned to the operating means from the state where the hand is placed near the operating means with the palm rising up and down Examples include a method of operating in a manner of tilting down, a method of placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft bar, and a method of operating in a manner of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the palm is arranged in a posture facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means is set to a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the operability in the first state is ensured while the second operation is performed. It is possible to prevent destruction by the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is automatically operable, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine A4 acts in a direction in which it does not act in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the driving unit from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further comprises a maintenance means operated by the driving means. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of changing a phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed. In both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is maintained in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. With this configuration, it is possible to change the movement width of the operation device by the urging unit. Therefore, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

  In the gaming machine A5, in the maintenance state, the maintenance unit is configured to be movable in the biasing direction of the biasing unit, and the moving speed of the maintenance unit is increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotating unit. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was only caused by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode in which the operation means moves following the maintenance means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting unit is provided inside the operation device and irradiates light to a player, and the light emitting means is disposed in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the viewpoint of a player, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is illuminated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. The area of the operation means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light is enlarged, so that the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming. In this manner, the power of the player during the operation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the display means to change the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means. Gaming machine A8, which is a feature.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to view the image on the display means.

<The point that the repulsion during normal operation is small while responding to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation device capable of allowing a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which a movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than the first state. A first driving unit for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing unit for generating an urging force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation of a player.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by a spring, and the operating means is automatically operated by a drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means is slow, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform a continuous hit operation. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. Since the return can be speeded up by pushing back the operating means by the two drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a continuous hit determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of a stroke operation unit within a predetermined time, and controls the second drive unit based on a detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. A gaming machine B2, which determines whether to drive.

  According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive unit based on the detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. Therefore, the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press operation). The second driving means operates until the operation is performed), thereby preventing the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

  In the gaming machine B2, an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the end position, and determining whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a moving direction judging means for judging a moving direction of the operating means based on a time relationship between a detected value of the end detecting means and a detected value of the position difference detecting means; The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction of return is the direction of returning to the first state from the pushing end.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction to return to the first state from the pushing end, that is, the player's hand Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separating, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

  Therefore, the second driving device operates in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and it is possible to suppress the high load on the player's hand.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a driving force for moving the operation means can be generated by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation unit is provided, and the second drive unit elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. Supporting means, wherein the supporting means increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving unit is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting unit and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force and the driving force, the driving force applied to the operation means can be adjusted while the rotation of the driving motor is maintained. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the control can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

  In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and contacts the support frame based on the operation means being disposed at the end position. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means. Accordingly, since the support means supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration directing device>
A detecting sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring a speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detecting sensor, and measuring means for the measuring means Threshold determining means for determining whether or not the measurement value measured by the control means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, the threshold determining means When the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means increases as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when it is emphasized that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered, and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although the operation speed can be reduced to reduce the possibility of the operation means being damaged, the force required for the operation of the player increases, and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a weak player. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determining unit determines whether the speed of the operating unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsive unit is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and to reduce the speed of the operating means only when necessary. Therefore, the resilience means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion unit includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation unit, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. Wherein the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is performed, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operation means is disposed at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where the operating means can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation unit and the voice coil motor.

  In the gaming machine C3, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other in the gaming machine C1 or C2, control is performed to increase a current flowing through the voice coil motor.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other, the control to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor is performed, so that the operation means is improved. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operation means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the control unit and the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity. Therefore, even when the moving speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is not delayed. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion unit compares the value measured by the threshold determination unit with a value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold when the value measured by the threshold determination unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold. A game machine C5, wherein a movable area of an end of the repulsion means and an end opposite to a side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the rebounding means, which is the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means, is reduced, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<The transmission of the driving force is blocked by the clutch to prevent breakage of the driving means>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, wherein the releasing means reduces the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 for canceling transmission.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing unit is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving unit and the operating unit via the transmitting unit becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disabled), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine D1, the driving unit is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, A gaming machine D2 characterized in that release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is being performed in the second direction.

  Here, when it is determined whether the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit, the operating unit is operated by the player when driving the driving unit in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. In such a case, a large load may be generated on the driving unit. For this reason, the degree of freedom of the effect at the time of effecting by operating the operation means is reduced.

  When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the locking member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button operation can be made in two modes (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but in both cases, the drive force must be interrupted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. In addition, the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

  As a method of canceling the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is, for example, a meaning excluding a circumferential direction when the driving unit rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means comprises a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Are provided respectively, and are provided with engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth are such that both surfaces opposed to the operating direction of the driving means are separated from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 comprising a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in such a manner that the distance from the contact surface decreases.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages the driving force in a state in which the releasing means is engaged with the pressing surface which is pressed. On the other hand, since the transmission means is provided with the engagement teeth which are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces opposed to the operation direction of the drive means are tapered so as to be away from the contact surface, the transmission means is moved from the drive means by the engagement of the engagement teeth. The driving force can be released.

  Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. Load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving unit between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

  Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

  In addition, in the release state, the resistance does not disappear completely and the resistance is restored periodically. Thus, when the player releases his / her hand, the button can be started to be operated within a short time.

  That is, when the button is driven “as an effect”, if the player is holding the button, one phase of the button operation elapses. If the player releases his hand on the way and moves from the end of the one phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started moving since the load on the player has been released" is reduced. Can come off.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his / her hand and the load is released. This makes it possible to produce a feeling that the player has begun to move because the load on the player has been released.

  The gaming machine D4, wherein in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission unit and the release unit is formed in a saw-tooth shape that engages with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means early. That is, when there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means abut on the plane, and the transmission of the release means is performed. It is possible to suppress the stop of the movement along the direction approaching or moving away from the means. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation of the operation means can be started early.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, release of the driving force transmission is not limited to any one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operation means. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is such that when the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the drive unit for a predetermined period from the start of the operation is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 has a different operation after a lapse of the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode in the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation means.

  Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operation unit with information that is beneficial to the player, such as a jackpot expectation, the player can operate the operation unit for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation unit changes. You can watch over.

  Also, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and Can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the projection of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, A first means for operating the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, wherein the first means suppresses a position of the operation means from changing from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means End means for variably forming a movement end of the game machine, wherein the first means suppresses a change in position of the operation means by engaging with the operation means, One of the means Releasing means for applying a load for releasing engagement with the means to the first means, wherein the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the moving end of the operating means in the end means are single. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being driven by the driving means of (1).

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam and fixed at a first position is fixed, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the operation means is extended by the urging force of the urging means. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhang operation of the operating means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking, the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking is variously changed. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing have been operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required, and the arrangement space for the driving means is increased.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the driving means for changing the end position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. Thus, the number of detectors such as position sensors for detecting the state of the release load unit can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

  In addition, as a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection which rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection, For example, there is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are desynchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are synchronized in other phases.

  In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the operation of the release load means. A game machine E3 characterized in that whether or not the game machine operates synchronously is switched.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the operation of the release load means. It is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate synchronously, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation unit is supported eccentrically with respect to a rotation axis of the first rotation member, and the release load unit is configured to rotate the second rotation member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that the second rotating means A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

  According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and the operation means moves toward the second position, a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared. , Can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with a similar configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position, the operating means, and a second position to which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. And a receiving means arranged so as to be able to contact the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, while the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot be brought into contact with the receiving device, when the operating device is disposed at the second position, the vibrating portion can be brought into contact with the receiving device. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means operable by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibrations to the player via the operating means or a frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, since the vibration is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. . For this reason, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation in which the operating means is released at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some embodiments, the start of the vibration may not be ready before the hand is released, and the player may not notice the vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section contacts the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating section is continuously vibrated, the vibration can be made to be felt by the player only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player, Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to protrude into an occupied area occupied when the operation means is disposed at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 changes to the contact state when the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating section can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, an effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without any particular change in the driving mode.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via supporting means having spring elasticity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the positioning of the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of the vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibration means during the vibration can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means abut. That is, when the vibrating part moves in the direction approaching the receiving means due to the expansion and contraction of the supporting means, it is possible to give momentum.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means may have a deformation resistance along a movement direction of the operation means lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to a difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

  Thus, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating part and the receiving means can be made different. .

  In addition, as a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the support means is formed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibratory means In the case of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a support means, and a rail for guiding the operating means to operate in the direction along the operation direction. And a coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operation direction of the operating means.

  In the gaming machine F3, a portion where the vibrating portion contacts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is separate from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration unit from being transmitted to the drive unit via the operation unit and the transmission unit, so that it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive unit. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

  Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent a player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

  In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a portion of the frame of the gaming machine, a portion near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, or an edge portion of a glass frame, etc. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operation unit, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit, wherein the transmission unit includes a deforming unit that is elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting a driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, a connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, There is a problem that a load is accumulated in a connection portion between the motor and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connection portions may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, and the driving means and the transmission means The load applied to the connection portion with the connection can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, and the deformed portion forms a connection portion with a rotation shaft of the cam member. A gaming machine G2 wherein a fixing force is generated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion for performing elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a portion for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a projecting portion projecting in parallel with a rotation axis, and the projecting portion and the operating means are connected to each other. The gaming machine G3, wherein the rotating shaft is inclined.

  Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member, so that the projecting portion is attached to the cam member. The cam member can be easily formed of a single member as compared with a case where the cam member is slid, and the members can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the deformable portion to elastic deformation is compared with the rotational axis of the cam member in a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational axis and the protruding portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the convex portion and an extending direction of the rotating shaft is used as an axis. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformed portion for each direction, the state after the deformed portion is elastically deformed in the rotation axis direction is better. As compared with the state before the elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. Accordingly, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member is going to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided at a predetermined distance in a direction parallel to a rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deforming portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member is changed in posture, and the cam member and the friction member are changed. Abut on each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

  A gaming machine G6 comprising, in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is displaced in an inclined manner with respect to an axis.

  Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detecting means for detecting the displacement deviation becomes shorter, but as the arrangement interval of the detecting means becomes smaller, the configuration of the detecting means becomes more complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to adopt a configuration that is inexpensive and detects the occurrence of overload early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether at least a part of the cam member is displaced inclining with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. Thus, when an overload occurs, the load applied to the driving unit can be reduced.

<Strand with ball thread prevention. Gaming machine H>
In a gaming machine having a foul ball passage through which a foul ball that flows down toward the launching device among the game balls fired to the game area can pass, the foul ball passage allows the flowing down game ball to pass therethrough. A gaming machine H1 comprising one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act is performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball with the thread connected into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, an illegal tool with game balls connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls that has been gripped, the thread can be removed from the guide path, and the other ball can be passed through the foul ball passage. A game ball can be connected to the other game ball by a thread, so that a load is externally applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained by manipulating

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means can be used even when a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by hindering the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profit.

  In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends a flow path of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed with the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

  The gaming machine H3, wherein in the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes a load means for applying a load to the backward flowing object without applying a load to the flowing game ball on the inner corner side of the bending.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object flowing backward (for example, a thread-like member) by the load unit.

  In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the concave portion, the collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 is provided with regulating means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage is regulated by the regulating means. When a load is generated, the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened by deforming the load means outward of the foul ball passage.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a part for discharging a game ball to be discharged from a payout device, the receiving plate being a plate in which a foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above a discharge-side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the game ball dispensed from the dispensing device is configured to pass before the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. When an illegal act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area is performed, the payout game ball is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of a payout ball discharging portion, which is a portion for discharging game balls paid out from the payout device, to a receiving plate, which is a plate where a foul ball arrives first on the front side of the front door, is provided. The gaming machine H7, wherein the lower end of the outlet side outlet of the foul ball passage is lower than the lower end.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the paid out game balls.

<Structure of board holding. Gaming machine I>
A game device used during a game, and a receiving device that is open on one side that is opposite to the game device and that can receive the game device from the one side, the receiving device includes the game device. The game device is provided with a state changing unit that can be changed from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an available state, which is a state in which the gaming unit can be used. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a proximity unit that approaches the gaming unit from the one side.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board can be rotated in the rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the position of use, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the pushing is performed again. It is necessary to perform such a repetitive operation, and there is a problem that the operation efficiency may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means which is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into the use state, the pressing of the game board can be prevented. Even if it is halfway, there is an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position in use by applying the pushing force by the proximity means contacting the game board.

  In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side according to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) in accordance with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing unit is configured to make the gaming unit unusable so that the unusable state occurs, and the proximity unit retreats outside the gaming unit. Gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing operation of the gaming means can be improved, and the game efficiency can be improved. Since the operation is performed when the means is disabled, the work efficiency can be further improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state changing unit includes a contact unit that receives a load from the gaming unit when the state changes to a usable state.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means. Therefore, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means allows the state changing means to be used as a series of flows. State can be changed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means as a shaft, and is configured to be received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means includes the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, a load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means by utilizing the width of the gaming means.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is such that the state changing means disables the gaming means. A gaming machine I6, comprising: a closing restricting portion for preventing the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether or not the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to perform. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means keeps the unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire goto. Gaming machine J>
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side which is opposite to the game means and which can receive the game means from the one side, the receiving means includes the game means and A gaming machine J1 comprising: arranging means arranged on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from outside at a plurality of places.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from a rotation axis side of a front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient because there is only one anti-fraud unit.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thereby preventing fraud. Can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the arranging unit is different from a first unit that suppresses entry of a member from the outside at a first location and a second unit that suppresses entry of a member from the exterior at a second location. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that a member is prevented from entering from outside by a method.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J1, the method of arranging means for suppressing the entry of a member from outside differs between the first location and the second location. As compared with the case where the number is increased, the entry of the member from the outside can be further suppressed.

  It should be noted that the method for suppressing the entry from outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by closing a route, or a method of detecting improper activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape opened outward of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further entering.

  In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting an electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the path from the outside to the gaming means on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion. Gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud that penetrates the entry restricting portion due to high heat occurs, a change (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected to detect an external influence. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

  The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, wherein the arranging means includes a dissolving means for guiding a member entering from outside to a dissolving area far from the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, since the member entering from the outside is guided by the arranging means to the cancellation area far from the gaming means, the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree is increased, it is possible to prevent a member entering from outside from reaching the game means.

<Five-piece decorative plate structure. Involve also fraud prevention. Gaming machine K>
A first unit and a second unit, which are arranged to face each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along the first direction; A connecting means for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting part is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first unit and a second unit that are arranged to face each other and are connected at at least one side, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along a first direction. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the first means. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction crossing the first direction, the third means is provided in the first direction. Therefore, the load applied from the vehicle can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided a connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in an approaching third direction and fitting them together.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in a direction intersecting the third direction Resistance to the disassembly of the second means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed outward.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitted portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thus, even if a wrongdo occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the detection of the wrongdoing can be hastened.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening direction is the same as the third direction. .

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

  In one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiating unit that irradiates light toward the first unit or the second unit and is fixed to the connected unit, and one of the first unit or the second unit. And a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside thereof.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from the light guide means.

  In the gaming machine K6, an abutting means is provided for abutting a surface in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K6, the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained at a distance corresponding to the dimension of the contact means. Can be. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the facing direction. Can be.

  This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from being changed even when a load is applied in the facing direction when the first means or the second means is illegally disassembled. can do.

<Point L that utilizes curved light guide means. As point, not reached>
A light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projected means to which light passing through the light guiding means is disposed opposite to the light guiding means, and The gaming machine L1, wherein the projection target device includes a concave facing portion disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end face to the surface (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-265573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target means includes the concave facing part and the convex facing part, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing part and the convex facing part. It is possible to change the light emission intensity of the projection target means with the unit.

  In the gaming machine L1, the projection target means is configured such that the concave-facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex-facing portion is made of a material that transmits less light than the concave-facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is converged at the concave facing portion. The effect of the effect by the light can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L2, there is provided opposite projection means which is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guiding means interposed therebetween, and which projects light passing through the light guiding means. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light guide facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guide facing the convex portion are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the opposite projection unit that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide unit and the portion that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide unit are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, the same light is incident on the light guide means, so that the light is visually recognized through the projected means and the light is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. And can be different.

<Bus reflex speaker arrangement structure. Gaming machine M>
A first means and a second means which are arranged opposite to each other and are fixed to each other, and constitute the internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and perform effects using sound output from the speakers (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine, and is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, so that the effect of producing a low tone is easily performed. However, there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means. By releasing the right and left widths, the vibration wave can be made to travel at an arbitrary distance.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a protruding portion protruding from the first means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion being in contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in a direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. Abuts with each other to prevent the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, an opening is provided to connect the internal space to the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being closed by a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

  The gaming machine M4, wherein in the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the protruding portion and disconnected. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the production means from below, so that the support fastening means can be weighted without pressing the space used for production. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Gaming machine N>
A base member, a first displacement unit that is displaceably supported by the base member, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first displacement unit, and a following state in which the first displacement unit is displaced in a displacement direction. A second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, wherein at least the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacement unit that is displaced in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of the second displacement unit by a driving force of the driving unit.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the extension / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is extended / contracted, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means when performing the operation (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacing means expands and contracts, the direction of displacement of the first displacing means and the second displacing means is the same, so that a slow effect is produced, and the effect of the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means. , Can be visually recognized as the speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the second displacement means felt by the player as a bodily sensation, as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

  In the gaming machine N1, a resistance means for generating a resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means causes the second displacement means to follow the first displacement means in a following state and a non-following state deviating from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of the mode of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is provided so as to be visible from the front surface.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible, so that the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and the player can visually recognize the resistance means. It can be shared with the function as the effect device.

  In the gaming machine N4, a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member is provided, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. Gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N4, the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotation axis of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, the posture of the other members or means also changes, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can be.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As point, not reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening that is opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include operating means operable by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign object is inserted into a gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 has the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign matter is stored through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where foreign matter remains inside.

  In the gaming machine O1, the accommodating unit includes a support unit that supports the first unit, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support unit with the first unit therebetween. Gaming machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the support portion.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured to have a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, since the plurality of second openings are formed from a shape based on the shape of the solid object in different directions, the second opening is formed. The solid object can be easily removed through the section.

  The gaming machine O5, wherein in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to a player than the first means.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially closed at the second opening. Can be done. This allows the player to be aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining remaining can be reduced. .

<Points for devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A game machine comprising: a first means; and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means includes a protruding portion protruding from a lower surface. P1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is provided is configured to be detachable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a planar shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of easy handling. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protrusion formed from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a portion for hanging a finger, thereby suppressing occurrence of a situation in which the first support means slides down from the hand. Can be improved from the viewpoint of easy handling.

  The arrangement of the protruding portions is not limited at all, and may be any as long as it protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may be one that projects vertically, or one that projects frontward.

  In the gaming machine P1, the game machine P1 includes the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means, and the protruding portion is separated from a support position at which the first support means is supported by the second support means. A gaming machine P2, wherein the gaming machine P2 is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion is provided to project downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first support means is centrally applied as the support position. Therefore, the first support means can be further easily held. Thereby, the work of attaching and detaching the first support means to and from the second support means can be facilitated.

  The position apart from the support position is not limited at all. For example, it may be a position closer to the front side when the first support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or may be the other position when the first support means is pivotally supported at one end by the second support means. The position may be near the end, or may be a position on the opposite side of the pivotal support position with respect to the plate storing the game balls.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means includes a gap between the recess and the recessed portion. A gaming machine P3 which is arranged to face the recessed portion.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is formed as a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means is formed. It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shaved powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means are rubbed by the displacement. That is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction due to the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable portion, and the prevention of erroneous sensing due to accumulation of powder at the detection location of the detection device.

  As described above, the recessed shape portion is not only used during non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened for error cancellation, maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, game play). The effect is also exhibited in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

  The gaming machine P4, wherein in the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the projecting shape portion is provided.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent a portion where the recessed portion is formed from becoming extremely thin as compared with other portions, thereby preventing a lack of strength. it can. In addition, since the recessed portion is formed on the back of the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be bent and deformed in and out, so that even if a large load is applied to the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be deformed. Cracking of the formed portion can be suppressed.

  The load applied to the protruding shape portion may be, for example, the self-weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when the first support means is moved, the first load, or the like. An example is a load or the like that is applied by an object (such as a thousand boxes) moved by a player or a clerk near the support means.

  In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a part of the first support means outside the concave shape part, and is supported in such a manner as to contact an overlapping part which overlaps the projecting shape part inward and outward. A gaming machine P5 comprising: a contacting means; and an operation unit positioned at the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed portion, the supporting thickness at the overlapping position for supporting the contacting means can be sufficiently ensured. Deformation of the first support means during operation can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes an impact damping means continuously formed between the operating portion and the shock attenuating means, and the impact damping means is provided on the recessed portion. A gaming machine P6 formed to have a width shorter than the width.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect that the shock transmitted from the operating section to the contacting means can be attenuated by the shock damping means, the distance between the shock damping means and the overlapping portion is increased. Thus, the impact can be attenuated by the deformation (bending) of the contact means.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a shock attenuation means. For example, it may be a lump member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

  In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of depression is greater than that of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first portion where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first portion. By making the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small applied load, small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed portion while maintaining high durability.

  The degree of depression is exemplified by, for example, the depth of the depression (the greater the degree of the depression, the deeper) and the width of the depression (the greater the degree of the depression, the wider).

  In addition, when the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the part facing the first means is smaller than that of the other part, the concave shape corresponding to the other part is used. The degree of depression of the portion may be increased.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the magnitude of the load. For example, the recessed portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game store, or may be based on the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined production state or a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It is good also considering the size of as a standard.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed below the bottom portion of the first support means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider toward the front. Gaming machine P8.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first support means stands alone can be improved. Even in a storage method in which one support means is placed on the floor by itself, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without the first support means falling down.

  What should be considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by examining the magnitude of the load generated at the time of operating the first means and the frequency of occurrence of the load.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined upward in a direction away from the second support means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily made independent by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the protruding portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of portions other than the protruding shape portion.

<Points related to the deformation structure based on the supporting structure and shape of the collar>
In a gaming machine comprising: an operating means operable by a player; first supporting means for supporting the operating means; and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means or the operating means. The gaming machine Q1, wherein the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction to narrow a gap between the operation means and the second support means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which operation means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (for example, see JP-A-2006-106830). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, measures against displacement caused in a region around the operation means due to a load at the time of operation of the manipulation means are insufficient, and measures against displacement caused in a region around the operation means are called. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from a viewpoint.

  For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operation means. At this time, there is a possibility that a gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means in the front side portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, deformation of the first support means prevents a gap from being formed between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operation means can be allowed to descend excessively (subsidence), the supporting mode of the operation means can be simplified.

  The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, the moving direction may be a descending direction, a rising direction, a pushing direction along the front and rear, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

  In addition, as a mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to a case where a normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface spreading in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be shifted toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shape) formed by the contact surface, and the reaction force increases as the position approaches the center of the bottom. Can be done

  Also, a common support means for commonly supporting the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled or fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, is configured to support the operation means, and is configured to be able to hold a game ball, and the operation means is provided via the first support means. And a game ball holding unit connected to the game machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the gaming ball holding portion can be suppressed.

  Further, when the first support means is formed of a flexible member, or when the first support means is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration when operating the operation means is directly held by the game ball. Since it is possible to prevent the game balls from being transmitted to the game unit, it is possible to prevent the game balls held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, thereby preventing generation of abnormal noise.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a structure of vibration transmission prevention (suppression). For example, the configuration may be such that the transmission of vibration is prevented in the first direction, while the transmission of vibration is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal noise, and it is possible to execute a sound effect.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the operation unit includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player, and the first support unit is arranged such that the farther the connection position with the game ball holding unit is from the operation unit, the more the front surface becomes. A gaming machine Q3, which is arranged on the side.

  In the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation section, which is likely to be displaced due to the operation, the connected position is shifted to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the displacement, thereby reducing the game. While suppressing the generation of the gap between the ball holding unit and the first support means, the connection position is located on the front side (closer to the player) at a position far from the operation unit where the position is difficult to be displaced by the operation. In addition, the design can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operation unit includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player, a main unit supported by the first support unit, and the operation unit and the main unit. A connecting portion for connecting, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. The gaming machine Q4 is configured so as to surround the connecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, assembling of the first support means can be facilitated while sufficiently securing the size of the operation unit.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a method of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be respectively connected to the operating means, or one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies, and another divided body connected to the divided body You may let it.

  In addition, various modes are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, fitting may be performed or fastening may be performed.

  In the case of performing the fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, it is possible to disperse the impact generated when the operation unit is operated at a plurality of fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, the occurrence of displacement of the first support means can be suppressed.

  Further, by setting the fastening direction to a direction intersecting (for example, orthogonally) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. The loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact during operation can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects the operation direction of the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, the load at the time of operating the operation unit can be suppressed from being applied in the fastening direction, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation, and the divided body is fixed. Can be prevented from being released.

  It should be noted that various modes are exemplified as directions intersecting the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle around a predetermined rotation axis, a direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined direction). (Direction along the rotation axis).

  Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (when the operation is a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined line. Direction is exemplified.

  In this case, during the game, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed, at least one of a plurality of planes intersecting each straight line The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or may be set in an intersecting portion of a plurality of planes, that is, a direction intersecting any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

  In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening portion of the divided body is formed of a plurality of portions, and a first plane including one fastening portion and a second plane including another fastening portion are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is simultaneously applied to the other fastening points. Can be prevented from being applied, so that it is possible to prevent the divided bodies from being simultaneously displaced or loosened at both fastening locations.

  In addition, the fastening part of the divided body may be arranged at a place where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Also in this case, since another fastening portion is arranged on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, it is possible to prevent the divided body from being displaced or loosening due to the load at the time of operation. Can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes a detection means configured to detect a predetermined operation of the operation unit, and the detection means is arranged at a position distant from a division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the division position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is moved along with the operation of the operation unit at the division position. And the divided body may rub against each other to generate powder (dust). However, since the detecting means is disposed away from the dividing position, the detection of powder (dust) by the detecting means is suppressed. can do. Thereby, occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means which interferes with the divided body in the dividing direction (approaching / separating direction) when viewed from the divided body when the game is available. A gaming machine Q8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction by the interference means.

  The interfering means may be formed so as to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but not to interfere with the operating means before the assembly state, for example, during an assembling operation. For example, when the divided body is formed from a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during the assembling work, so that interference with the interference means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly can be maintained. can do.

  Also, for example, even when the divided body is formed from a hard material, the divided body may be configured so as not to interfere with the interference means in the assembling process. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere when viewed in the assembling direction before fastening (for example, in a direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembling). In this case, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

  The gaming machine Q9 of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second support means includes a receiving recessed portion recessed to receive the first support means.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in the receiving recessed portion, so that the first support means is displaced by the influence of the operation means being displaced. Even in the case of displacement, the operation means and the first support means can be returned to the original position promptly by the repulsive force from the receiving recess.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which a center of a radius of curvature is arranged on an operation portion side of the operation means. Q10.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be ensured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, It can prevent you from feeling. Thereby, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and the operability of the operation unit.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, since the extending direction of the streak portion is different in each region, the first support means having anisotropy in rigidity. Can be configured.

  In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of the streak portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield from the shape of the first support means, or when the load generated at the time of operating the operation means acts in a different manner for each region, the best way to cope with the load is given. The extending direction of the streak portion may be designed as the direction.

<Points related to the support structure between the speaker and the board>
In a gaming machine including a vibrating means and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to emit light, the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibration means. Gaming machine R1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the light emission effect.

  More specifically, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, or the like) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the board from receiving the vibration of the speaker. It becomes dark because the light emission effect cannot be performed at the place where it is performed. In this case, in the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where the effect can be produced brilliantly becomes narrow. In the first place, the size of a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like is roughly determined from the standard, and thus it is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, the light emitting means has a displacement width with respect to the vibrating means, so that the light emitting means can permeate the vibration of the vibrating device, and the arrangement of the light emitting means is determined by the vibration generating point of the vibrating means. Can be approached. This allows the front area to be viewed brightly irrespective of the location of the vibration of the vibrating means, thereby improving the light emitting performance.

  The mode of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic unit configured to output a sound, or an operating unit incorporating a vibration device. Further, the present invention is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, but may be a means configured to be capable of vibrating (passively vibrating) against a load of an external force.

  Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in the speaker, an outlet for discharging back pressure of the vibration of the speaker seen in, for example, a bass reflex speaker, and a path connected from the vibrating portion to the outlet are exemplified.

  The vibration device may be a vibration device driven by rotation (for example, a vibrator) or a vibration device that generates vibration by linear driving (for example, a voice coil motor).

  The mode of the close arrangement is not limited at all, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting unit. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibrating means. In this case, the laminating direction may be a front-back direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or a left-right inner The direction may be inclined in the direction.

  In the gaming machine R1, a plurality of the vibrating means are provided, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is provided is provided, and the light emitting substrate is stacked and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. .

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the influence of the vibration generated when the vibration means outputs the sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by changing the vibration means for outputting the sound. ) Can be increased.

  The light emitting substrate may be a single substrate or a plurality of substrates. In the case of a plurality of substrates, it is sufficient that at least one light emitting substrate is stacked on a plurality of vibration units. In this case, a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated by the vibration means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, so that the number of types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine R2, holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, and the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means is configured to emit the light along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that a load is generated in a direction for suppressing displacement of the use substrate.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine R2, the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means can be suppressed.

  Note that the non-fixed state is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding unit are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, merely to prevent slipping), it can be said that the light emitting substrate is not fixed.

  The expression “non-fixed” does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-back position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-back position of the light-emitting substrate is defined (front-back position stable, small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. Also, by enclosing the direction orthogonal to the front and rear with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, displacement in a direction different from the front and rear direction (up, down, left and right) can be suppressed.

  As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibration means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibration means. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing unit for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding unit, Regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the laminating direction, wherein the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the laminating direction. A gaming machine R4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some fixing means are loosened), it is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Thus, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to progress. For example, a mode in which a rod-shaped member is inserted into a through hole or a mode in which a fastening screw is fastened to a screw hole may be used.

  In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared to the first displacement region. A gaming machine R5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change of the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced by the influence of the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emitting substrate. Can be done.

  Thus, by designing the mode of the light emission effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emission effect in the second displacement region differently, an excellent effect can be achieved. For example, as a first refraction unit that receives and refracts light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface light emitting unit that performs uniform light emission by surface light emission is disposed, while receiving and refracting light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means to be provided, an edge light emitting means for totally reflecting light incident from one end (edge) and emitting the light from the other end (edge) so as to show high-brightness light to a player is arranged. Thus, a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, luminance) differs for each region can be performed.

  Note that the mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited at all. For example, a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or a mode defined by the mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

  For example, as a positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, an area which is set at the same position from each vibration means is such that the influence from one vibration means is offset by the influence from the other vibration means. , The displacement may be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the game machine includes a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw is provided. A gaming machine R6, wherein a part and the opposing part are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. Can be prevented.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated about the response after the loosening of the fastening screw occurs. For example, when a loosening occurs in the fastening screw, it may be configured to be able to electrically detect the loosening, or by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibration device, the loosening occurs in the fastening screw. If it is vibrated when it is present, an abnormal sound may be generated to notice the looseness, or the loosened part may be fixed by regular maintenance without providing special notification.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connection means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connection direction occurs more easily than deformation in a connection direction connecting the first member and the second member. Gaming machine R7.

  Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extending or contracting, and the advantageous effect and the adverse effect are periodically changed. Undesirably.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is reduced is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

  Accordingly, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only in a state in which the connecting means is deformed (for example, a state in which a load is applied to the connecting means). The load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibration means while setting the load in the opposite direction of the member and the second member to be low. Of the substrate for use can be suppressed.

  The manner in which the deformation easily occurs in the predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so as to have a different thickness for each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated on the connecting means may be changed for each direction.

  Further, the manner of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device for displacing either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the driving device.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration unit is configured to be capable of changing a direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Gaming machine R8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of action of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical idea of the light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
A light-emitting means configured to emit light; and a light-guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the first light-guiding means guides light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode. A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide unit; and a second light guide unit that guides light emitted from the light emitting unit in a mode different from the first mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that LED light is made incident from an end of a plate-like member and emitted from the surface of the plate-like member (for example, JP-A-2015-159875). Gazette). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

  To be more specific, as in the case of the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when performing a light-emitting effect on an LED substrate formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, luminance, and the like) occurs between a position near and far from the LED, and the effect tends to be reduced. To solve this, the light emission mode is weakened. The number of LEDs in a portion that tends to be (dark) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in impeding cost reduction. Will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or to reduce the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different, the effect is reduced. (Change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emitting effect from the viewpoint of the effect while reducing the cost.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of the light guide means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform form such as frosted glass, or a resin made of a milky white material or the like may be hardened. It may be a white member, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member whose display itself is projected (projected) similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or the like. May be used.

  In the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured such that the way of illuminating changes stepwise according to the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guide means is provided is formed of a flat plate, the light guide means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In this case, an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly) can be executed.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is provided a housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is provided, wherein the housing means supports the light emitting substrate, and the light guide means Comprises at least a support means fixed at a first position, and a shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, wherein the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. Gaming machine S3, characterized in that the gaming machine S3 is disposed on the side.

  In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened in a state where the shielding means is still assembled, so that the position of the light guide means with respect to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it is easy to repair the displacement between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintenance can be improved.

  The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the shield may be configured so that the player cannot touch the light guide means while viewing it, or the player may not be able to touch or see the light guide means. You may.

  When the first position is formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

  In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 which is arranged at an end in a longitudinal direction.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the light guide means is formed in a long plate shape, and the first position is disposed at the end in the long direction, so that the fixing of the first position is relaxed. By applying a load in the short direction of the light guide means, the displacement of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

  More specifically, the correction of the displacement of the light guide means is compensated for by the deformation of the light guide means in the short direction, or by supplementing with a slip that gives a strong load, so that one of the long direction is compensated. Even if the fixing is loosened only at the end and the fixing is maintained at the other end, the displacement of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

  Further, in the case of a supporting mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the supporting means by the light guiding means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate on the supporting means can be reduced with the bending deformation of the light guiding means. Therefore, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be reduced by loosening the fixing at the first position and flexing and deforming the light guiding means without removing the light guiding means from the supporting means. , The displacement of the light emitting substrate can be corrected.

  Note that the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the design base is designed to be mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not deviate from the outer shape of the light emitting means provided on the light emitting substrate to such a degree that it completely deviates in the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be such as to correct the positional deviation in the above (small adjustment width), or the part to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means may be directed in the irradiation direction based on the design to secure a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position completely out of sight (adjustable width is large).

  In this case, the light-emitting means and the light-guiding means can have the same structure, and the mode of the light-emitting effect visually recognized in the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so as to be able to be played with a different gaming property (for example, when configuring a gaming machine having a different specification), without greatly changing the mechanical configuration of each unit, Since the mode of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means, it is possible to reduce the burden (for example, cost) of manufacturing the gaming machine.

  Note that the non-fixed aspect is not limited at all. For example, an aspect other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally referred to as non-fixed. Further, the term “end” is an expression intended to avoid being limited to the end. That is, the first position may be located at a position including the periphery of the long end.

  In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding unit is fixed to the support unit, and the light guide unit and the shielding unit are configured to be able to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between the light guiding unit and the shielding unit is reduced. A gaming machine S5 comprising a unit, and the displacement prevention unit includes a fixing unit with the support unit.

  Here, it is necessary to connect wiring for conducting electricity to the light emitting substrate. However, a shift or lack of the wiring directly affects the operation failure of the light emitting means. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the displacement between the substrate and the support means does not easily occur.

  In consideration of the effect, it is preferable that the light guide means be easily aligned if the positional shift has occurred, assuming that the positional shift with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is considered that it is better to hold the support means. On the other hand, if a position shift occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated.

  Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix the shielding means to the supporting means serving as a base in consideration of strength. As described above, there are various support modes expected from each means.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine S3 or S4, the position of the light guide means and the shielding means can be easily aligned with each other at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. In addition to the above, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

  In addition, the aspect of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, it is also possible to have concaves and convexes that can be fitted in the same shape, and that the concaves and convexes that can be fitted have a shape that does not change along the assembling direction, or a convex that tapers toward the side closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an enlarged concave shape.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a main body, a detachable extension extending from the main body to a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension. An opposing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, wherein the light emitting means is disposed such that light incident on the opposing extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 comprising a unit.

  According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light-emitting portion from entering a portion other than the opposed extension portion, and thus the separated extension portion and the opposed extension portion, and other portions Can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating light) at a short width boundary can be performed.

  The mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiating light, the width of the irradiating light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, and a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means forms a covering portion covered by the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, wherein the facing extension portion extends from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

  According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S6, light can be made to enter the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of emitting light in the frame portion can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide can be improved.

  According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the opposite side in the emission direction.

  In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, and is coupled to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and from the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being separated.

  According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension, the end capable of entering light into the frame in the longitudinal direction and the end whose incidence is restricted are defined. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing a light emitting effect using the frame portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is disposed at a projection position of the facing extension portion and the separating extension portion, and an inclination angle of a tip shape of the separating extending portion with respect to a light irradiation direction is set. The gaming machine S9, wherein the smaller the smaller, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the opposed extending portion and the separated extending portion.

  According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the distal end of the separated extension has a shape inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the luminous intensity of the light emitting means is increased. The light emission effect can be performed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, while maintaining the same. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension portion can emit light to the same extent.

<Technical idea of top light emitting means. The point to change the way of shining according to the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-emitting unit configured to emit light, and a light-receiving unit configured to receive light, the light-receiving unit includes a first light-receiving unit configured to receive light emitted from the light-emitting unit in a first mode; A gaming machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving unit that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit in a mode different from the first mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to make LED light enter from an edge of a planar member and emit from a surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875). See). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

  To be more specific, as in the case of the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when performing a light-emitting effect on an LED substrate formed from a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, darkness, intensity, luminance, and the like) occurs between a position near and far from the LED, and the effect tends to be reduced. To solve this, the light emission mode is weakened. The number of LEDs in a portion that tends to be (dark) may be increased, but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in impeding cost reduction. Will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the effect or to reduce the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different, the effect is reduced (change). Do) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emitting effect from the viewpoint of the effect while reducing the cost.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a mode of a light receiving means. For example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform form such as frosted glass, or a resin made of a milky white material or the like may be hardened. It may be a white member, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member whose display itself is projected (projected) similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or the like. May be used.

  The gaming machine T2, wherein in the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured so that the manner of illuminating changes stepwise in accordance with a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is provided is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly) can be executed.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is provided a housing unit for housing the light emitting unit, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting unit is provided, and the housing unit is disposed to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine T3, comprising: a partitioning unit for partitioning a region to be divided, wherein the light receiving unit is configured to change a lighting method for each region partitioned by the partitioning unit.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, since the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the way of light of the light receiving means changes, the way of light of the light receiving means changes rapidly. In this case, the sense of incongruity given to the player can be reduced. Thereby, even when the number of the light emitting substrates is small, the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, the positioning is performed by supporting the light emitting substrate by the partitioning means in a direction opposing the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, the alignment work between the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means can be facilitated, so that the assembling work can be facilitated, and the light emitting substrate can be used at the time of use. It is possible to suppress the displacement between the and the partitioning means.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through-hole formed corresponding to a shape of a light-emitting portion provided on the light-emitting substrate, and the light-receiving means is inserted through the through-hole. A gaming machine T5 comprising a unit.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be reduced without being affected by the size of the partitioning unit, and the light incident inside the insertion unit can be reduced. It becomes easy to make total reflection, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of light emitted from the light emitting unit from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-penetrating through hole that is formed to correspond to the shape of the light emitting part provided on the light emitting substrate, and does not receive the insertion part. A gaming machine T6, wherein the opening is formed in such a manner that the opening becomes larger as the distance from the light emitting substrate increases, and the surface of the gaming machine T6 comes into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T5, the through-hole into which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and additionally, the light receiving means The leakage of light can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means has a cross-sectional shape larger on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be.

  In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving unit includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting unit side, and a cutout boundary surface that intersects with the light conductive portion. The gaming machine T8, wherein the front-rear surface in the extension direction is disposed at a position shorter than the inclined surface.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punching boundary surface portion is formed. Even so, the thickness of the light conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the total reflection in the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

  In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving unit may include a light conducting unit extending from the light emitting unit, and the light conducting unit may be formed in a line shape including a base end of the insertion unit. A gaming machine T9.

  According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily recognized as linear light (light in which light from a point light source is mixed). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Point consisting of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine having a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means comprises: a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to the direction.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structural bodies with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

  For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, a light-emitting member such as an LED cannot be disposed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front in one cross section where the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the area where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

  In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means, so that the size of the area where the support plate can be arranged is The size of the light emitting substrate is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, since the inserting direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is constituted by the first direction and the second direction which are inclined with respect to each other, all the fixing means are along the front-back direction. As compared with the case where the player is inserted, a wider effect area on the side to be visually recognized by the player can be secured.

  In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means includes an outer surface having a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Gaming machine U2.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing portions of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force.

  Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are formed of a resin molded product, and the direction of pulling out the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction which is inclined with respect to each other, and the direction of pulling out. Since it is inclined, the fixing force may be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common component. can do.

  The configuration of the suppression means is not limited at all. For example, a loosening prevention means for preventing the loosening of the fixing may be used, or a loosening restricting means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

  In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means includes a notifying means capable of notifying the fixing failure of the fixing means.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine U3, the fixing means is notified of the fixing failure by the notification means, so that early detection that the fastening screw is loosened can be achieved.

  Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically informing such as a detecting means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. As a structural means, for example, a transmission change means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light effect change means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen in the appearance, Vibration notification means that makes the player notice by contacting a vibrating part of the vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or enhance vibration is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the game machine includes a third unit disposed between the first unit and the second unit, and the third unit includes a third unit disposed between the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5, which is disposed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate the resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set to a plurality of directions. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

  The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured so that the first means side is visually recognized by the player, while the second means side is not visually recognized by the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the space is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the structure can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U5, fourth means is provided on the opposite side of the third means with respect to the first face, and the first face is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Gaming machine U6.

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means can be made to be able to interfere with each other in a front view. Can be secured large.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals, so that one of the fixing means The deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be prevented from being generated in the other fixing means. That is, since the deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid the loosening of the fixing means.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1 characterized by the following. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by the following. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine And a gaming machine Z3. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which LED light is incident from an end of a plate-shaped member and emitted from a surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of a light-emitting effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 includes a light emitting unit configured to emit light and a light guiding unit configured to guide light, and the light guiding unit includes the light emitting unit. A first light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode, and a second light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode. Prepare.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the light guide unit is configured such that a lighting method changes stepwise according to a difference in distance from the light emitting unit. You.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention provides the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, further comprising: a housing unit that houses the light emitting unit; and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting unit is provided. The means supports the light emitting substrate, the light guide means is fixed at least at a first position, a support means, and a shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and a player, And the first position is disposed outside the outer shape of the shielding means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the light emitting mode can be changed stepwise in a positional relationship based on the light emitting means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the handling of the light guide unit can be facilitated.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame (second support means)
12 inner frame (accepting means)
13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (closing means)
14d2 auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate, part of game ball holder)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
159 Opening / closing control section (blockage control section)
173 Long cover member (part of solution)
178 Inverted cup part (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of solution means)
180 Binding movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operating devices 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311 gL, 3311 gL Left detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft bar)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of storage means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing (part of support)
340, 5340, 6340 Driving device (driving means, first driving means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaging teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging teeth)
343d coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (projecting part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of terminal means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second driving means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 speaker connection line (passing member)
460 Front side assembly (1st means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding part)
500 Right panel unit (production means)
500L left heavy plate unit (1st means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of the connection part)
532 Inclined rib (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Projecting part (part of connecting part)
600 Board support device (state changing means)
620 Claw member before rotation (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (contact means)
801 Supporting base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of terminal means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means and repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (part of receiving means, repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engaging member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge section)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10014 Front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal body (part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate (regulator)
10310 Swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation unit)
10321 Left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 Right front cover (part of first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of game ball holder)
6413 Protrusion-shaped portion 6414 Recessed-shaped portion 6427 Resin member (impact attenuation means)
6451 Body part (part of receiving recessed part)
6455 Right reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left reinforcement rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of connection means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving protruding part (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light transmitting hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Body tube part (part of light conducting part)
6522 Flange (Punch boundary surface)
6540 Partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Fastening part after guiding (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Protruding rib (part of suppression means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppression means)
6550 Plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate (part of outer surface)
6554a Threaded part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Partition member (first member, part of first means, part of storage means, part of partition means)
6562a Enlarged hole (part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large-diameter cylindrical part (part of regulation means)
6570 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate)
6574a Edge light emitting section (part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface light emitting section (part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of storage means)
6610 Sound device (part of vibration means, part of notification means, part of fourth means)
6621 Retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6622 Contact avoidance concave part (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 Base member (part of accommodation means)
6720 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (part of light guide means)
6731 Light receiving surface (part of second light guide means, part of main body, covering part)
6732 Inside extension (part of frame)
6733 Outside extension (part of frame)
6734 Long rib (part of first light guide means, facing extension)
6735 Fin (part of the first light guide means, separated extension part)
6736 Insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (part of displacement prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decoration projecting part (part of misalignment prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of accommodation means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R Insertion hole (part of support part)
18830 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 Streak D24 End streak (part of streak)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a Deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 clearance

Claims (3)

A light emitting unit configured to be capable of emitting light, and a light guiding unit that can guide light,
A first light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode,
A gaming machine, comprising: a second light guide unit that guides light emitted from the light emitting unit in a mode different from the first mode.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the light guide means is configured such that a way of illuminating changes stepwise according to a difference in distance from the light emitting means. Comprising a housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed,
A supporting means for supporting the light emitting substrate, wherein the light guiding means is fixed at least in a first position;
Shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first position is disposed outside an outer shape of the shielding unit.